section 08110- hollow metal doors & frames

City of Atlanta (APD) Crime Lab-Phase 1 Atlanta Public Safety Annex

08110-1

SECTION 08110 HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Wood doors. 2. Door hardware. 3. Painting. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein. B. Shop drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations and sections, materials,

gauges and finishes, fabrication and erection details, location of finish hardware by dimension and locations, details of openings and louvers, and fire rating requirements.

C. Samples: Submit as follows: 1. Door: 1'-0" by 1'-0" corner section showing door construction. 2. Welded frame: 1'-0" by 1'-0" head and jamb comer section showing

welded corner construction. 3. Anchors: One of each type. D. Product data: Indicate that hollow metal work complies with specified

requirements, including performance criteria. E. Certification of label construction; (FIO): For components exceeding

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) tested size limitations, submit UL inspection certificate stating that component construction conforms to UL rating requirements.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards; standards of the following, as referenced herein: 1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI). 2. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. Steel Door Institute (SDI). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Fire Codes. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).


08110-2

B. Fire door assemblies: 1. Door and frame assemblies in rated walls shall have been tested in accord

with NFPA 252 or UL 10C; after 5 minutes into NFPA 252 test, neutral pressure shall have been established at 40” or less above sill.

2. Door and frame assemblies in corridors and smoke barriers shall have a minimum fire rating of 20 minutes and shall have been tested in accord with NFPA 252 or UL 10C without hose stream test. Assemblies shall comply with UL 1784 for draft and smoke control test; leakage may not exceed 3.0 CFM per foot of door at 0.10” of water column.

C. Labeling requirements: 1. Fire-rated components shall bear factory-applied labels showing name of

manufacturer, name of third-party inspection agency, fire-protection rating, and where required for doors in exit enclosures, maximum transmitted temperature end point.

2. Smoke and draft doors complying with UL 1784 shall be labeled as a smoke and draft control door.

3. Permanently attach label to hinge stile of each fire-rated and smoke and draft control door.

D. Performance criteria: 1. Physical endurance: Comply with performance level for specified level

classification in accord with ANSI A250.8-98 and ANSI A250.4-01 for doors and hardware reinforcing, ANSI A250.4-0l for doors, frames, frame anchors and hardware reinforcing.

2. Finish: Comply with standard performance criteria of ANSI A250.1 0-98 for primed steel surfaces.

3. Thermal performance: Minimum aged value of U = 0.10 (R = 1 0.2) or better, apparent thermal performance in accord with SDI-113-01.

4. Acoustical performance for standard hollow metal doors: STC of 25 or better in accord with SDI-128-97, ASTM E90-04 and ASTM E413-04.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned for protection. Mark each hollow metal door

and frame at top hinge and on outside of carton with destination door mark indicated on door schedule.

B. Inspect work upon delivery for damage. Reject damaged items. C. Store materials under cover, on raised platforms. 1. Stack a maximum of five assembled frame units and doors vertically with


08110-3

minimum 1/4" spacers between units. 2. Stack knocked down frames horizontally with minimum 1/4" spacers

between frame units. 3. Protect from moisture but provide for cross ventilation. Remove units

from wet containers if wetting occurs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. CECO. 2. Curries. 3. Republic Builders Products. 4. Steelcraft, Div. Ingersoll Rand. 5. Products of other manufacturers, similar in type and quality, are

acceptable for use subject to Architect’s approval. B. Fabrication standard: Except for more stringent requirements specified, comply

with ANSI/SDI-100, including performance levels as referenced. C. Steel: 1. Interior Doors; Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality (CS) carbon

steel, complying with ASTM A1008-03, Type B, minimum 18 gauge face sheets for interior doors.

2. Exterior Doors; Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A653-02a, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A90 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher- leveled standard of flatness; minimum 16 gauge face sheets for exterior doors.

3. Frames: ASTM A1008, commercial quality cold-rolled steel; 16 gauge for interior and 14 gauge for exterior frame locations and frames for acoustical doors.

D. Finish: 1. Interior: Prime painted steel surfaces shall comply with requirements for

acceptance stated in ANSI A250.3-99. 2. Exterior: Provide one coat of manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive

primer after chemical treatment of galvanized surfaces for paint adhesion. E. Door classification: 1. Standard interior hollow metal doors: Level II, 18 ga. Heavy Duty, Model

One with edge seams, 1-3/4" thickness. 2. Label fire-resistive composite metal doors:


08110-4

a. Level II, 18 ga., Heavy Duty, Model One with edge seams, 1-3/4" thickness, with mineral fiberboard core for all ratings over 20 minutes.

b. For "B" "1 hour" and "2 hour" label doors used in stairway enclosures, the average temperature developed on the unexposed side during fire-resistance testing shall not exceed 450°F at the end of 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure.

3. Exterior insulated composite metal doors: Level III, 16 ga. Extra Heavy Duty, Model One with edge seams, 1-3/4" thickness, with polyurethane core.

F. Door characteristics: 1. Edge bevel: Vertical edges beveled 1/8" in 2"; double-acting doors

rounded on 2-1/8" radius. Non-handed door blanks with filler plates are not acceptable.

2. Top and bottom edges: Flush, welded, minimum 18 ga. steel. Provide weep holes in bottom edge of exterior doors.

3. Join door edges by projection welding no more than 6" on center extending the full height of door. Vertical seam shall be visible at both edges of door. Fill and finish vertical seam smooth.

4. Astragals: Mortised, 12 ga. material. Fire-rated "B" and "C" labeled doors shall be of type not requiring astragals to obtain rating.

5. Glass moldings and stops: a. Where specified or scheduled, provide doors with hollow metal

moldings to secure glazing by others in accordance with glass opening sizes shown on approved shop drawings.

b. Weld fixed moldings to door on security side. c. Loose stops shall be not less than 20 ga., with mitered corner

joints, secured to frame opening by cadmium- or zinc-coated countersunk screws at 1’-0” o.c. maximum.

d. Design snap-in moldings with mitered corners and with a non-removable stop on security side after glass installation.

G. Frame construction: 1. Welded steel frames for double-acting doors: 14 ga., with backbend

returns, setup arc welded, with all joints, including face, flange and throat, full welded, dressed and ground smooth; no mechanical interlocking allowed. Provide welded frames with temporary spreaders during shipping, storage and erection.

2. Welded steel frames for all other doors: 14 ga. for exterior doors, 16 ga. for interior doors; with backbend returns, setup arc welded, with all joints, including face, flange and throat, full welded, dressed and ground smooth; no mechanical interlocking allowed. Provide welded frames with


08110-5

temporary spreaders during shipping, storage and erection. 3. Machine door frames for hardware scheduled for installation on that

frame. Filler plates installed at unused openings will not be acceptable. 4. Joints: a. Dress welded joints and ground smooth, indistinguishable in

completed work. b. Make non-welded connections with tight fitting, closed joints. c. Make joints with aligned faces and arises. 5. Loose glazing stops: a. Removable glazing stops shall be cold rolled steel, no less than 20

ga., butted at corner joints and secured to frame using cadmium or zinc plated #6 countersunk sheet metal screws at 1'-0" o.c. maximum.

b. Frame underneath glazing stops and the inside of glazing stop shall be treated for maximum paint adhesion and painted with a rust inhibitive primer prior to installation in the frame.

H. Frame anchors: 1. Wall anchors for frame attachment to masonry construction: Adjustable,

flat, minimum 18 ga. corrugated or perforated, T-shaped steel anchors with leg not less than 2" wide by 1 0" long. Provide one anchor per jamb for each 2'-0" of height or fraction thereof. Anchors for fire-rated frames shall be labeled type.

2. Wall anchors for frame attachment to drywall partitions: Manufacturer's standard adjustable type for attachment to studs. Provide one anchor per jamb for each 2'-0" of height or fraction thereof. Anchors for fire-rated frames shall be labeled type.

3. Floor anchors: Provide frames with minimum 18 ga. anchors for attachment to floor. For wall conditions that do not allow for the use of a floor anchor, provide an additional jamb anchor. Anchors for fire-rated frames shall be labeled type.

4. Head struts: For frames over 7'-0" high and not anchored to masonry or concrete construction, provide 1/4" by 2" steel struts spot welded to jambs, each side, extending to building structure. Attach to structure. For frames over 4'-0" in width, provide center strut at head.

J. Bituminous coating for inside fully grouted frames: Cold-applied, asphalt mastic

meeting SSPC-Paint 12-82, minimum 30 mils thickness. Comply with coating requirements of ANSI A250.11-01.

K. Preparation for hardware and anchors: 1. Reinforcement: Reinforce components for hardware installation in accord

with ANSI A250.8-98.


08110-6

2. Punch single leaf frames to receive three silencers; double leaf frames to receive two silencers per leaf, at head.

3. Factory-prepared hardware locations shall be in accord with ANSI A250.8-98 and ANSI A250.6-97.

4. Provide grout shields where frames in masonry walls are cut or drilled. 5. Install hardware reinforcement and anchors without distortions or

blemishes on exposed surfaces. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL SECURITY DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Security Door Assemblies: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal doors, provide manufacturer's security door system tested in accordance with ANSI/NAAMM/HMMA 862-87 or 863-98 commercial and detention hollow metal standards. Fabricate with minimum 12 gauge construction, 2" thickness, reinforced with 18 gauge steel stiffeners welded to the face sheets every 4" on center with spot welds 4" on center the full height of the door and minimum 10 gauge inverted steel end channels welded to both face sheets. Furnish as a complete unit with factory welded frame. 1. Manufacturers Basis of Design:

a. CECO Door Products (C) - RestrictDor Series. b. Curries Company (CU) - 857 Series. c. Products of other manufacturers, similar in type and quality, are

acceptable for use subject to Architect’s approval.

B. Door characteristics: 1. Grade 3 Security Door

C. Security Frame Assemblies: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal frames, provide where indicated manufacturer tested security frame as part of a complete door and frame assembly. Fabricate security frames from minimum 12 gauge steel, fully welded, including heavy duty security hinge reinforcements.. 1. Manufacturers Basis of Design:

a. CECO Door Products (C) - RestrictDor Series Frames. b. Curries Company (CU) - 857 Series Frames. c. Products of other manufacturers, similar in type and quality, are

acceptable for use subject to Architect’s approval D. Frame anchors: 1. Wall anchors for frame attachment to drywall partitions: Manufacturer's

recommended type for attachment to studs. Provide one anchor per jamb for each 2'-0" of height or fraction thereof. Anchors for fire-rated frames shall be labeled type.


08110-7



2.03 HOLLOW METAL ACOUSTICAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Sound Resistant Doors: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal doors, provide manufacturer's standard sound resistant acoustic core tested in accordance with ASTM E90, ASTM 413, ASTM E1332, and E2235 standards. Fabricate with minimum gauge construction as tested, 1-3/4" thickness, combined with standard flush frames designed for mid-range and high range sound attenuation from STC 32 through STC 54 applications. Furnish complete with perimeter sound seals, bottom seals, and threshold as required for specified STC rating. 1. Provide sound resistant doors with minimum STC sound rating;

a. 53, Single door and frame b. 48, Double doors and frame

2. Each unit to bear a physical label applied to door certifying the product construction and identifying the specific STC rating.

3. Manufacturers Basis of Design: a. CECO Door Products (C) - Sound-Tech Express Series. b. Curries Company (CU) - 757 Quiet Noise Series. c. Products of other manufacturers, similar in type and quality, are

acceptable for use subject to Architect’s approval. B. Frame construction:

1. Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal frames. 16 gauge with continuous corners.

C. Frame anchors:

1. Wall anchors for frame attachment to masonry construction: Manufacturer's recommended type for attachment to masonry. Provide one anchor per jamb for each 2'-0" of height or fraction thereof. Anchors for fire-rated frames shall be labeled type.

2. Wall anchors for frame attachment to drywall partitions: Manufacturer's recommended type for attachment to studs. Provide one anchor per jamb for each 2'-0" of height or fraction thereof. Anchors for fire-rated frames shall be labeled type.


08110-8



D. Bituminous coating for inside fully grouted frames: Cold-applied, asphalt mastic

meeting SSPC-Paint 12-82, minimum 30 mils thickness. Comply with coating requirements of ANSI A250.11-01.

E. Preparation for hardware and anchors:

1. Reinforcement: Reinforce components for hardware installation in accord with ANSI A250.8-98.

2. Punch single leaf frames to receive three silencers; double leaf frames to receive two silencers per leaf, at head.

3. Factory-prepared hardware locations shall be in accord with ANSI A250.8-98 and ANSI A250.6-97.

4. Provide grout shields where frames in masonry walls are cut or drilled. 5. Install hardware reinforcement and anchors without distortions or

blemishes on exposed surfaces. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FRAME INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install hollow metal frames in accord with ANSI A250.8-98, ANSI

A250.11-01, SDI-122-99, manufacturer's product data and approved shop drawings.

2. Frames in masonry and concrete walls and fire-rated frames shall be tightly butted to walls. For other frames, clearance between frame and interfacing wall surfaces shall be 1/16" maximum.

3. Shimming of door hinges is not an acceptable correction of door frames installed out of erection tolerance.

B. Welded frames: 1. Set welded frames in position prior to beginning partition work. Brace

frames until permanent anchors are set. 2. Set anchors for frames as work progresses. Install anchors at hinge and

strike levels.


08110-9

3. Remove temporary braces and spreaders after wall construction is complete.

4. Install welded frames in prepared openings in concrete and masonry walls

using countersunk bolts and expansion shields. C. Fire-rated frames: Install in accord with requirements of NFPA No. 80 and ANSI

A250.11-0l. D. Hollow metal door frames unless noted to be grout filled shall be filled with

fiberglass insulation to prevent sound from flanking door and seals. 3.02 DOOR INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install doors in accord with SDI-122-99, ANSI A250.8-98, manufacturer's

product data, and approved shop drawings. 2. Seal tops of exterior, out-swinging doors prior to painting. Paint bottoms

of doors in accord with Painting and Coating section prior to hanging doors.

3. Install hollow metal doors in frames, using hardware specified in Door Hardware section.

4. Shimming of door hinges is not an acceptable repair of warped doors or door frames out of erection tolerances.

B. Edge clearances at doors: 1. Between door and frame, at head and jambs: 1/8”. 2. At meeting edges of pairs of doors and at mullions: 1/8” to 1/4” (1/8” for

fire rated doors). 3. At sills without thresholds: 3/8” maximum above finish floor. 4. At sills with thresholds: 3/8” maximum above top of threshold. 5. Between face of door and door stop: 1/16”. C. Fire-rated doors: Install in accord with requirements of NFPA No. 80, SDI-118-

01 and ANSI A250.11-01. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect hollow metal work from damage and staining until Date of Substantial

Completion. Replace or repair damaged or stained components. B. Replace components which exhibit warp, buckle or broken welds.


08110-10

END OF SECTION 08110


08211-1

SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Metal door frames. 2. Door hardware. 3. Glazing. 4. Painting and coating. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein. B. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product description, indicating materials,

classifications, factory finish and fabrication. Include manufacturer's proposed warranty. Indicate that doors meet specit1ed requirements, including fire ratings. Include manufacturer's requirements for door installation, finishing, care, maintenance and cleaning to obtain specified warranties.

C. Shop drawings: Submit schedules and elevations indicating door sizes,

construction, swing, fire rating, undercut, and hardware locations. Dimension and detail openings for glass lights. Indicate that doors meet specified requirements, including fire ratings.

D. Samples: 1. Submit 4" by 4" door corner samples indicating construction for each door

type. 2. Submit a minimum of 3 samples of each face veneer, 2'-0" by 2'-0" in size,

representative of proposed species, cut, color and grain, finished with proposed factory finish. Accepted samples shall indicate extremes of color, graining, defects and general quality of proposed veneers.

E. Intent to warrant and certifications; (FIO): Submit an Intent to Warrant executed

by authorized representative of door manufacturer, indicating that manufacturer has reviewed drawings and specifications, conditions affecting the work and the relationship of doors with related work, and that manufacturer proposes to provide warranties as referenced herein without further stipulation.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE


08211-2

A. Allowable color and grain variation of natural finished doors: Color and grain shall be uniform and within range established by accepted veneer samples as specified herein. Joints in face veneers shall be inconspicuous. Adjacent doors and doors viewed together shall have similar color and grain.

B. Fire door assemblies: 1. Door assemblies in rated walls shall have been tested in accord with

NFPA 252 or UL 10C; after 5 minutes into NFPA 252 test, neutral pressure shall have been established at 40” or less above sill.

2. Door assemblies in corridors and smoke barriers shall have a minimum fire rating of 20 minutes and shall have been tested in accord with NFPA 252 or UL 10C without hose stream test. Assemblies shall comply with UL 1784 for draft and smoke control test; leakage may not exceed 3.0 CFM per foot of door at 0.1 0" of water column.

3. Fire-rated doors shall provide rating without use of salt-treated wood, or manufacturer shall provide certification that treated wood is non-hygroscopic and shall warrant door against failure or discoloration of face veneer and door finish.

4. For B Label doors used in stairway enclosures, the average temperature developed on the unexposed side during fire-resistance testing shall not exceed 450°F at the end of 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure.

C. Labeling requirements: 1. On top edge, provide each door with a label which identifies

manufacturer, trade association of which he is a member, grade and type of door or industry standard with which it complies.

2. Fire-rated components shall bear factory-applied labels showing manufacturer's name, name of third-party inspection agency, fire-protection rating, and where required for doors in exit enclosures, maximum transmitted temperature end point. Permanently attach label to hinge stile of each fire-rated door.

3. Smoke and draft doors complying with UL 1784 shall be labeled as a smoke and draft control door.

D. All flush doors shall be the product of one manufacturer. E. Face veneers shall be domestically assembled veneer facing using no rainforest-

produced crossbands or backs. F. Applicable standards; as referenced herein: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", Eighth Edition, Version 1.0, 2003, herein referred to


08211-3

as AWI Standards. 4. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), "Safety Standard for

Architectural Glazing Materials", 16-CFR, Part 1201. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. Window and Door Manufacturer's Association (WDMA). 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver no doors to building until weatherproof storage space is available. Store

doors in a space having controlled temperature and humidity. Stack doors flat, off floor, supported to prevent warpage and protected from damage and direct exposure to sunlight.

B. Seal top and bottom edges of doors. C. For doors to receive field finish, in compliance with Painting and Coating section,

provide corrugated cardboard, polyethylene foam or heavy polyethylene sheet protection between stacked individual doors and for door faces in contact with other surfaces. Cover stacked doors with polyethylene.

D. Protect factory finished doors during shipping and storage by enclosing in

polyethylene bags. Replace doors in original packaging for shipment to site following machining and finishing. Hang pre-machined and prefinished doors without removal of packaging. Identify each door with door number on packaging. Maintain packaging in place until Date of Substantial Completion.

E. Break packaging seal on site to permit ventilation. F. Do not walk or stack other materials on top of stacked doors. Do not drag doors

across each other. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's door replacement warranty against warpage, twist,

delamination, telegraphing of core and manufacturing defects for the following terms:

1. Interior solid core, sound retardant and mineral core doors: Lifetime of original installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUSH DOORS A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements:


08211-4

1. Glued particleboard core doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., PC-5 Super Novodor. b. Eggers Industries, Inc., Master Flush Particleboard Door. c. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc., Marshfield Signature Series DPC-1. d. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co., Classic Architectural Hardwood

Door, GP7. 2. Mineral core fire-rated doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., FD Series. b. Eggers Industries, Inc., FireGuard Plus. c. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc., Signature DFM Series. d. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co., GF Series with SLM IL B. General quality standard: WDMA I. S. 1-A or A WI, Section 1300, Custom

Grade. C. Glued particleboard core wood doors: 1. Description: Meeting AWI Standards, Section 1300, five-ply veneer face

construction, AWI PC5 particleboard core. a. Thickness: 1-3/4”. b. Adhesive bond: 1) Type II or better for interior applications. 2) Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. c. Blocking: Top and bottom rail and lock stile blocking shall

accommodate specified hardware, without through-bolting hardware.

2. Core: Single-piece particleboard meeting ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or LD-2, DPC-1.

a. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde resin.

3. Construction: Hardwood stiles and rails glued to core; core assembly sanded for uniform thickness.

4. Crossbanding: Engineered high density fiberboard (HDF), minimum 1/16” thickness.

5. Fire resistence rating: Comply with specified requirements for tested, labeled door construction for ratings indicated on drawings.

D. Fire-rated mineral core doors: 1. Description: Five-ply non-combustible mineral composition core

construction, meeting AWI Standards, Section 1300, FD Series and label requirements scheduled on drawings.

a. Thickness: 1-3/4". b. Adhesive bond: Type I. 1) Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. 2. Core: Single piece, non-combustible, asbestos-free, mineral composite


08211-5

with minimum 24 pcf density when tested in accord with ASTM C303-02, with 10 percent maximum moisture absorption by weight with core in equilibrium at 90 percent relative humidity and 70° F.

a. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde resin.

3. Construction: Stiles, rails and blocking glued to core; core assembly sanded for uniform thickness. Reinforced composition laminate stile backers, rails and blocking, to receive full mortise hinge installation, with the following minimum characteristics:

a. Screw withdrawal resistance: 600 lbs. minimum when tested in accord with ASTM Dl037-99.

b. Split resistance: 750 lbs. average when tested in accord with ASTM D143-94(2000).

c. Blocking: Top and bottom rail and lock stile blocking to accommodate specified hardware, meeting label requirements scheduled.

4. Crossbanding: Engineered high density fiberboard (HDF), minimum 1/16" thickness. Crossbanding shall be non-salt-treated or door finish shall be warranted by door manufacturer against failure or discoloration.

5. Fire resistance rating: Comply with specified requirements for tested, labeled door construction for ratings indicated on drawings.

6. Where rated door pairs require metal astragal for labeled construction, astragals shall be wrapped in veneer matching door face or concealed within door edge.

7. Applied moldings: Moldings, where indicated on drawings, shall be applied by the manufacturer in accord with tested label requirements.

E. Cutout doors with glued core: 1. Description: Door construction shall be suitable for the purposes of

obtaining specified warranty. Provide solid core, structural composite lumber or staved core wood doors with full cutouts for glazing; meeting A WI Standards, Section J 300, five-ply construction, A WI PC-5, or seven-ply construction, A WI PC-7, particleboard core.

a. Thickness: 1-3/4" b. Adhesive bond: Type II or better for interior applications. 1) Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. c. Stiles and rails: 4-1/2" wide. 2. Core: Single-piece particleboard, or single-piece structural composite

lumber or solid lumber staved core, meeting warranty requirements. a. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea

formaldehyde resin. 3. Construction: Hardwood stiles and rails glued to core; core assembly

sanded for uniform thickness. 4. Crossbanding: Engineered high density fiberboard (HDF), minimum 1/16”


08211-6

thickness. F. Facing veneer for transparent finish: 1. Veneer species: Select White Birch. 2. Veneer slicing: Rotary Cut. 3. Face of veneer door matching: Slip match veneers across door face; full

length. Sequence match veneers for pairs of doors and for pairs of doors with single door adjacent to one or both doors within pairs of doors. Stain and graining to match Architect’s approved sample.

4. Veneer thickness: Minimum 1/52” after sanding at 12% moisture content. 5. Adhesive bond: Type 1. a. Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. 6. Quality grade: AA Grade. G. Facing for opaque finish: 1. Material: Natural Birch or Medium Density Overlay. 2. Quality grade: A Grade. H. Vertical stiles: 1. Stiles for transparent finish doors not requiring fire ratings: Minimum l-

3/8" thick with specified veneer, solid hardwood or structural composite lumber inner stile backer with not Jess than outermost 1/4" of stile matching face veneer in specie, color and graining; no exposed fingerjoints allowed.

2. Stiles for opaque finish doors not requiring fire ratings: Minimum l-3/8" thick with close grained hardwood or structural composite lumber inner stile backer with close grained hardwood edge veneer.

3. Stiles for fire-rated doors: Minimum 1-3/8" thick with specified veneer, solid hardwood or lamination meeting fire rating requirements; not less than outermost 1/4" matching face veneer in color and graining, with no salt impregnation treatment.

a. 20-minute rated pairs without metal edges or astragals: As required by manufacturer to permit positive pressure "S" label per Category H.

b. Mineral core doors required to meet positive pressure Category A (concealed) requirements: As required by door manufacturer.

c. Pairs of fire-rated doors: 1) With metal edges or metal edges and astragals: As required

by door manufacturer's test data for required fire-ratings, 2) Without metal edges or metal edges and astragals: As

required by door manufacturer's test data for required fire-ratings.

3) Mineral core doors required to meet positive pressure Category A (concealed) requirements: As required by door


08211-7

manufacturer. 4. Stile width for doors with cutouts: a. Non-rated doors: Provide minimum 5" of core between lock and

light cutout or from edge of door to edge of cutout. b. Rated doors: Provide minimum 5-1/2" core between lock and

cutout or from edge of door and edge of cutout. c. Opening next to lock: Provide minimum 10" lock stile. I. Rails: Mill option hardwood or structural composite lumber and as required to

meet positive pressure ratings. 2.02 GLAZING A. Refer to Glazing section for tempered glazing. 2.03 FACTORY FITTING, MACHINING AND FINISHING A. Factory fitting and machining are required for all wood doors. Factory finishing

is required for all transparent finished doors. B. Fitting and machining: 1. Factory fit and machine doors to clearances and bevels specified. 2. Prepare for hardware installation using hardware manufacturer’s

templates. a. Locate in accord with WDMA I.S.1.7, unless otherwise indicated. b. Drill pilot holes for screws and bolts. 3. Seal edges of doors and cutouts immediately following fitting and

machining. C. Openings: 1. Cut openings to receive glass lights in accord with AWI requirements or

WDMA I. S. 1-A. 2. Seal edges of cutout immediately following cutting using one coat of

solvent type sealer. 3. Install glass lights without looseness or rattle. Trim shall have mitered

corner joints and shall conceal edges of cutout and door core. 4. Protect door faces from damage during cutting. D. Clearances and bevel: 1. Hinge stile: 1/8". 2. Lock stile: 1/8". 3. Top: 1/8". 4. Bottom: 1/4" above floor finish or threshold, except where undercutting

is indicated. Confirm installed floor covering thickness before cutting


08211-8

door bottom edges. 5. Meeting stiles, pairs of doors: 1/8". 6. Bevel: l/8" in 2". E. Sanding: Factory sand doors to comply with AWI Standards, Section 1300 for

flush doors, 1400 for stile and rail doors. F. Factory finish: 1. Type: AWI Standards, Section 1500, Premium Grade, System TR-4

Conversion Varnish or TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane, filled finish. Color and sheen shall match existing building doors.

2. Finish faces and edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. 3. Factory-finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field-

finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish, in accord with the Painting and Coating section.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fabrication tolerances: 1. Overall dimension: ±1/16". 2. Width: +1/32". 3. Maximum warp, bow, cup or twist: 1/4". 4. Squareness: Maximum 1/8" difference in diagonal measurement. 5. Hardware locations: -0", +1/32". PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Acclimatization: Allow doors to become acclimated to finished space conditions

a minimum of 72 hours before hanging. B. Preparation: Verify that framed openings are installed within specified tolerances.

Do not install doors in frames which are not installed within size and plumbness tolerances.

C. Installation: 1. Install doors in accord with manufacturer’s product data using scheduled

hardware. Install using threaded to the head wood screws furnished by hardware manufacturer.

2. Anchor hardware in correct position and alignment. 3. Adjust hardware and door for proper function and for smooth, free

operation, latching without force or excess clearance, within specified clearances and tolerances.


08211-9

D. Fire-rated doors: Install in accord with UL requirements and NFPA No. 80-92

and No. 105-93. E. Erection tolerances: 1. Variation from specified clearances: +1/32", -0. 2. Maximum variation in edge alignment, pairs of doors: 1/16". F. Replace doors with defects in material, finish, fit or machining. G. Field finish opaque doors: Field finish painted doors in accord with the

requirements of the Painting and Coating section. Prior to finishing, sand using 120 to 180 grit abrasive on a smooth sanding block, to remove scuff and handling marks, raised grain, scratches and effects of moisture exposure.



08211-10


08310-1

SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein. B. Product data: Indicate material types, finishes and sizes, fabrication and

installation details and requirements. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards; standards of the following, as referenced herein: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Fire Codes. B. Labeling requirements: 1. Fire-rated access door assemblies shall bear factory-applied labels

showing name of manufacturer, name of third-party inspection agency, fire-protection rating, and where required for access doors in exit enclosures, maximum transmitted temperature end point.

2. Horizontal access doors shall bear a label that includes the wording "FOR HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION".

3. Permanently attach label to each door and frame. C. Note: Access doors and panels are to be purchased by affected trade, and

installed by trade providing material where access door and panel is to be located. Review all locations with Architect prior to installation.

1. Finish: Selected by Architect to match adjacent finish materials. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver access doors in protective packaging. B. Store in packaging to prevent soiling and physical damage. C. Handle to prevent damage to finished surfaces and operating mechanisms. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Protection: Protect prefinished surfaces from damage or staining. Following

installation, provide protective covering for duration of project.


08310-2

B. Coordinate installation of access doors required to be built into building structure. Secure templates or lay out to rough dimensions provided by specialty manufacturer.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. J.L. Industries, Inc. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Wilkinson Co., Inc. 4. Williams Brothers Corp. B. Characteristics: 1. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Types: a. Typical: As required by substrates. b. Non-fire-rated access doors in gypsum board work: Flush type

with perforated frame flanges for finishing with joint compound. c. Recessed doors: Recessed 5/8" to receive a layer gypsum board. 3. Construction: a. Steel units: Minimum 14 ga. steel sheet for doors; 16 ga. for

frames; prime painted. b. Fire-rated units: Minimum 22 ga. steel inside and outside faces;

box construction, filled with insulation; 16 ga. frames; prime painted.

4. Hardware: a. Non-fire-rated units: Manufacturer's standard concealed hinges

allowing 175 degree operation and cam lock in nonpublic areas and keyed cylinder lock in public areas. Provide two keys per lock.

b. Fire-rated panels: Manufacturer's standard continuous piano hinges, self-closing mechanism, interior release and cylinder lock. Provide two keys per lock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors in accord with manufacturer's product data, plumb, level and

true to line and location. B. Install access doors with fasteners of type and spacing recommended by

manufacturer's product data.


08310-3

C. Set fire rated access doors at locations and elevations indicated and in accord with

NFPA 80. Attach curb flange to floor/ceiling structure. D. Protect surfaces from damage or staining. Clean surfaces prior to Date of

Substantial Completion.


IRCO Project: 213062 City of Atlanta (APD) Crime Lab-Phase 1 Atlanta Public Safety Annex

SECTION 87100 DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that

are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges 2. Lock cylinders and keys 3. Lock and latch sets 4. Bolts 5. Push/Pull units 6. Closers 7. Overhead holders 8. Miscellaneous door control devices 9. Door trim units 10. Protection plates 11. Weatherstripping for exterior doors 12. Sound stripping for interior doors 13. Automatic drop seals (door bottoms) 14. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors 15. Thresholds 16. Electric security hardware C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section: 1. Division 1: General Conditions 2. Section 08110: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 3. Section 08211: Flush Wood Doors 4. Division 16: Electrical 1.03 REFERENCES

87100-1


A. Standards of the following as referenced: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) 3. Factory Mutual (FM) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 6. UL 10C - Fire Tests Door Assemblies 7. Warnock Hersey B. Regulatory standards of the following as referenced: 1. Department of Justice, Office of the Attorney General, Americans with

Disabilities Act, Public Law 101-336 (ADA). 2. CABO/ANSI A117.1: Providing Accessibility and Usability for

Physically Handicap People, 2010 edition. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Refer to applicable “Headings” for system description for electric and electro-

pneumatic hardware products. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and

Division 1 Specification sections. B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of

door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. For items other than those scheduled in the “Headings” of Section 3, provide catalog information for the specified items and for those submitted.

C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to

ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize

schedule into vertical format “hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Use specification Heading numbers with any variations suffixed a, b, etc. Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on

Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.

87100-2


e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information. i. Cross-reference numbers used within schedule deviating from

those specified. 1) Column 1: State specified item and manufacturer. 2) Column 2: State prior approved substituted item and its

manufacturer. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date

particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.

3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

D. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged

with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule.

1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.

E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for

the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

F. Contract closeout submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data: Complete information for installed door

hardware. 2. Warranty: Completed and executed warranty forms. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets,

hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with

warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful

87100-3


in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.

1. Require supplier to meet with electrical, security and door and frame suppliers to coordinate all electrified hardware with related trades. Meeting to be held as a pre-construction meeting.

2. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

3. Required supplier to meet with installer prior to beginning of installation of door hardware.

C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies

with NFPA Standard No. 80 requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not. All hardware shall comply with UL 10C.

1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors’ UL labels indicating “Fire Door to be equipped with Fire Exit Hardware”) provide UL label on exit devices indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”.

1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware

schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received

by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.

C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and

hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of

installation (shop or Project site). E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet

installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by

87100-4


87100-5

hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special warranties: 1. Door Closers: Ten year period 2. Locks and Cylinders: Three year period 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools

and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS (* Denotes manufacturer referenced in the Hardware Headings) A. Hinges: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Hager b. Stanley c. Ives* 2. Characteristics: a. Templates: Provide only template-produced units. b. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the

following requirements: 1) For metal doors and frames install machine screws into

drilled and tapped holes. 2) For wood doors and frames install threaded-to-the-head

wood screws. 3) For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4 inch,

threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws. 4) Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. c. Hinge pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as

follows: 1) Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 2) Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable

pins. 3) Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 4) Tips: Flat button and matching plug. Finished to match

leafs.


d. Size: Size hinges in accordance with specified manufacturer’s published recommendations.

e. Quantity: Furnish one pair of hinges for all doors up to 5'0" high. Furnish one hinge for each additional 2-1/2 feet or fraction thereof.

B. Cylinders: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Schlage* 2. Characteristics: a. Interchangeable core system: Key to the existing Schlage Primus

Grand master key system for Project. b. Equip locksets with cylinders featuring patented, restricted keys

and auxiliary locking pin. Provide construction cores. c. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze,

stainless steel, or nickel silver. d. Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying and, except as

otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.

1) Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, “DO NOT DUPLICATE."

e. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. f. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys

for each master system, and 2 control keys for interchangeable core series. Provide 10 construction master keys and 2 control keys.

1) Deliver keys to Owner. C. Locksets, Latchsets, Deadbolts: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Schlage* L9000 series 03A design. (Match existing building

standards) 2. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled. a. Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without

disassembly. b. Latchbolts: 3/4-inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type. c. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast or solid rod

lever as scheduled. Spindles: independent break-away. d. Thumbturns: accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting

motions to operate. e. Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw. f. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty

solenoid.

87100-6


g. Strikes: 16 gage curved stainless steel, bronze or brass with 1" deep box construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. h. Certifications: 1) ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational 2) ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 30 UL Listed. D. Closers and Door Control Devices: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. LCN Closers* 4010 series. (Match existing building standards) 2. Characteristics: a. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action

with a high strength cast iron cylinder. b. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature

range of 120oF to -30oF without seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C.

c. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed and back check.

d. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forearms for parallel arm closers) and where specified shall have a cast-in solid stop on the closer shoe (“CNS”). Where door travel on out-swing doors must be limited, use “CNS” or “S-CNS” type closers. Auxiliary stops are not required when cush type closers are used.

e. Overhead concealed closers shall have spring power adjustable for 50% increase in closing power and fully mortised door tracks.

f. All surface closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. All closers (overhead, surface and concealed) shall be of one manufacturer and carry manufacturer's ten year warranty (electric closers to have two year warranty).

g. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped provide adjustable units complying with ADA and ANSI A-117.1 provisions for door opening force.

h. Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans. Doors swinging into exit corridors shall provide for corridor clear width as required by code. Where possible, mount closers inside rooms.

i. Powder coating finish to be certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray

87100-7


testing by ETL, an independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification.

E. Floor Stops and Wall Bumpers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Trimco b. Ives* c. Rockwood 2. Characteristics: Refer to Part 3, Hardware Headings. F. Door Bolts/Coordinators: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Trimco b. Ives* c. Rockwood 2. Characteristics: a. Flush bolts to be forged brass 6-3/4" x 1", with 1/2" diameter bolts.

Plunger to be supplied with milled surface one side that fits into a matching guide.

b. Automatic flush bolts to be UL listed as top and bottom bolts on a pair of classified fire doors. Bolt construction to be of rugged steel and brass components.

c. Self latching flush bolts to be UL listed as top and bottom bolts on a pair of classified fire doors. Bolt construction to be of rugged steel and brass components.

d. Automatic flush bolts and self-latching flush bolts shall be UL listed for fire door application without bottom bolts (LBB).

e. Coordinator to be soffit mounted non-handed fully automatic UL listed coordinating device for sequential closing of paired doors with or without astragals.

f. Provide filler pieced to close the header. Provide brackets as required for mounting of soffit applied hardware.

G. Push Plates: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Trimco b. Ives* c. Rockwood 2. Characteristics: a. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturers standard exposed

fasteners. b. Material to be wrought, stainless steel, per the Hardware Headings. c. Provide plates sized as shown in Part 3, Hardware Headings.

87100-8


H. Door Pulls & Pull Plates: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Trimco b. Ives* c. Rockwood 2. Characteristics: a. Provide concealed thru-bolted trim on back to back mounted pulls,

but not for single units. b. Material to be cast, stainless steel. c. Provide units of types and sizes shown in Part 3, Hardware

Headings. I. Protective Plates: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Trimco b. Ives* c. Rockwood d. Or equal 2. Characteristics: a. Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trim

units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws. b. Materials: 1) Metal Plates: Stainless Steel, .050 inch (U.S. 18 gage). c. Fabricate protection plates not more than 2 inches less than door

width on hinge side and not more than 1 inch less than door width on pull side.

d. Heights: 1) Kick plates to be 8 inches in height. 2) Mop plates to be 4 inches in height. 3) Armor plates to be 34 inches in height. Armor plates on

fire doors to comply with NFPA 80. J. Thresholds: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. National Guard Products* b. Reese Industries c. Zero Weatherstripping 2. Types: Indicated in Part 3, Hardware Headings. K. Door Seals/Gasketing: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. National Guard Products* b. Reese Industries c. Zero Weatherstripping.

87100-9


2. Types: Indicated in Part 3, Hardware Headings. L. Silencers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Hager b. Ives c. Rockwood 2. Three for each single door; two for each pair of doors. 3. Omit silencers at openings scheduled to receive perimeter gasketing. M. Security Equipment: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Schlage* b. Southern Folger as scheduled or equal 2. Characteristics: a. Provide items as found in Part 3, Hardware Headings. 3. Coordinate security equipment with Electrical and security contractor. 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method

indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.

B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,

generally prepared for machine screw installation. 1. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet

metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips

flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including “prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners.

4. Use thru-bolts or sex bolts for installation of all door closers and surface mounted overhead stops/holders. Coordinate with wood doors and metal doors and frames. Where thru-bolts are used, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt as a means of reinforcing the work or use sex bolt fasteners.

87100-10


87100-11

2.02 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer’s standard color and texture finish for the latch

and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch of lock sets). B. Provide finishes that match those established by ANSI or, if none established,

match the Architect’s sample. C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any),

composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer’s standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass,

bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer."

E. The designations used to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in

ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

1. Hinges (exterior doors): 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 2. Hinges (interior doors): 652 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated Steel 3. Flush Bolts: 626 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated Brass/Bronze 4. Locks: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 5. Door Closers: 689 Powder Coat Aluminum 6. Push Plates: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 7. Pull Plates: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 8. Protective Plates: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 9. Floor Stops: 626 (US26D) Satin Chrome Plated Brass/Bronze 10. Wall Bumpers: 630 (US32D) Satin Stainless Steel 11. Thresholds/Weatherstripping: 627/628 (US27/US28) Aluminum PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications,

except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect.

1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and


recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the

attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.

Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene

mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealers”.

F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

3.02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper

operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.

1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to function properly with final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Door Hardware Supplier's Field Service 1. Inspect door hardware items for correct installation and adjustment after

complete installation of door hardware. 2. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of

door hardware and hardware finishes. 3. File written report of this inspection to Architect. 3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

87100-12


HW SET: 01 DOOR NUMBER: 332C 344 346 350B 352 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1HW IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-10 VON 1 EA ELECT LOCK L9080T EU X RX 03A SCH 1 EA CORE ONLY 20-740 SCH 1 EA CARD READER BY OTHERS 1 EA MONITOR SWITCH 679-05 HM SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X 2" LDW IVE 1 SET SEALS 5020 NGP NOTE: COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL AND SECURITY CONTRACTORS NOTE: COORDINATE LOCKING SIDE OF DOOR 332C HW SET: 02 DOOR NUMBER: 340A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1HW IVE 1 EA LOCK L9080T 03A SCH 1 EA CORE ONLY 20-740 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X 2" LDW IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD BY SOUND DOOR MFG 1 SET SEALS BY SOUND DOOR MFG 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM BY SOUND DOOR MFG

87100-13


HW SET: 03 DOOR NUMBER: 340B EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGES 5BB1HW IVE 2 EA FLUSH BOLTS FB458 X 12” X DPS IVE 1 EA LOCK L9480T 03A SCH 1 EA CORE ONLY 20-740 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSERS 4111 SHCUSH LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X 2" LDW IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD BY SOUND DOOR MFG 1 SET SEALS BY SOUND DOOR MFG 2 EA DOOR BOTTOM BY SOUND DOOR MFG 1 SET ASTRAGAL BY SOUND DOOR MFG HW SET: 04 DOOR NUMBER: 341 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1 IVE 1 EA LOCK L9456T 03A SCH 1 EA CORE ONLY 20-740 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X 2" LDW IVE 1 SET SEALS 5020 NGP HW SET: 05 DOOR NUMBER: 342 349 351 353 355 357 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1 IVE 1 EA LOCK L9456T 03A SCH 1 EA CORE ONLY 20-740 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X 2" LDW IVE 1 EA WALL BUMPER WS407CCV IVE

87100-14


1 SET SEALS 5020 NGP HW SET: 06 DOOR NUMBER: 343 347 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1 IVE 1 EA LOCK L9456T 03A SCH 1 EA CORE ONLY 20-740 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X 2" LDW IVE 1 EA WALL BUMPER WS407CCV IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD BY SOUND DOOR MFG 1 SET SEALS BY SOUND DOOR MFG 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM BY SOUND DOOR MFG HW SET: 07 DOOR NUMBER: 345 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1 IVE 1 EA LOCK L9456T 03A SCH 1 EA CORE ONLY 20-740 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X 2" LDW IVE 1 EA WALL BUMPER WS407CCV IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD BY SOUND DOOR MFG 1 SET SEALS BY SOUND DOOR MFG 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM BY SOUND DOOR MFG

87100-15


87100-16

HW SET: 08 DOOR NUMBER: 348 EACH TO HAVE: 2 EA HINGES SF204 FMSS OR EQUAL SF 1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 4 ½ EH SF 1 EA ELECT LOCKSET LT D9345 X PIGTAIL X 4 KEYS MAXI MOGUL SF 4 EA PARACENTRIC KEYS MAXI MOGUL SF 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP T (PULL SIDE MT) LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X 2" LDW IVE 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S IVE 1 SET SEALS 5020 NGP 1 EA CARD READER BY OTHERS 1 EA MONITOR SWITCH 679-05 HM SCH NOTE: SECURITY DOOR 2” THICK. SECURITY DOOR HINGES AND LOCKSET BY SOUTHERN FOLGER OR EQUAL NOTE: COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL AND SECURITY CONTRACTORS HW SET: 09 DOOR NUMBER: 350A 356 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1HW IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4 X 16 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8303-8 4 X 16 IVE 1 EA CLOSER 4011 LCN 1 EA KICKPLATE 8400 X 2” LDW IVE 1 EA WALL BUMPER WS407CCV IVE 1 SET SEALS 5020 NGP

END OF SECTION


08800-1

SECTION 08800 GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related work: 1. Entrances and storefronts. 2. Curtain wall. 3. Sealants and caulking. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein. B. Samples: Submit minimum 1'-0" by 1'-0" samples of each type glazing material

proposed for use, if requested by the Architect. C. Product data: Submit for each type of glazing material and accessory product

specified. Include technical data, storage and handling procedures and performance characteristics.

D. Framing manufacturer's approval; (FIO): Prior to submission of shop drawings,

indicate by letter that an authorized representative of storefront framing manufacturer has reviewed and approved details, including glass bite, clearances and glazing methods.

E. Calculations; (FIO): Submit for Architect's information only. Submit

calculations prepared by glazing material manufacturer indicating recommendations for glass thickness and heat treating of glazing materials as a result of heat stress, building orientation, inside window treatments, shading by exterior building components or wind loading. Identify factors affecting breakage probability which have been taken into consideration and breakage probability anticipated by calculations.

F. Maintenance data: Submit glazing material manufacturer's maintenance data for

cleaning and care of each type of glazing material. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Applicable standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), “Safety Performance

Standards and Methods of Tests for Safety Glazing Materials used in


08800-2

Buildings,” Z97.1. 2. ASTM International (ASTM), standards and referenced herein. 3. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), “Safety Standard for

Architectural Glazing Materials,” 16-CFR, Chapter II, Part 1201. 4. Glass Association of North America (GANA) “Glazing Manual”. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), standards as referenced

herein.

B. Design criteria: 1. Glazing materials, whether in monolithic state or as a lite of a thermal

insulating unit, shall be heat treated where required by glass manufacturer's design calculations to resist stress caused by glass orientations, sizes and configurations, heat stress, inherent imperfections, wind loading, glazing conditions, temperature differential, inside window treatments or other conditions affecting breakage probability. Maximum allowable breakage probability at design loads shall be eight lites per thousand for vertical glazing.

2. For heat-treated glass, orient lites with roll distortion parallel to head and sill members.

3. Tempered and human impact safety rated glazing materials shall comply with CPSC 16-CFR, Part 1201, Category II.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store glazing materials indoors in cool, dry area, off floor, supported to prevent

stress and breakage. B. Move no cases which have been partially unpacked. Unpack glazing materials in

accord with manufacturer's product data for type of material being handled. Stack individual lites as recommended by manufacturer's product data.

C. Utilize rolling blocks to rotate glazing materials. D. Handle insulating units without rotating, warping or “cartwheeling” units.

Prevent damage to glazing material or edge seal. 1.05 WARRANTIES:

A. Provide Owner written warranties covering defects in materials and workmanship and flowing conditions for minimum periods specified from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Glass replacement warranty: Include a two-year warranty covering glazing

materials and labor to replace glazing damaged for any reason other than natural


08800-3

disasters, vandalism or damage resulting from accident or abuse arising out of the Owner's operations.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable float glass manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified

requirements: 1. AFG Industries, Inc. 2. ACH Float Glass (formerly Visteon). 3. Guardian Industries Corp. 4. Pilkington/Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. 5. PPG Industries, Inc./Glass Group. 6. Basis-of-design; Viracon, Inc. B. Acceptable glass unit fabricators; subject to compliance with specified

requirements: 1. AFG Industries. 2. Guardian industries Corp. 3. Pilkington/Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. 4. PPG Industries, Inc./Glass Group. 5. Basis-of-design; Viracon, Inc. 2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General transparent flat glass standard: Comply with ASTM Cl 036-06, Type I Glazing Select Quality for all transparent clear glass.

B. Tempered, clear float glass: 1/4” thickness, fully tempered, complying with

ASTM C1048-04. Glass for butt-joint glazing shall be free of tong marks and surface defects on exposed edges.

C. Bullet-Resistant: Provided by Owner as indicated on drawings.

Contractor is responsible for moving glass from Owners storage to project. Verify sizes as indicated on drawings prior to frame fabrication.

2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting blocks: Neoprene, 70-90 Shore A durometer hardness, meeting ASTM

C864-05. B. Edge blocks: Neoprene, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness, meeting ASTM

C864-05.


08800-4

C. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 Shore A durometer hardness, meeting ASTM C864-

05. D. Glazing gaskets: Glazing assembly manufacturer's standard extruded or molded

neoprene or Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) gaskets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compliance with the following requirements prior to beginning glazing

work: 1. That framing is anchored in position, plumb and square within l/8" of

nominal dimensions indicated. 2. That fastener heads, and other projections are removed from glazing

rabbets. 3. That corners and fabrication intersections are sealed and framing is

weathertight. 4. That rabbets at sills weep to outside and rabbets are of sufficient depth and

width to receive glazing material and provide the required bite of the glazing material.

5. That hollow metal frames have received paint finish in accord with Painting and Coating section.

3.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Install glazing materials to obtain airtight and watertight installation and to

withstand normal temperature changes and wind loads without failure. B. Protect glazing material faces and edges during handling and installation. C. Size glazing materials for each opening to ensure correct bite on glazing material,

without imposing strain, in accord with manufacturer's product data. D. Maintain minimum bed clearance between glazing material and sash of 1/8", both

sides, except where greater clearance is required by either glazing material or framing manufacturer.

3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Clean glass edges and framing glazing channel of debris and protective coatings

immediately prior to glazing. Use material acceptable to framing, glazing material and glazing sealant manufacturers.


08800-5

B. Inspect glazing material prior to installation. Eliminate lites having face or edge

damage.

C. Lites of tempered and insulating glass shall not be cut or otherwise altered in the field.

3.04 GLAZING PROCEDURES:

A. Install glazing materials in accord with manufacturer’s product data and applicable standards, except where more stringent requirements are specified.

B. Install setting blocks for all glazing materials over six sq. ft. in area. Install at sill

rabbet at quarter points. Size setting blocks in proportion to glass weight; minimum 4” length.

C. Shim all lites over 100 united inches, inboard and outboard, on all sides using continuous shims, except where gaskets accomplish shimming.

D. Provide edge blocks at vertical jambs to prevent lateral movement of glass. Provide edge blocks at 3” minimum length. Maintain 1/8” clearance between edge of glass and edge block.

E. Interior channel glazing: Glaze using polyvinyl chloride tape applied to both

sides, all stops. Place tape, with butted joints. Compress tape approximately 30 percent. Center glazing material in rabbet.

F. Glazing sealant installation: Comply with applicable provisions of Joint Sealants

section. 3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. For glazing materials subject to damage during construction, protect from

breakage by attachment of crossed streamers to framing. Do not mark on surfaces. B. Remove and replace broken, cracked, chipped or otherwise damaged glazing

materials and materials not meeting specified design criteria prior to Date of Substantial Completion.


08800-6

C. Final cleaning: Just prior to Date of Substantial Completion, clean glass inside and out. Clean using pre-tested detergent and water. Flush with clean water. Repair or replace work which cannot be cleaned or which has been damaged during construction operations.



09250-1

SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related work: 1. Rough carpentry. 2. Finish carpentry. 3. Acoustical ceilings. 4. Painting and coating. 5. Mechanical. 6. Electrical. 1.02 SUBM1TTALS A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein. B. Product data: Indicate product description, including compliance with specified

requirements and installation requirements. Include specific requirements for fire-rated and acoustically rated partitions and ceiling assemblies. Mark manufacturer's brochures to include only those products proposed for use. Include complete details of shaftwall system. Include details for supplementary fire protection at penetrations and locations of acoustical sealant.

C. Structural design calculations; (FIO): Submit for Architect's information only.

Indicate compliance with specified design criteria. Calculations shall bear the seal of a professional engineer licensed in the State of Georgia.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Applicable standards; standards of the following: l. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. ASTM International (ASTM) as referenced herein. 3. Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries – International (AWCI). 4. Celings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA). 5. Gypsum Association (GA). 6. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA). 7. Underwrirters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 8. Intertek Testing Services/Warnock Hersey, Inc. (WHI). 9. “Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish” as

published jointly by the Gypsum Association, AWCI, CISCA, and PDCA. 10. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA).


09250-2

B. Design Criteria: 1. Sound rating: Construct designated partitions in accord with

manufacturer’s product data, as submitted, for obtaining Sound Transmission Class (STC) ratings, as indicated on the drawings, in accord with ASTM E90-04.

2. Fire-resistance: Comply with fire-resistance designs indicated on the drawings. Use only manufacturers and types of materials as required by indicated designs. Designs with tests by other than Testing Agency listed may be submitted for Architect's acceptance, subject to prior acceptance by governing authorities.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing

brand name, applicable standard designation and name of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Storage: 1. Stack gypsum board inside building under roof, off floor on pallets or

similar platforms providing continuous support for gypsum board and to prevent sagging. Stack gypsum board flat and so that long lengths are not over short lengths.

2. Store joint compound in dry area; provide protection against freezing at all times.

3. Do not overload floor systems. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Temperature: 1. Maintain uniform temperature in range of 55 to 70°F. for 24 hours before,

during and after gypsum board installation and finishing. 2. Maintain uniform temperature range until permanent heating system is in

operation or building is occupied. B. Ventilation: 1. Provide ventilation during and following joint treatment applications. 2. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation. 3. Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between coats

of joint treatment. 4. Protect installed materials from drafts during hot, dry weather.


09250-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING MEMBERS A. Gypsum board studs: Meeting requirements of ASTM C645-04; channel type,

roll formed from hot dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A1003-02a and with ASTM C653-97(2002), G40 minimum.

1. Stud size: As indicated on drawings, except minimum 3-5/8” depth where partition is indicated to receive tile finish.

2. Stud gauge: 20 ga. Minimum and as required by manufacturer’s product data for heights and conditions of use, with maximum allowable deflections of L/240 at 5 psf.

B. Floor and ceiling runners: Hot dip galvanized steel, 1” deep, minimum, by widths

to receive studs, same gauge as studs. Runner tracks shall have slotted holes for attachment to structure and studs, for slip joints where required by manufacturer’s product data.

C. Security Lath: AMICO "Security Mesh" or Keene Products from Metalex Corp.

"Barrier Mesh F500-13" 13 ga. maximum security style mesh. 1. Attachment: AMICO "Secura Clip". 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD A. Regular board: Meeting ASTM CI396-04 (formerly ASTM C36), thickness

indicated, tapered edges. B. Fire-retardant board: Meeting ASTM C1396-04 (formerly ASTM C36), Type X,

thickness indicated, tapered edges. 2.03 SOUND CONTROL MATERIALS A. Contractor’s option: Based on sound ratings and fire-resistance ratings required

for assemblies, Contractor may select glass fiber or mineral wool sound attenuation materials as follows:

1. Glass fiber sound attenuation batts: a. Acceptable products: 1) CertainTeed, Corp., Acousta-Therm Batts. 2) Johns Manville Corp., Sound Shield. 3) Owens-Corning Corp., Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation. b. Characteristics: 1) Type: Unfaced fiberglass batts for friction fit between

studs, complying with ASTM C665-01, Type 1. 2) Surface burning characteristics: Maximum 25 flame spread


09250-4

and 50 smoke development when tested in accord with ASTM E84-04.

3) Assembly STC: As indicated on drawings. 4) Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 2. Mineral wool sound attenuation blankets: a. Acceptable products; subject to compliance with specified

requirements: 1) Fibrex, Inc., Sound Attenuation Fire Batt Insulation. 2) Owens-Corning Corp., Sound Attenuation Batt/MW. 3) USG Interiors, Inc., Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire

Blankets (SAFB). b. Characteristics: 1) Type: Paperless, semi-rigid mineral wool fiber blanket

complying with ASTM C665-0 I, Type l. 2) Density: Maximum 4.0 pcf for 1" thickness, and maximum

2.5 pcf. for greater thicknesses. 3) Surface burning characteristics: Maximum 15 flame spread

and 5 smoke development when tested in accord with ASTM E84-04.

4) Assembly STC: As indicated on drawings. 5) Thickness: As indicated on drawings. B. Sound Isolation Membrane: 1. Manufacturers: a. Basis of Design: Acoustiblok, Inc.; Acoustiblok Sound Isolation

Membrane, 16 oz.: www.acoustiblok.com. b. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01630 – Product Options and

Substitutions. 2. Fasteners, Sealant, and Tape: As recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Acoustical sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning synthetic rubber. D. Acoustical tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam tape, 1/4" thickness by 1"

wide. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Fasteners for metal framing, corrosion-resistant: l. For fastening framing members to concrete and masonry surfaces:

Fasteners shall be beaded drive pins or threaded studs driven by powder actuated tools. Fasteners shall resist design loads in accord with requirements of NAAMM-MLISFA 540-87.

2. For fastening to metal decking and for fastening framing members together: Type S, pan head screws, in sizes recommended by gypsum


09250-5

board manufacturer for applications indicated. 3. Provide slotted, stand-off washers for slip joint attachments. B. Screws for gypsum board and accessory application: Meeting ASTM C1002-01,

corrosion-resistant. 1. For application of single layer or base layer of gypsum board to metal

framing: 1", Type S, bugle head. 2. For application of face layer of gypsum board to metal framing in double

layer construction: 1-5/8", Type S, bugle head. 3. For gypsum board to gypsum board application: 1-l/2", Type G, bugle

head. 4. For application of gypsum board to wood framing: 1-1/4”, Type W, bugle

head. 2.05 JOINT MATERIALS A. Materials for standard gypsum board products: 1. Joint tape: Meeting ASTM C475-02, perforated paper type. 2. Joint compound: Meeting ASTM C475-02, ready-mixed tape embedment

and topping compounds, vinyl-based, except that compounds for use with moisture-resistant gypsum board shall be chemically hardening type recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.

B. Concrete finishing compound: 1. Acceptable product: U.S. Gypsum Co., Cover Coat Compound. 2. Characteristics: Ready-mixed, vinyl-based compound, white color. 2.06 SUSPENDED GYPSUM BOARD FURRING SYSTEM A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Chicago Metallic Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Characteristics: 1. Structural classification: Meeting ASTM C635-00, Heavy Duty. 2. Components: Fabricated from minimum 0.020" thickness, galvanized,

cold-rolled steel; double web design. 3. Fire-resistive rating: In accord with UL fire-rated assembly design

indicated. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Accessories shall comply with ASTM Cl047-99(2004) and shall be as follows.


09250-6

B. Corner reinforcement: Galvanized steel with 1-1/4" wide fine expanded mesh

flanges. C. Metal jamb, ceiling and casing trim: Manufacturer's standard "L" and "U" shaped

galvanized members with fine expanded mesh flanges; "mud-in" type for finishing with joint compound.

D. Control joints: Roll-formed galvanized steel. E. Furring channels: Minimum 25 ga. galvanized steel, 7/8" deep by 1-3/8" face

width. F. Cold-rolled channels: Minimum 16 ga. steel, hot dip galvanized or black

asphaltum-painted, as follows: 1. 3/4" depth: 300 lbs./mlf, for use as horizontal stiffeners, bracing and cross

furring. 2. 1-1/2" depth: 475lbs./mlf, for use as main ceiling runners. G. Furring channel clips: Manufacturer's standard type for attachment of furring

channels to cold-rolled runner channels. H. Resilient channel: Galvanized steel, manufacturer’s standard type. I. Furring brackets: Minimum 20 ga. galvanized steel, for attaching 3/4” furring

channels to masonry walls. J. Ceiling hangers: 1. Wire: Minimum eight ga. galvanized annealed steel wire. 2. Rod: 1/4” diameter, rust-resistent painted, threaded cold-drawn mild steel. K. Tie wire: Minimum 18 ga. galvanized, annealed steel wire. L. Special trim shapes: 1. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified

requirements: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. MM Systems Corp. 2. Characteristics: a. Material: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy. b. Finish: Painted finish, color selected by Architect. c. Shapes: As indicated on the drawings. Radius shapes factory-

fabricated to radius indicated.


09250-7

M. Reinforcing for Thru Wall Mounted Items: Minimum 18 gauge galvanized sheet

metal, specified in Miscellaneous Metal section, 1 2-inches wide and spanning minimum 2 studs, or treated wood blocking specified in Rough Carpentry section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING AND FURRING INSTALLATION A. Except where more stringent requirements are specified, install framing and

furring in accord with ASTM C754-00, Gypsum Association requirements and manufacturer's product data.

B. Runners: 1. Attach runner tracks at floor and underside of structural deck with

specified fasteners. Provide slip joint attachments to meet deflection criteria and manufacturer's calculations at the following locations:

a. Tall partitions. b. Full-height, floor-to-floor or floor-to-deck partitions. c. All partitions subject to deflection. 2. Where partitions are indicated to stop at finish ceiling, attach to ceiling

suspension system using 1/8" toggle bolts or sheet metal screws spaced at 1'-4" o. c., maximum, where partition aligns with ceiling grid. Where partition does not align with grid, attach at each intersection with grid.

C. Studs: 1. Position full length studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling runners. a. Space studs as indicated on drawings, but l'-4" o. c., maximum. b. Space studs not to exceed 1'-4" o. c. for partitions to receive tile

and stone finish(es). 2. Provide double studs at interior and exterior corners, expansion joints,

partition termination and adjacent to door and borrowed lite openings in partitions. Locate next stud not more than 6" from double studs.

3. Secure abutting and intersecting walls with fasteners through stud flanges. 4. For horizontal reinforcement at door and borrowed lite frames, install cut-

to-length runner sections with slit flanges secured to studs. 5. Install acoustical tape on metal studs which abut other studs or dissimilar

surfaces in walls to receive sound attenuation blankets. D. Furring: 1. Attach to masonry and concrete substrate with fasteners spaced at 2’-0”

o.c. on alternating furring channel flange. 2. Position channels vertically, spaced at 2’-0” o.c., maximum.


09250-8

E. Reinforcemnet Installation: 1. Install 18 ga. sheet metal reinforcing to studs for thru wall supported items

such as stair handrails. Secure reinforcing with minimum of two sheet metal screws.

2. Reinforcement shall be located by trade furnishing item. 3. At location of stair handrails attached to metal framed wallboard

partitions, set reinforcement at handrail height and rise for handrail bracket attachment. Attach to metal framing, full length of handrail.

F. Security Mesh: Attach to indicated metal studs with manufacturer's security clip.

Attach at spacing required for maximum security rating. 3.02 SUSPENDED GYPSUM BOARD FURRING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install suspension system in accord with ASTM C754-00 and fire-rated design

assemblies indicated. B. Hangers: 1. Space hangers at 4'-0" o. c., maximum, in each direction. Secure to

building structure. 2. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member and at each

corner of lighting fixtures. 3. Splay wires no more than 5" in 4'-0" vertical drop. 4. Wrap wire minimum of three times horizontally, turning ends upward.

C. Space main tees at 4'-0" o. c., perpendicular to structure. Space cross tees at 2'-0" o. c., perpendicular to main tees to form 2'-0" by 4'-0" grid system.

D. Level and square suspension system within specified tolerances. E. Where grid system exists in an unrestrained condition, brace back to building

structure using hanger wire, main tee or carrying channel braces spaced at 4'-0" o.c., maximum.

F. Where acoustical ceilings are indicated to be installed beneath gypsum

board sub-ceilings, provide sub-ceiling hanger brackets at location of ceiling grid, as specified in Acoustical Ceilings section.

3.03 GENERAL BOARD APPLICATION A. Except where more stringent requirements are specified, install gypsum board in

accord with ASTM C840-04, GA-216 and manufacturer's product data.


09250-9

B. Use gypsum board of maximum lengths to minimize end joints. Stagger end

joints. C. Abut gypsum boards without forcing. Fit ends and edges of board. Do not place

butt ends against tapered edges. D. Support ends and edges of gypsum board panels on framing or furring members,

except for face layer of double layer work. E. Install gypsum board accessories in accord with gypsum board manufacturer’s

product data and as follows: 1. Control joints: Install in walls and ceilings, not exceeding 30’-0” o.c.

Attach with staples to panel face. Where control joints occur in fire rated partitions, comply with code requirements and gypsum board manufacturer’s product data.

2. Corner bead: Install at external corners. 3. Metal trim shapes: At exposed edge of gypsum board at door and window

openings, at intersections with other materials and at intersection of walls with ceilings.

4. Install corner beads and metal trim shapes to framing system with mechanical anchors.

F. Install acoustical sealant at sound-rated partitions: 1. Seal partition perimeter with continuous 1/4" minimum round bead of

acoustical sealant applied to each leg of runners, including those used at partition intersections with dissimilar wall construction.

2. Install gypsum board with 1/8" perimeter relief compressing sealant to form permanent airtight seal.

3. Where slip joint attachments are required at top of partition, fill resulting joint between drywall and adjacent structure with acoustical sealant to form permanent air tight seal.

4. Apply acoustical sealant around cutouts such as at electrical boxes, plumbing penetrations, medicine cabinets, heating ducts and cold air returns to form permanent airtight seal. (Sealant shall not be used as a fire stopping material.)

G. Install sound attenuation blankets at locations indicated on drawings. Comply

with manufacturer's product data for installation. Attach flanges of blanket to web of stud and not to face of stud receiving gypsum board.

H. Sound Isolation Membrane: 1. Install in accordance with membrane manufacturer’s recommendations,

apply fasteners in accordance with fastener manufacturer’s recommendations.


09250-10

2. Apply sealant, tape, and scrap sound isolation material as required to preserve acoustical integrity, where isolation membrane is penetrated, such as electrical outlets and switch boxes.

I. Install board coated glass mat backer board as a base for ceramic tile in accord

with ANSI A1 08.11 at shower and other locations indicated on drawings. J. For fire-rated and acoustically rated construction, comply with requirements of

tested assemblies scheduled on the drawings. K. Continue all required components of fire-rated and acoustically rated wall

assembly to overhead structure. Apply joint tape and one coat of compound to gypsum board joints concealed from view in completed work.

L. Seal openings and penetrations in fire-rated construction as specified in

Firestopping section. M. Identify fire-rated sub-ceilings and partitions above finished ceiling line with

stenciled red lettering reading, “FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER – PROTECT ALL OPENINGS.” Apply lettering in 1-1/2” high letters. Space 10’-0” o.c. Apply to both sides of partitions.

N. Attach gypsum board to resilient channels with screws of length to not contact

framing. 3.04 SINGLE LAYER APPLICATION A. Ceilings: Apply gypsum board with long dimension at right angles to framing.

Terminate edges of gypsum board running parallel to framing on framing members.

B. Walls: 1. Apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally at Contractor’s option,

except as required by gypsum board manufacturer’s product data for system designs, including fire-rated and acoustically-rated partitions.

2. Stagger end joints in opposite sides of partitions. 3. Terminate edges of gypsum board running parallel to framing, furring on

framing or furring members. C. Fastening: Attach gypsum board using fasteners specified at spacings required by

manufacturer's product data.


09250-11

3.05 DOUBLE LAYER APPLICATION A. Base layer: 1. Ceilings: Apply base layer with long dimension at right angle to framing.

Terminate edges of gypsum board running parallel to framing on framing members.

2. Walls: Apply base layer vertically. Terminate edges of gypsum board running parallel to framing, furring on framing or furring members. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. Fastening: Attach gypsum board using fasteners specified, at spacings required by manufacturer's product data.

B. Face layer: 1. Apply face layer at right angle to base layer with minimum 1 0" offset in

parallel base and face layer joints. 2. Fastening: Attach gypsum board using fasteners specified, at spacings

required by manufacturer's product data. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish Levels shall be in accord with the "Recommended Specification: Levels of

Gypsum Board Finish" as published jointly by the Gypsum Association, A WCI, CISCA and PDCA.

B. Finish Level I; Joint treatment for non-public, non-service areas to receive no

further finish, including storage areas: Apply joint compound to joints and angles in gypsum board and embed joint tape. Surfaces shall be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.

C. Finish Level 2; Joint treatment for areas indicated to receive no further finish,

including unfinished service areas, mechanical and electrical rooms, janitor’s closets: Apply joint compound to joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories. Embed joint tape. Apply one additional coat of compound over tape. Apply one coat of compound to fastener depressions. Surfaces shall be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.

D. Finish Level 3; Joint treatment for areas to receive textured and tile finishes: 1. Moisture-resistant board: a. Apply joint compound to joints, angles, fastener heads and

accessories. Embed joint tape. Apply two additional coats of compound over tape, featheredging and sanding each coat.

b. Apply minimum of two coats of compound to fastener depressions, sanding each coat and bringing to level plane with gypsum board surface.


09250-12

2. Water-resistant, coated glass mat backer board: a. Embed glass fiber mesh tape in skim coat of material used to set

tiles on joints and corners that are to receive tile. b. Caulk or seal penetrations and abutments to dissimilar materials. 3. Finished joints shall be free of tool marks and ridges. E. Finish Level 4; Joint treatment for areas indicated to receive wall coverings and

flat and eggshell paint finishes: 1. Apply joint compound to joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories.

Embed joint tape. Apply three additional coats of compound over tape, feather edging and sanding each coat.

2. Apply minimum of three coats of compound to fastener depressions, sanding each coat and bringing to level plane with gypsum board surface.

3. All joint compound shall be free of tool marks and ridges. F. Fastener pop: Drive new fastener approximately 1-1/2" from popped fastener and

repair to match gypsum board finish. G. Fill cracks with joint compound and sand smooth and flush. H. Dust surfaces and leave ready for decoration. Joint and fastener treatment shall

be indistinguishable in finished work.



09480-1

SECTION 09480 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Patterned, sound-absorptive acoustical panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04400 – Masonry 2. Section 11495 – Baffle & Safety Ceiling Systems. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Acoustical Performance Requirements: 1. NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient): Comply with ASTM C423-90a up to 1.0

depending on thickness. See specific products for ratings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01330 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each type of panel including fire-

resistive characteristics, finishes, details of installation, and the following: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Certified test reports indicating compliance with Performance Requirements

specified herein. C. Samples: 2 full size sets of Samples of the following specified units for color selection or

verification. 1. Panels. D. Closeout Submittals: Comply with Section 01770 – Closeout Procedures. 1. Operating and Maintenance Manual, including cleaning and maintenance

instructions. 2. Extra Material for Owner’s stock. 3. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).


09480-2

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain from a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years experience in

manufacturing of products similar in complexity to those required for this Project. C. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years experience in installation of

products similar in complexity to those required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated.

1. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers with brands,

names, and production lot numbers clearly marked on these containers. B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Store products in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight. 2. Protect from elements and from damage. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty per Section 01770 – Closeout Procedures. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Deliver not less than the following quantity of each type, color, and pattern of

material, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. a. 1 carton. 2. Furnish Extra Materials from same production run to verify run for color. 3. Package replacement materials with protective covering, identified with

appropriate labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of design:


09480-3

1. pinta acoustic, inc. Telephone: 800-662-0032 612-355-4250 Fax: 612-355-4255 Website: www.pinta-acoustic.com B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01630 – Product Options and Substitutions. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Acoustical Panels: Lightweight, open-cell willtec® foam panel meeting the following

requirements: 1. SONEX One Panel: a. Density: 0.5 to 0.7 pounds per cubic foot (0.23 to 0.32 kg per m3). b. Tensile Strength: 8 psi (0.06 MPa). c. Flammability: Class 1 per ASTM E84. d. Flame Spread: 1) Natural: 5. 2) Painted: 10. 3) HPC: 25. e. Smoke Density: 1) Natural: 50. 2) Painted: 10. 3) HPC: 65. f. Panel Size: 24 inch by 48 inch (610 mm by 1219 mm). g. Panel Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm). h. Finish: HPC coating; color to be selected from manufacturer’s

standard. i. Sound Absorption Coefficients: Type B and A mountings, ASTM

C423-90a. Frequencies (Hz) 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 NRC Mounting 2 inch (51 mm) HPC: 0.13 0.41 1.02 1.18 1.18 1.13 0.95 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Non-toxic, water-based adhesive, for use with foam products as

recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION


09480-4

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be

performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prior to installing acoustical panels, make certain that surfaces to which adhesive will be

applied are clean and free of dust, dirt, and other residues that would inhibit a proper bond.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. B. Acoustical Panels: 1. Cut adhesive tube end to produce a 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) bead. 2. Apply adhesive to panels per manufacturer's recommended pattern and press

panel firmly into place per manufacturer's installation requirements. 3. Install panels true to lines and plane indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces and remove unused product and debris from site. B. After installation is completed, clean soiled surfaces of materials. C. Remove and reinstall improperly installed material. D. Remove damaged or discolored material, or material that cannot be properly cleaned,

and install new material.



09510-1

SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein.

B. Shop drawings; include the following: 1. Layout, including locations of lighting fixtures and grilles. 2. Insert and hanger spacing and fastening details. 3. Splicing method for main and cross runners. 4. Change in level details. 5. Support requirements for lighting fixtures, grilles and similar items.

C. Product data: Include product descriptions and installation instructions for each

material. Indicate load carrying capacity of suspension system hanger spacings and manufacturer's recommended methods for fixture support.

D. Samples; submit the following:

1. 1'-0" by 1'-0" samples of each type and color acoustical material. 2. Samples of each type and color suspension member and accessory.

E. Certificates; (FIO): Indicate compliance with specified requirements.


A. Applicable standards; standards as referenced herein: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 2. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. Ceiling & Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

B. Obtain acoustical panels and supporting suspension system through one source

from a single manufacturer. Each type of acoustical panel and painted grid shall be from a single production run.

1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Sequencing and scheduling: Schedule acoustical material installation to minimize need for removal and replacement of acoustical units to accommodate work of other trades.


09510-2

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. BPB America, Inc. Celotex Brand. 3. Chicago Metallic Corp. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Standard Profile Exposed Grid: ASTM C635-04, intermediate duty (12 lb./LF in

both main runner and cross tee), components from roll formed cold rolled steel electrozinc coated or manufacturer's standard coating complying with ASTM C635-04; factory or field finished to match ceiling panel. 1. Nonrated System: Armstrong "Prelude 7300 Series".

a. Main Tees: Armstrong "7300-WH". b. Cross Tees: Armstrong "7340-WH".

1) 1-1/2" web height and 15/16" exposed flange width. 2) Double web design with rectangular bulb integral ends for

splicing end-to-end. c. Other Acceptable Systems:

1) USG Interiors, Inc. "DX". 2) Chicago Metallic "1200 System".

C. Accessories:

1. Hanger wire: Minimum 12 ga., galvanized, soft-annealed, mild steel wire. 2. Wire ties: 18 ga., galvanized, annealed steel wire. 3. Hanger clips: Prefabricated metal clamps for fastening to building

structure. 4. Carrying channels: 16 ga. cold-rolled steel, 1-1/2" deep. 5. Special shapes:

a. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1) Fry Reglet Corp. 2) MM Systems. 3) Pittcon Industries.

b. Characteristics: Aluminum acoustical moldings, shapes as indicated; white color.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS FOR WET LAB AND DRY LABS ONLY

A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. BPB America, Inc., Celotex Brand.


09510-3

2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Basis-of-design: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., "Clean Room Mylar

with HumiGuard Plus, Item # 1720".

B. Characteristics: 1. Size: 2'-0" by 2'-0". 2. Thickness: 5/8". 3. Edges: Square lay-in. 4. Finish: Soil-resistant polyester film. 5. Texture: Smooth. 6. Light Reflectance: 0.79.

2.03 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS FOR TYPICAL OFFICE AREAS

A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. BPB America, Inc., Celotex Brand. 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Basis-of-design: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., “Ultima Open Plan,

Item #1941”.

B. Characteristics: 1. Size: 2'-0" by 2'-0". 2. Thickness: 3/4". 3. Edges: Beveled tegular lay-in. 4. Finish: Factory-applied, washable paint. 5. Texture: Smooth. 6. Light Reflectance: 0.90.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustical sealant for exposed and concealed joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, with a VOC content of250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C834-05 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90-04.

B. Acoustical sealant for concealed joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying,

nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

C. T-Grid support clip:


09510-4

1. Acceptable products: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Beam End Retainer Clip Item

#7395. b. Chicago Metallic corp., Perimeter clip 1499. c. Erico Products, Inc., Caddy TGE T-Grid support clip. d. USG Industries, Inc., Mac 2.

2. Characteristics: Mechanical clip for attaching acoustical "T" to edge

molding without exposed fasteners in grid system. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 JOB MOCK-UP

A. Install complete ceiling of each type specified, in space designated by Architect. Notify Architect when spaces are ready for observation.

B. Following Architect’s acceptance, retain mock-up as a standard of quality for

ceiling installation. Accepted mock-up may remain as part of finished work. 3.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install suspension system in accord with manufacturer’s product data, ASTM C636-06, ASTM E580-06 and CISCA recommendations, except for more stringent requirements specified herein.

B. Layout:

1. Center grid system within areas to avoid panels of unequal widths at opposite walls and panels of less than 1/2 width.

2. Align grid members straight and perpendicular to walls. Locate accessories, control joints and expansion joints before installing grid system.

C. Hangers:

1. Space hangers for main tees at 4'-0" o. c. maximum. Secure to building structure.

2. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member, within 6" of end of member or wall.

3. Install additional hangers within 6" of each corner of lighting fixtures, grilles and similar items.

4. Splay wires no more than 5" in 2'-6" vertical drop. 5. Where spacing of hangers for main tees exceeds maximum specified

spacing due to interference by adjacent construction, indirect-hang tees using carrying channels to maintain maximum hanger spacing.


09510-5

6. Wrap wire minimum of three times horizontally, turning ends upwards.

D. Direct-hung, exposed grid system: 1. 2'-0" by 2'-0" module:

a. Space main tees at 4'-0" o. c., maximum, perpendicular to structure.

b. Locate cross tees at 2'-0" o. c., perpendicular to main tees. c. Space cross tees at 2'-0" o. c., perpendicular to previously installed

cross tees, to form 2'-0" by 2'-0" grid module. Connect to cross tees through slots in main tees.

2. 2'-0" by 4'-0" module: a. Space main tees at 4'-0" o. c., maximum, perpendicular to

structure. b. Space cross tees at 2'-0", perpendicular to main tees, to form 2'-0"

by 4'-0" grid module. Connect to main tees through slots in main tees.

E. Level and square suspension system components within specified tolerances prior

to beginning ceiling material installation.

F. Install cross tees adjacent to lighting fixtures and grilles on each side not supported by main tees. Support no fixtures on main or cross tees when fixture weight results in dead load exceeding deflection capacity of suspension system.

G. Where cut tees intersect other tees or edge moldings without mechanical

attachment, attach components using T-Grid support clip. At contractor's option tees may be attached directly to partition with tie wire.

H. Wall moldings:

1. Install wall molding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces.

2. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. 3. Attach to vertical surfaces with mechanical fasteners. 4. At plenum areas, apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on vertical

web.

I. Where grid system exists in an unrestrained condition, brace back to building structure using hanger wire, main tee or carrying channel braces spaced at 4’-0” o.c. maximum.

3.03 ACOUSTICAL UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical units in level plane, in straight line courses, within specified tolerances.


09510-6

B. Place acoustical materials to bear all around on suspension members.

C. Pattern shall be symmetrical about centerline of area, unless otherwise indicated.

Lay out units having directional pattern in same direction.

D. At supply and return air plenum, seal joints in acoustical units around pipes, ducts, and electrical outlets with acoustical sealant.

E. Where cutting of acoustical units is required, cut so that no cut or damaged edges

are visible in finished work. 3.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials equal to one percent of each type of acoustical material supplied.

B. Furnish suspension system components in amount sufficient to install extra

ceiling units. 3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation.

B. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted metal surfaces.

C. Remove and replace damaged and stained acoustical units with new units.



09621-1

SECTION 09621 BALLISTIC FLOORING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The complete installation of the ballistic flooring system consists of a

prefabricated rubber basemat (20mm) integrated with seamless, self-leveling polyurethane topcoats (3mm). The finished product is a homogeneous and resilient range floor surface with the unique characteristics of a dual-durometer system.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09650 – Resilient Flooring 1.03 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. An experienced flooring contractor approved by the distributor, as described in

the scope of these specifications, shall carry out the complete installation of the ballistic flooring system, and the work shall be performed in accordance with the most recent manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Sheets B. Samples of ballistic flooring system in the specified thickness. C. Maintenance Guidelines 1.05 DELIVERY & STORAGE A. All materials shall be delivered and stored in their original containers with seals

unbroken, and labels intact, in a maintained area with a minimum room temperature of 55°F.

1.06 WORKING CONDITIONS A. The ballistic flooring system specified herein shall not be installed until all

masonry, plaster, tile, marble and terrazzo work is completed, and overhead mechanical trades and painters have finished their works in the floor area. The


09621-2

general contractor shall remove foreign material from subfloor (i.e. paint, mortar, drywall compound, etc.)

B. The building must be dry, all openings must be closed in, and permanent heating

and air conditioning installed and working. Moderate room temperature of 65°–75°F shall be maintained one week prior to and throughout the duration of the installation.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide one (1) year warranty that ballistic flooring system is free from any

defects in material and workmanship, that products meet all specifications and that products shall perform effectively. During the warranty period the resilient surfacing shall not harden, become brittle, chip, crack, tear or exhibit any signs of excessive deterioration except normal wear and tear.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BALLISTIC FLOORING SYSTEM A. Basis of design: 1. BSW Shooting Range Flooring System - Distributed by Abacus Sports

Installations, Ltd. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Robbins Sports Surfaces 2. Conner Sport Court International 2.02 MATERIALS A. Basemat Adhesive shall be a two-component polyurethane adhesive supplied by

the flooring distributor and specifically compounded to assure compatibility with the basemat and applicable subsurface. The adhesive shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions at a rate of 0.2 lbs. per sq. ft.

B. Basemat shall be prefabricated elastic layer (20mm), supplied by the flooring

distributor in a roll-width of 48”, made out of recycled SBR rubber and bound with an environmentally safe MDI polyurethane binder. Basemat shall be fully adhered using approved two component polyurethane adhesive at a rate of 0.2 lbs. per sq. ft. The basemat material is treated to resist most types of microbes, oils, and fungi.

Property Test Method Result Unit Density ASTM D297 .51 min g/cm3


09621-3

Tensile Strength ASTM D412, Die C 35 min PSI Elongation ASTM D412, Die C 60 min Percent Compression ASTM F36 Recovery @50 psi 33 92 Percent @100 psi 46 93 Percent @200 psi 56 93 Percent Tear ASTM D624, Die C 15 PPI Flexibility ASTM F147 0 – 1 Factor Compression Set B ASTM D395 25% deflection, 22 hrs. @ 158°F 37 Percent Compression Set (Foam) ASTM D3676 50% deflection, 22 hrs. @ 158°F 34 Percent C. Basemat sealer seal coat shall be a two-component polyurethane compound

supplied by the flooring distributor and applied at a rate of 0.28 lbs. per sq. ft. D. Wear coat shall be a two-component self-leveling polyurethane compound

supplied by the flooring distributor and applied at a rate of 0.8 lbs. per sq. ft. Mercury and lead are not permissible on any trace quantity.

2mm Polyurethane Topcoats Shore Hardness: A80 Compression Set: 97%-99% recovery after 72 hours at 50% compression Abrasion Resistance: RV 32 according to DIN 18032 Shock Absorbency: 51% Slip Resistance: 0.46 Rolling Load: 1000 N according to DIN 10832/2 Ball Rebound: 99% according to DIN 18032/2 Tensile Strength 11 N/mm2 (2156 psi) according to DIN 53504 Elongation at Break: 230% according to DIN 53517 Fire Rating: Class I according to DIN 51960 E. Color finish shall be a two-component polyurethane varnish supplied by the

flooring distributor and applied at a rate of 0.06 lbs. per sq. ft. The color shall be selected from a color-chart available from the flooring distributor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION


09621-4

A. Ballistic flooring system shall not be installed until moisture content of slab is tested and does not exceed 3%. Concrete subfloors should be clean, dry, free from any sealer, drying agent, curing compound or parting compound.

B. Contractor shall suitably prepare subfloor. High spots shall be ground level, and

low spots filled with approved leveling compounds. Fill concrete cracks with a cement-based filler approved by the flooring manufacturer. All grease and oil must be completely removed, as these will prevent the adhesive from achieving a proper mechanical bond. The concrete slab movement should be stabilized by a constantly maintained room temperature.

C. The subfloor shall be broom clean prior to beginning installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All two-component polyurethane compounds must be power-mixed for at least 5

minutes before application. B. Apply polyurethane adhesive directly onto subfloor by using a notched trowel. C. Roll basemat into adhesive by using an installation cart. Roll seams with a carpet

roller and repeat rolling the entire surface approximately 45 minutes after installation.

D. Apply sealer by using a straight trowel. The sealer must be applied in three

layers. The second layer will receive a fiberglass mesh “scrim coat” to insure dimensional stability and area elastic performance. Be sure to fill all seams and gaps. Allow each layer to properly cure and inspect the entire floor again for any open spots. Grind down any ridges using a circular grinder with sandpaper. Clean floor by vacuuming or dry dust mop.

E. Apply wear coat by using a notched squeegee. Make sure that the material is

applied wet-in-wet. Allow surface to cure entirely and if necessary, grind down any imperfections using sandpaper of 150 or finer grain. Clean floor by vacuuming or dry dust mop.

F. Apply color-finish using lambskin rollers or airless spray machine. Allow surface

to cure sufficiently after application. G. Lay out and tape firing lines according to specifications. Apply paint using

rollers. 3.02 MAINTENANCE


09621-5

A. No wax should be applied to matte polyurethane finish. Regular cleaning can be carried out with a water/detergent mixture using a wet mop. If necessary, use a nylon brush in order to remove heavy dirt. Dust can be removed with a damp mop, which has been sprayed with a very light water/detergent mixture. Major dirt marks (from black shoe soles, etc.) can be wiped off with polyurethane thinner or acetone.



09650-1

SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Indicate product characteristics and installation requirements,

including manufacturer's recommended adhesives and maintenance instructions. B. Samples: Submit full size samples for each type color and pattern of flooring and

accessory required. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Applicable standards, as referenced herein: ASTM International (ASTM). 1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: 1. Maintain temperature in space to receive resilient materials at not less than

70°F. for not less than 24 hours before, during and for 48 hours after installation.

2. Maintain minimum temperature of 55°F. after flooring is installed, except as specified above, for duration of project.

B. Deliver vinyl flooring and base products to jobsite a minimum of 24 hours prior to

use. Unroll vinyl base and low percentage rubber base and allow to relax for 24 hours prior to using.

C. Protection: Protect finished flooring, base and accessories from staining, marring

or other physical damage by work of other trades. Cover or mask surfaces as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. VCT-1 (not used) B. VCT-2, VCT-3, VCT-4 & VCT-5 1. Acceptable product: “Standard Excelon, Imperial Texture” by Armstrong

World Industries, Inc. 2. Characteristics:


09650-2

a. Color: As indicated on the drawings. b. Size: 12” x 12” c. Thickness: 1/8” 2.02 SHEET VINYL ROLL GOODS FOR WET AND DRY LABS A. Acceptable product:

1. “Medintone” by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Type: Homogeneous vinyl sheet flooring C. Characteristics: 1. Polyurethane-coated wear surface composed of polyvinyl chloride resin,

plasticizers, stabilizers, fillers, and pigments comprising a through-grain vinyl chip visual with pattern and color uniformly dispersed throughout the entire thickness.

2. Vinyl sheet flooring shall meet ASTM F 1913, “Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing.”

D. Size: 72” wide. E. Thickness: Minimum 0.080”. F. Colors: As indicated on the drawings. G. Seams: Welded with vinyl welding rod intended for heat welding of seams. Color

of welding rod shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color selection.

2.03 RUBBER BASE A. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Characteristics: 1. Type: Minimum 48% rubber, 100% vulcanized; meeting ASTM Fl861-

02, Type TS Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber SBR. 2. Length: Minimum 120'-0" rolls. 3. Thickness: 1/8". 4. Height: 4". 5. Style: Straight and coved as indicated. 6. Color: As indicated on the drawings. C. Corners: Preformed inside and outside corners. Preformed corners shall match


09650-3

base in color, sheen and overall appearance. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Transition Strip #1 (Ballistic Flooring System to Sealed Concrete): 1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Material: Rubber. 3. Thickness: 1” to 1/8”. 4. Width(s): Manufacturer’s standard. 5. Edges: Tapered. 6. Color: As indicated on the drawings. B. Transition Strip #2 (VCT to Sealed Concrete): 1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Material: Rubber. 3. Thickness: 1/8” to flush floor. 4. Width(s): Manufacturer’s standard. 5. Edges: Tapered. 6. Color: As indicated on the drawings. C. Transition Strip #3 (VCT to Carpet): 1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Material: Rubber. 3. Thickness: 1/8” to 1/4”. 4. Width(s): Manufacturer’s standard. 5. Edges: Tapered. 6. Color: As indicated on the drawings. D. Transition Strip #4 (VCT to Sheet Flooring): 1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Material: Rubber. 3. Thickness: 1/8” to 1/8”. 4. Width(s): Manufacturer’s standard. 5. Edges: Tapered. 6. Color: As indicated on the drawings. 2.06 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Leveling compound; acceptable products: 1. Custom Building Products, LevelQuik RS. 2. Euclid Chemical Co., Floorstone with Latex Liquid. 3. Mapei, PLANI/PATCH. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant types and brands of solvent-free adhesive


09650-4

recommended by flooring material manufacturer’s product data for installation conditions indicated.

1. VOC Content: Comply with the following limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. 3. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 giL. 4. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 giL. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces to receive resilient material in accord with flooring

manufacturer's instructions. B. Grind high areas and fill depressions with leveling compound where required to

produce smooth installation and for proper alignment of carpet with adjacent flooring materials.

C. Perform bond and moisture tests on subfloors in accord with ASTM F21 70-02

and resilient flooring manufacturer's product data, to determine if surfaces are acceptable to receive specified resilient flooring products. Correct conditions detrimental to resilient flooring installation prior to starting installation.

D. Remove dirt, oil, grease or other foreign matter from surfaces to receive floor

covering or accessories. 3.02 APPL1CATION OF ADHESIVES A. Mix and apply adhesives in accord with resilient material manufacturer's product

data. Apply with notched trowel or other tools as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended by

adhesive manufacturer. C. Apply adhesive to only that area which can be covered by resilient material within

the recommended working time of the adhesive. l. Remove adhesive which dries or films over. 2. Do not soil walls, bases or adjacent areas with adhesives. 3. Remove spilled or misplaced materials. 3.03 TILE INSTALLATION


09650-5

A. Lay tile in accord with resilient tile manufacturer’s product data. B. Lay tile beginning at center of room or space, working toward perimeter. 1. Adjust starting point as necessary to provide border tile widths equal to or

greater than a half width tile. 2. Joints between tile shall be fitted without gap; butted together. 3. Cut border tile to fit within 1/32” of abutting surfaces. C. Fit flooring material into breaks and recesses, against bases, around pipes and

penetrations, under saddles or thresholds and around permanent cabinets and equipment.

D. Lay tile with grain or pattern running in same direction as adjacent tiles. 3.04 SHEET MATERIAL INSTALLATION

A. Install flooring in strict accordance with manufacturer’s current instructions. 1. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets, casework,

furniture, equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as shown on the drawings.

2. Lay cut sheets flat and allow to adjust to design room temperature prior to securing in place.

3. If required, install flooring on pan-type floor access covers. Maintain continuity of color and pattern within pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Adhere flooring to the subfloor around covers and to covers.

4. Scribe, cut, and fit or flash cove to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and built-in furniture and cabinets.

5. Adhere flooring to the subfloor without cracks, voids, raising and puckering at the seams. Roll with a 100-pound (45.36 kilogram) roller in the field areas. Hand-roll flooring at the perimeter and the seams to assure adhesion. Refer to specific rolling instructions of the flooring manufacturer.

6. Lay flooring to provide a minimum number of seams. Avoid cross seams, filler pieces, and strips. Match edges for color shading and pattern at the seams in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

7. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working times.

8. Prepare heat-welded seams with special routing tool supplied for this purpose and heat weld with vinyl welding rod in seams. Use methods and sequence of work in conformance with written instructions of the flooring manufacturer. Finish all seams flush and free from voids, recesses, and raised areas.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF BASE A. Workmanship: 1. Unroll base material and allow to relax for 24 hours, minimum, prior to


09650-6

installation. Cut into lengths for minimum number of joints. Double-cut adjoining lengths.

2. Install with tight butt joints with no joint widths greater than 1/64". B. Cove base: 1. Install flooring prior to installation base. 2. Apply adhesive and adhere to wall surfaces. 3. Press down and set bottom edge to floor surface profile. 4. Form internal corners by coping and bending sufficient length around

corner for anchorage. 5. Form external corners using premolded corners. 6. Scribe base to abutting materials. 3.06 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Cut materials to lengths and sizes indicated. B. Resilient reducers: 1. Apply adhesives and bond to substrate. 2. Center reducers in door openings. 3. Fit edge to door frame jambs without visible gaps or cracks. 4. Fit edges to abutting floor materials for flush fit. 3.07 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, clean surfaces using a neutral cleaner acceptable

to material manufacturer. 3.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL A. Furnish additional floor tile of each color and pattern of tile as maintenance

material. Furnish at the rate of one carton for each 1 000 sq. ft. of floor surface or fraction thereof.

B. Salvage scraps from installation of sheet flooring goods over three sq. ft. in area

and over 1'-0" in width for Owner's use.



09680-1

SECTION 09680 CARPET

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein. B. Shop drawings: Show columns, doorways, enclosing walls and partitions, built- in

cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate the following:

1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 2. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 6. Pile direction. 7. Type of cushion. 8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 9. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Product data: Submit for carpet and installation accessories. Include test reports

verifying that carpet meet(s) specified design criteria. Include manufacturer's specification data and installation procedures. Indicate primers, adhesives and seaming methods proposed for use. Should carpet manufacturer not publish detailed installation data, installer shall submit detailed proposed procedures for Architect's and/or Architect's approval.

D. Maintenance data: Submit as part of Contract closeout documents. Include

recommendations for various traffic conditions, cleaning procedures and intervals. E. Samples; identify carpet samples by name, number and manufacturer's Jot

number: l. Carpet: Submit minimum of two 2'-0" by 2 '-0" samples of each type,

color and pattern selected. 2. Accessories: Submit 2'-0" length of carpet edge strip. F. Certificates; (FIO): Carpet shall be certified for compliance with specification

requirements. Submit certificates from carpet manufacturer at time of carpet delivery to project site. Each certificate shall be signed by authorized officer of carpet manufacturing company and shall contain the name and address of the Contractor, the project location and the quantities and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which certificates apply.


09680-2

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design criteria; carpet shall meet the following: 1. Smoke development: Less than 450 when tested in accord with NFPA

258. 2. Critical radiant flux: Class 1, 0.45 watts/cm2 when tested in accord with

ASTM E648-06a. 3. Electrostatic propensity: Less than 3000 volts when tested in accord with

AATCC 134. 4. Flammability of carpet: Pass methanamine pill test when tested in accord

with ASTM D2859-06. B. Emissions compliance: 1. Carpet: Emissions shall not exceed the following limits when tested in

accord with ASTM D5116-06 and shall be in compliance with CRI Indoor Air Testing Program and shall bear CRI Label.

a. Total volatile organic compounds: Maximum 0.5 mg per square meter per hour.

b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg per square meter per hour. c. 4-PC (4-Phenylcychlohexane): 0.05 mg per square meter per hour.

d. Styrene: 0.4 mg per square meter per hour. 2. Adhesive: Emissions shall not exceed the following limits when tested in

accord with ASTM D5116-06 and shall be in compliance with CRI Indoor Air Testing Program and shall bear CRI Label.

a. Total volatile organic compounds: Maximum 10.0 mg per square meter per hour.

b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg per square meter per hour. c. 2-Ethyl-I-Hexanol: 3.0 mg per square meter per hour. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards; standards of the following, as referenced herein: 1. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC). 2. ASTM International (ASTM). 3. Department of Commerce (DOC). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 5. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI). 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original mill wrappings, with carpet having

register tag number attached. Deliver only after building is enclosed and spaces have controlled temperature and humidity.


09680-3

B. Store materials under cover, off floor, in ventilated space. Protect from damage,

staining and moisture. Stand no roll material on end. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide fresh air ventilation during entire installation process and for 72 hours

afterwards. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Carpet warranty: 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty (Lifetime Commercial Limited)

for each type of carpet stating that carpet will remain dimensionally stable, colorfast and static-resistant and will not lose more than 10% by weight of face yarn, will not edge ravel or separate.

2. Warranty period shall begin at Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET A. Carpet: 1. Unless specifically stated as an approved equal, no other product

substitution will be approved. 2. Products are to conform to manufacturer's printed specifications which are

in effect as of this date. All carpet and necessary overrun are to be from one dye lot.

3. Manufacturer Shaw Contract Group Style Name Align Tile Style Number 5T006 Construction Multi- level pattern cut/loop Fiber Eco Solution Q Nylon Dye Method 100% solution dyed Color Clay 83761 Pattern Repeat None Tufted Wight 20 oz./sq. yd. Gauge 1/10 Stitches per inch 13 Finished pile thickness 0.129” Total thickness 0.249” Average density 5581 oz./cubic yd. Product size 24” x 24” Primary backing Synthetic


09680-4

Secondary backing Ecoworx tile Protective treatments SSP soil protection 2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Carpet edge strip: Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Imperial Reducer for glue-

down installation; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Leveling compound; acceptable products: 1. Euclid EUCO Polypatch. 2. Mapei, PLANJ/PATCH. 3. Tamms Floorstone with Latex Liquid. D. Miscellaneous materials: As recommended by manufacturer as required for

carpet installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Perform bond and moisture tests on subfloors in accord with ASTM F2170-02

and carpet flooring manufacturer’s product data, to determine if surfaces are acceptable to receive specified carpet flooring products. Correct conditions detrimental to carpet flooring installation prior to starting installation.

B. Vacuum substrate immediately prior to beginning carpet installation. Remove

debris, oil, grease and other foreign materials. Surfaces to receive installation shall be dry.

C. Grind high areas and fill depressions with leveling compound where required to

produce smooth installation and for proper alignment of carpet with adjacent flooring materials.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Except where more stringent requirements are specified herein, comply with

manufacturer’s product data and with CRI Commercial Installation Standard 104, Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials.

B. Lay out carpeting materials in accord with approved shop drawings.


09680-5

C. Lay carpet in accord with manufacturers recommendations 1. Install carpet tiles quarter turn D. Extend carpet under movable furniture and equipment and into closets of rooms

indicated to be carpeted unless other floor finish is indicated in finish schedule. E. Install carpet edge strip at locations where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic,

except where another device, such as a threshold, is indicated. F. Maintain edges and seams straight and square with adjacent surfaces. 3.03 DIRECT GLUE INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive in accord with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of installation, remove debris. Sort out scraps to be saved.

B. Vacuum carpet with a commercial type vacuum cleaner having a rotating agitator in nozzle. Utilize corner attachment for vacuuming in corners and crevices.

C. Remove stains with spot remover acceptable to carpet manufacturer. D. Immediately after cleaning, cover carpeted areas with heavy kraft paper.

Maintain in place for remainder of construction period. E. Just prior to Date of Substantial Completion, remove protective covering and

vacuum carpet. Steam clean areas if required to remove stains. F. Replace carpet which cannot be cleaned. 3.05 EXCESS MATERIAL A. Provide 6% excess of each type, pattern and color of carpet for Owner's use. B. Salvage scraps from installation over three sq. ft. in area and over 1'-0" in width

for Owner's use. C. Store excess material where directed by Owner.



09900-1

SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work of this section includes: 1. Touching up of shop-applied prime coats. 2. Preparation of surfaces to receive finishes. 3. Painting, or otherwise finishing of all surfaces, except as otherwise

indicated. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Shop-applied primer coats. 2. Sealants and caulking. 3. Piping identification. 4. Prefinished items. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein. B. Product data: 1. Submit complete list of products proposed for use at least 30 days prior to

commencement of painting work. 2. Indicate manufacturer, brand name, quality, type, and sheen for each type

of paint and for each surface to be finished. 3. Indicate manufacturer's instructions regarding mixing, surface preparation

and application. Include application rates, film thickness and required primers.

4. Intent of Contractor to use products specified does not relieve him from responsibility of submitting product list.

C. Color samples: Submit two sets of color samples from paint manufacturers

proposed for use, for color selections by Architect. D. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide full-coat benchmark finish sample for

each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards, as referenced herein:


09900-2

1. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), volatile organic compounds (VOC) standards as required by local codes and regulations.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to project site ready-mixed in original containers with

labels intact; labels bearing manufacturer’s name, paint type, color and recommended installation and reducing procedures.

B. Storage and handling: 1. Store materials in location acceptable to Architect. 2. Maintain neat, clean conditions in storage area; remove rags and waste

materials at end of each day's work. 3. Close containers at end of day's work. Leave no materials open. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer's product data as to environmental conditions

under which materials may be applied. 2. Apply no materials in spaces where dust is being generated. 3. Comply with applicable VOC regulations. B. Protection: Cover finished work of other trades and surfaces not being painted

concurrently and prefinished items. C. Safety precautions: 1. Provide temporary fire protection equipment in materials storage area. 2. Prohibit smoking in storage area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINTING MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Except as otherwise noted, products specified as a

standard of quality are manufactured by Benjamin Moore & Company. Products of the following manufacturers similar in type and quality are acceptable for use, subject to approval of product list:

1. ICI Paints. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 3. Porter Paint Co. 4. Sherwin-Williams Co. B. Where products other than those of the manufacturer listed as the standard of


09900-3

quality are specified in Painting Schedule, such products have been selected to achieve specific results and substitutions will be allowed only in accord with Product Options & Substitutions section.

C. Miscellaneous materials: 1. Paint thinners and tints shall be products of the same manufacturer as

paints or approved by him for use with his products. 2. Shellac, turpentine, patching compounds and similar materials required for

execution of work shall be pure, best quality products. D. Paint colors shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color

range with final approval based on benchmark (mock-up) samples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surfaces to receive finishes shall be dry and free of debris, oils, dust or other

deleterious materials. B. Where finish materials abut or are abutted by dissimilar materials, caulk joints in

accord with Joint Sealants section. C. Lumber and plywood surfaces: 1. Apply shellac, maximum two pounds cut to knots, pitch and resinous

sapwood prior to application of first paint or stain coat. 2. For surfaces to receive opaque finish, fill nail holes, cracks, joints and

defects with spackling compound. Apply after first coat of paint. 3. Sand surfaces smooth except where rough sawn surfaces are indicated.

Final step shall remove scuffs, handling marks and effects of moisture exposure. Dust to remove debris.

D. Gypsum Board: 1. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with patching compound.

Allow to dry and sand smooth without raising nap of wallboard paper. 2. Drywall shall be finished as specified in Gypsum Board section prior to

painting. E. Concrete: 1. Fill cracks, holes and irregularities with cement grout. 2. Remove laitance, oil, grease, dirt and debris from surfaces. Allow

concrete to cure prior to paint application. F. Concrete unit masonry: Rub to remove loose mortar and debris. Fill irregularities


09900-4

with cement grout. G. Remove surface contamination, oils and passivators from galvanized surfaces and

wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching type primer. 1. Testing for Passivators: a. Prepare a solution by dissolving 20 grams of copper sulfate in one

liter (I000 grams) of water. Copper sulfate crystals may be purchased at most drug stores.

b. Solvent wash a small area per SSPC-SPI procedure. c. Sand a small washed area using emery cloth. d. Using a common swab saturated with copper sulfate solution,

apply a swipe to both sanded and unsanded washed areas. e. If sanded and unsanded surfaces turn black at the same time, and,

that time is less than 10 seconds, there is no passivation on the surface other than light oil, and a normal degreasing/cleaning operation is sufficient preparation prior to coating application. If the unsanded surface turns slower than the sanded surface, or not at all, a passivator of some type is present on the surface. If neither surface turns, the surface is probably an alloy of zinc or some other metal.

2. Removing Pasivators: Methods to remove the passivator treatment include brush blasting, sanding or chemical etching.

3. Passivated galvanized metal requires the additional step of brush blasting in accordance with SSPC-SP-7.

H. Aluminum: 1. Sand or scrape to remove oxides. 2. Wash with xylol to remove grease, oil and contaminants. Wipe dry with

clean cloth. I. Ferrous metals: 1. Wire-brush or sandpaper to remove rust and mill scale. 2. Solvent-clean with xylol to remove grease, oil and contaminants. Wipe

dry with clean cloth. J. Ferrous and galvanized metals and aluminum to receive epoxy finish: 1. Ferrous metals: Brush sandblast, power tool clean, or hand tool clean to

remove rust and mill scale. 2. Ferrous and galvanized metals and aluminum: a. Remove dirt and dust with stiff bristle brush or compressed air. b. Solvent clean with xylol or mineral spirits to remove grease, oil

and contaminants. Wipe dry with clean cloth. 3.02 APPLICATION


09900-5

A. Apply paint only when moisture content of surfaces is within limits recommended

in product data. Apply paint materials using clean brushes, rollers or spraying equipment.

B. Apply materials at rate not exceeding that recommended in product data for

surface being painted, less ten percent for losses. C. Comply with product data for drying time between coats. D. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible from a distance of 5'-0". E. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps or pile-up of paint,

skipped or missed areas. F. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp without

overlapping. G. Primer coats may be omitted for surfaces specified to receive factory-applied

primer, if primer is compatible with finish coats. If primer coats are not compatible, substitute a bond coat as recommended by paint manufacturer for specified primer coat.

H. Where two-coat finish is specified, prime coat shall be tinted to approximate

finish color. I. Where portion of finish on drywall partition is damaged or unacceptable, refinish

entire surface of partition. J. Seal tops and bottoms of interior doors with prime coat only; side edges same as

faces. K. Finish all edges of exterior doors same as faces. L. Unless otherwise indicated, paint all construction on roof top, including

prefinished mechanical and electrical equipment. M. Unless otherwise indicated, paint all ground mounted mechanical, plumbing and

electrical equipment, including prefinished equipment. N. Paint exposed grilles and registers in public areas. O. Paint walls, exposed structure, handrails and exposed ductwork and piping in

stairwells.


09900-6

P. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures,

factory-finished work and similar items, or provide in-place protection. Upon completion of each space, replace removed items.

Q. Unless otherwise indicated, paint exposed structural system. 3.03 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Surfaces not requiring painting: 1. Prefinished surfaces and items, except where specifically indicated

otherwise. 2. Concealed ductwork, conduit and piping. B. Exterior surfaces; number of coats specified are minimum: 1. Cast-in-Place Concrete; Flat Acrylic: a. First Coat: Moore #169 Super Spec Acrylic Exterior Primer. b. Second Coat: Moore # 1 83 Super Spec 1 00% Aery lie Exterior

Flat House Paint. c. Third Coat: Moore #183 Super Spec 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat

House Paint. 2. Ferrous, galvanized metals and aluminum, epoxy finish: a. First coat: No. M33 IMC Polyamide Epoxy Primer. b. Second coat: No. M74/M75 Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Gloss

Coating. 3. Ferrous metals, acrylic enamel; semi-gloss: a. First coat: No. M07 IMC Universal Metal Primer. b. Second coat: No.M29 IMC Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss

Coating. c. Third coat: No. M29 IMC Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss

Coating. 4. Galvanized metals and aluminum, acrylic enamel; semi-gloss. a. First coat: No. M04 lMC Acrylic Metal Primer. b. Second coat: No. M29 IMC Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss

Coating. c. Third coat: No. M29 IMC Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss

Coating. C. Interior surfaces; number of coats specified are minimum: 1. Wood for painted finish, alkyd semi-gloss enamel: a. First coat: No. C245 Super Spec Alkyd Interior Enamel

Undercoater. b. Second coat: No. C271 Super Spec Alkyd Interior Semi-Gloss

Enamel.


09900-7

c. Third coat: No. C271 Super Spec Alkyd Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel.

2. Concrete, alkyd enamel: a. First coat: No. 253 SuperSpec Acrylic Latex Primer-Sealer. b. Second coat: No. C271 Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Wall &

Trim Paint. c. Third coat: No. C271 Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Wall & Trim

Paint. 3. Concrete unit masonry, semi-gloss latex: a. First coat: No. 285 Supercraft Acrylic Latex Int./Ext. Block Filler. b. Second coat: No. 170 Super Spec 100% acrylic Semi-Gloss Wall

& Trim Enamel. c. Third coat: No. 170 Super Spec 100% acrylic Semi-Gloss Wall &

Trim Enamel. 4. Concrete; Epoxy-Polyamide Gloss: a. First coat: Moore #285 Supercraft Acrylic Latex Block Filler. b. Second and third coat: Moore M36/M37 I.M.C. Polyamide Epoxy

Gloss Coating. 5. Concrete Unit Masonry; Epoxy-Polyamide Gloss: a. First coat: Moore #285 Supercraft Acrylic Latex Block Filler. b. Second and third coat: Moore M36/M37 I.M.C. Polyamide Epoxy

Gloss Coating. 6. Gypsum board; alkyd semi-gloss: a. First coar: No. 253 Super Spec Acrylic Latex Primer Sealer. b. Second coat: No. C271 Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. c. Third coat: No. C271 Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 7. Gypsum board; semi-gloss latex: a. First coat: No. 253 Super Spec Acrylic Latex Primer Sealer. b. Second coat: No. 276 Super Spec Acrylic latex Semi-gloss

Enamel. c. Third coat: No. 276 Super Spec Acrylic Latex Semi-gloss Enamel. 8. Ferrous and galvanized metals and aluminum; alkyd semi-gloss: a. First coat: No. M07 IMC Universal Metal Primer b. Second coat: No. C271 Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. c. Third coat: No. C271 Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.



10440-1

SECTION 10440 SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. Door and directional signs.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans,

elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details

of wording and lettering layout.

E. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and

compliance with requirements indicated: a. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: provide a sample panel

not less than 8-1/2” by 11” for each material, color, texture, and pattern required. On each panel include a representative sample of the graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices.


A. Applicable standards: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

B. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to

those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful ten year in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work.


10440-2

C. Design Concept: Provide door and directional signage at locations consistent

with existing building signage. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver signs for interior installation only after building is enclosed and designated areas are ready to receive work.

B. Cover or otherwise protect finished surfaces from damage or stains for remainder

of work. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR AND DIRECTIONAL SIGNS AND NUMBERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Match existing building signage: ASI-Modulex, Inc.

B. Characteristics: All signage shall comply with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 1. Frame: Injection molded plastic, 0.125" flange thickness, 0.380" depth,

90 degree corners. 2. Sign: 0.0 II" thickness polyester carrier, polyamide resin face and 0.125"

thickness acrylic laminating base. 3. Graphics: Sign copy shall be relieved 1/32” minimum from plaque first

surface. Graphics, letters and symbols shall comply with ADA requirements; types as selected by Architect.

4. Braille: Braille shall be relieved 1/32” minimum from plaque first surface. Braille symbols shall comply with ADA requirements; translation shall be the responsibility of the sign manufacturer.

5. Colors: Match existing. 6. Surface texture: Matte. 7. Mounting: Concealed fasteners and pad mounted, projected; no exposed

fasteners or anchors. 2.04 FINISHES


10440-3

A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide finish and color to match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate sign units and accessories at locations consistent with existing building signage, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces

free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below: 1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to

smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double- sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the in place until the adhesive has fully cured.

3. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8" thick concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach the plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to the substrate. Attach panel sign units to the plate using the method specified above.

C. Bracket-Mounted Units: Provide the manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings,

and hardware as appropriate for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls or ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer's directions.

3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.



10505-1

SECTION 10505 METAL LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS: A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein. B. Shop drawings: Indicate locker layout, methods of attachment and accessory items

and hardware. Include proposed numbering system for each locker room. C. Product data: Submit copies of manufacturer's product specifications and installation

instructions. D. Color samples: Submit manufacturer's color chips for color selection by Architect. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver lockers only after closing in of building. B. Handle products to prevent bending, racking or otherwise damaging lockers. Protect

prefinished surfaces from marring. Damaged products shall not be installed and shall be removed from project site.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 LOCKERS A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. List Industries, Inc. 2. Lyon Metal Products, Inc. 3. Penco Products, Inc. 4. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. B. Single Tier lockers; 12" wide by 18" deep by 72" high. C. Characteristics: 1. Locker body: Minimum 24 ga. Cold-rolled steel, flanged at connections of

sides, back, top, and bottom. Locker body shall be assembled with galvanized steel bolts spaced at 9” o.c., maximum.

2. Door frame: Minimum 16 ga. Cold-rolled steel, welded construction, formed with integral door strike.

3. Door: Minimum 18 ga. Cold-rolled sheet steel: a. Single-tier locker shall have door edges formed with right angle

flanges on horizontal edges; channel shaped on vertical edges.


10505-2

4. Sloping hoods, closure panels, shelves and similar accessories: Minimum 24 ga. Cold-rolled steel; exposed edges flanged.

D. Hardware: 1. Latching device: Spring-actuated slide latch engaging latch hooks on door

frame. Slide latch shall be enclosed in door assembly but be removable for service or replacement.

2. Latch hooks: Fabricated of minimum 13 ga. cold-rolled steel. Provide three latch hooks for single-tier lockers.

3. Rubber silencers: Provide one silencer at each latch hook. 4. Recessed handle: Recessed pocket serving as door pull, combining latching

device release and locking mechanism. 5. Hinges: 2" by 0.050" thickness, five-knuckle full loop with non-removable

pin, attached to door and frame; three per door for doors 3'-6" and greater in height.

6. Coat hooks: Manufacturer's standard design. Provide one double-prong ceiling hook and three single-prong wall-mounted hooks per locker; bolt-attached.

7. Number plates: Factory-installed aluminum with 3/8" high etched numerals. E. Locking provisions: Latching device prepared to receive padlocks. F. Finish for locker components: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish, applied

over phosphate-treated steel, colors selected by Architect. G. Ventilation: Six louvers at top and bottom of each door. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install lockers and built-in wood bench at locations indicated, plumb,

level and rigid. Secure lockers to walls using l /4" toggle bolts spaced at 2'-0" o. c., horizontally. Secure wood bench to emu base with steel brackets attached at spacings indicated on drawings.

B. Locker doors shall operate without sticking or binding. Test hardware for proper

operation. C. Clean all finished surfaces just prior to Date of Substantial Completion. Touch up

minor scratches to match prefinished surfaces.



10522-1

SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. General: In compliance with Section 01330 and as specified herein. B. Shop drawings: Indicate extinguisher location, size, mounting height and method

of installation. C. Show cabinet installation details, including fire protection enclosure where

cabinet is located in fire-rated wall assembly. D. Product data: Indicate material types, finishes, ratings, hardware, sizes,

fabrication, and installation details. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards; standards of the following as referenced herein: 1. ASTM International (ASTM). 2. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 3. Factory Mutual (FM). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 5. Inchcape Testing/Warnock Hersey (WH). 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store in protective packaging to prevent soiling and physical damage.

Handle to prevent damage to finished surfaces and operating mechanisms. 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Protection: Protect prefinished surfaces from damage or staining. Provide

protective covering following installation for duration of project. B. Coordinate installation of built-in cabinets with wall construction. 1.05 INSPECTION SERVICE A. Extinguishers shall have an inspection certification tag attached, indicating date of

charge and service agent’s name and address. Charge date shall not be earlier than sixty days prior to Date of Substantial Completion. Service agent shall be


10522-2

located within 50 miles of project. B. Provide an inspection service agreement for inspection and servicing of

extinguishers for one year following date of initial charge, as well as for servicing and recharging extinguishers failing to hold charge within the initial one-year period. Recharging extinguishers due to use or vandalism shall not be included in service agreement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer and Type: 1. Typical Locations and Inside Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Potter-

Roemer, Inc. "Model 301 0", 10 lb. ABC multi-purpose dry chemical extinguisher; red enamel steel; complete with pressure gauge and wall mounting bracket.

2. Electronic Equipment Room Locations: Potter-Roemer, Inc. "Model 3410", 10 lb. BC carbon dioxide fire extinguisher; red glossy polyester coated aluminum cylinder; complete with discharge horn, pressure gauge and wall bracket.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. J. L. Industries. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 2.02 SEMI-RECESSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer and Type: Potter-Roemer, Inc. "7000 Alta Series,

Model 7022-DV-VR" fire extinguisher cabinet. 1. Cabinet: 22 gauge steel box. 2. Trim: Flat, 5/8" wide face, primed steel. 3. Door Construction; Vertical Glass Panel: "Suffix DV-2" duo-vertical

panel door with tempered safety glass in frame. 4. Hinge: 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. Beginning of

installation means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.


10522-3

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall, at heights indicated in Drawings, in

compliance with Code. B. Install wall hung extinguishers on wall mounting brackets mounted 4’-6” from

finished floor to top of extinguisher assembly. C. Secure rigidly in place in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. D. Finishing: 1. Paint exposed surfaces of cabinet door and trim as specified in Painting

and Coating section; colors as selected by Architect. 2. Apply “Fire Extinguisher” lettering to finished door. Lettering shall be

straight, true and accurately spaced and aligned, free of wrinkles, bubbles, tears or other imperfections.

3.03 SCHEDULE A. Provide 10 lb. ABC extinguishers, in semi-recessed cabinets, in public corridors

of each floor of office building and in other locations as indicated, or as directed by Architect.

B. Provide one 10 lb. ABC extinguisher, wall mounted, in each mechanical,

electrical, telephone and equipment rooms, warehouse, and in loading dock areas as indicated on Drawings, or as directed by Architect.



10801-1

SECTION 10801 TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: Include catalog cuts and data sheets indicating size, material and finish, complete parts list and installation procedures for each accessory. Where manufacturer's standard products vary with design criteria, indicate compliance with design criteria.

C. Samples: Submit one actual sample of each accessory for approval if requested

by Architect. Upon approval, samples will be returned for incorporation into project.

1.02 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Protection: Maintain manufacturer's protective covering on accessories until final cleanup of installation.

B. Coordinate this work with work of other trades into which accessories are to be

installed. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. In order to be acceptable, products shall comply with the following criteria: 1. All accessories shall be products of a single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. items are listed herein to establish quality and design standards for toilet accessories.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. American Specialties, Inc. 2.02 ITEMS:

A. Accessories:


10801-2

1. TA-1; Powdered Soap Dispenser: "B-132", surface mounted powdered soap dispenser; 32 oz. capacity; satin finish.

2. TA-2; Coat Hook "B-21 1 6", heavy-duty clothes hook with concealed mounting; satin finish stainless steel.

3. TA-3, Surface Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser; T-17: "Classic® Series B-262", surface mounted satin stainless steel paper towel dispenser; dispenses 400 C-fold or 525 multi-fold towels.

B. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building

finishes.

C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.

D. Back paint components with bituminous paint where contact is made with

building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

E. Hot-dip galvanized ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.

F. Shop-assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories level, plumb and in indicated location. Installation methods shall be as indicated in product data for substrates encountered. Securely attach to blocking or framing members.

B. Mounting heights: As indicated on drawings.

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean and polish exposed surfaces prior to Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Deliver accessory schedule, keys and parts manual as part of project closeout documents.


City of Atlanta (APD) Crime Lab-Phase 1

Atlanta Public Safety Annex

11495-1

SECTION 11495 BULLET CONTAINMENT PANELS & TARGET RETRIEVEL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of Division 1. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Bullet Trap Containment System: Section 11975 B. Acoustical Panels: Section 09480

1.03 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION A. Overhead Containment System: provide overhead baffle systems that will safely

capture or deflect bullets fired from all conventional shotguns, handguns, pistols and rifles up to and including a .460 Weatherby rifle caliber (8,100 ft. lbs. Energy at muzzle), using any of these ammunition types: Soft point, hollow point, full metal jacket, wadcutters, slugs, buckshot, and birdshot. Except for the sacrificial anti-ricochet covering, the system must be able to accept all of these types of ammunition without damage to any part of the baffle system. Steel core, ceramic tip and AP/API ammunition will not be used.

The Overhead Containment System shall: 1. Allow shooters to safely shoot into the system with no danger from

ricochets or bullets bouncing, in whole or part, back toward the shooter or range personnel.

2. Redirect downrange all fired ammunition projectiles, including acute angle strikes while preventing splash backs and ricochets.

3. Prevent any bullets fired from the Firing Line towards the trap from directly exiting range without having made contact either the baffle systems or CMU sidewalls.

4. Prevent errant discharges at the firing line from escaping the range without creating a ricochet hazard for the User.

5. The baffles shall extend full width of the range and be positioned to ensure that ‘no blue sky’ is visible from the defined firing locations and positions. The line of fire from any position must strike the baffle panel at least 4” from the top edge. The baffles shall be designed and installed to protect light fixtures, electrical outlets, sprinkler heads, and other protrusions which may be present throughout the firing range. These items shall be located in the safe area that is created by the baffle system.



11495-2

6. The safety ceiling shall extend the full width of the range. It shall extend a minimum 12’ forward beginning at a point 3’ behind the farthest firing line.

B. Overhead Target Retrieval System: Provide a motor operated trolley type target

retrieval system. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable product: 1. Basis of Design: Baffle System and Overhead Target Retrieval System

described hereafter, manufactured by Savage Range Systems Inc. 2. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01630 – Product Options and

Substitutions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit detailed shop drawings, fully dimensioned. B. Submit sample of proposed baffle panel (minimum 4’ x 4’ size) for testing prior

to manufacture. C. Submit maintenance instructions for inclusion in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Except where noted otherwise, provide the manufacturer’s standard products and

equipment. B. Baffle and Safety Ceiling Panels shall be of steel plate construction for heavy use

/ high volume. The design of the baffle system shall consist of: 1. Minimum 3/8” AR500 steel plate. 2. One layer of 3/4” CDX plywood. Plywood shall be attached using No. 8

self-drilling screws, countersunk into the wood. 3. An air gap with a minimum depth of 7/8” between the steel plate and the

plywood. 4. Structural framing on the back of the AR500 steel panel to ensure stability. 5. Adjacent panels shall have positive bolted connections and not rely on

pressure or friction to get the panels connected. Joints between panels



11495-3

shall be backed with steel plate to ensure that bullet fragments cannot get past the panel.

6. The panel face exposed to the shooters shall be smooth and free from any protrusions (bolts, additional plates, etc.) that have the potential to cause a ricochet.

7. Each panel shall be suspended independently with a minimum of 6 supports from the support structure and not rely on adjacent panels for support.

8. There shall be no gaps between panels. Any holes in the baffle panel shall be ‘backed up’ / covered on the reverse side of the panel with material meeting or exceeding the hardness of the baffle panel.

9. All components other than the suspension materials (chain, turnbuckles, etc.) shall be factory primed.

10. Panels must accommodate acoustical panels.

C. Overhead Target System: 1. The OHTS system shall be a motor operated trolley type. All structurally

supporting parts shall be cold-rolled or extruded steel. A 120V motor assembly shall be placed above the firing line in direct alignment with the trolley system. When operated the assembly shall reposition a target carrier along the full length of the firing range at the operator’s desired location.

2. A steel target holder shall be attached to the target carrier and shall move up and down range as the motor is operated.

3. All leading edges exposed to projectile impact shall be fired with angled steel surfaces such that any misdirected projectile will be deflected down range. Materials and assembly shall be designed to withstand projectile forces equal to or in excess of those to which the bullet trap will be subjected.

D. Signage: The range equipment manufacturer shall provide metal signs which

display the maximum ballistic levels (i.e. weapon sizes with corresponding muzzle velocities, bullet size and energy) permitted for use with this equipment. Size of signs shall be 14”H x 20”W. Sign material shall be painted steel. Anchor to wall with 4 anchors. Locations shall be determined by Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide all components as necessary to support panels from building structure

and/or walls.



11495-4

B. Coordinate all concrete saw cutting or concrete and/or steel work of any kind,

required to receive the containment equipment. C. Provide all exposed steel with prime coat. Finish baffles as indicated. D. Check all site existing conditions and dimensions and make allowances for any

discrepancies. Fully coordinate the ballistic containment panel and target retrieval systems with the bullet trap, other range equipment, and all associated building features such as HVAC diffusers and grilles, light fixtures, sprinklers, etc.

E. Assemble all components. Carefully align all baffle & safety ceiling components

to eliminate obstructions. Field welding of baffle components is not allowed without prior approval.

F. Touch up any coated surfaces damaged during shipment or installation. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate all aspects of the operation and recommended maintenance

procedures, to the full satisfaction of the Owner’s representatives.

END OF SECTION


11600-1

SECTION 11600 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Extent of laboratory equipment is shown on drawings and as specified herein. The work is all Contractor Furnished Contractor Installed (CFCI). The responsibilities and duties of the Contractor are specified below. Laboratory equipment included in this specification: 1. Gas Cylinder Restraints. 2. Safety Supply Cabinet. 3. Task Exhaust (Fume Extraction) Arms. 4. Lab Coat Rack

1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry. B. Section 09510 – Acoustical Ceiling. C. Section 12350 – Laboratory Casework.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Broom Clean: A condition in an interior area in which surface debris has been removed by dry methods.

B. Rough-In Point: individual or common supply of mechanical, electrical, and heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) through wall, floor or ceiling.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit complete submittal package of product data, shop drawings, samples and informational submittals. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without review.

B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

a. Manufacturer model number. b. Accessories and components that will be included for Project. c. Clearance requirements for access and maintenance. d. Utility service connections for water, drainage, power, and fuel; include

roughing-in dimensions. e. Key equipment using same designations as indicated on Drawings

2. Shop Drawings: For each type of product requiring attachment to other work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, roughing-in dimensions, weights, loads, service clearances, utility service requirements, seismic restraint, and attachments to other work. Show relationship to adjoining work. a. Key equipment using same designations as indicated on Drawings


11600-2

3. Samples: For each exposed product and for each material requiring color selection.

C. Project Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For products to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section " Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Product Schedule: For each equipment item, include the following:

1) Designation indicated on Drawings. 2) Manufacturer's name and model number. 3) List of factory-authorized service agencies including addresses and

telephone numbers.


A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installers’ who have completed installation of products similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in a record of successful in-service performance. Where required by product manufacturer, installers’ shall be authorized, trained and approved by equipment manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of laboratory equipment of the same kind or function through a single source from a single manufacturer.

C. Manufacturer: company specializing in manufacturing products with minimum 10 years experience.

D. Installer: company specializing in installing products, with minimum three years documented experience, approved by the manufacturer.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Architect will permit the delivery of laboratory equipment only after wet operations in building are completed. The contractor is required to schedule activities in such manner that the condition of the building does not delay the delivery and installation of laboratory equipment.

B. Laboratory equipment shall be stored only in a ventilated place, protected from the weather, with relative humidity therein of 50 percent or less at 70 degrees F.

C. Contractor and trades shall protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering.

D. Site Access: The Contractor shall provide access for vehicle delivery to delivery area. The receiving area in the building and corridors needed for laboratory equipment shall be kept clear (by the Contractor) of materials of other trades to make reasonable access to areas possible.


11600-3

E. Building Finish: Upon delivery of laboratory equipment to the job site, it should be possible to allow complete distribution and commencement of physical installation in the rooms where the laboratory equipment is to be installed. In order to ensure an orderly installation and to avoid damage to finished laboratory equipment, the following building conditions shall be completed by the contractor prior to installation of laboratory equipment and fixtures. The contractor and Architect shall conduct a joint review of the site prior to installation to confirm that the following requirements are met.

1.07 CONTINUITY AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Coordinate with all trades to insure continuity and cooperation. Laboratory equipment, as installed, is considered to be finished equipment and shall be protected from damage by all trades.

B. Painting and Other Finishing Trades: At no time shall the installed work surface be used by tradesmen as a workbench, scaffolding, etc. It is the responsibility of the contractor to perform minor wall touch-up around laboratory equipment and to caulk between laboratory equipment and wall as indicated on drawings. The contractor shall protect installed laboratory equipment, especially the laboratory work surface, from debris, paint and damage in the course of the construction sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER’S MODEL NUMBERS

A. Model numbers shown on the drawings are those of specific manufacturer’s as listed below. These numbers are provided for convenience in identifying sizes and general characteristics of the individual products. The use of these numbers is not intended to preclude the use of any acceptable manufacturer's product that complies with these specifications.

2.02 GAS CYLINDER RESTRAINTS

A. Basis of specification: Matheson TriGas Products (www.mathesontrigas.com), Lab Safety Supply (800-356-0783).

B. Wall Mounted Cylinder Bracket that secures cylinders to a wall or to the side of a work bench. 1. Matheson Model 510-C or Lab Safety Supply Product No. 9A-8446. 2. Cast aluminum bracket for wall mounting to concrete masonry units. If attached

to gypsum wallboard assemblies provide blocking in wall as detailed. 3. Nylon safety strap with message. 4. Safety chain. 5. Nickel-plated spring catch buckle. 6. Able to handle cylinders from 4 to 14 inches in diameter.

2.03 SAFETY SUPPLY CABINET


11600-4

A. Basis of specification: Acudor Products Inc. (800-722-0501) 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with features listed

below will be considered acceptable: a. Karp Associates b. Bobrick

2. Model: ARVB Valve Box 3. Features:

a. Size: Inside box dimensions: 12 inches high by 12 inches wide by 8 inches deep.

b. Style: Fully recessed mounted, with overlapping trim, door flush with trim. c. Single flat door. d. Door material: Solid panel, 14-gage stainless steel, satin finished. e. Surface mounted door handle, finished to match door. f. Friction or roller catch. g. Hinge: concealed continuous piano hinge h. Trim: Same material and finish as door. Arc welded and ground smooth i. No lettering on door or trim. j. Box interior finish: Stainless steel sheet, satin finished k. Provide 1/4” diameter holes inside box on 4 sides for mounting in laboratory

casework

B. First Aid Kit 1. Manufacturer: Johnson & Johnson 2. Product: Small Industrial First Aid Kit 3. Product No: WQ-3115 4. Quantity: 1 per location shown on drawings. 5. Supplier: Lab Safety Supply 800-356-0783, www.labsafety.com

C. Burn Kit 1. Manufacturer: WATERJEL Technologies 2. Product: Food Service Kit 3. Product No: WQ-25218 4. Quantity: 1 per location shown on drawings. 5. Supplier: Lab Safety Supply 800-356-0783, www.labsafety.com

D. Spill Control Pads and Pillows

1. Manufacturer: 3M 2. Product: High-Capacity Chemical Sorbent Pads, No. WQ-26577 3. Chemical Sorbent Pillows, No. WQ-8619 4. Quantity: 2 cartons of each per location shown on drawings. 5. Supplier: Lab Safety Supply 800-356-0783, www.labsafety.com

E. Spill Control Portable Kit

1. Manufacturer: Ansul 2. Product: Spill-X 3. Product No: WQ-14625 Multi Pak 4. Quantity: 1 per location shown on drawings.

http://www.labsafety.com/



11600-5

5. Supplier: Lab Safety Supply 800-356-0783, www.labsafety.com

F. Chemical Neutralizers and Absorbents 1. Manufacturer: Ansul 2. Product: Spill-X 3. Product No: WQ-9895-2 (Multi Pak Refill) 4. Quantity: 1 per location shown on drawings. 5. Supplier: Lab Safety Supply 800-356-0783, www.labsafety.com

2.04 TASK EXHAUST (FUME EXTRACTION) ARMS A. Basis of specification: Alsident, System 75, Series 16179 for ceiling mounting. B. Available from Lab Safety Supply, 1-800-356-0783. C. Features: 1. 3 inch diameter, polypropylene (white), extraction arms will be ceiling mounted

with appropriate bracket and connected to the building exhaust system. 2. Arms shall have a minimum 180-degree turning radius and minimum reach of 42

inches. 3. Arms shall consist of one short segment for connection to hose, two intermediate

segments and one short segment for 16-1/2 inch long by 12-1/2 inch wide rectangular hood attachment with friction hinges between each segment. Provide white, flexible PVC exhaust duct for connection of arm assembly to duct.

4. When arm is positioned it will not drift horizontally or vertically. a. Do not provide damper for task exhaust arm. Arm must remain on at all

times.

2.05 LAB COAT RACK

G. Basis of specification: Bradley 9943 for three hook, and 9944 for four hook configuration.

H. Features:

1. Backplate: Fabricated of type 304 (18-8), 22 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish.

2. Hooks: fabricated of type 304 (18-8), 14 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces designated to receive work for conditions that would adversely affect the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirement governing substrate construction prior to start of work.




11600-6

B. Take site measurements of construction to which Work of the Section must conform, and through which access must be made, before Work is delivered to site, to ensure that adaptation is not required which would result in construction delay.

3.02 UTILITIES

A. Inspect and verify that all necessary utilities have been roughed in prior to equipment installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Provide anchorage information, rough-in dimensions, templates and service requirements for installation of Work in this Section and assist or supervise, or both, the setting of anchorage devices and construction of other Work incorporated with equipment specified in this Section in order that they function as intended.

B. Install Work to meet manufacturer’s recommended specifications, true, tightly fitted, and level or flush to adjacent surfaces, as suitable for installation.

C. Work shall include rough hardware, fastenings and other items necessary for secure installation.

D. Use only fastenings suitable for materials; do not use through fastenings at floor or walls.

E. Install Work straight, plumb, level and secured to prevent distortion or displacement. Shim as necessary with concealed shims. Where required, use grout on which iron oxide deposits will not form.

F. Secure fixed equipment to building structure or construction as required to maintain it permanently in place and so that it functions properly with no damaging vibrations to the building itself.

G. Install equipment with connections provided as required for plumbing and electrical services.

H. Provide manual shut off valves and gauges for all utility connections.

3.04 START-UP

A. Start systems prior to demonstration to ensure proper supply of services and functions of units. Demonstrate the successful completion of a standard cycle on each of five consecutive days.

B. After start-up of equipment, test and adjust equipment.

3.05 ADJUSTMENT & CLEANING

A. Prior to final acceptance, clean soiled surfaces and repair or replace items that become damaged.


11600-7

B. Verify installed products function properly, adjust accordingly to ensure satisfactory operation.

C. Lubricate equipment as specified by equipment manufacturer.

D. Refinish or replace damaged or defective work so that no variation in surface appearance is discernible. Refinish Work at site only if approved by Owner.

E. Clean and polish all surfaces that are exposed to view from any location on completion of installation.

F. Remove all steam traps, clean and reinstall.


A. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to remove packaging debris and other waste resulting from installation of OFCI equipment.

B. After completing installation of equipment, repair damaged finishes.

C. Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage factory-authorized equipment service representatives’ to train Owner's laboratory and maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products.

+++ END OF SECTION 11600 +++


SECTION 11615

BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Biological safety cabinet, NSF Class II, Type A2.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 Sections for plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and

communications services and connections for complete equipment installation. 2. Division 23 Section “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing” for testing of equipment

connected to exhaust system.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

a. Manufacturer model number. b. Accessories and components that will be included for Project. c. Clearance requirements for access and maintenance. d. Utility service connections for water, drainage, power, and fuel; include

roughing-in dimensions. e. Key equipment using same designations as indicated on Drawings

2. Shop Drawings: For each type of product requiring attachment to other work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, roughing-in dimensions, weights, loads, service clearances, utility service requirements, seismic restraint, and attachments to other work. Show relationship to adjoining work. a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. b. Key equipment using same designations as indicated on Drawings

3. Samples: For each exposed product and for each material requiring color selection.

C. Informational Submittals:

D. Project Closeout Submittals:

11615 -1


1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For products to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section " Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Product Schedule: For each equipment item, include the following:

1) Designation indicated on Drawings. 2) Manufacturer's name and model number. 3) List of factory-authorized service agencies including addresses and

telephone numbers.


A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installers’ who have completed installation of products similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in a record of successful in-service performance. Where required by product manufacturer, installers’ shall be authorized, trained and approved by equipment manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of laboratory equipment of the same kind or function through a single source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel-burning equipment and components that are evaluated by UL for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable safety standards, and that are UL certified for compliance and labeled for intended use.

E. Product Standard: Biological safety cabinets listed by NSF International as complying with NSF Standard #49.

F. Product Designations: Drawings or Specifications indicate sizes and configurations of laboratory equipment by referencing designated manufacturer's model numbers. Other manufacturers' laboratory equipment of similar sizes, configurations, utilities, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install products until building is enclosed and weather-tight, utility roughing-in and wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

11615 -2


1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate product layout and installation with other work, including layout and installation of framing, reinforcement required to support product, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical, electrical, and communications components.

B. Coordinate locations and requirements of utility service connections as indicated on drawings.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products and components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Minimum 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by The Baker Company or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation. 2. Labconco Corporation. 3. NuAire, Inc. 4. Thermo-Scientific.

1.02 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS, NSF CLASS II, TYPE A2 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The Baker Company; Product – SterilGARD Class II,

Type A2 Biological Safety Cabinet, Vertical Flow, Model No. SG403A-HE (4-foot unit)

B. Description: NSF Classification Class II, Type A2 Biological Safety Cabinet, 30-percent of air exhausted through HEPA exhaust filter, 70-percent of air re-enters work area through HEPA supply filter. 1. Sash Configuration: Sloped 10-degrees. 2. Sash Opening Height: 10-inch operating height; minimum 20-inch set-up height. 3. View Screen Sash: Clear, laminated safety glass, 1/4-inch thick; fully closing,

with two sash handles, counterbalance, anti-racking mechanism. 4. Cabinet Exterior: Cold rolled steel, powder coat finish; white. 5. Cabinet Interior Work Area: Type 304 stainless steel; coved corners, spill trough

and drain valve, removable perforated work surface; towel catch below work surface; double wall construction with negative-pressure airflow between walls.

6. Controls: Touch-pad controls (on/off, lights, event timer, programs), information display (cabinet status, alarm conditions, filter life remaining), air flow monitor (inflow and downflow, sash position), audible/visual alarms. a. Monitor exhaust air flow volume for cabinets connected to exhaust system.

11615 -3


7. Air Flow: a. Intake air velocity, minimum 100 fpm. b. High velocity, down-flow air curtain behind view screen. c. Cabinet blower shall automatically adjust to maintain required air flow

volume as filter resistance increases with filter loading. d. Cabinet blower shall have a reduced air flow/energy saver mode that

activates when sash is fully closed, and maintain containment and clear air conditions of NSF #49. Blower shall automatically resume normal operation when the sash is raised.

8. Filters, motor, blower, and electrical components shall be accessible from the front of unit.

9. Supply and Exhaust Filters: HEPA filters, 99.99% effectiveness on 0.3 micron size particles. Filters shall be protected with perforated stainless steel diffusers

10. Light Fixture: Fluorescent light fixture with electronic ballast and lamp(s); lamp replacement from exterior; minimum 100 foot candles on the work surface.

11. Accessories: a. RS 232 communications port. b. Adjustable height base stand with accessory shelf and leveling feet.

1) Provide swivel/locking casters for base stand where indicated on Drawings.

c. Warning labels. d. Seismic restraint.

12. Electrical Services: Equip unit with grounded cord and plug; 120V service. a. Provide one internal circuit for blower and lights; one internal circuit for

two duplex GFI receptacles with splash covers located in the interior work area.

13. Piped Services: Equip unit for connection to services indicated on Drawings. a. Pre-pipe biological safety cabinet to 6-inch below bottom of cabinet as

required. Piping shall be concealed within side panels. Refer to Division 22 Sections for piping materials for each type of service.

b. Future Services: Pre-punch and plug future service connections. c. Service Fittings: Comply with requirements in Division 12 Section

“Laboratory Casework.” Service fitting types as indicated on Drawings.

14. Exhaust Connection Types: a. None, vent to room.

1.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect each biological safety cabinet according to NSF Standard #49 “Performance Tests” article. Provide testing facilities, instruments, equipment and materials needed for test.

11615 -4


1. Prepare source quality control test reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Verify utility services are in required locations and are ready for use before

installation of equipment. 2. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances that comply with

manufacturer’s written installation instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Complete equipment assembly where field assembly is required. 4. Connect equipment to utilities.

B. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances that comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units specified with casters in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.

1.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturers’ Field Service: Engage factory-authorized service representatives’ to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform visual, mechanical and electrical inspection and testing for each product

according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's equipment-performance parameters.

2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and components. 5. Field test installed biological safety cabinets according to NSF Standard #49 –

Field Testing

6. After making corrections, retest products that failed to perform. 7. Coordinate field testing of biological safety cabinets with requirements of

Division 23 Section “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.”

11615 -5


D. A product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. After completing installation of equipment, repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period.

1.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage factory-authorized equipment service representatives’ to train Owner's laboratory and maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products.


11615 -6


SECTION 11625 LABORATORY FUME HOODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Bench-top laboratory fume hoods.

B. Water, laboratory gas, and electrical service fittings in fume hoods.

C. Piping and wiring within fume hoods for service fittings, light fixtures, fan switches, and other electrical devices included with fume hoods.

1.02 RELATED WORK

1. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry 2. Section 09250: Gypsum Board 3. Section12350: Laboratory Casework 4. Division 23: for fume hood duct connections, including ducts and exhaust fans.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Containment: Provide fume hoods that comply with the following when tested according to ASHRAE 110 at a release rate of 4.0 L/min.: 1. Average Face Velocity: 100 fpm (0.51 m/s) plus or minus 10 percent with

sash fully open. 2. Face-Velocity Variation: Not more than 10 percent of average face velocity. 3. Sash Position: Fully open and as follows:

a. Vertical Rising Sash: Test hoods with vertical rising sashes fully open and at set operating height indicated for Average Face Velocity.

B. Static-Pressure Loss: Not to exceed 1/4-inch wg at 60-fpm and 1/2-inch wg (124 Pa) at 100-fpm (0.51-m/s) face velocity when measured at four locations 90 degrees apart around the exhaust duct and at least three duct diameters downstream from duct collar.

C. Structural Performance: Provide fume hood components capable of withstanding the following loads without permanent deformation, excessive deflection, or binding of cabinet drawers and doors:

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

11625-1


B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory fume hoods. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Indicate details for anchoring fume hoods to permanent building construction including locations of blocking and other supports.[ Include calculations demonstrating that anchorages comply with seismic performance requirements.]

2. Indicate locations and types of service fittings together with associated service supply connection required.

3. Indicate duct connections, electrical connections, and locations of access panels. 4. Include roughing-in information for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical

connections. 5. Show adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, laboratory

casework, and other laboratory equipment. Indicate clearances from above items. 6. Include layout of fume hoods in relation to lighting fixtures and air-conditioning

registers and grilles. 7. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory casework and equipment specified

in other Sections. 8. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For fume hood exterior finishes materials requiring color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For fume hood exterior finishes in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Product Schedule: For laboratory fume hoods items.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of laboratory fume hood, from manufacturer, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

G. Product Test Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance requirements for as-manufactured containment and static pressure loss based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

H. Source quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fume hoods to include in operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 or elsewhere in documents include the following:

1. Product Schedule: For each fume hood, include the following:

a. Designation indicated on Drawings. b. Manufacturer's name and model number. c. List of factory-authorized service agencies including their addresses and

telephone numbers.

11625-2



A. Source Limitations for Laboratory Fume Hoods: Obtain fume hoods from single manufacturer.

1. Obtain from same source and manufacturer as laboratory casework specified in Division 12 Section "Laboratory Casework."

B. Product Standards: Comply with SEFA 1, "Laboratory Fume Hoods - Recommended Practices."

C. Safety Glass: Products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or another suitable material.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fume hoods until building is enclosed, wet work and utility roughing-in are complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for lateral support of fume hoods.

B. Coordinate installation of fume hoods with laboratory casework, fume hood exhaust ducts, and plumbing and electrical work.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of fume hood finish provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged fume hood finish.

11625-3


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fisher Hamilton products as indicated below or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Jamestown Metal Products. 2. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation; Laboratory Products Group. 3. Mott Manufacturing Ltd.

C. Basis-of-Design Fume Hood Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fisher Hamilton products as follows:

1. General Purpose Fume Hood Product: SafeAire II

2.02 MATERIALS

D. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

F. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester: Polyester laminate with a chemical-resistant gel coat on the exposed face, and having a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

G. Epoxy: Factory molded of modified epoxy-resin formulation complying with Division 12 Section “Laboratory Casework” and having a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

H. Epoxy: Factory molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular finish.

1. Physical Properties:

a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70 MPa). b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi (1400 MPa). c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100. d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent. e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F (127 deg C). f. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

2. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:

11625-4


a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene.

b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

I. Glass: Clear, laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3;[ with two lites not less than 3.0 mm thick each and] with clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer.

2.03 FUME HOOD VENTILATION

A. Constant-Volume Fume Hoods: Provide constant-volume fume hoods without bypass

1.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Assemble fume hoods in factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble fume hoods only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Fume hoods shall be capable of being partly disassembled as necessary to permit movement through a 35-by-79-inch (889-by-2007-mm) door opening.

B. Steel Exterior: Fabricate from steel sheet, not less than 0.0478 inch (1.2 mm) thick, with component parts screwed together to allow removal of end panels, front fascia, and airfoil and to allow access to plumbing lines and service fittings. Apply chemical-resistant finish to interior and exterior surfaces of component parts before assembly.

C. Ends: Fabricate with double-wall end panels without projecting corner posts or other obstructions to interfere with smooth, even airflow. Close area between double walls at front of fume hood and as needed to house sash counterbalance weights, utility lines, and remote-control valves.

D. Splay top and sides of face opening to provide an aerodynamic shape to ensure smooth, even flow of air into fume hood.

E. Interior Lining: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester, not less than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick. 2. Fasten lining components to a rigid frame assembly fabricated from[ stainless]

steel and to which exterior panels are attached. 3. Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive service fittings and remote

controls. Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings.

11625-5


F. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Lining: Molded unit consisting of end panels, back panel, preset rear baffle, and top bonded together into a single piece; reinforced to form a rigid assembly to which exterior is attached.

1. Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive service fittings and remote controls. Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings.

2. Provide adjustable baffles with remote-control adjustment from outside front of fume hood

3. Provide epoxy-coated, stainless-steel screen at bottom baffle opening to prevent paper from being drawn into the exhaust plenum behind baffles.

G. Exhaust Plenum: Full width of fume hood and with adequate volume to provide uniform airflow from hood, of same material as hood lining, and with duct stub for exhaust connection.

1. Duct-Stub Material: stainless steel unless otherwise indicated 2. Duct-Stub Material for Hoods: Stainless steel.

H. Bypass Grilles: Provide grilles at bypass openings of bypass and restricted bypass fume hoods.

Sash: Provide operable sash of type indicated on Drawings.

1. Framed Vertical Rising Sash: Fabricate from 0.050-inch- (1.27-mm-) nominal thickness stainless steel. Form into four-sided frame with bottom corners welded and finished smooth. Make top member removable for glazing replacement. Set glazing in chemical-resistant, U-shaped gaskets.

a. Provide bottom rail with integral formed flush pull, full width of bottom rail.

b. [Provide framed sash for fume hoods 8’-0” or greater in width.] c. [Provide framed postless sash where indicated on Drawings.] d. [Provide vertical rising, independently operable, double-hung sash at [floor-

mounted][ and][ distillation] fume hoods.]

2. Glaze with laminated safety glass. 3. Counterbalance vertical-sliding sash with sash weight and stainless-steel cable

system to hold sash in place regardless of position. Provide ball-bearing sheaves, plastic glides in stainless-steel guides, and stainless-steel lift handles. Provide rubber bumpers at top and bottom of each sash unit.

a. Counterbalance Option: In lieu of sash weight and cable above, provide counterbalance vertical sliding sash with sash weight, sprocket and chain system. Provide ball-bearing sprockets, connector shaft, and stainless-steel lift hangles. Provide rubber bumpers at top and bottom of each sash unit.

4. Sash Opening Height:

a. Bench-Top Fume Hoods: 27 to 30 inches unless otherwise indicated.

11625-6


I. Airfoil: Unless otherwise indicated, provide airfoil at bottom of fume hood face opening with 1-inch (25-mm) space between airfoil and work top. Sash closes on top of airfoil, leaving 1-inch (25-mm) opening for air intake. Airfoil directs airflow across work top to remove heavier-than-air gases and to prevent reverse airflow.

1. Fabricate airfoil from stainless steel[ coated with PTFE or PVDF].

J. Light Fixtures: Provide vaporproof, two-tube, rapid-start, fluorescent light fixtures, of longest practicable length; complete with tubes at each fume hood. Shield tubes from hood interior with 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) thick laminated glass or 3-mm-thick tempered glass, sealed into hood with chemical-resistant rubber gaskets. Provide units with fluorescent tubes easily replaceable from outside of fume hood.

1. Provide fluorescent tubes with color temperature of 3500 K and minimum color-rendering index of 85.

2. Provide one fixture for hoods less than 96 inches long.

K. Base Cabinets: Comply with Division 12 Section "Laboratory Casework.". Provide metal base cabinets in finish matching fume hood exterior finish.

L. Work Top:

1. Work Tops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Where acid storage cabinets are indicated beneath fume hoods, provide holes in work tops as need to accommodate cabinet vents.

2. Resin Work Tops: Provide front overhang of 1 inch (25 mm), with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm) from edge.

a. Work Top Material: Solid epoxy composition. b. Work Top Configuration: Raised (marine) edge,1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick

at raised edge, with beveled or rounded edge and corners..

M. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between fume hoods or fume hood base cabinets and adjacent building construction. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as fume hoods.

N. Ceiling Enclosure: Provide filler panels[, where indicated,] matching fume hood exterior to enclose space above fume hoods at front and sides of fume hoods and extending from tops of fume hoods to ceiling.

O. Sash Enclosure: Provide sash enclosure matching fume hood exterior to enclose sash travel above fume hoods, when sash travel will extend above ceiling.

P. Finished Back Panels: Where rear surfaces of fume hoods are exposed to view, provide finished back panels matching rest of fume hood enclosure.

11625-7


Q. Comply with requirements in Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings, piping, electrical devices, and wiring. Install according to Shop Drawings. Securely anchor fittings, piping, and conduit to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated.

1. Pre-wiring: Fume hoods shall be pre-wired to an accessible junction box(es) at the top of the fume hood

2. Pre-piping: Fume hood water and laboratory gas services shall be pre-piped to 6-inches above top of fume hood at back of fume hood. Refer to Division 15 Sections for piping materials for each type of service.

1.05 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT FINISH

A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after welding. Prepare, treat, and finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.

B. Preparation: Clean steel surfaces, other than stainless steel, of mill scale, rust, oil, and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.

C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply fume hood manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).

1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Acceptance level for chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.

2. Colors for Fume Hood Finish: Match metal laboratory casework.

1.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Service Fittings: Comply with requirements in Division 12 Section "Laboratory Casework."

1. Provide service fittings with exposed surfaces, including fittings, escutcheons, and trim, finished with acid- and solvent-resistant powder coating complying with requirements in SEFA 7 for corrosion-resistant finishes

a. Powder Coating Color: Comply with SEFA 7 for colors and embossed identification. Color code remote control valve handles and outlet fittings to identify the service or media delivered. Provide embossed identification secured to each service fitting handle..

11625-8


B. Airflow Indicator: Provide each fume hood with airflow indicator of the following type(s): 1. Indicator Type: Thermal anemometer that measures fume hood face velocity and

indicates whether it is below normal, normal, or above normal. 2. Indicator Type: Thermal anemometer that measures fume hood face velocity and

displays data as digital readout.

C. Airflow Alarm: Provide fume hoods with audible and visual alarm that activates when airflow sensor reading is outside of preset range.

1. Provide with thermal-anemometer airflow sensor. 2. Provide with reset and test switches. 3. Provide with switch that silences audible alarm and automatically resets when

airflow returns to within preset range.

D. Sash Alarm: Provide fume hoods with audible and visual alarm that activates when sash is opened beyond preset position.

1. Provide with silence and test switches.

E. Sash Stops: Provide fume hoods with sash stops to limit hood opening to 18-inches of sash height. Sash stops can be manually released to open sash fully for cleaning fume hood and for placing large apparatus within fume hood.

1. Provide additional sash stop for fume hoods on constant air volume exhaust system to limit the full open sash height to maintain minimum face velocity indicated in “Performance Requirements” Article.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fume hoods.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fume hoods according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims, and securely anchor to building and adjacent laboratory casework. Securely attach access panels, but provide for easy removal and secure reattachment. Where fume hoods abut other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

11625-9


11625-10

B. Comply with requirements in Division 12 Section "Laboratory Casework" for installing fume hood base cabinets, and work tops.

1.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand. Adjust sashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances operate without interference.

B. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

1.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain laboratory fume hoods.



11975-1

SECTION 11975 BULLET TRAP CONTAINMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 1. 1.02 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

A. Bullet Trap Containment System: provide a bullet containment system that will capture bullets fired from all conventional shotguns, handguns, pistols and rifles up to and including a .460 Weatherby rifle caliber (8,100 ft. lbs. Energy at muzzle), using any of these ammunition types: Soft point, hollow point, full metal jacket, wadcutters, slugs, buckshot, and birdshot. System must be able to accept all of these types of ammunition without damage to any part of the backstop system. Steel core, ceramic tip and AP ammunition will not be used.

B. The system shall:

1. Absorb all fired ammunition projectiles, including acute angle strikes while preventing splash backs and ricochets.

2. Provide ricochet-proof operation and complete bullet containment within the system, preventing any bullets fired into the trap from exiting range.

3. Allow shooters to safely shoot from point-blank distances into the system with no danger from ricochets or bullets bouncing, in whole or part, back toward the shooter or range personnel.

4. Prevent bullet fragmentation, deviation, and disintegration. A smash plate design, where the bullet must lose its energy through deformation and/or disintegration, is not acceptable.

5. The system must clearly reduce pulverized lead particles, excluding high velocity lightweight jacketed bullets and rounds striking ceiling baffles, wall, or floors prior to entering the system.

6. Provide a containment system that provides the maximum possible reduction of hazardous lead materials, while providing an environmentally clean range, which will assure the highest degree of safety possible for all range employees and shooters.

C. The bullet containment system must meet or exceed all OSHA and EPA

requirements and must provide a system that minimizes hazardous material clean up.


11975-2

D. The system shall include a perforated tray for collection of the spent bullet debris.

E. The bullet containment system shall be manufactured from non-combustible materials.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Bullet trap manufacturer shall demonstrate at least five (5) years

experience supplying identical equipment to that being proposed. Unproven prototypes will not be accepted.

B. Acceptable product:

1. Basis of Design: Bullet containment system described hereafter, manufactured by Savage Range Systems Inc.

2. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01630 – Product Options and Substitutions.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit detailed shop drawings, fully dimensioned, including specifications for bullet trap and other similar components.

B. Mill certificates for AR500 plates.

C. Submit operating and maintenance instructions for inclusion in maintenance

manuals. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Except where noted otherwise, provide the manufacturer’s standard products and equipment.

B. Bullet Trap: the trap shall be of steel plate construction for heavy use / high

volume. The design of the dry type bullet recovery system shall consist of: 1. The bullet trap (without allowing bullet penetration) must be capable of

stopping and containing all projectiles up to 8100 FPE at the muzzle. No steel core (other than M855 / SS109), ceramic hardened tipped bullets or AP are to be used with this trap.

2. Shallow angle entrance ramps (approximately 12°) sprayed with an oil / synthetic oil mixture.


11975-3

3. Circular deceleration chamber with a minimum diameter of 24” (600mm) sprayed with the water / oil mixture to encapsulate any lead particles resulting from the deceleration of the bullets inside the chamber.

4. Perforated tray beneath the deceleration chamber for collection of the spent bullet debris.

5. All components will be provided shop primed.

C. Trap Entrance Ramps: 1. The entrance ramps of the trap are to be designed to guide the bullet into

the trap deceleration chamber, without impeding its progress. The ramp design shall not exceed 12°. Ramps shall not have raised seams running in the direction of fire that could cause cross range shots to ricochet.

2. All ramps shall be fabricated from a minimum ¼” AR500 steel plate with a Brinell Hardness of at least 470. Mill certificates shall be provided to verify hardness.

3. Extend the entrance ramps from the floor, to the entrance (throat) of the circular deceleration chamber. The tip of the upper ramp shall be a minimum 8 feet AFF.

4. The lower ramp attached to the deceleration chamber shall have a uniform sheet of the water & oil fluid running down the impact face. The lower ramps for each trap section shall consist of no more than two plates. The joint between the plates shall occur at the trough for collecting the fluid from the wet ramp and returning the fluid to the tank beneath the deceleration chamber.

5. The upper ramp for each trap section shall be fabricated from a single plate of steel.

6. The ramps shall have an integrated structural frame attached to the plates to provide rigidity and enable the sections to be joined together. Adjacent ramp sections shall be joined using mechanical fasteners and not rely on friction / pressure to prevent the sections from separating.

D. Circular Deceleration Chamber:

1. Design the circular deceleration chamber to allow the bullet to dissipate its kinetic energy in a circular motion. The deceleration chamber shall be fabricated from 3/8” AR500 steel plate with a minimum internal diameter of 24” (600mm).

2. The deceleration chamber shall not have any corners or other surfaces that would cause the bullet to abruptly change either direction or velocity.

3. The inside of the deceleration chamber shall be sprayed with the water / oil fluid from a spray bar positioned along the front edge. The spray bar must be protected from bullet impact.


11975-4

4. The deceleration chambers shall be sized to ensure that the joints between sections occur at the edges of the lanes. Deceleration chamber joints shall not be located within any given lane.

5. The bottom of the deceleration chamber shall have a small opening running across the width of the chamber. This opening is to allow the spent bullets to drop perforated Bullet Collection Tray. As the bullet makes its revolutions, it is to skip across the opening, making contact on the opposite side at an angle of approximately 12°.

E. Fluid System:

1. Provide a fluid system consisting of the rear tank, front trough, automatic bullet recovery system, return lines and pumps.

2. Locate the rear tank under the bottom opening of the deceleration chamber. The rectangular tank extends the full width of the bullet trap, contains the fluid, supports the bullet collection tray and houses the pumps. The tank must hold enough liquid to maintain a steady flow while the trap is in operation. Locate weirs on the bottom of the tank to protect pump from shotgun wads and assorted debris.

3. The rear tanks and front troughs shall be designed and connected in such a manner so that the water can flow between trap sections, ensuring equalized distribution.

4. The front trough is connected to the rear tank using 4” diameter PVC piping with a flexible coupling. Each trap section shall have a return line.

5. Each trap section shall have a separate pump to supply fluid to the spray bar. The fluid shall pass through an inline stainless steel filter prior to reaching the spray bar. The pumps shall be 230V single phase and be powered from the control panel.

F. Bullet Collection Tray:

1. The bullet recovery tray shall cover the entire surface of the rear tank so that spent bullets exiting the deceleration chamber cannot fall into the tank. The spent bullets are to be easily cleaned off the tray with a small flat shovel.

2. The bullet collection tray shall be fabricated from 16 ga. (minimum) perforated plate – 1/8” x 3/16”, 40% open.

3. The sides of the tray shall extend at least 2” above the bottom. The short ends of the tray should be minimum 11 gauge.

G. Controls:

1. System will be supplied with an integrated, PLC-based control system for operation and control of the bullet trap pumps from the range control area. The system shall include all necessary monitoring devices and both


11975-5

audible and visual alarms to alert the range operators in the event of an equipment failure.

2. The control panel shall sequence start the pumps to minimize the start-up power loads. The run indicator light shall flash to indicate that the start-up sequence is in process. The light will shine continuously once all equipment is operating.

3. The control system will use 120VDC signal wiring. 4. Each range shall have a separate control system. 5. The range equipment manufacturer shall mount the control panels. 6. Provide the power to supply the control panel, feeds from the control

panel to the pump outlets, all interconnecting wiring and all connections. Manufacturer to coordinate system requirements.

H. Signage: The range equipment manufacturer shall provide metal signs which

display the maximum ballistic levels (i.e. weapon sizes with corresponding muzzle velocities, bullet size and energy) permitted for use with this equipment. Size of signs shall be 14”H x 20”W. Sign material shall be painted steel. Anchor to wall with 4 anchors. Locations shall be determined by Owner.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Check all site dimensions and make allowances for any discrepancies.

B. Assemble all components and secure upper ramp to support structure above. Each upper ramp section requires two (2) suspension points each capable of supporting at least 375 pounds. Carefully align all ramp components to eliminate obstructions.

C. Coordinate construction at perimeter of trap components with adjacent building

components.

D. Coordinate all HVAC, mechanical and/or ventilation systems required to support the firing range functions.

E. Coordinate all electrical work including all interconnecting wiring between the

control panel and remote operator station, along with the power supplies from the control panel supplied by the range equipment supplier to the pumps.

F. Coordinate all concrete saw cutting or concrete work of any kind, required to

receive bullet trap equipment. The manufacturer shall provide drawings detailing


11975-6

the slab requirements for the bullet trap system. Ensure that the existing structure is capable of supporting the loads.

G. Touch up any primed surfaces damaged during shipment or installation. All

surfaces subject to bullet impacts shall receive a final coat of primer. Surfaces not exposed to bullet impacts will receive a finish coat of “Direct to Metal” (DTM) paint or equivalent.

H. Test all systems to ensure that all are operating properly.

3.02 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate all aspects of the operation and recommended maintenance procedures, to the full satisfaction of the Owner’s representatives.



11980-1

SECTION 11980 BULLET RECOVERY SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install one BULLET RECOVERY SYSTEM for use in forensic

examinations. 1. System will enable the recovery of projectiles fired from an assortment of

firearms with a maximum kinetic energy equivalent to a .338 Win.Mag. cartridge.

2. System will fully contain water under all firing conditions. The system must be proof-tested to 13,000 ft- lbs. (50 BMG) before leaving the manufacturer.

3. System construction will maximize safety of personnel and minimize damage to the recovered projectile.

4. Self-contained design will incorporate all necessary components on a single, transportable structure. These components will include, but not be limited to:

a. One-piece shooting tank b. Water filtration c. Automatic lid operation d. Solid-state underwater lighting. e. Integral vacuum recovery of projectiles f. And optionally: 1) Brass catcher 2) Remote firing stand 3) Air spring suspension of the tank 4) HEPA air filtration. B. Contractor will be required to demonstrate a fully operational system prior to

shipment. C. Further contractor requirements include on-site training, 5-yr. tank warranty and

two-year parts and labor warranty. 1.02 MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS A. System must be a regularly manufactured item by the manufacturer, with at least

four prior law enforcement installations.


11980-2

B. References, literature/brochures, and photographs must accompany proposal. Proposal must address each of the requirements contained herein.

C. Manufacturer must demonstrate history of performance and financial

responsibility. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Required: Shop drawings indicating equipment layout, dimensions, clearances,

and location and size of services. 1.04 WARRANTY A. A written warranty covering performance, as well as defects in materials and

workmanship will be required. 1. Bullet Recovery vessel will be warranted against leaks for a period of 5

years, and that any required repairs will be made without expense to Owner.

2. All other components will be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 2 years.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of design: CyberNational, Inc. 615-893-1099 B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01630 – Product Options and Substitutions. 2.02 MATERIALS A. The following items are to be constructed of type 304 or 316 stainless steel: 1. Bullet recovery tank and lid 2. Lid hinges 3. Air filter housing 4. All weldments and reinforcements to the tank 5. All screws, bolts, nuts and washers used by the vendor in the construction

of the system. B. NYLOK nuts are required where vibration and shock are present in mechanical

fittings. C. Underwater lighting housing will be constructed of stainless steel.


11980-3

D. All plumbing and piping are to be constructed of stainless steel. The initial piping

fittings at the tank must be stainless steel due to the strength requirements imposed by shock.

E. The use of galvanized piping or fittings is prohibited. The joining or abutment of

dissimilar metals that would provide conditions for galvanic corrosion is prohibited. Brass to stainless is allowed.

F. Platform walkway will be constructed of aluminum checker decking. Handrails

will be constructed of anodized aluminum tubing. 2.03 FABRICATION A. The bullet recovery tank shall be a one-piece welded design having minimum

overall interior dimensions of 101 inches length, 28 inches width, and 57.5 inches height. Tank bottom and target end shall be 3/8" S-S, with all remaining sides a minimum of 1/4" S-S. The sides and bottom of the tank will be welded as follows: TIG welded inside and out, followed by MIG welding inside and out, yielding a total of four independent welds on all tank abutments. Interior and exterior sides will be given a finish grade of 2B (satin). Inside and outside bottom will be free of scale and clean, but otherwise unfinished.

B. Tank lid will be at least 11 gauge S-S, cross-folded diagonally for added rigidity,

and finished with a grade 2B. Lid will be raised and lowered by using a pneumatic, hydraulic, or motorized mechanical means. Lid actuation should be smooth, quiet and crisp, and speed of opening or closing should be user adjustable. The lid construction should be such that water or condensation does not drain outside the tank when operated. Water must not be ejected or leaked from the system, including the lid and shooting port during firing of any cartridge up to the system’s maximum rating, i.e. 338 Win Mag. A simple means of disconnecting the actuator/s and manually raising the lid should be incorporated.

C. Shooting port will be a 6" Sch. 40 S-S tube, angled such that the centerline of the

tube extends to the abutment of the tank bottom and target end. Length of the tube will be sufficient to prevent a fired projectile from leaving the tank, regardless of the firearm shooting angle. The shooting tube extending into the tank will remain above the intended waterline of the tank, which is 48". The tube will include a ‘V’ notched nylon or similar block to rest the barrel of the firearm under test.

D. Tank bracing will consist of no less than 3" x 1/4” S-S angle around the exterior

at heights of 20", 40", and 57.5" (top edge).


11980-4

E. A surface skimmer will be employed opposite the shooting port and plumbed in a manner to enable floating debris to be rapidly cleared, thus providing an unobstructed view of the bottom.

F. Except for water inlet, vacuum wand and air duct, no other interior plumbing or

piping will be allowed. The entire floor of the tank will be unobstructed, visible and accessible to the operator. Inlet and outlet ports for water and drain must be constructed in such a fashion as to prevent bullets from entering or becoming trapped in the exterior piping.

G. The entire interior floor will be covered with a 1/8" white HDPE mat. The mat

will be secured with removable Stainless Steel angle sufficient to insure the mat will not lift. No adhesive or sealant is to be used. The mat is to be easily removed and replaced.

H. A shooting platform of suitable height will be incorporated into the structure. The

platform will allow a minimum of 48" distance between the shooting port and the rear handrails. A 24" walkway of the same height will traverse the entire length of the tank. Platform surface will be constructed of 1/8" aluminum checker decking. An accessory tray for firearms and ammunition will be provided.

I. Two tiers of anodized aluminum tube handrails will enclose the entire platform

and walkway. J. Entire structure, including all operating systems and stairwell, will be mounted on

a single, portable platform, the footprint not to exceed 16 feet in length and approximately 5 feet wide.

K. Tank shall be isolated from the frame by suspension on air springs. 2.04 INTERIOR LIGHTING A. The interior of the tank will be illuminated with a minimum of 100 watts

equivalent solid-state (LED) lighting. The interior lighting circuit must be driven from a low voltage transformer intended for underwater lighting, UL rated, and powered from a ground-fault interrupter circuit breaker.

B. The lamp will be mounted below the water line in a water-tight housing of S-S.

The lamp and housing must be able to withstand the shock imposed by firing without damaging the watertight integrity of the housing.

C. The lamp must be conveniently replaceable without draining the tank.


11980-5

2.05 BULLET RECOVERY A. Bullets will be easily and quickly recovered from the bottom of the tank. An

integrated vacuum system and wand attachment will be utilized, with the capability of gathering a minimum of twelve 44 magnum, 180 grain projectiles in a single batch.

B. After gathering, the projectiles and their accompanying fragments will be

discharged into a mesh stainless steel basket using a simple operator control. Recovery procedure will enable the operator to access the entire bottom area of the tank from the walkway. The vacuum system will have the additional capability of cleaning the tank using the wand and a supplied cleaning accessory.

2.06 PLUMBING/PIPING A. Isolation valves will be appropriately provided, and will be of bronze with

stainless wetted parts. B. Tank shall be free-floating; therefore, all plumbing and electrical to the tank must

be provided with flexible connections. C. Supply water connection is 3/4" FPT at city pressure. 2.07 WATER FILTRATION A. Provide a commercial grade custom stainless steel water pump and high

performance cartridge filter. Pump will be continuous-duty rated to at least 10gpm capacity with sufficient pressure to establish a visible surface flow from front to rear of tank. Pump must be protected by a loss of pressure switch with a delay-on-make time delay to enable a restart in the event of loss of prime.

2.08 AIR FILTRATION A. Provide a high-pressure blower capable of evacuating the tank air volume within

10 seconds. Blower must be capable of pulling air from around the shooter and into the tank without exposing the shooter to airborne lead and particulates.

B. The exhaust system shall be circuited as follows: room air is drawn into the tank

through the shooting port, exhausted from the tank through a plenum, into the filter box, into the intake side of the blower, and discharged to room atmosphere. The circuiting must prevent the infiltration of water into the filter cabinet resulting from high-energy blasts.


11980-6

C. The filter housing will be stainless steel, and constructed in a manner that

prevents the bypassing of air-borne lead particles into the atmosphere. Filter elements will consist of a 30% pre-filter and a laboratory-certified 99.97% HEPA filter.

2.09 ELECTRICAL/CONTROLS A. Tank will require a single 115 VAC, 40 Amps single phase power source with a

wall-mounted disconnect for same. The operation of the water pump, air blower, interior light, and the raise/lower lid functions shall be remotely controlled from the shooting platform. The enclosures for the remote box and the main control panel will be constructed of stainless or aluminum, and the enclosures and user switches will be NEMA 12 rated. A ‘Sonalert’ type audible warning device must be activated when the lid is commanded to the DOWN position. When the air blower is engaged, the water pump will be interlocked so as to simultaneously disengage.

B. Tank shall be isolated from the frame by suspension on air springs ; therefore,

suitable grounding of the tank to the frame, and from the frame to earth ground will be ensured. Power for all electrical components must be provided through manufacturer supplied GFI breakers. All plumbing and electrical to the tank must be provided with flexible connections.

C. All electrical work performed will conform to the latest edition of the National

Electrical Code. 2.10 ACCESSORIES TO BE PROVIDED A. Brass Catcher 1. Catches ejected brass from semi-automatic handguns or rifles. B. Accessory Tray 1. 12" x 36" padded tray for holding firearms, ammunition and evidence. 2. May be mounted at any location along top handrail. C. Remote Firing Stand 1. Must capture and hold firearm rigidly in position, enabling the operator to

fire a suspected faulty weapon from a safe distance. 2. Fully-adjustable fixture will mount on the tank structure and self-align

with the shooting port centerline. 3. Must accommodate handguns and long guns with or without magazines.


11980-7

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY/ACCEPTANCE A. System shall be delivered complete within pledge date as scheduled after receipt

of order. Manufacturer shall notify the general contractor two weeks prior to planned shipping date. Manufacturer shall coordinate delivery of the system with the general contractor.

B. System will be tested at the manufacturer’s facility prior to shipping. Testing will

include live firing by designated firearms examiner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General contractor shall be responsible to off load the system from the delivery

trailer and place it within the facility. When in place, general contractor shall notify manufacturer of same and arrange for manufacturer to complete the installation.

B. Utility stubs for drain, water supply and electrical, shall be provided within 10 ft.

of the system’s installed position. Manufacturer shall make all electrical and plumbing connections to the system, and provide start-up services to make the system completely operational.

C. Provide on-site instruction in the proper operation and maintenance of the system.

Provide schematic drawings, operating and maintenance manuals. 3.03 SUMMARY OF MANUFACTURERS RESPONSIBILITY A. Not exclusive of other specified requirements, manufacturer’s general

responsibility is for the fabrication of system, acceptance testing prior to delivery of the system, shipping to the job site, utility (plumbing-electrical) connections to system from building utilities, start-up, on-site instruction for operation and maintenance of the system, and all schematic drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, and documentation sufficient to install and maintain the system.



SECTION 12350 LABORATORY CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal laboratory casework. 2. Wood laboratory casework. 3. Shelving. 4. Cabinet hardware and accessories. 5. Laboratory work surfaces. 6. Laboratory sinks. 7. Casework accessories. 8. Water, laboratory gas, safety and electrical service fittings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for slot-channel framing and other metal fabrications for overhead support of laboratory casework items.

2. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry” for installing anchors in masonry construction.

3. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood blocking for anchoring laboratory casework.

4. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for reinforcements in metal-framed gypsum board partitions for anchoring laboratory casework.

5. Division 09 Sections for wall base material applied to laboratory casework. 6. Division 11 Section “Laboratory Equipment” for equipment items to be installed

with laboratory casework. 7. Division 11 Section “Laboratory Fume Hoods” for fume hoods, including base

cabinets, countertops and base stands under fume hoods. 8. Division 22, 23, 26 and 27 Sections for installing service fittings specified in this

Section, including connecting service utilities.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


12350-1


1. Partial shop drawing submittal, prepared for a portion of the Work, will be reviewed when use of partial submittal has received prior written approval from Architect.

2. Submit laboratory casework submittal package concurrent and coordinated with laboratory fume hood submittal package specified in Division 11 Section “Laboratory Fume Hoods.”

B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: Manufacturers published information for each type of cabinet, table, shelving, hardware, countertop, sink, casework accessory, and service fitting.

a. Include cabinet styles and dimensions, component dimensions, standard construction details, and joint details.

b. Show compliance with specified reference standards, testing by recognized agencies, and application of testing agency labels.

c. Include service fitting manufacturer’s product cut-sheets for each fitting type and finish. Use same designation as indicated on Drawings.

d. Manufacturers generic guide specifications will not be reviewed.

2. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale sections and details, and attachments to other work.

a. Detail assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

b. Product Schedule: For laboratory casework types. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

c. Indicated details of anchoring casework to permanent building construction including locations of blocking, reinforcements and other supports required for installation of laboratory casework.

d. Include locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components.

e. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory casework, laboratory fume hoods, laboratory equipment and laboratory accessories specified in other Sections.

f. Include rough-in information for mechanical, plumbing and electrical connections. Indicate duct, piping and electrical connections, and locations of access panels.

g. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring as required

3. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

a. Each type of cabinet material, finish and color. b. Each type of countertop and sink material, finish and color.

12350-2


c. Other materials requiring color selection.

C. Informational Submittals: 1. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to

scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. Coordinate with requirements of Division 01.

2. Product Certificates: For laboratory casework, from casework manufacturer, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

3. Work Surface Material Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating epoxy, and chemical resistant plastic laminate work surface materials comply with product standards and material performance requirements specified.

D. Close-Out Informational Submittals: Submit the following with project close-out documentation. 1. Maintenance data.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that produces casework of types indicated for this Project that has been tested for compliance with SEFA-8

B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework from single source from single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

1. Obtain laboratory casework thru same source and from same manufacturer as fume hoods specified in Division 11 Section “Laboratory Fume Hoods.”

C. Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA-8 “Recommended Practices for Laboratory Grade Furniture, Casework, Shelving and Tables” for cabinet materials specified.

D. Work Surface Product Standard: Comply with SEFA-3 “Recommended Practices for Laboratory Work Surfaces.”

E. Wood Countertop Standard: Comply with AWI’s “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards” for grade of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation and other requirements.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying requirements. Coordinate with Owner.

12350-3


1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Schedule delivery of laboratory casework so that spaces are sufficiently complete that material can be installed immediately following delivery.

B. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material. 1. Cardboard is not an acceptable protective cover. 2. Casework shall not be used by other trades for storage, or support, or as a ladder

substitute for overhead work.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory casework until building is enclosed, utility roughing-in and wet work are complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.

B. Overhead soffits and ceiling grid shall be in place prior to casework installation.

C. Overhead lighting shall be installed and operational prior to casework installation.

D. Flooring required to be installed under laboratory casework shall be installed prior to casework delivery.

1. Flooring materials shall extend into knee-space areas, equipment areas and base cabinets without cabinet floor/bottom.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of laboratory casework.

B. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with installation of fume hoods and other laboratory equipment.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS.

A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of metal laboratory casework provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish.

B. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of wood laboratory casework provided. Include scratch fillers, stains, finishes, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish.

12350-4


C. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Cabinet Mounting Clips and Related Hardware: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Laboratory Casework Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, Provide Fisher Hamilton or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation. 2. Mott Manufacturing Ltd. 3. Jamestown Products. 4. Mott Manufacturing Ltd.

B. Water, Laboratory Gas and Electrical Service Fittings Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.

1. See Plumbing division for Basis of Design Products

1.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel Materials:

1. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25-percent.

2. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, plain sawn or sliced. a. Contractor to verify and coordinate with architect existing finishes and

match.

C. Wood Countertop Materials:

1. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White maple, plain sliced.

D. Epoxy Materials: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular finish.

12350-5


1. Physical Properties: a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70 MPa). b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi (1400 MPa). c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100. d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent. e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F (127 deg C).

2. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material in Black, when tested with reagents according to SEFA-3 Work Surfaces Chemical/Stain Resistance Test, shall have no more than four Level-3 conditions.

E. Chemical Resistant Plastic Laminate Materials: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodworking quality standard.

1. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

2. Chemical Resistance: Chemical resistant plastic laminate material that has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:

a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), amyl acetate, benzene, butyl alcohol, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, dimethyl formamide, dioxane, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, formaldehyde (37 percent), gasoline, gentian violet, hydrogen peroxide (3 percent), methyl alcohol, methyl ethyl ketone, methylene chloride, mono chlorobenzene, naphthalene, toluene, trichloroethylene, xylene, zinc chloride (saturated).

b. Slight Effect: Cresol, tincture of iodine, sodium sulfide (15 percent).

F. Auxiliary Materials:

1. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

2. Sealants:

a. Sealant Joints and Penetrations in Work Surface Materials: Silicon sealant recommended by work surface manufacturer.

b. Between Laboratory Casework and Adjoining Construction: Refer to Division 7 Section “Sealants.

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 4. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise

indicated.

1.03 METAL CABINETS AT FUME HOODS AND TABLE FABRICATION

12350-6


A. Cabinet Design:

1. Metal Cabinets: Inset drawers and doors except where required by manufacturer for special purpose cabinet types.

a. Provide 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) reveals between adjacent doors and adjacent drawers and between adjacent cabinets.

B. Metal Cabinet Construction: Cabinet performance shall comply with acceptance levels of physical performance tests in SEFA 8-M. Drawer cycle test shall comply with laboratory load (100 pound) and heavy-duty laboratory load (150 pound) acceptance level.

C. Fabrication: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels. Except where otherwise specified, integrally frame and weld cabinet bodies to form dirt and vermin-resistant enclosures. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch (1.5 to 2.4 mm).

1. Cabinets, General:

a. Cabinets 30 inches and wider with pair of swinging doors shall provide full access to complete interior without center vertical post.

b. Provide reinforcing at front and rear corners with full upright posts containing shelf adjustment holes, maximum 1/2-inch on center.

c. Provide floor mounted cabinets with leveler screws and integral bottom flange at each corner, accessed through openings in toe-space or cabinet bottom; plug openings.

2. Base Cabinets:

a. Provide base cabinets with removable backs for access to utility space. Removable backs are not required at suspended cabinets, cabinets with security panels and where countertop depth is less than 30 inches.

b. Provide intermediate rails between drawers and doors, and between drawers with security panels.

c. Intermediate rails shall be removable to allow modification to cabinet configuration in future.

d. Base cabinet assemblies without cabinet bottom separating interior of cabinet from toe-space are not acceptable.

D. Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height channel reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-deadening material.

12350-7


E. Glazed Doors: Hollow-metal stiles and rails of similar construction as flush doors, with glass held in resilient channels or gasket material.

F. Hinged Doors: Mortise for hinges and reinforce with angles welded inside inner pans at hinge edge. Doors shall close against rubber bumpers.

G. Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with no raw metal edges at top. Sides, back, and bottom fabricated in one piece with rolled or formed top of sides for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal. Drawers shall close against rubber bumpers.

H. Toe Space: Fully enclosed, nominal 4 inches (100 mm) high by 3 inches (75 mm) deep, with no open gaps or pockets.

1. Provide toe space at sides of cabinet at island and peninsula cabinets.

I. Tables: Welded tubing legs, 2 inches (50 mm) square with channel aprons/frames, reinforcing cross-rails, and stretchers. Legs welded or bolted to table apron/frame with heavy-duty corner brackets; weld or bolt reinforcing cross-rails to front and back table apron/frame. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs to table aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Table Design: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Leg Rails and Stretchers: Where indicated. Channel leg rails welded or bolted to

table legs; channel stretcher welded or bolted to leg rails 3. Leg Shoes: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) high, black vinyl or rubber; open-bottom, slip-on

type at table with leveling devices. Leg shoe shall be adjustable to conceal leveling devices and hold-down clips.

4. Leveling Devices: Adjustable height type with non-marring, non-metallic glides; minimum 1 inch (25 mm) diameter with minimum 5/8 inch (16 mm) height adjustment.

5. Caster: 4 inch (100 mm) rubber tire, swivel, locking type, where indicated. 6. Table Load Ratings: Work surface plus 600 pounds minimum, unless otherwise

indicated. Table load rating is in addition to the weight of the table assembly and work surface material.

a. Tables with Casters: Work surface plus 300 pounds minimum.

J. Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, conduits, and fittings in cabinet bodies to accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies. Grind edges and radius corners to eliminate sharp edges.

K. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges unless otherwise indicated.

12350-8


1. Provide utility-space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops.

2. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be exposed.

3. Provide knee-space panels (modesty panels) at spaces between base cabinets, where cabinets are not installed against a wall or where space is not otherwise closed. Fabricate from back-to-back panels or of hollow construction to eliminate exposed hemmed or flanged edges.

4. Provide fixed and removable panels at knee-spaces. Incorporate electrical and data services fittings in fixed portion of knee-space panels where indicated.

5. Work Surface: As indicated on Drawings.

1.04 WOOD CABINET FABRICATION

A. Cabinet Design: Flush overlay, with 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) reveals between doors and drawers that are adjacent

B. Grain Direction: Vertical on both doors and drawer fronts, with continuous vertical matching, and as follows:

1. Lengthwise on face frame members. 2. Vertical on end panels. 3. Side to side on bottoms and tops of units. 4. Vertical on knee-space panels. 5. Horizontal on aprons and table frames.

C. Veneer Matching: Provide veneers for each cabinet from a single flitch, book or slip and balance matched.

1. Provide materials that are selected and arranged for compatible grain and color. Do not use materials adjacent to one another that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings.

D. Edgebanding for Wood-Veneered Construction:

1. Minimum 1/8-inch (3-mm) thick, solid wood of same species as face veneer.

E. Wood Cabinet Construction: Cabinet and table construction shall comply with SEFA 8-W physical performance acceptance levels. Drawer cycle test shall comply with mechanical suspension system test acceptance levels.

1. Exposed Materials: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets and cabinets with glass doors; underside of cabinet bottoms more than 42 inches (1067 mm) above floor, including cabinet bottoms behind light valances and the bottom edge of light valances; flat tops of cabinet less than 80 inches (2032 mm) above floor; tops of cabinets visible from

12350-9


an upper floor or building level; sloping tops; interior face of doors and applied drawer fronts. Ends of cabinets, including those installed directly against walls or other cabinets, are defined as “concealed.”

a. General: Provide materials that are selected and arranged for compatible grain and color. Do no use materials adjacent to one another that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings.

b. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, selected for compatible grain and color.

c. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, selected for compatible color and grain. Grade A exposed faces at least 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) thick, and Grade J crossbands. Provide backs of same species as faces.

2. Semi-Exposed Materials: Surfaces visible when solid doors and drawers are opened, including cabinet interiors, shelves, and dividers; drawer sides, sub-fronts, backs and bottoms; underside of cabinet bottoms between 24 inches (610 mm) and 42 inches (1067 mm) above floor; security and dust panels or drawer stretchers.

a. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber of same species as exposed solid wood.

b. Plywood: Hardwood plywood of same species as exposed plywood. Grade B faces.

c. Provide solid wood or hardwood plywood for semi-exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3. Concealed Materials: Exterior or interior surfaces that are covered or not normally exposed to view, include toe spaces; sleepers, stretchers, and solid sub-tops; underside of cabinet bottoms less than 24 inches (610 mm) above floor; flat tops of cabinets 80 inches (2067 mm) or more above floor except if visible from an upper floor or building level; non-visible edges of adjustable shelves; underside of countertops, knee spaces and drawer aprons; and other surfaces not usually visible after installation.

a. Solid Wood: Any species, with no defects affecting strength or utility. b. Plywood: Hardwood plywood. Provide backs of same species as faces. c. Particleboard. d. MDF. e. Hardboard.

F. Fabrication: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacturer. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming and fitting. Use precision dies for interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision jigs to provide units that are square. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts.

12350-10


1. Cabinets, General:

a. Cabinet Core: 3/4-inch (19-mm) thick veneer-core hardwood plywood; 1-inch (25-mm) thick veneer-core hardwood plywood at top and bottom of wall and upper cabinets, and top of tall cabinets.

b. Backs of Cabinets: 3/4-inch (19-mm) thick veneer-core hardwood plywood where exterior is exposed; nominal 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick veneer-core plywood dadoed into sides, bottoms and tops where interior is semi-exposed; nominal 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick hardboard dadoed into sides, bottoms and tops where concealed.

c. Cabinets 30 inches and wider with pair of swinging doors shall provide full access to complete interior without center vertical post.

d. Bore interior face of cabinet sides for shelf support holes; provide 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) spacing for adjustable shelf support clips.

2. Base Cabinets:

a. Top Frame: Full top frame; front and side rails horizontal, rear rail vertical; solid wood with mortis and tendon or doweled connections, glued and pinned or screwed.

b. Intermediate Rails: Provide front rails between doors and drawers with locks provide front and rear rails between drawers, and drawers and doors with security/dust panels; panel product strips or solid wood, glued and pinned or screwed.

c. Provide base cabinets with full-height removable backs for access to utility space; two piece behind drawers, one piece at cupboards. Removable backs are not required at suspended cabinets, cabinets with security panels and where countertop depth is less than 30 inches.

3. Tall Cabinets:

a. Provide with recessed toe-kick.

G. Flush Doors: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, with particleboard or MDF cores and hardwood face veneers and crossbands.

H. Stile and Rail Glazed Doors: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid hardwood; mitered joints, machined to accept glass and removable interior glazing stops.

I. Drawers:

1. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, hardwood plywood or solid hardwood. 2. Drawer Box: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid hardwood or veneer-

core hardwood plywood, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints. 3. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, hardboard (smooth side up) glued

and dadoed into front, back, and sides of drawers. Use 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick material for drawers more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide.

12350-11


J. Adjustable Shelves: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick veneer-core hardwood plywood.

1. Adjustable on 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) centers. 2. Depth: Full depth shelves 3. Front edge of shelf to be within 1 inch of inside face of door. 4. Cabinet Shelf Lip: Provide at cabinets without doors; 1/2 inch thick solid

hardwood with top of lip minimum 1/2 inch above top of shelf.

K. Pull-Out Shelves: Minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) thick, solid hardwood or veneer-core hardwood plywood four sides, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints; minimum 1-inch (25-mm) high above top of shelf. Construct pull-out shelf bottom to match drawer bottom. Provide pull-out shelves at bottom and center of base cabinets where indicated on drawings.

L. Toe Space: Fully enclosed, 4 inches (100 mm) high by 3 inches (75 mm) deep, with no open gaps or pockets.

1. Provide toe space at sides of cabinet at island and peninsula cabinets.

M. Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, conduits, and fittings in cabinet bodies to accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies.

N. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as adjacent exposed cabinet surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide utility-space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops.

2. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be exposed.

3. Provide knee-space panels (modesty panels) at spaces between base cabinets, where cabinets are not installed against a wall or where space is not otherwise closed and where indicated. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as exposed cabinet backs.

4. Provide fixed and removable panels at knee-spaces. Incorporate electrical and data services fittings in fixed portion of knee-space panels.

5. Provide finished back of utility space where exposed; conceal fasteners.

O. Security/Dust Panels: Provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

P. Mobile Cabinets:

1. Cabinet Design: Match wood cabinet design. 2. Cabinet Construction: Construct cabinets without toe space; reinforce bottom of

cabinets; full cabinet top; finish cabinet four sides and top.

12350-12


a. Leveling Devices: Provide four adjustable height type per cabinet with non-marring, non-metallic glides where indicated.

b. Casters: Provide 3 inch (75 mm) rubber wheel caster at cabinet types indicated; front casters swivel/locking type; rear casters fixed type.

c. Anti-Tipping Mechanism: Unit with drawers shall be equipped with counter balance weight to avoid tipping. Units with more than one drawer shall be equipped with interlocking drawer system to limit one drawer in vertical stack to be opened at one time.

3. Work Surface: As indicated on Drawings.

1.05 SPECIAL PURPOSE CABINET FABRICATION

A. Under-hood Corrosives Storage Cabinets:

1. Cabinet Material and Design: Metal laboratory casework with inset doors. 2. Cabinet Construction: Comply with requirements for metal laboratory casework

and the following:

a. Cabinet Use: Storage of acids and bases, where indicated on Drawings. b. Cabinet Lining: Chemical resistant polyethylene lining, top, bottom, sides,

back, and inside of cabinet doors; 2-inch high lip at front cabinet opening; cabinet lining shall be liquid tight to minimum depth of 2-inches.

c. Cabinet Back: Removable back panels for access to utility chase from inside cabinet.

d. Shelves: Provide two, half-depth shelves with polyethylene or polyolefin spill tray with 1-inch high raised lip four sides of each shelf.

e. Cabinet Ventilation: Provide two, 2-inch diameter polypropylene or polyolefin threaded vent pipe outlets (one high, one low) with sealed pipe joints. Secure vent outlets to back of cabinet with locking nut and seal to back panel. Cabinets with single vent outlet are not acceptable. PVC piping is not acceptable. 1) Where cabinets are located below fume hoods, provide 2-inch

diameter polyethylene or polyolefin vent pipe up to rear of fume hood located above cabinet. Coordinate pipe opening size and location in fume hood work top with Division 11 Section “Laboratory Fume Hood.” Extend vent pipe assembly 4 inches above fume hood work top and behind rear baffle.

f. Cabinet Hardware: Locks, catches, fasteners, shelf supports and other hardware items shall be corrosion resistant materials, compatible with materials being stored. Provide cabinet lock.

g. Identification: Storage cabinet shall be identified with conspicuous, minimum 2-inch high lettering to identify the material being stored (e.g. ACIDS, BASES) as indicated on Drawings.

B. Under-counter Flammable Liquid (Solvent) Storage Cabinets:

12350-13


1. Cabinet Material and Design: Metal laboratory casework with inset doors. 2. Cabinet Construction: Comply with requirements of NFPA-30 and the following:

a. Provide self-closing doors with fusible link and coordinator; doors shall be self-latching with three-point latch arrangement.

b. Provide continuous stainless steel piano hinges and cabinet locks. c. Cabinet Back Option: Provide units with removable back where standard to

manufacturer’s listed and labeled products. d. Spill Containment: Provide minimum 2-inch high raised lip at bottom of

cabinet behind doors or spill tray with 2-inch high raised lip on fours sides; bottom of cabinet or spill tray shall be liquid tight to depth of 2-inches.

e. Shelves: One, full-depth shelf; adjustable where standard to manufacturer’s listed and labeled products.

f. Cabinet Ventilation: Two, 2-inch diameter threaded pipe vent outlets (high and low at back of cabinet) with flame arrestors and bungs (caps). Vent outlets shall be capped.

g. Identification: Flammable liquid (solvent) storage cabinets shall be identified with conspicuous, two-inch high letting to read “FLAMMABLE KEEP FIRE AWAY” in color contrasting with the cabinet finish color.

h. Labeling: Cabinets shall be listed and leveled per Quality Assurance Article in Part 1. Provide testing laboratory labels on top interior of cabinet door.

1.06 SHELVING

A. Wall Rail System: Manufacturer’s integrated system that includes support structure and cantilevered storage components mounted to building partitions.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation; Product - .Alpha System, Wall Hanging System.

b. Mott Manufacturing Ltd.; Product – Sigma Flex, Wall Rail System. c. Thermo Scientific; Hamilton Laboratory Furniture and Fume Hoods;

Product – Max/Lab, Wall Rail System.

2. System Assembly: Wall mounted rail systems with cantilevered storage components as indicated on Drawings.

a. Structural components consisting of vertical and horizontal rails anchored to building partitions.

1) Vertical Rails: Cold rolled steel channels, slotted for 1 inch (25 mm) adjustment of components; attached to horizontal rails and anchored to partition at 12 inches (300 mm) on-center, maximum. End vertical rails single or double slotted; intermediate vertical rails double slotted.

12350-14


2) Horizontal Rails: Cold rolled steel channels, slotted for 6 inch (150 mm) adjustment of vertical rails; anchored to partition at 12 inches (300 mm) on-center, maximum.

3) Horizontal Rail Covers: Cold rolled steel channel inserts, fastened to horizontal rails, between vertical rails.

b. Module Size and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. c. Fasteners: Type required by manufacturer for materials and assemblies

being fastened. d. Adjustable Shelving Units: Shelving material, number, size and

configuration as indicated on Drawings. e. Suspended Casework: Type and size as indicated on Drawings. f. Insert Panels: Steel panels with mounting brackets and hardware, as

indicated on Drawings. g. Load Capacity: Minimum 760 lbs total load rating.

B. Adjustable Wood Shelving Units with Metal Brackets:

1. Adjustable Wood Shelving Units: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick veneer-core hardwood plywood core.

a. Wood Veneer for Shelves: Match wood casework. b. Edgebanding Exposed Shelf Edges: Minimum 1/8-inch (3-mm) thick, solid

wood of same species as face veneer. c. Shelf Lip: Minimum 1/2 inch thick solid hardwood at unprotected edges of

shelf; top of lip 1/2- inch (12 mm) above top of shelf.

1.07 LABORATORY WORK SURFACES

A. Work Surfaces, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniform. Provide front overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) unless otherwise indicated, and .25 inch (6mm) on ends unless otherwise indicated.

1. Seal joint between curbs and adjoining construction. 2. Seal joint between different work surface materials.

B. Epoxy Countertops and Table Tops: Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks, holes for service fittings and accessories, and with butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and concealed metal splines.

1. Tops: Flat, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, with beveled or rounded edge and corners, with drip groove on underside 1/2-inch (13-mm) from edge.

a. Raised (marine) edge, 1-inch (25-mm) thick at raised edge. b. Provide drain-board grooves in countertops adjoining sinks, where indicated

on Drawings.

12350-15


2. Curbs: Supply loose for field application in same thickness as top. Configuration as indicated on Drawings.

a. Height: 4 inch (100 mm) high, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. Provide where tops abut partitions, fume hoods and other adjoining above

counter elements.

C. Wood Countertops and Table Tops:

1. Grade: AWI Premium grade. 2. Type of Top: Solid laminated for transparent finish. Narrow strips of lumber

glued together with crown direction reversed in adjacent strips. Arrange strips for random mix of color and grain. Ease edges and corners.

a. Strip Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) b. Top Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm

D. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:

1. Countertops: Chemical-resistant plastic laminate shop bonded to top surface and exposed edges of 1-inch- (25-mm) thick core with plastic-laminate backing bonded to bottom surface.

a. Backsplash Core Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). b. Countertop Core: Urea-formaldehyde-free particleboard. c. Countertop Core for Counters Containing Sinks: Not allowed. Use epoxy at

all wet conditions. d. Countertop Configuration: Flat, with square edges, and flat backsplashes

and end splashes. Finish faces and exposed edges of splashes with same plastic laminate as top.

e. Plastic-Laminate Grade for Backing: BKL.

1.08 LABORATORY SINKS

A. Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated or manufacturer's closest standard size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Architect. 1. See Plumbing Division for sink types.

1.09 WATER AND LABORATORY GAS SERVICE FITTINGS

A. See Plumbing Division for Water and Laboratory Gas Service Fittings

1.010 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Service Fittings, General: Provide UL listed units with metal housings, accessories, and gaskets required for mounting on laboratory casework. Receptacles, data outlets,

12350-16


switches, pilot lights, device plates, and accessories are specified in Division 26 and 27 Sections.

1. Switch and Receptacle Colors: Refer to Division 26 Sections. 2. Cover Plate Identification: Refer to Division 26 and 27 Sections. 3. Provide pilot light type switch with neon-light handle, illuminated when switch is

“ON” for Fume Hood light switch, vacuum cabinet switch and where indicated.

B. Line-Type Fittings: Provide with cast-metal boxes with threaded holes for mounting on rigid steel conduit. Provide cover plates same size as boxes.

C. Recessed-Type Fittings: Provide with galvanized-steel boxes.

D. Finishes for Service-Fitting Components: Provide housings or boxes for pedestal- and line-type fittings with manufacturer's standard baked-on, chemical-resistant enamel in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1.011 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FITTINGS 1. Receptacle Color: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required

by NFPA 70. 2. Provide pilot light adjacent to switch or neon-lighted handle, illuminated when

switch is "ON," where noted as "PL" next to switch identification. 3. Provide key-operated switch where noted as "KEY" next to switch identification. 4. Provide thermal-overload switches, single or double pole, as required, with

maximum overcurrent trip setting to suit particular motor controlled.

B. Data Outlets: Refer to Division 27 Section for data device outlets.

C. Finishes for Service-Fitting Components: Provide housings or boxes for pedestal- and line-type fittings with manufacturer's standard baked-on, chemical-resistant enamel in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Cover Plates: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cover-Plate Identification: Use 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) high letters unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide on all cover plates:

a. Receptacles other than standard 125-V duplex, grounding type. b. Switches and thermal-overload switches. c. Pilot lights when located remotely from associated equipment or switch,

where function is not obvious. d. Receptacles, switches, and other locations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

12350-17


1.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of laboratory casework.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1.02 INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. Do not exceed the following tolerances:

1. Variation of Tops of Base Cabinets from Level: 1/16 inch in 10 feet (1.5 mm in 3 m).

2. Variation of Bottoms of Upper Cabinets from Level: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).

3. Variation of Faces of Cabinets from a True Plane: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).

4. Variation of Adjacent Surfaces from a True Plane (Lippage): 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 5. Variation in Alignment of Adjacent Door and Drawer Edges: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

B. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to partition framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base cabinets.

C. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.

1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and at sides of cabinets with not less than 2 fasteners per side.

D. Tall, Upper and Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

E. Install shelving systems plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.

F. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.

G. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

12350-18


1.03 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings.

B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in same manner as shop-made joints using dowels, splines, fasteners, adhesives, and sealants recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges in shop for field-made joints.

1. Use concealed clamping devices for field-made joints in plastic-laminate countertops. Locate clamping devices within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a uniform heavy pressure at joints.

C. Fastening:

1. Secure countertops, except for epoxy countertops, to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.

2. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each corner and along perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c.

3. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical resistance, hardness, and appearance.

4. At utility chases behind base cabinets, provide utiity space framing material, wood blocking, cleats or other reinforcement to support edge of countertop at adjoining construction.

D. Provide required holes and cutouts for service fittings.

E. Seal unfinished edges and cutouts in plastic-laminate and wood countertops with heavy coat of polyurethane varnish.

F. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer.

G. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

H. Provide 1 ¾” grommets at far left end of countertops where knee openings are located.

1.04 INSTALLATION OF SINKS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.

12350-19


12350-20

B. Semi-Flush Installation of Stainless-Steel Sinks: Before setting, apply sink and countertop manufacturers' recommended sealant under rim lip and along top.

1.05 INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2, and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports, stainless-steel shelves, to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.

C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.

1.06 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in Divisions 22, 26 and 27 Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings, electrical and data devices.

B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2, and manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely anchor fittings to laboratory casework unless otherwise indicated.

1.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c.



01011-1

SECTION 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product data for blinds. Indicate materials, finishes, construction, and installation instructions. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance and cleaning instructions.

C. Sample: Submit full size sample indicating top and bottom hardware, tracks, cord

and ladders and minimum 1 '-0" length of slat.

D. Shop drawings: Indicate fasteners, installation methods and clearances at head, jamb and sill.

1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver to project site in manufacturer's original packaging.

B. Handle and store to prevent damage to finished surfaces and operating mechanisms.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Provide blind manufacturer's standard material warranty for slats, tilters, hardware, finish and construction. Warranty period shall be lifetime of original installation, beginning at Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VENETIAN BLINDS

A. Acceptable products; subject to compliance with specified requirements: 1. Hunter Douglas, Inc., Model CD80. 2. Levelor Lorentzen, Inc., Riviera. 3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc., Bali Classics.

B. Characteristics: Provide each blind as a complete unit produced by one

manufacturer, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets and fasteners:


01011-2

1. Headrail: Maximum 1-3/8” by 1-1/2”. 2. Slats: Nominal 1” wide, 0.008” thickness aluminum; 20 mm spacing

between slats. 3. Construction: Aluminum and steel components with synthetic fiber

ladders and lift cords. 4. Tilt operation: Disengaging wand tilter; wand at 4’-0” above finished

floor. 5. Finish: Provide metal components with anti-static and anti-microbial

factory finish in color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard selection.

6. Hardware: Brackets, supports and internal reinforcement for installation and operation.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Verify actual opening dimensions by job site measurements.

B. Fabricate units for openings from head to sill and jamb to jamb.

C. Fabricate blinds with tilt operation controls on left-hand side of units. Provide full height raising operation with locking only in fully raised position.

D. Locate pull cords for raising and lowering on right-hand side of units. Where pull

cords or wand tilters are located behind columns and at building corners, install pull cords and wands on same side of blind unit for ease of access.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install blinds in all interior windows, plumb and in accord with manufacturer's product data. Provide intermediate support for blinds greater than 5'-0" in length.

B. Adjust operating mechanisms for proper operation. Clean exposed surfaces prior

to Date of Substantial Completion. Repair or replace damaged blinds or units which have been stained.



210010-1

SECTION 210010 GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. These fire suppression provisions specified herein apply to all Sections of Division 2l.

B. Refer to the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 for special requirements and conditions which apply to all Sections of Division 21.

C. Performance verification is specified in Section 210090, Performance Verification.

This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of the performance verification specified therein.


A. Conform to the following: 1. International Fire Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2010.

a. International Fire Code-2012. b. NFPA 13-2002. c. NFPA 70-2011. d. NFPA 72-2002.

B. Systems shall comply with the Georgia Rules and Regulations of Safety Fire

Commissioner, Chapter 120-3-3, Rules and Regulations for the State Minimum Fire Safety Standards-2010.

C. Codes, standards and regulations specified herein refer to the edition date. Revisions and addenda to these codes, standards and regulations shall be part of these specifications. Provisions of referenced codes, standards, and regulations do not create duty or responsibility by the Architect or the Owner, unless otherwise specified herein.

D. Codes, standards and regulations referred to are minimum standards. Where the

requirements of these specifications or drawings exceed those of the codes, standards and regulations, the drawings or specifications shall govern.

E. Fire Suppression/Electrical Design Coordination:

1. The power ratings of motors and other fire suppression equipment and the electrical characteristics of electrical systems serving them, as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings, have been established as minimums which will allow that equipment to satisfactorily function while producing the required capacities. These power ratings include a safety factor deemed appropriate to accommodate common differences between design parameters and field


210010-2

construction practices. Under no circumstances shall equipment with power ratings less than those indicated on the Drawings or specified herein be provided.

2. Reasonable efforts have been made to coordinate the electrical requirements of the fire suppression equipment with the electrical systems serving that equipment. Differences among manufacturers of fire suppression equipment make it impossible to produce a single electrical design which will satisfy the varying electrical requirements of those manufacturers. Consequently, the Contractor shall coordinate the electrical requirements of the fire suppression equipment actually furnished on this Project and provide the electrical systems required by that equipment. This coordination effort shall be completed prior to the installation of either the fire suppression equipment or the electrical systems serving that equipment. Electrical system revisions required to coordinate with the fire suppression equipment actually furnished shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Adhesives, sealants, and sealant primers used inside the building (defined as inside the weatherproofing envelope and applied on site) shall comply with SCAQMD Rule 1168-2005 for volatile organic compound content limits.

2. Aerosol adhesives shall comply with GS 36-2011 for volatile organic compound content limits.

G. Paints and Coatings:

1. Anticorrosive and antirust paints applied to interior ferrous metal shall not exceed a volatile organic compound content limit of 250 g/L per GS 11-2011.

1.03 SPACE CONDITIONS

A. Provide access to equipment and apparatus requiring operation, service or maintenance throughout the life of the system.

B. Piping and equipment shall not be installed in electrical equipment rooms, elevator

equipment rooms, or elevator shafts unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. In addition, piping or fire suppression equipment shall not be installed in the space equal to the width and depth of switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers from floor to structure above nor within the working space in front, rear and/or side (where rear and/or side access is required to work on equipment) of electrical equipment (switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, transformers, and starters). Dimensions of the working space shall be a minimum depth of 42" horizontally, the width of the equipment or 30", whichever is greater, and the height of the equipment or 78", whichever is greater. Minimum depth shall be increased to 60" for equipment rated over 600 V.


210010-3

1.04 ASBESTOS MATERIALS

A. Materials containing asbestos or any trace of asbestos related materials shall not be used on this Project.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed piping or conduit is that which can be seen when the base building is complete without opening or removing access doors or panels or accessible ceiling components.

B. Other piping and conduit is considered to be concealed.

1.06 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICE AND SYSTEMS

A. Schedule work so existing systems will not be interrupted when they are required for normal usage of the existing building. Obtain approval from the Owner and Architect at least 7 days prior to any utility interruption or connection.

B. Perform work at such time and in such manner as to cause minimum inconvenience to

the Owner and as approved by the Architect. No allowance will be made for lack of knowledge of existing conditions.

C. The existing engine-generator set shall remain operational during construction and

shall be accessible to the Owner. Protect the engine-generator set from dust, dirt and damage.

1.07 TEMPORARY SERVICES

A. Temporary utilities shall be in accordance with requirements specified herein.

B. Immediately after award of contract, determine the time of demolition of the existing building and the time of excavation for the new building, and be ready to: 1. Arrange with the Architect for making new connections to existing mains. 2. Remove existing equipment and cap piping. 3. Protect existing piping in the path of new construction.

1.08 PROVISION FOR FUTURE ADDITIONS

A. The design contemplates future additions. Provisions for these additions are indicated on the Drawings.

1.09 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED IN OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Installation of access panels in wall and ceiling construction.


210010-4

B. Cutting, coring, waterproofing, and patching of walls, floors, ceilings, roofs and structure of existing buildings.

C. Painting, except as specified herein.

D. Electric power, interlock, and control wiring, except as specified herein.

E. Installation of starters, contactors, thermal overload switches, and remote push

buttons, except as specified herein.

F. Demolition, including removal of piping and equipment. 1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 15 days after notice to proceed, submit a schedule indicating the proposed submission date of each submittal specified herein. Schedule shall anticipate the submittal review time, the possible need for resubmittals, and the time required for fabrication, shipping and integration into the construction sequence. Architect will advise of any conflicts in reviewing submittals that the proposed schedule presents.

B. Submittals shall be prepared in a line-by-line format corresponding to these

Specifications and shall indicate compliance with each requirement specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. 1. In addition to any other transmittals or cover sheets used, fill out and attach to

each individual submittal a copy of the Cover Sheet for Submittals to Newcomb & Boyd included at the end of this Section.

2. Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Indicate deviations, if any, including any from the manufacturer's installation

instructions. 4. Reproductions or electronic versions of design drawings shall not be used in the

preparation of shop drawings. 5. Resubmittals that are required to address review comments shall include a cover

transmittal with a written explanation of how each review comment has been addressed.

6. Submittals not specifically required, or not complying with the format requirements, will be returned unreviewed.

7. Shop drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD 2013 format. 8. Submittals in 3-ring binders shall include an index of contents and divider tabs.

C. Shop drawings shall include the following:

1. Trade shop drawings (i.e., fire suppression sprinkler working drawings, shall be submitted within 30 days after award of contract.

2. Approved trade shop drawings shall be utilized as the basis for the coordination drawings. Coordination drawings shall be submitted within 30 days after approval of trade shop drawings.


210010-5

3. Coordination drawings shall utilize either manual or electronic means of analyzing the work of each trade in spatial relationship with other trades. Locations of conflicts between trades, and the proposed resolution for each conflict, shall be noted on the coordination drawings submitted.

4. No work shall be fabricated and/or installed prior to receipt by the Contractor of approved trade shop drawings and approved coordination drawings without specific written authorization from the Architect. No change orders will be approved or design assistance provided for remedial field coordination activities for work fabricated and/or installed prior to receipt by the Contractor of approved trade shop drawings and approved coordination drawings.

D. General submittals shall include the following:

1. Performance Verification Supervisor qualifications. 2. Coordination drawings, with dimensions and elevations, of plumbing, HVAC, and

fire suppression work, including ductwork, equipment, piping with fittings, valves, dampers, accessories and sleeves where applicable according to trade, coordinated with the work of other trades, including HVAC, plumbing, fire suppression, electrical, structural, and architectural, minimum 1/4" = 1'-0" scale.

3. Seismic restraint devices, including calculations, restraint selection, installation details and written confirmation that a licensed engineer prepared the calculations.

E. Fire suppression submittals shall include the following:

1. Contractor's welders qualification test records. 2. Pipe hangers. 3. Piping and fittings, aboveground. 4. Sprinkler heads. 5. Valves. 6. Working drawings, approved and stamped by the insurer's agent prior to pipe

fabrication, with pipe lengths, hanger locations, hydraulic reference points, and data required by NFPA 13-2002, minimum 1/4" = 1' - 0" scale.

1.11 EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment and materials shall, unless otherwise specified herein, be new and shall be of the customary standard and quality furnished by the designated manufacturer for that catalogue number.

B. Materials and equipment shall be UL listed, and shall bear the UL listing mark on

products for which standards have been established and for which listing is regularly furnished by UL.


210010-6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers: 1. General: complete with rods and supports proportioned to the size of piping or

equipment to be supported. 2. For steel sprinkler and standpipe piping 4" and smaller: galvanized steel, flat

band type; Anvil 69, B-Line B3170 NF, or ERICO 115.

B. Hanger Rods: 1. One-piece steel type, threaded as required. 2. Sizes, unless specified otherwise herein, shall be as follows:

Pipe Size Rod Diameter

2" and smaller 0.375" 2.5" and 3" 0.5"

3. Sizes for gang or multiple hangers: calculated for the combined weight of the

piping and accessories. 4. Sizes for equipment hangers: calculated for the weight of the equipment

supported. 5. Sizes for sprinkler piping: in accordance with NFPA 13-2002.

C. Inserts:

1. Adjustable type: Anvil 282, B-Line B3014, or ERICO 355. 2. Continuous type: Anvil PS-5000, B-Line B32I, or ERICO CON.

D. Expansion Anchors:

1. In concrete: wedge, self-drilling, or drilled flush type. 2. In masonry: sleeve type. 3. Manufacturer: Hilti, ITW Ramset/Red Head, or Rawl.

E. Clamps for piping in bar joist construction: Anvil 92 or 93, B-Line B3031 or B3033,

or ERICO 300.

F. Channel strut systems: 14 gauge minimum galvanized steel, with factory-punched attachment holes. Straps shall be designed so that the attachment nut is captive on the shoulder of the strap when tightened. Attachment nuts shall be designed to provide a surface on the turned down edge while making positive contact with the side walls of the channel. Nuts, bolts, straps, and accessories shall be protected with same finish as channels. 1. Manufacturer: B-Line, Kindorf, Midland-Ross, or Unistrut.


210010-7

G. Pipe Stand Supports: 1. For fire suppression water piping: adjustable pipe saddles, stanchion type with

locknut nipple, reducer, flange and baseplate. Provide U-bolt yoke for pipe 12" and smaller. a. Manufacturer: Anvil 264, B-Line B3093, or ERICO 723.

2.02 VALVE TAGS

A. Minimum 19 gauge polished brass, 1.5" minimum size. Tags shall be octagonal. Stamped numbers and letters shall be not less than 0.75" high, and filled with black paint.

2.03 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Pipe identification shall be 5 mil thick, self-adhering vinyl plastic tape. Tape and legend shall be as follows:

Diameter (Including Insulation) Width Size of Legend Letters 0.75 - 1.25" 8" 0.5" 1.5 - 2" 8" 0.75" 2.5 - 6" 12" 1.25"

1. Legends shall be in full or abbreviated form, in contrasting color to background

color.

B. Nameplates and signs: laminated plastic, engraved with white letters. Background color shall be:

System Color

Fire suppression systems Red 2.04 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe except sleeves for concealed piping through floors not in structural members, and through interior drywall construction may be formed from 26 gauge galvanized sheet metal lapped and pop riveted.

2.05 PENETRATION SEALS

A. Firestops: 1. Refer to Section 07840, Penetration Firestopping.


210010-8

B. Expansion Seals: 1. Waterproof, modular, mechanical expansion type consisting of synthetic rubber

grommets or interlocking links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the penetrating item and the opening. Sizing of links and sleeve shall be determined by the manufacturer.

2. Manufacturer: Calpico Pipe Linx, Metraflex MetraSeal, or Thunderline Link Seal.

2.06 ACCESS PANELS - BUILDING

A. Refer to Section 08310, Access Doors and Panels. 2.07 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Split hinged type, constructed of chromium-plated steel or cast brass, sized to cover sleeve.

2.08 PAINTING

A. Paint shall be designed for the temperatures at which the system will operate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide protective covers, skids, plugs or caps to protect equipment and materials from damage or deterioration during construction.

B. Store equipment and material under cover, and off the ground or floors exposed to

rain.

C. For outdoor storage, protective covers of 10 mil thick black sheet plastic shall be fitted over equipment and materials. Covers shall be reinforced to withstand wind and precipitation. Set equipment and material on skids or platforms of height to avoid damage or deterioration from spattering and ground water.

D. Plug ends of pipes when work is stopped to prevent debris from entering the pipes.

E. Provide dust and debris protection for equipment, motors, and bearings operated

during construction up to date of substantial completion. 3.02 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. The existing installation shall remain as is except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Connect the new work with the existing work and adapt the existing work to the changes in the building and systems.


210010-9

B. Coordinate the installation of new piping and other equipment with existing equipment

which is to remain operational to avoid conflict with operating performance and working clearances.

C. Remove exposed piping rendered useless due to changes. Plug outlets in piping.

D. Relocate concealed piping which is exposed by the removal of walls and reconnect.

E. Sleeves left open by removal of piping shall be cut flush with the finished slab, and

filled with grout flush with both sides of slab.

F. Material and equipment which has been removed and not accepted by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.

G. Material and equipment which has been removed shall not be used in the new work,

except as specified herein.

H. Where existing piping and equipment is indicated on the Drawings, its size and location shall be verified.


A. Equipment shall be installed and connected as specified herein or indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for this Project. Furnish and install auxiliary piping, water seals, valves, and electrical connections recommended by the manufacturer for operation.

B. In unfinished areas designated for future build-out, install piping, conduit and

equipment tight against the structure to maximize future ceiling height.

C. Where water connection sizes at equipment vary from the pipe size indicated on the Drawings, provide appropriate reducers/increasers directly adjacent to the pipe-equipment unions. Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, the size of the valves and accessories dedicated to the equipment shall not be less than the pipe size to which they are connected.

3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers for piping shall be spaced according to NFPA 13-2002.

B. Where several pipes run parallel and in the same plane: 1. 2.5" and smaller: may be supported on gang or multiple hangers. Separate

copper tubing from ferrous supports with copper-plated steel or 4 psf sheet lead. 2. 3" and larger: support independently, parallel, and equally spaced.


210010-10

C. Supports for steel pipe and for copper tubing, except standpipe piping, 1.25" or larger, shall not be more than 10' apart.

D. Support piping independently of equipment.

E. Adjust hangers and supports so that loading is uniform.

F. Hanger rods shall be suspended from the structure. Do not suspend from other piping,

or equipment.

G. Inserts: 1. Use for piping 2.5" and larger in new concrete construction. 2. Where the weight to be supported by an insert exceeds 50% of its rated load,

install 2 No. 3 reinforcing rods, 3' long through each yoke of insert.

H. Expansion Anchors: 1. Use for piping in existing concrete and masonry construction. 2. Use for piping 2" and smaller in new concrete construction.

I. Where fire suppression systems are seismically braced, provide listed restraining

straps for C-type clamps used to attach piping hangers to the building structure. 3.05 SLEEVES

A. Provide where pipes pass through walls, floors and roofs, except in the following circumstances: 1. Concealed wall openings of the required diameter in non fire- or smoke-rated

construction. 2. Concealed floor openings formed by the use of plastic forming devices providing

a circular opening of the required diameter. 3. Core drilled concealed openings. Openings in roofs shall not be core drilled.

Obtain written permission prior to core drilling. 4. Openings in concrete floor slabs on grade.

B. Sleeves shall be placed into position prior to wall, floor, or roof construction. Sleeves

shall be tight-fitting and cut smooth.

C. Floor sleeves shall be cast in place, shall be watertight, and shall extend from the bottom of the slab to 2" above the finished floor.

D. Wall sleeves shall extend 1" on each side of walls.

E. Make sleeves through outside walls above and below grade watertight.

F. Sleeves in nonrated construction shall be sized to provide clearance all around pipe, to

accommodate thermal movement. Clearance shall be minimum 0.75".


210010-11

G. Furnish 4 psf lead flashing for sleeves through flat built-up roofs extending at least 8" from the sleeve in all directions.

H. For piping designed for future upward extension, provide steel pipe sleeves in the roof

slab accurately aligned for future extension of these lines. Fill these sleeves with a removable insulating material and coordinate sealing of sleeve tops with the roofing system.

I. Where fire suppression systems are seismically braced, sleeves and clearances for all

fire suppression piping shall be sized in accordance with the earthquake protection requirements of NFPA 13-2002.


A. General: 1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions to achieve

ratings and classifications specified herein. A copy of these instructions shall be maintained and available on site.

B. Firestops:

1. Close and firestop abandoned penetrations and penetrations through fire- and smoke-rated construction. Materials used to seal these penetrations shall continue the construction’s fire and smoke resistance ratings uninterrupted and shall maintain an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and hot gases. Install after installation of piping, and conduits.

C. Expansion Seals:

1. Use expansion seals between pipes and sleeves. Where walls exceed the width of expansion seals, use two seals, one being flush with the inside sleeve face and the second with the outside sleeve face. Fill the annular void space between the two seals.

3.07 VALVE TAGS AND SCHEDULES

A. Provide numbered brass tags on valves. Attach tags to valve stems with brass S-hooks

or brass chain.

B. Tags on new valves shall continue the numbering sequence of existing valves.

C. Provide for each system a typewritten schedule of valves giving number, location (room number), and function of each with a small scale diagram outlining general piping layout and location of each numbered valves.

3.08 EQUIPMENT AND EQUIPMENT ROOMS

A. Remove dust, dirt, rust, stains, and temporary covers.


210010-12

B. Foreign matter shall be blown, vacuumed, flushed, or cleaned out of and from new

equipment, piping, pumps, motors, bearings, devices, switches, controls, and panels.

C. Clean and polish identification plates.

D. In equipment rooms, clean equipment, piping, conduit, and room surfaces from dust and dirt and maintain in a clean condition from date of substantial completion until final completion of work and corrective work.

E. Remove excess material from the Project site.


A. Where fire suppression work is concealed by walls or ceilings, or is inaccessible, provide an access panel to provide access for service and maintenance.

B. Fire suppression work located above ceilings is considered accessible if the ceiling is

the accessible type and is arranged for access to the equipment.

C. Fire-rated access panels shall be provided in fire barriers with ratings to match the construction fire rating.

D. Installation of access panels is specified under another Division.

3.10 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide escutcheons where exposed piping passes through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas.

3.11 PAINTING

A. Except where otherwise specified herein, painting shall be done under another Division. Surfaces shall be left clean and free from oil.

B. Equipment factory finishes damaged or deteriorated during construction shall be

repaired to match original finish.

C. Where galvanizing is broken during fabrication or installation, recoat exposed areas with zinc-rich paint.

D. Exposed interior uninsulated black steel piping, and exposed nongalvanized ferrous

accessories, hangers, rods, inserts, and mechanical supports shall be prepared and painted with 1 coat of rust preventive paint prior to other painting or identification, or 2 coats of rust preventive paint if no other painting is specified.


210010-13

E. Conduits and pipe visible through architectural return air openings, grilles, registers and diffusers shall be painted flat black.

3.12 COORDINATION

A. Provide offsets, transitions, and fittings to coordinate the work of each trade with that of other trades, including HVAC, plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural, and architectural.

3.13 PHASING

A. Install work in phases as required by the Architectural Documents. 3.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. These operation and maintenance manual requirements supplement operation and maintenance manual documentation requirements of other Sections of these specifications.

B. Operation and maintenance documentation, in hardback 3-ring loose-leaf binders

except full size drawings and diskettes, shall cover the fire suppression systems. Documentation shall include an operation and maintenance documentation directory, emergency information, operation manual, maintenance manual, test reports, and construction documents.

C. The operation and maintenance documentation package shall be submitted as one

comprehensive package to the Architect 3 months before systems start-up, and shall be updated, revised and completed at completion of, construction.

D. Compile and coordinate the documentation for equipment and systems installed.

Documentation shall be typewritten and shall contain, at a minimum, the following information. 1. Introduction:

a. Project name, contractors' and subcontractors' names, addresses, and telephone and facsimile numbers.

b. Index. 2. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory:

a. Explanation of the identification system used, including lists of systems, equipment, and component identifiers and names.

3. Emergency Information: a. Information for technical and nontechnical personnel about actions

recommended during emergency situations to protect life and property and to minimize disruption to the building occupants. Emergencies shall, at a minimum, include: 1) Fire. 2) Security breach.


210010-14

3) Water outage. 4) Power failure.

4. Operation Manual: a. General Information:

1) Building function. 2) Building description. 3) Operating standards and logs.

b. Technical Information: 1) System description. 2) Operating routines and procedures. 3) Special procedures. 4) Basic troubleshooting.

5. Maintenance Manual: a. Descriptions (specifications) of the equipment and components. b. Description of function, as applicable: the function of the equipment,

procedures before start-up, functional parameters (input, output) at the design load and at part loads, and performance verification procedures.

c. Recommended maintenance and lubrication procedures and their recommended frequency for this Project.

d. Recommended list of spare parts, part numbers, and the place(s) from which they can be obtained.

e. Original purchase order number; date of purchase; name, address, and the telephone number of the vendor; and warranty information.

f. Installation information. g. Other information needed for the preparation of documents supporting the

management of operation and maintenance programs. 6. Test Reports and Certifications:

a. Copies of tests and certifications performed during manufacture and construction, including but not limited to the following: 1) Receipt for instruction of operating personnel. 2) Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping per

NFPA 13-2002. 7. Construction Documents:

a. Record drawings. b. Approved submittals, including revised shop drawings indicating as-

installed conditions. c. One copy of shop drawings bearing insurance company approval stamps. d. Equipment identification charts and schedules. e. Warranty certificates. f. Inspection certificates. g. Performance verification report.

E. Submit a receipt signed by the Owner acknowledging receipt of the operation and

maintenance documentation package.


210010-15

3.15 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Refer to Section 01770, Closeout Procedures. 3.16 MAINTENANCE

A. Equipment operated prior to the date of substantial completion shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.17 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING PERSONNEL

A. Provide the designated Owner's personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of equipment specified in Division 21. Conduct 2 formal instruction sessions for operating personnel. The first session shall be conducted at the time of start-up and check-out, and the second session shall be approximately 2 months later. Sessions shall be a minimum of 2 days for basic systems, and as specified herein. Sessions shall be conducted at the site.

B. Prepare and submit a syllabus describing an overview of the proposed training

program, describing how the training program will be conducted, when and where meetings are to be held, names and company affiliations of lecturers, description of contents and outline for each lecture, and recommended reference material and outside reading. Obtain direction from the Architect on which operating personnel shall be instructed in each system. Proposed training schedules, materials, and lesson plans shall be submitted to the Owner for review of the content and adequacy of the training of the Owner's personnel.

C. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on

each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor, or manufacturer’s representative. More than one party may be required to execute the training. The training program shall include the following, as appropriate for the system or equipment: 1. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on

training for each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including start-up, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm modes, and power failure.

2. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the operation and maintenance manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.

3. Attend training sessions for each type of equipment or system controlled by the automation system, to discuss the interaction of the automation system as it relates to the equipment or system, in addition to the training required for the automation system.


210010-16

4. Training shall include: a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction

material included in the operation and maintenance manuals. b. A review of the written operation and maintenance instructions emphasizing

safe and proper operating requirements, preventative and routine maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover, and any emergency procedures.

c. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees. e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions. f. Explanatory information included in the operation and maintenance

manuals and the location of plans and manuals in the facility. g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. h. Classroom sessions shall include the use of multimedia instruction material

as appropriate. i. Specific operating and maintenance procedures for:

1) Clean agent fire suppression systems, including emergency procedures, abort functions, and safety requirements.

5. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment.

6. Explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of local packaged controls not controlled by the central control system.

7. Training shall occur after testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Architect.

8. Obtain a receipt acknowledging completion of each item of instruction.


COVER SHEET FOR

SUBMITTALS TO NEWCOMB & BOYD Project: ________________________________________________ Date: Item: Submittal Number: Manufacturer: Model: Specification Paragraph and/or Drawing Number: Capacity: Electrical Characteristics (including identification of all separate connections or services required): Accessories: Options: Deviations (if any; if none, state so): General Contractor Approval:

City of Atlanta (APD) Crime Lab-Phase 1Atlanta Public Safety Annex

210090-1

SECTION 210090PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General provisions and other fire suppression systems are specified in other Sections of Division 21.

B. Performance verification is an ongoing process and shall be performed throughout construction. Performance verification verifies that systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Construction Documents.

C. This Section covers fire suppression systems performance verification, as required to demonstrate that the equipment and systems of Division 21 are ready for safe and satisfactory operation, as defined by the Construction Documents. Performance verification shall include, but shall not be limited to, identification of piping and equipment, cleaning, lubrication, start-up, check-out, and testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems, preparation of equipment and systems documentation and of operation and maintenance manuals, Owner training, and preparation of record drawings.

D. Performance verification shall conclude with the completion of required deferred testing, training, and system documentation as specified herein and required to demonstrate the proper operation of the fire suppression equipment and systems provided by this Division.

E. Verify, at a minimum, the performance of the following systems and equipment and witness the following tests:1. Section 213000, Fire Suppression:

a. Aboveground pipe.b. Alarm and supervisory devices.


A. Provide a Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor with ten years experience in fire suppression contracting. The Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor shall become familiar with the Owner's project requirements and the requirements of the performance verification process as defined in this Section. The Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate and execute the required performance verification activities.

B. The Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor shall review submittal data for conformance with the requirements of the Project, shall monitor compliance with the requirements specified herein for storage and protection of equipment during construction, shall authorize the initial starting of equipment and systems in a manner to avoid damage to equipment, shall oversee start-up, testing and balancing, and shall


210090-2

document that the scheduled and specified performance requirements of each systemhave been accomplished.

C. Refer to ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005, Addenda a-d-2010, The Commissioning Process, and Guideline 4-2008, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.

1.03 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor shall be responsible for scheduling, supervising, and coordinating and executing the start-up, testing, and performance verification activities as specified herein. Include and itemize the cost of performance verification in the contract price, and in each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, performance verification efforts and documentation, operation and maintenance data, and training as specified herein.

B. Fire suppression performance verification shall take place in three phases. Performance verification requirements for each phase are as follows:1. Construction Phase:

a. Attend a performance verification scoping meeting and additional such meetings, initially scheduled monthly until prefunctional testing of equipment and systems begins, and weekly thereafter during the construction phase to facilitate the performance verification process. The Fire SuppressionPerformance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate meeting attendance.

b. Report in writing to the Architect, at least as often as performance verification meetings are scheduled, concerning the status of fire suppression activities as they affect the performance verification process, the status of each discrepancy identified the prefunctional and functional testing process, explanations of any disagreements with the identified deficiencies, and the proposed resolution and schedule for correction of the deficiency.

c. Provide documentation of installed systems and equipment, and develop functional testing procedures. This documentation shall include detailed manufacturer installation, start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures; full details of any Owner-contracted tests; pump curves; full factory testing reports, if any; and full warranty information, including responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force. In addition, the installation, start-up and check-out materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field check-out sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Architect.

d. Develop and submit to the Architect for review and comment, prior to equipment or system start-up, a complete start-up and initial check-out plan using manufacturer's start-up procedures and prefunctional checklists for the performance of the equipment to be verified.

e. Assist in clarifying the proposed operation and control of equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.


210090-3

f. Prepare the specific functional test procedures as specified herein and review the proposed functional test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety, and equipment protection, and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests. Obtain Architect approval for proposed functional test procedures.

g. Prepare a preliminary schedule for performance verification activities, including pipe pressure and leakage testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, and testing and adjusting start and completion, and update the schedule during the construction period, as appropriate. Notify the Architectimmediately when the performance verification activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction.

h. Fire suppression equipment start-up shall not be initiated until completion of pressure and leakage testing and cleaning as specified in other Sections of Division 21.

i. Provide start-up and prefunctional testing for equipment, and execute the fire suppression-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for the verification of the performance of all the equipment during the start-up and initial check-out process.

j. Perform and document start-up and system operational check-out procedures, providing a copy to the Architect.

k. Correct noncompliance items before beginning functional performance testing. 2. Acceptance Phase:

a. Place equipment and systems into operation and continue their operation during each working day of the testing and performance verification activities, as required.

b. For each system or area, have required prefunctional checklists, calibrations, start-up and prefunctional tests of the fire suppression systems and associated controls completed prior to beginning the testing and adjusting process.

c. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting and prefunctional testing of equipment and to execute the functional tests for each individual piece of equipment and system. Technicians shall be available and present during the agreed upon scheduled tests and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.

d. Perform functional testing for specified equipment and interpret the test data, as necessary.

e. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as identified by the Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor and interpreted by the Architect and retest the equipment, as required to demonstrate proper operation and performance.

f. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals as specified herein, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.

g. Maintain marked-up record drawings and produce final record drawings of Project drawings and contractor-generated coordination drawings.

h. Provide specified training of the Owner’s operating personnel.


210090-4

i. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty.

3. Warranty Period: a. Execute deferred functional testing.b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to operations and

maintenance manuals and as-built drawings system or equipment modifications made during the warranty period and those identified in any deferred functional performance testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Standard testing equipment required to perform start-up, initial check-out, prefunctional, and required functional testing shall be provided for the equipment or systembeing tested.

B. Test equipment shall be of the quality and accuracy required to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified and shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, or as specified herein. Equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates available on request.1. Pressure sensors shall have a certified calibration within the 12 months and a

resolution of 0.05% of sensor range. Accuracy of pressure test equipment shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested.

2. Accuracy of other sensors shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit additional documentation as required to support the performance verification process. This additional submittal documentation shall include, at a minimum, the proposed start-up and initial check-out procedures, and prefunctional checklists.

3.02 START-UP PLAN AND PREFUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Prefunctional testing shall be required for each piece of equipment to ensure that the equipment and systems are properly installed and ready for operation, so that functional testing may proceed without delays. Follow the approved start-up, initial check-out, and prefunctional testing procedures. Sampling strategies shall not be used for prefunctional testing. The prefunctional testing for equipment and subsystems of a given system shall be successfully completed and documented prior to functional testing of the system.


210090-5

B. Procedures for performance verification shall include:1. Start-up and initial check-out plan: develop the detailed start-up and prefunctional

testing plans for equipment and systems that are to be performance verified, as specified herein. Review the proposed procedures and prefunctional testing documentation to ensure that there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed.

2. The start-up and initial check-out plan shall consist, as a minimum, of the following:a. The manufacturer’s standard written start-up and check-out procedures copied

from the installation manuals and manufacturer’s normally used field check-out sheets. The plan shall include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.

b. First-run checklist for equipment, including:1) Equipment properly set.2) Alignment of shafts and couplings.3) Piping and equipment properly connected. 4) Completion of initial lubrication procedures.5) Wiring properly connected.6) Electrical overload relays appropriate for load.7) Electrical accessories properly installed and adjusted.8) Controls, safeties, and time switches properly set.9) Verification of direction of motor rotation after final electrical

connections by jogging motor.10) Measurement of ampere draw of electric motors and comparison with

nameplate rating and with overload heater ratings.11) Monitoring of temperature build-up in motors and bearings.

c. Contractor-developed prefunctional checklists.3. Identify which trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line

item tasks and note that trade on the form. Each form may have more than one trade responsible for its execution.

C. Four weeks prior to start-up, schedule equipment and systems start-up and check-out and notify the Architect in writing. The execution of the prefunctional checklists, start-up and check-out shall be directed and performed by the Contractor, in accordance with manufacturer's published procedures. The Architect shall be present for the start-up, check-out, and prefunctional testing of the first unit of each type of equipment, and any other tests he designates.

D. Sensor calibration: calibration of sensors associated with a given piece of equipment or system shall be included as part of the prefunctional testing and listed on the appropriate test checklists and reports for the system.

E. Completed start-up, check-out, and prefunctional test forms shall be completed and submitted to the Architect for review. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the


210090-6

procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the Architect within 2 days of test completion. The Architect shall review the Contractor’s start-up and prefunctional testing reports and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. The Contractor shall correct items that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the Architect as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, the Architect shall recommend approval of the start-up and prefunctional testing ofeach systemand schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.

F. Complete start-up and prefunctional testing for a system before functional test of that system may proceed.

3.03 RETESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND/OR SYSTEMS

A. Provide labor and materials required for retesting of any functional test found to be deficient.

B. Prior to retesting, submit required data indicating that the deficient items have been completed and/or corrected to the Architect for approval and rescheduling of the functional test. If during the retesting it becomes apparent that the deficient items have not been completed and/or corrected as indicated in the data provided by the Contractor, the retesting shall be stopped. Costs for the design team to further supervise the retesting of a functional test shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.04 DEFERRED TESTING

A. Schedule and coordinate, with the approval of the Architect, tests delayed until building construction is completed, required building occupancy or loading, or other conditions are suitable for the demonstration of equipment or system’s performance, as specified herein. Deferred testing shall be executed, documented, and deficiencies corrected as specified herein for functional testing.

3.05 TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NONCONFORMANCE, AND APPROVALS

A. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the functional test procedure forms or on anattached sheet. The functional test procedure forms and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the Architect within 2 days of test completion. The Architect shall review the Contractor's start-up and prefunctional testing documentation and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. Work with the Architect to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. Correct items that are deficient or incomplete in a timely manner, and notify the Architect as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a


210090-7

statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.

B. As functional performance testing progresses and deficiencies are identified, work with the Architect to resolve the issues.

3.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems covered in Division 21 and deliver this documentation for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals prior to the training of the Owner's personnel.


A. The Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor shall schedule, coordinate and assemble, and deliver the documentation of training required by Division 21.

3.08 FUNCTIONAL TESTS

A. Functional test requirements for the demonstration of proper system and equipment operation shall be defined by the Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor. Execution of these test and demonstration of the required performance shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems or subsystems at the discretion of the Fire Suppression Performance Verification Supervisor. Architect. Beginning system testing before full completion of construction shall not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including prefunctional checklists.

C. Functional testing shall be completed and test documentation approved by the Architectbefore the Project will be considered substantially complete.



213000-1

SECTION 213000 FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General provisions and other fire suppression systems are specified in other Sections of Division 21.

B. This Section covers the modification of fire sprinkler systems.

C. The building shall be protected by an automatic sprinklers system as defined by NFPA

13-2002.

D. Performance verification is specified in Section 210090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of the performance verification specified therein.


A. Products and components installed in the system shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

B. Fire suppression systems shall be installed by a company regularly engaged in the

installation of sprinkler systems and which holds a current sprinkler contractor's license from the State of Georgia. Submittals shall bear the stamp or the license number of the installing contractor.

C. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, materials shall be new and free from defects.

D. Materials and equipment used for similar applications shall be the products of one

manufacturer.

E. Design shall be prepared under the supervision of a NICET Level III technician certified in fire protection engineering technology and automatic sprinkler system layout.

F. Minimum service pressure rating for aboveground pipe, valves, and fittings shall be

175 psig unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. 1.03 BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Obtain a current fire hydrant waterflow test at the site. The test shall be made in accordance with NFPA 13-2002 and shall indicate normal static pressure conditions, residual pressure, and flow rate. A discharge coefficient of 0.80 shall be used to calculate the flow from the hydrant.


213000-2

B. Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 225 ft² for Light Hazard areas and 130 ft² for Ordinary

Hazard areas.

C. Contractor shall develop coordinated installation drawings and hydraulic calculations including the following: 1. Reflected ceiling plan showing the location, type, and temperature rating of sprinkler

heads mounted on the ceiling. 2. Piping plans showing offsets, pipe elevations, sizes, and lengths; hangers types and

locations; seismic restraint locations and types; hydraulic calculation reference points; remote area location and density.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ABOVEGROUND PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel pipe: black steel conforming to ASTM A53/A53M-2012, ASTM A135/A135M-2009, or ASTM A795/A795M-2008. Use galvanized pipe where indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Piping 2" and smaller shall be schedule 40. Wet system piping 2.5" and larger shall be schedule 10 conforming to NFPA 13-2002.

B. Cast iron fittings: standard weight fittings shall be UL classified for 175 psig. Fittings

shall comply with ASTM A126-2004 (2009). Threaded fittings shall comply with ASME B16.4-2006. Flanged fittings shall comply with ASME B16.1-2010. Gaskets for flanged fittings shall be full-face type of red sheet rubber. Fittings on galvanized piping systems shall be galvanized.

C. Malleable iron fittings: standard weight threaded fittings, UL classified for 300 psig,

conforming to ASME B16.3-2006 and ASTM A197/A197-2000 (2011).

D. Welding fittings: UL listed and FM approved class 150 factory-fabricated welded outlets, with foundry mark. No other type of welded outlet shall be used. 1. Manufacturer: Allied, Bonny Forge, or Sprinkler Fittings.

E. Grooved couplings and fittings: grooved mechanical fittings and couplings using an

elastomeric gasket enclosed by a split malleable or ductile iron housing. Fittings and couplings on dry piping systems shall be cut-grooved type. Malleable iron shall comply with ASTM A47/A47M-1999 (2009). Ductile iron shall comply with ASTM A536-1984 (2009). Self-grooving couplings and fittings employing set screws or plain end pipe shall not be used. Segment-welded fittings shall not be used. Fittings on galvanized piping systems shall be galvanized. 1. Manufacturer: Central Sprink, Grinnell, or Victaulic.


213000-3

2.02 VALVES

A. Valve size, working pressure, and the manufacturer's name or trademark shall be permanently affixed to valve bodies. Drain, test and gauge valves are exempt from this requirement.

B. Indicating control valves shall be indicating butterfly type.

C. Valves for service pressure up to and including 175 psig:

1. Manufacturer: Kennedy 68, NIBCO F-607-0, or Stockham G634. 2. Indicating butterfly valves: UL listed, FM approved, with cast iron body, bronze

mountings, flange or groove connections, integral tamper switch, and handwheel operator. a. Manufacturer: Grinnell 8000FP, NIBCO 3510, or Pont-A-Mousson JPL.

2.03 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. General: 1. Sprinkler heads shall be the product of one manufacturer.

2. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, sprinkler heads shall have a 0.5" orifice

and 0.5" threaded connection.

B. Upright sprinklers: quick response type with rough brass body.

C. Pendent sprinklers: quick response type with chrome body and shallow 2-piece deep chrome escutcheon.

D. Pendent sprinklers: recessed, quick response type with chrome white polyester body and

chrome white ceiling cup.

E. Pendent sprinklers: quick response type with chrome body. UL listed for extended coverage up to 16' x 20'.

F. Sidewall sprinklers: quick response type with chrome body and shallow chrome

escutcheon. UL listed for extended coverage up to 16' x 20'.

G. Manufacturer: Match existing. 2.04 FIRE VALVE AND CABINETS

A. Fire valve cabinets shall be steel with a double-strength full metal door, piano-type hinge, "Fire Valve" decal, and pull-handle latch with roller catch. Cabinet and door shall be finished with white prime polyester coating ready for finish painting. Cabinets shall be recessed type unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Manufacturer: Croker, Elkhart, JL Industries, Larsen, or Potter-Roemer.


213000-4

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Hangers and supports: UL listed and FM approved, and as specified in Section 210010, General.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ABOVEGROUND PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Run pipe parallel to column centerlines. Pipe shall be installed as high as possible to maintain maximum head room. Provide auxiliary drains to drain the piping system.

B. Piping arrangements shall be made as compact as possible. Spool pieces and pipe nipples

shall be as short as installation will allow.

C. Fittings and joints shall be assembled using threaded, flanged, or grooved connections. No welded joints or weld formations, either shop- or field-fabricated, shall be used except as specified herein.

D. Threads cut into galvanized pipe shall be painted with zinc-rich paint.

E. Threads on fittings and bolts shall be fully engaged. Threads shall be made up using joint

compound or Teflon tape.

F. Drains and discharges from relief valves, ball drips, drip rims and test connections shall be piped to spill directly over the nearest floor drain. High and low pressure drains shall not be connected together unless specifically indicated on the Drawings.

G. Torch cutting is not permitted as a means of modifying sprinkler systems.

H. Joints and fittings in copper tubing shall be threaded.

I. System layout shall follow the layout and sizes indicated on the Drawings. Provide

coordination required with other trades. 3.02 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Install sprinkler guards on sprinklers located lower than 7' above the floor, and on sprinklers located in electrical rooms, telecommunications rooms, elevator equipment rooms, and hoistways.

B. No sprinkler head shall be located closer than 6" from an adjacent wall.


213000-5

C. Refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans for exact head locations. Sprinkler heads shall be aligned on the ceiling and centered in the ceiling tiles. Head escutcheon plates shall be set tight against the ceiling.

D. Locate sprinkler heads under exposed ductwork over 48" wide, including insulation.

3.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Hangers and Supports: 1. The installation and spacing of hangers for sprinklers shall conform to NFPA 13-

2013. 2. Sprinkler piping below ductwork shall not be supported directly from the ductwork

but by trapeze hangers or angles conforming to NFPA 13-2002.

B. Hydraulic identification nameplates: provide nameplates for each sprinkler system recording data required by NFPA 13-2002.

C. Test and drain connections: where failure of a pressure reducing valve would subject the

sprinkler system to pressures exceeding 175 psig, install a pressure gauge with cock on the inlet of the drain connection and a 0.5" automatic pressure relief valve in a bypass position around the drain connection. Set relief valve to open at 175 psig.

3.04 PAINTING

A. Interior: fire protection pipe and fittings exposed to view without the removal of ceilings shall be cleaned to remove grease, oil, and scale and then painted 1 coat of Rust-Oleum X-60 metal primer followed by 1 coat of Rust-Oleum 964 red, high gloss finish. Do not paint copper, brass, or glass surfaces, sprinkler heads, valve stems, or nameplates.

3.05 TESTS

A. Prior to covering the joints of underground pipe, the pipe shall be hydrostatically tested for 2 hours at a pressure of 200 psig. Leakage allowance shall be within the limit specified in NFPA 24-2002. The municipal water main and the plumbing system shall be isolated for this test. Submit a Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping in accordance with NFPA 13-2002 and NFPA 24-2002.

B. Prior to being concealed by walls or ceilings, each portion of the interior piping shall be

hydrostatically tested for 2 hours at 200 psig measured at the bottom of the system. Leaks shall be repaired until the system test pressure is maintained for 2 hours. Hydrostatic tests shall be made after drop nipples have been cut back and sprinkler heads have been installed. Submit a Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping in accordance with NFPA 13-2002.

C. At the completion of the work, conduct a comprehensive inspection of new sprinkler

systems to ensure that new systems are operational. Submit a letter certifying that, as of


213000-6

the date of the inspection, manual sprinkler control valves were open, water flow and tamper switches were operational, sprinkler heads were installed.

D. The sprinkler system acceptance tests shall be witnessed by representatives of the Owner,

Architect, the Contractor, insurance underwriters, and the local fire department. Provide test equipment and instruments. The acceptance test shall demonstrate operation of initiating detector system, water flow switches, time to trip valve, time to discharge water from test connection, and manual and automatic operating sequences. Submit a typed report, similar to that shown in NFPA 13-2002, recording test results, pressure switch settings, motor current and voltage readings, and witnesses.



220010-1

SECTION 220010 GENERAL


A. These plumbing general provisions specified herein apply to all Sections of Division 22.

B. Refer to the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 for special

requirements and conditions which apply to all Sections of Division 22.

C. Performance verification is specified in Section 220090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of the performance verification specified therein.


A. Conform to the following: 1. International Energy Conservation Code-2009 with Georgia State Amendments-

2012. 2. International Fuel Gas Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012. 3. International Plumbing Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012.

B. Codes, standards and regulations specified herein refer to the edition date. Revisions

and addenda to these codes, standards and regulations shall be part of these specifications. Provisions of referenced codes, standards, and regulations do not create duty or responsibility by the Architect or the Owner, unless otherwise specified herein.

C. Codes, standards and regulations referred to are minimum standards. Where the

requirements of these specifications or drawings exceed those of the codes, standards and regulations, the drawings or specifications shall govern.

D. Adhesives, Mastics, and Sealants:

1. Adhesives, mastics, sealants, and sealant primers used inside the building (defined as inside the weatherproofing envelope and applied on site) shall comply with SCAQMD Rule 1168-2005 for volatile organic compound content limits.

2. Aerosol adhesives shall comply with GS 36-2011 for volatile organic compound

content limits.


220010-2

E. Paints and Coatings:



A. Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and, unless explicitly dimensioned, indicate approximate locations of fixtures, apparatus, equipment and piping. Changes in the location, and offsets, of same which are not shown on the Drawings but are necessary in order to accommodate building conditions and coordination with the work of other trades, shall be made.

B. Provide access to equipment and apparatus requiring operation, service or

maintenance throughout the life of the system.

C. Piping or equipment shall not be installed in electrical equipment rooms, elevator equipment rooms, or elevator shafts unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. In addition, piping or plumbing equipment shall not be installed in the space equal to the width and depth of switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers from floor to structure above nor within the working space in front, rear and/or side (where rear and/or side access is required to work on equipment) of electrical equipment (switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, transformers, and starters). Dimensions of the working space shall be a minimum depth of 42" horizontally, the width of the equipment or 30", whichever is greater, and the height of the equipment or 78", whichever is greater. Minimum depth shall be increased to 60" for equipment rated over 600 V.



1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed piping is that which can be seen when the tenant fit-up is complete without opening or removing access doors or panels or accessible ceiling components.

B. Other piping is considered to be concealed.




220010-3

B. Perform work at such time and in such manner as to cause minimum inconvenience to the Owner and as approved by the Architect. No allowance will be made for lack of knowledge of existing conditions.





D. Casework and laboratory equipment.

E. Sterilizers.

F. Fume hoods and canopy hoods, with utility connections.

G. Demolition, including removal of fixtures, piping, and equipment.

1.08 SUBMITTALS



Specifications and shall indicate compliance with each requirement specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. 1. In addition to any other transmittals or cover sheets used, fill out and attach to

each individual submittal a copy of the Cover Sheet for Submittals to Newcomb & Boyd included at the end of this Section.


instructions. 4. Resubmittals that are required to address review comments shall include a cover



6. Submittals, when submitted in 3-ring binders, shall include an index of contents and divider tabs.


220010-4

C. Plumbing submittals shall include the following: 1. Backflow preventers. 2. Chemical-resisting piping and fittings. 3. Domestic water piping and fittings. 4. Drains and cleanouts. 5. Gauges and thermometers. 6. Inulsation. 7. Valves. 8. Hose bibs. 9. Water heaters and thermal expansion tanks.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers: 1. General:

a. Complete with rods and supports proportioned to the size of piping or equipment to be supported.

b. For cast iron pipe: steel or malleable iron, unless specified otherwise herein.

2. For cast iron pipe, steel pipes 2.5" and smaller, steel plumbing piping 3"and larger, and piping insulated to prevent sweating: galvanized; Anvil 260, B-Line B3100, or ERICO 401.

3. For copper piping 4" and smaller: copper-plated; Anvil CT-69, B-Line B3170 CT, or ERICO 101.

4. For PVDF piping: coated; Anvil 69C, B-Line B3170 NFC, or ERICO 102.

B. Hanger Rods: 1. One-piece steel type, threaded as required. 2. Sizes, unless specified otherwise herein, shall be as follows:

Pipe Size Rod Diameter 2" and smaller 0.375" 2.5" and 3" 0.5" 4" 0.625"


220010-5

3. Sizes for gang or multiple hangers: calculated for the combined weight of the piping and accessories.

4. Sizes for equipment hangers: calculated for the weight of the equipment

supported.

C. Expansion Anchors: 1. In concrete: wedge, self-drilling, or drilled flush type. 2. In masonry: sleeve type. 3. Manufacturer: Hilti, ITW Ramset/Red Head, or Rawl.

D. Clamps for piping in bar joist construction: Anvil 92 or 93, B-Line B3031 or B3033,

or ERICO 300.

E. Insulation protectors: Anvil 167, B-Line B3151, or ERICO 125.

F. Channel strut systems: 14 gauge minimum galvanized steel, with factory-punched attachment holes. Straps shall be designed so that the attachment nut is captive on the shoulder of the strap when tightened. Attachment nuts shall be designed to provide a surface on the turned down edge while making positive contact with the side walls of the channel. Nuts, bolts, straps, and accessories shall be protected with same finish as channels. 1. Manufacturer: B-Line, Kindorf, Midland-Ross, or Unistrut.

2.02 VALVE TAGS

A. Minimum 19 gauge polished brass, 1.5" minimum size. Tags shall be round. Stamped numbers and letters shall be not less than 0.75" high, and filled with black paint.



Diameter (Including Insulation) Width Size of Legend Letters 0.75" to 1.25" 8" 0.5" 1.5" to 2" 8" 0.75" 2.5" to 6" 12" 1.25"

1. Legends shall be in full or abbreviated form, in contrasting color to background

color.


220010-6

2.04 SLEEVES




2.06 GROUT

A. Nonshrink type, conforming to ASTM C1107/C1107M-2011 when tested at fluid consistency. Grout shall exhibit zero bleeding at every age when mixed to fluid consistency. Minimum 28 day compressive strength, when mixed to fluid consistency, shall be 7000 psi.

B. Manufacturer: Cormix, or Master Builders.


A. Refer to Section 083113, Access Doors and Frames. 2.08 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Split hinged type, constructed of chromium-plated steel or cast brass, sized to fit over insulation and to cover sleeve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DURING

CONSTRUCTION



rain.


D. Plug ends of pipes when work is stopped to prevent debris from entering the pipes.


220010-7

E. Provide dust and debris protection for equipment.

F. Provide protective covers on floor drains during construction to prevent debris from

entering the waste piping system. Protection shall not deface drain grate. 3.02 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS


B. Coordinate the installation of new piping and other equipment with existing equipment

which is to remain operational to avoid conflict with operating performance and working clearances.

C. Remove piping rendered useless due to changes. Cap outlets in piping.

D. Material and equipment which has been removed and not accepted by the Owner shall

become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.

E. Material and equipment which has been removed shall not be used in the new work.

F. Where existing piping and equipment is indicated on the Drawings, its size and location shall be verified.


A. Equipment shall be installed and connected as specified herein or indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for this Project. Furnish and install auxiliary piping, water seals, valves, and electrical connections recommended by the manufacturer for operation.

B. Provide roughing, traps, tail pieces, fittings, and connecting piping, and make final

water supply and drain connections to equipment.

C. Refer to manufacturer's or equipment supplier's shop drawings for exact type, number, location, dimensions and size of connections to equipment, including but not limited to, laboratory equipment.

D. In unfinished areas designated for future build-out, install piping, conduit and

equipment tight against the structure to maximize future ceiling height.

E. Where water pipe sizes at equipment vary from the pipe size indicated on the Drawings, provide appropriate reducers/increasers directly adjacent to the pipe-equipment unions.


220010-8

F. Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, the size of the valves

and accessories dedicated to the equipment shall not be less than the pipe size to which they are connected.


A. Where several pipes run parallel and in the same plane: 1. 2.5" and smaller: may be supported on gang or multiple hangers. Separate

copper tubing from ferrous supports. 2. 3" and larger: support independently, parallel, and equally spaced.

B. Horizontal Supports:

1. Supports for copper tubing, 1.25" or larger, shall not be more than 10' apart. Supports for copper tubing 1" and smaller shall be not more than 5' apart. Pipes shall be supported within 1' of each elbow and tee, and for piping 3" and larger, and at each valve and strainer.

2. Support each horizontal length of cast iron pipe, excluding fittings, at 5' on center, maximum.

3. Support each horizontal length of PVDF piping 30" on center for 0.75" and smaller, 36" on center for 1" to 1.5", and 48" on center for larger.

C. Vertical Supports:

1. Anchor vertical water risers at their midpoints with offset pipe clamps attached to the building structure.

D. General:

1. Support domestic hot and cold water piping in chases or walls behind plumbing fixtures with brackets secured to cast iron stacks or metal studs.

2. Size hangers for insulated piping to bear on outside of insulation. Hangers shall be sized for noncompressed insulation thickness.

3. Provide insulation protectors. 4. Support piping independently of equipment. 5. Adjust hangers and supports so that loading is uniform. 6. Hanger rods shall be suspended from the structure. Do not suspend from other

piping or equipment. 3.05 SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves where pipes pass through walls and floors, except in the following circumstances: 1. Cast iron pipe built into masonry walls. 2. Concealed wall openings of the required diameter in non fire- or smoke-rated

construction, unless specified herein to have voids packed with fiberglass and caulking.

3. Core drilled openings. Obtain written permission prior to core drilling.


220010-9

B. Sleeves shall be placed into position prior to wall construction. Sleeves shall be tight-fitting and cut smooth.

C. Wall sleeves shall extend 1" on each side of walls.

D. Size sleeves to have a minimum of 1" annular space to the outside diameter of pipe

and/or the pipe insulation, except as follows: 1. Sleeves in nonrated construction shall be sized to provide clearance all around

pipe, including insulation, to accommodate thermal movement. Clearance shall be minimum 0.75".


A. Firestops: 1. Close and firestop penetrations through fire- and smoke-rated construction.

Materials used to seal these penetrations shall continue the construction’s fire and smoke resistance ratings uninterrupted and shall maintain an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and hot gases. Install after installation of piping and conduits.

3.07 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING

A. Identify piping specified under this Division in accordance with ASME A13.1-2007.

B. Legends shall be on the lower quarters of the pipe except where such location would be obscured. Arrow tape shall be wrapped completely around the pipe at each end of the legend with arrows pointing in the direction of flow.

C. Locate pipe identification as follows:

1. Equipment rooms: a. Within 18" of each valve or valve assembly. b. Within 36" of each 90º elbow, connection to equipment or vessel, point

where pipe enters shafts and pierces outside walls. c. On not over 20' intervals along exposed piping.

2. Above suspended ceilings: a. Within 18" of each valve or valve assembly. b. At tees within 36" of both main and branch. c. Within 36" of each 90º elbow. d. On not over 20' intervals.

3. Piping exposed in rooms other than equipment areas: a. Omit identification of piping 0.5" and smaller exposed at connections to

equipment or plumbing fixtures. b. With the above exception, identify at not less than 1 point each piping run

visible in each room with identification on not over 20' intervals.


220010-10

D. Schedule of Piping Identification:

Piping System Tape Abbreviated and Contents Color Legend Legend Drainage Systems Soil Green Soil S Waste Green Waste W Rainwater (Existing) Green Rain RW Vent Green Vent V Water Systems Cold Water Green Dom. Cold Water Dom. CW Hot Water Green Dom. Hot Water Dom. HW Hot Water Circulating Green Dom. Hot Water Circulating Dom. HWC Emergency Fixture Tepid Water Green Emer. Fix. Tepid Wat. Emer. Fix. TW Nonpotable Water Yellow Nonpotable Wat. NP Wat. Laboratory Systems Chemical Waste Yellow Chem. Waste ChW Chemical Vent Yellow Chem. Vent ChV


A. Provide numbered brass tags on valves except at plumbing fixtures. Attach tags to valve stems with brass S-hooks or brass chain.


C. Provide for each system a typewritten schedule of valves giving number, location

(room number), and function of each with a small scale diagram outlining general piping layout and location of each numbered valves.

3.09 CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT AND EQUIPMENT ROOMS


B. Foreign matter shall be blown, vacuumed, flushed, or cleaned out of and from new equipment, fixtures, floor drains, and piping.


220010-11

C. In equipment rooms, clean equipment, insulation, piping, conduit, and room surfaces from dust and dirt and maintain in a clean condition from date of substantial completion until final completion of work and corrective work.

D. Remove excess material from the Project site.


A. Where plumbing work is concealed by walls or ceilings, or is inaccessible, provide an access panel to provide access for service and maintenance.

B. Plumbing work located above ceilings is considered accessible if the ceiling is the

accessible type and is arranged for access to the equipment.


D. Installation of access panels is specified under another Division.

3.11 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide escutcheons where exposed piping passes through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas and each janitor's closet.

3.12 PAINTING





D. Nongalvanized ferrous accessories, hangers, rods, inserts, and supports shall be

prepared and painted with 2 coats of rust preventive paint if no other painting is specified.

E. Insulation and pipe visible through architectural return air openings, grilles, registers

and diffusers shall be painted flat black.


220010-12

3.13 COORDINATION

A. Provide offsets, transitions, and fittings to coordinate the work of each trade with that of other trades, including HVAC, fire protection, electrical, structural, and architectural.

3.14 PHASING

A. Install work in phases as required by the Architectural Documents. 3.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS


B. Operation and maintenance documentation, in hardback 3-ring loose-leaf binders.

Documentation shall include an operations and maintenance documentation directory, emergency information, operating manual, maintenance manual, test reports, and construction documents.


comprehensive package to the Architect 3 months before systems start-up, and shall be updated, revised and completed at completion of, construction.

D. Compile and coordinate the documentation for equipment and systems installed.

Documentation shall be typewritten and shall contain, at a minimum, the following information. 1. Introduction:


b. Index. 2. Operations and Maintenance Documentation Directory:



recommended during emergency situations to protect life and property and to minimize disruption to the building occupants. Emergencies shall, at a minimum, include: 1) Water outage. 2) Plumbing overflow or rupture.

4. Operating Manual: a. General Information:

1) Building function. 2) Building description.


220010-13

3) Operating standards and logs. b. Technical Information:

1) System description. 2) Operating routines and procedures. 3) Special procedures. 4) Basic troubleshooting.

5. Maintenance Manual: a. Descriptions (specifications) of the equipment and components. b. Recommended list of spare parts, part numbers, and the place(s) from which

they can be obtained. c. Original purchase order number; date of purchase; name, address, and the

telephone number of the vendor; and warranty information. d. Installation information. e. Other information needed for the preparation of documents supporting the

management of operation and maintenance programs. 6. Test Reports and Certifications:

a. Copies of tests and certifications performed during manufacture and construction, including but not limited to the following: 1) Receipt for instruction of operating personnel. 2) Certification of plumbing piping tests. 3) Results of domestic water system disinfection tests.

7. Construction Documents: a. Record drawings. b. Approved submittals, including revised shop drawings indicating as-

installed conditions. c. Equipment identification charts and schedules. d. Warranty certificates. e. Inspection certificates.


maintenance documentation package. 3.16 RECORD DRAWINGS


A. Equipment operated prior to the date of substantial completion shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


COVER SHEET FOR SUBMITTALS TO NEWCOMB & BOYD

Project: ________________________________________________ Date: Item: Submittal Number: Manufacturer: Model: Specification Paragraph and/or Drawing Number: Capacity: Electrical Characteristics (including identification of all separate connections or services required): Accessories: Options: Deviations (if any; if none, state so): General Contractor Approval:


220090-1


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General provisions and other plumbing systems are specified in other Sections of Division 22.

B. Performance verification is an ongoing process and shall be performed throughout construction. Performance verification verifies that systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Construction Documents.

C. This Section covers plumbing systems performance verification, as required to demonstrate that the equipment and systems of Division 22 are ready for safe and satisfactory operation, as defined by the Construction Documents. Performance verification shall include, but shall not be limited to, identification of piping and equipment, cleaning, and testing and adjusting systems, preparation of equipment and systems documentation and of maintenance and operation manuals.

D. Performance verification shall conclude with the completion of required deferred testing, training, and system documentation as specified herein and required to demonstrate the proper operation of the plumbing equipment and systems provided by this Division.

E. Verify, at a minimum, the performance of the following systems and equipment and witness the following tests:1. Section 224200, Plumbing Fixtures:

a. Fixture tests.b. Plumbing fixtures.

2. Section 224300, Drainage Systems:a. Chemical resistant waste and vent system.b. Piping and joint tests.c. Sanitary, waste and vent system.

3. Section 224400, Water Systems:a. Flow and balancing valves.b. Emergency fixture water tempering valves.c. Mixing valves.d. Piping and joint tests.e. Trap primers.

4. Section 224800, Laboratory Systems:a. Piping and joint tests.


220090-2


A. Provide a Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor with ten years experience in plumbing contracting. The Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor shall become familiar with the Owner's project requirements and the requirements of the performance verification process as defined in this Section. The Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate and execute the required performance verification activities.

B. The Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor shall review submittal data for conformance with the requirements of the Project, shall monitor compliance with the requirements specified herein for storage and protection of equipment during construction, shall authorize the initial starting of equipment and systems in a manner to avoid damage to equipment, shall oversee start-up, testing and balancing, and shall document that the scheduled and specified performance requirements of each systemhave been accomplished.

C. Refer to ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005, Addenda a-d-2010, The Commissioning Process, and Guideline 4-2008, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.

1.03 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor shall be responsible for scheduling, supervising, and coordinating and executing the start-up, testing, and performance verification activities as specified herein. Include and itemize the cost of performance verification in the contract price, and in each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, performance verification efforts and documentation, operations and maintenance data, and training as specified herein.

B. Plumbing performance verification shall take place in three phases. Performance verification requirements for each phase are as follows:1. Construction Phase:

a. Attend a performance verification scoping meeting and additional such meetings, initially scheduled monthly until prefunctional testing of equipment and systems begins, and weekly thereafter during the construction phase to facilitate the performance verification process. The Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate meeting attendance.

b. Report in writing to the Architect, at least as often as performance verification meetings are scheduled, concerning the status of plumbing activities as they affect the performance verification process, the status of each discrepancy identified the prefunctional and functional testing process, explanations of any disagreements with the identified deficiencies, and the proposed resolution and schedule for correction of the deficiency.

c. Provide documentation of installed systems and equipment, and develop functional testing procedures. This documentation shall include detailed manufacturer installation, start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance


220090-3

procedures; full details of any Owner-contracted tests; pump curves; full factory testing reports, if any; and full warranty information, including responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force. In addition, the installation, start-up and check-out materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field check-out sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Architect.




g. Prepare a preliminary schedule for performance verification activities, including pipe and system pressure and leakage testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, and testing, and update the schedule during the construction period, as appropriate. Notify the Architect immediately when the performance verification activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction.

h. Plumbing equipment start-up shall not be initiated until completion of pressure and leakage testing and cleaning as specified in other Sections of Division 22.

i. Provide start-up and prefunctional testing for equipment and execute theplumbing-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for the verification of the performance of all the equipment during the start-up and initial check-out process.


k. Correct noncompliance items before beginning functional performance testing. Water testing and adjusting shall be completed with discrepancies and

problems remedied before functional testing of the respective water-related systems.

2. Acceptance Phase:a. Place equipment and systems into operation and continue their operation

during each working day of the testing, adjusting and balancing, and performance verification activities, as required.

b. For each system or area, have required prefunctional checklists, calibrations, start-up and prefunctional tests of the plumbing systems and associated controls completed prior to beginning the testing, adjusting and balancing process.

c. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting and prefunctional testing of equipment and to execute the functional tests for each individual piece of


220090-4

equipment and system. Technicians shall be available and present during the agreed upon scheduled tests and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.

d. Perform functional testing for specified equipment and interpret the test data, as necessary.

e. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as identified by the Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor and interpreted by the Architect and retest the equipment, as required to demonstrate proper operation and performance.

f. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals as specified herein, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.

g. Maintain marked-up record drawings and produce final record drawings of Project drawings and contractor-generated coordination drawings. List and identify on these record drawings the locations of control system components, and sensor installations that are not equipment mounted.

h. Provide specified training of the Owner's operating personnel.i. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements

to maintain the validity of the warranty.3. Warranty Period:

a. Execute deferred functional testing.b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to operations and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT


B. Test equipment shall be of the quality and accuracy required to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified and shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, or as specified herein. Equipment shall be calibrated according to themanufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates available on request.1. Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration

within the past 12 months and a resolution of ±0.1ºF. Accuracy of temperature test equipment shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested.

2. Pressure sensors shall have a certified calibration within the 12 months and a resolution of 0.05% of sensor range. Accuracy of pressure test equipment shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested.



220090-5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SUBMITTALS



A. Prefunctional testing shall be required for each piece of equipment to ensure that the equipment and systems are properly installed and ready for operation, so that functional testing may proceed without delays. Follow the approved start-up, initial check-out, andprefunctional testing procedures. Sampling strategies shall not be used for prefunctional testing. The prefunctional testing for equipment and subsystems of a given system shall be successfully completed and documented prior to functional testing of the system.



2. The start-up and initial check-out plan shall consist, as a minimum, of the following:a. The manufacturer's standard written start-up and check-out procedures copied

from the installation manuals and manufacturer's normally used field check-out sheets. The plan shall include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.

b. First-run checklist for equipment, including:1) Equipment properly set.2) Piping and equipment properly connected.

c. Contractor-developed prefunctional checklists.3. Identify which entity is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line




220090-6

D. Sensor calibration: calibration of sensors associated with a given piece of equipment or system shall be included as part of the prefunctional testing and listed on the appropriate test checklists and reports for the system.

E. Completed start-up, check-out, and prefunctional test forms shall be completed and submitted to the Architect for review. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the Architect within 2 days of test completion. The Architect shall review the Contractor's start-up and prefunctional testing reports and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. The Contractor shall correct items that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the Architect as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, the Architect shall recommend approval of the start-up and prefunctional testing ofeach systemand schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.






A. Schedule and coordinate, with the approval of the Architect, tests delayed until building construction is completed, required building occupancy or loading, weather, or other conditions are suitable for the demonstration of equipment or system's performance, as specified herein. Deferred testing shall be executed, documented, and deficiencies corrected as specified herein for functional testing.


A. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the functional test procedure forms or on an attached sheet. The functional test procedure forms and any outstanding deficiencies


220090-7

shall be provided to the Architect within 2 days of test completion. The Architect shall review the Contractor's start-up and prefunctional testing documentation and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. Work with the Architect to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. Correct items that are deficient or incomplete in a timely manner, and notify the Architect as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.



A. The Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems covered in Division 22 and deliver this documentation for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals prior to the training of the Owner's personnel.


A. The Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor shall schedule, coordinate and assemble, and deliver the documentation of training required by Division 22.


A. Functional test requirements for the demonstration of proper system and equipment operation shall be defined by the Plumbing Performance Verification Supervisor. Execution of these test and demonstration of the required performance shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems or subsystems at the discretion of the Architect. Beginning system testing before full completion of construction shall not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including prefunctional checklists.

C. Functional testing shall be completed and test documentation approved by the Architectbefore the Project will be considered substantially complete.



222500-1

SECTION 222500 INSULATION

PART - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers thermal insulation for plumbing equipment and piping specified in

Division 22.

C. Items not to be insulated: 1. Water supplies to plumbing fixtures. See Section 224200, Plumbing Fixtures for

insulation of water supplies to ADA fixtures. 2. Vents from pressure relief valves.



A. Conform to the following: 1. International Energy Conservation Code-2009 with Georgia State Amendments-

2012. 2. International Plumbing Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012.

B. Products of the manufacturers listed will be acceptable for use for the specific

functions specified herein. Materials shall be compatible with the materials to which they are applied, and shall not corrode, soften or otherwise attack such material in either the wet or dry state.

C. Materials shall be applied subject to their temperature limits. Methods of application

of insulating materials or finishes not specified in detail herein shall be in accordance with the particular manufacturer's published recommendations.

D. Insulation shall be applied by experienced workers regularly employed for this type of

work. 1.03 RATINGS

A. Insulation and accessories, unless specifically excepted herein, shall have a maximum composite flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke developed rating of 50. Materials that are factory-applied shall be tested as assembled. Materials which are field-applied may be tested individually. No fugitive or corrosive treatments shall be employed to impart flame resistance.


222500-2

B. Flame spread and smoke developed ratings shall be in accordance with ASTM E84-

2012. Products or their shipping cartons shall bear a label indicating flame spread and smoke developed ratings.

C. Treatment of pipe jackets to impart flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. The

use of water-soluble treatments is prohibited.

D. Vapor retarders shall have a maximum permeance of 0.02 perm at 73.4°F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION

A. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: 1. Pipe insulation: maximum K-value for preformed pipe insulation: 0.23

Btu·in/(h·ft²·°F) at 75°F. a. Manufacturer: CertainTeed, Johns Manville, Knauf, or Owens Corning.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives and Mastics: 1. Manufacturer: Aeroflex, Armacell, Childers, Epolux, Foster, Marathon, Pittsburg

Corning PC 88, Pittsburgh Corning Pittcote 300 (interior) or 404 (exterior), or Vimasco.

B. Insulating Cement:

1. Mineral wool type, asbestos free, maximum K-value of 0.20 Btu·in/(h·ft²·°F) at 75°F.

2. Manufacturer: Industrial Insulation Group CalCoat-127, or Ramco Ramcote 1200.

C. Glass fabric: 10 x 10 threads per square inch construction white fiberglass scrim

fabric.

D. Tape: pressure sensitive, foil-scrim-kraft backed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Surfaces to be insulated shall be clean, dry, and free of foreign material, rust, scale and dirt when insulation is applied.

B. Perform pressure and leakage tests and submit results required by other Sections

before applying insulation.


222500-3

C. Where existing insulation is damaged due to the new work, repair damage to match

existing work or replace damaged portion with insulation specified for new work. 3.02 INSULATION FOR TEMPERED, HOT, AND HOT WATER CIRCULATING

PIPE

A. Insulate the following pipe with preformed fiberglass pipe insulation of the thickness indicated, with vapor retarder and white all service jacket with self-sealing lap:

Insulation Thickness, Inches

Fluid Design

Operating Pipe Sizes Temperature

Range, ºF 0.5" - 1.25" 1.5"

Tempered water 85 to 109 1 1

Hot water and hot water circulating 110 to 140 1 1.5

1. Install insulation with jacket drawn tight and side laps and end joint butt strips

secured. End joint butt strips shall be minimum 3" wide and of material identical to jacket. Seal ends of insulation at fittings, valves, and riser clamps.

2. Insulate fittings, flanges, strainers, and valve bodies with packing nut and stem left open, with preformed or mitered fiberglass. Wire fiberglass in place and cover with a smoothing coat of insulating cement. Finish with glass fabric embedded into a coat of white breather mastic. Glass fabric shall overlap adjoining insulation at least 2". White fabric and mastic shall be used on exposed fittings. Do not insulate unions.

3. Mitered fittings shall receive a smoothing coat of insulating cement prior to finishing.

3.03 INSULATION FOR COLD PIPE

A. Insulate the following pipe with preformed fiberglass pipe insulation of the thickness indicated with vapor retarder, white all service jacket, and self-sealing lap:

Domestic cold water above grade, 0.5" thick. Branch waste, including drain and P-trap, receiving drainage from air

conditioning and boiler equipment, 1.5" thick.

1. Install insulation with jacket drawn tight with side-laps and end joint butt strips secured. End joint butt strips shall be same material as jacket and not less than 3" wide. Seal ends of insulation at fittings, valves, and riser clamps.


222500-4

2. Insulate fittings, flanges, strainers, unions, and valve bodies with packing nut and stem left open, with preformed or mitered fiberglass. Wire fiberglass in place and vapor seal with a layer of glass fabric embedded between two 0.063" coats of white vapor retarder mastic. Glass fabric shall overlap adjoining insulation at least 2". Do not insulate unions.

3. Mitered fittings shall receive a smoothing coat of insulating cement prior to finishing.

3.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives and Mastics: 1. Seal open ends of insulation with a thick mastic coating. 2. Refer to Section 220010, General, for manufacturing requirements.

B. Insulating Cement:

1. Install a minimum 0.5" thick coat with a smooth finish, and even with the adjacent insulation.

C. Glass fabric:

1. For piping fittings and valves use tape form, and for water storage tanks use sheet form.

D. Tape:

1. When applied to jacket insulation, wrap tape as-tight-as possible without crushing the insulation jacket.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation after piping has been tested and approved.

B. Insulation shall be clean and dry during installation and during application of any finish.

C. Provide removable and replaceable covers on equipment and removable ends of

strainers requiring insulation that must be opened periodically for inspection, cleaning, or repair.

D. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces, jackets drawn tight and

cemented down smoothly at longitudinal and end laps. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit.

E. Install insulation, jackets and coatings continuous through openings and sleeves in

nonrated construction. For penetrations of fire- or smoke-rated construction, insulation shall be butted tightly against firestops specified in Section 220010, General. Tape butt joints.


222500-5

F. Finish open ends of pipe insulation with a smoothing coat of insulation cement.



224200-1

SECTION 224200PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General provisions and other mechanical systems are specified in other Sections of Division 22.

B. This Section covers plumbing fixtures, trim and equipment.

C. See Section 224300, Drainage Systems for sanitary, vent, and rainwater systems.

D. See Section 224400, Water Systems for water systems.

E. See Section 224800, Laboratory Systems for laboratory gas systems.

F. Performance verification is specified in Section 220090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of the performance verification specified therein.


A. Conform to the following:1. ICC A117.1-2009.2. International Energy Conservation Code-2009 with Georgia State Amendments-

2012.3. International Plumbing Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012.

1.03 PLUMBING RELATED FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT

A. Laboratory and science equipment is specified in another Division.

B. Laboratory fixtures (e.g., sinks and cup sinks) complete with faucets, vacuum breakers, drains, and tailpieces, unless specified otherwise herein, will be furnished with the laboratory equipment and loosely installed by the laboratory equipment installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES - GENERAL

A. Fixtures shall have smooth impervious surfaces, free from defects and no concealed fouling surfaces and be Grade A quality, with name or trademark of the manufacturer printed on or pressed into the fixtures. In addition, a label which cannot be removed


224200-2

without destroying it, containing the manufacturer's name or trademark and the quality or class of the fixture, per ASME A112.19, shall be affixed to fixtures and not removed until after the work is accepted.

B. Exposed waste and supply piping, including piping exposed when millwork doors are open, and mounting bolts of fixtures shall be chromium-plated.

C. Plumbing fixtures shall be complete with equipment, fittings, and trim as specified in Paragraph 2.03, Plumbing Fixture Trim.

2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Sinks, Counter - (Series F6):1. F6, Sink, Stainless Steel, One Bowl, Handicapped:

a. Self-rimming 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel sink, 21" F/B x 22" L/R x 6"deep, one compartment with 4-hole punch, faucet, supplies with stop valves, rear drain, P-trap, waste to wall, and escutcheons.

b. Manufacturer: Elkay LRAD-2221, or Just SL-ADA-2122-A-GR.

B. Ice Maker Boxes - (Series F11):1. F11, Refrigerator Ice Maker Connection Box:

a. Recessed, wall-mounted galvanized steel box, with support brackets, adjustable face plate, enameled white finish on exposed parts, and water valve with 0.5" inlet and 0.25" compression outlet.

b. Manufacturer: Guy Gray BIM875, Oatey 38687/38689, or Water-Tite Metal Ice Maker Outlet Box.

C. Laboratory Fixtures - (Series F20):1. F20, Sink:

a. Furnished with the laboratory equipment.2. F21, Sink with Eye Wash:

a. Furnished with the laboratory equipment.3. F22, Emergency Shower/Eye Wash:

a. Furnished with the laboratory equipment.

2.03 PLUMBING FIXTURE TRIM

A. Counter Sink Trim - (Series F6):1. Faucets:

a. Standard swing type with 8" long spout, polished chromium-plated with single lever handle, color-coded indexes, washerless cartridge, copper inlet tubing with 0.5" compression threads, hand spray with antisiphon hose, and 2 gpm vandal resistant laminar flow control.

b. Manufacturer: Just J-901-LFA, or Zurn Z-82300-CP8-HS-4M.


224200-3

2. Supplies:a. Angle stops with 0.5" id x 5" inlet sweat tube, bell escutcheon, wheel

handle control, 0.5" od x 12" flexible tube riser, and exposed piping and parts chromium-plated.

b. Manufacturer: EBC LA27, McGuire 171, or Zurn Z8809LR.3. Strainers:

a. Chromium-plated finish brass body and grid type flat strainer with brass lock nut, sealant washers, and 1.5" x 4" seamless 20 gauge tailpiece.

b. Manufacturer: EBC SF8W, Elkay LK18, Just J-35-SF, McGuire 152, or Zurn R450W.

4. P-traps:a. 1.5", tubular chromium-plated brass, with 17 gauge tubing drain to wall,

wall flange, cast brass slip nuts, cleanout plug, and minimum 2" water seal.b. Manufacturer: EBC TA150, McGuire 8912, or Zurn Z8702-9-B.

5. ADA Insulation:a. Insulation kit for handicapped locations: white molded closed-cell vinyl, 3-

piece for tailpiece, P-trap, and waste arm, and 2-piece for supply stops, and risers.

b. Manufacturer: EBC 1K, Insul-Tect I-T 101 and/or I-T 102, McGuire PW2125 and/or PW2150, Plumberex 2000, or Truebro 102-W.

B. Laboratory Fixtures Trim - (Series F20):1. Supplies:

a. Angle stops with 0.5" id x 5" inlet sweat tube, bell escutcheon, wheel handle control, 0.5" od x 12" flexible tube riser, and exposed piping and parts chromium-plated.

b. Manufacturer: EBC LA27, McGuire 171, or Zurn Z8809LR.2. Traps: 1.5" polypropylene with mechanical or screwed joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES - GENERAL

A. Set fixtures level and in alignment with walls.

B. Caulk between fixtures and mounting surfaces with a white nonhardening mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

C. Install handicapped fixtures in accordance with ICC A117.1-2009.

3.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Laboratory Fixtures (Series F20):1. Sinks: furnished with the casework. Install sinks if not previously installed by

casework manufacturer.


224200-4

2. Sink with eyewash: furnished with casework. Install sink and eyewash if not previously installed by casework manufacturer.

3. Shower and eyewash: furnished with the laboratory equipment. Provide rough-in and installation.

3.03 PLUMBING FIXTURE TRIM

A. Fixture Trim - General:1. Wrist blade handles on faucet fittings shall be aligned perpendicular to the spout

when in the off position.

B. Sinks, Counter - (Series F6):1. For counter-installed sinks, coordinate with counter top supplier for size of

opening.

C. Laboratory Sinks - (Series F20):1. Sink faucets are furnished with the casework. Install faucets if not previously

installed by casework manufacturer.2. Provide and install additional trim not provided by casework manufacturer.3. Provide and make all utility connections.

D. Laboratory Showers and Eyewashes (Series F22):1. Provide and make all utility connections.

3.04 PLUMBING RELATED FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT

A. General:1. After plumbing related fixtures and equipment have been installed, provide piping

and accessories as specified herein, and make final connections.2. The location and number of connections shown on the Drawings is approximate.

Determine the exact number, location, and rough-in requirements from the equipment drawings and specifications.

B. Fixtures:1. Provide rough-in for related fixtures.2. For the water supply provide stops (or valves), supplies, and escutcheons as

required.3. Provide pressure rated vacuum breakers for fixture trim having hose connection

capabilities and no backflow prevention.4. For drainage provide drains, tailpieces, P-traps, continuous waste, and

escutcheons as required.5. For exposed drainage piping that is not chromium-plated, prime and paint silver.

C. Equipment:1. For pressure piping, rough-in each utility at 6" from wall or 6" above floor, unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings, with a valve and cap.


224200-5

2. Provide vacuum breakers for connections requiring water, and not having built-in backflow prevention.

3. Provide indirect drains with waste connections, and extend over the appropriate floor drain and turn down with an indirect connection.

3.05 P-TRAPS

A. Set traps true and level, and tight and secure.

3.06 FIXTURE TESTS

A. Test plumbing fixtures for soundness, stability of support, and operation.

B. Test fixture accessories for smooth operation of handles and hand wheels, and proper operation of flow.

C. Test the hot water temperature at each plumbing fixture, and ensure that the correct temperature water is flowing from the system.

3.07 WATERPROOF LINERS

A. Where waterproof liners are used with the building construction, secure to the plumbing drain body with the clamping ring, making a watertight connection.

B. Waterproof liners shall be specifically designed for shower pan construction.

C. Install liners in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.08 CLEANING

A. Each plumbing fixture, complete with accessories, shall be thoroughly cleaned with a commercial grade disinfectant cleaner.

B. Trim and accessories for plumbing related fixtures and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned with a commercial grade disinfectant cleaner.



224300-1

SECTION 224300DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers plumbing drainage systems and equipment.

C. See Section 224200, Plumbing Fixtures for fixtures and trim.

D. See Section 224400, Water Systems for water systems and equipment.

E. See Section 224800, Laboratory Systems for laboratory systems.



A. Conform to the following:1. ICC A117.1-2009.2. International Plumbing Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPING, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS

A. General:1. Piping and fitting sizes listed are nominal inside diameter.

B. Soil, waste and vent above slab-on-grade throughout the building:1. Piping: no-hub cast iron, petroleum asphaltic-coated inside and out, ASTM

A888-2011.2. Fittings: no-hub cast iron, petroleum asphaltic-coated inside and out, ASTM

A888-2011.3. Joints: medium duty stainless steel couplings for drainage and vent piping 1.5" to

8": mechanical compression type with neoprene collars conforming to ASTM C564-2011, type 304 stainless steel construction with shields (minimum 34 ga),bands, clamps, and screws. Couplings shall conform to FM 1680-1989, Class 1 for 80 lbf·in torque and a minimum pressure test of 15 psig.a. Manufacturer: Husky 2000, or Tyler WB.


224300-2

C. Concealed fixture drain connections from sinks to cast iron:1. Piping: copper tubing, type DWV, hard drawn, ASTM B306-2009.2. Fittings: drainage pattern DWV wrought copper, ASME B16.29-2007.3. Joints: soldered with 95/5 tin/silver using a compatible flux, ASTM B813-2010

and NSF 61-2012.

D. Indirect drain, 1" and smaller:1. Piping: copper tubing, type M, hard drawn, ASTM B88-2009.2. Fittings: wrought copper, ASME B16.22-2001 (R2005).3. Joints: soldered with 95/5 tin/silver using a compatible flux, ASTM B813-2010

and NSF 61-2012.

2.02 UNIONS

A. For copper piping 2" or smaller: cast brass or bronze with copper soldered connections.

B. For piping larger than 2": flange and gasket type. Flanges in steel piping shall be cast iron.

2.03 P-TRAPS

A. For floor drains and floor outlet sinks: deep seal type, or standard type with trap primer.

B. Exposed: brass cleanout plugs.

C. For plumbing fixtures: as specified in Section 224200, Plumbing Fixtures.

2.04 CLEANOUTS

A. General:1. Provide cleanout outlets as follows:

a. Floors above grade: no-hub, push-on or inside caulk.

B. For concealed piping in finished area floors: cast iron with internal cleanout plug, adjustable housing, and polished nickel-bronze top. For cleanouts in floors above grade, provide with flashing clamp.1. Manufacturer: Josam 56000-X, Smith 4025C, Wade 6000IC, or Zurn ZN-1400-

ZN-IC.

C. For concealed piping in mechanical and storage room floors: cast iron with internal cleanout plug, adjustable housing, and nickel-bronze top. For cleanouts in floors above grade, provide with flange.


224300-3

1. Manufacturer: Josam 56040-X, Smith 4105C, Wade 6000IC-Z-1, or Zurn ZN-1400-HD-IC.

D. For concealed piping in wall construction: no-hub cleanout tee and tapped bronze cleanout plug, with a stainless steel wall access cover.1. Manufacturer: Josam 58790 with 58600 cover, Smith 4532-Y, Wade

8560E+8480R, or Zurn Z-1446-BP-NH.

2.05 DRAINS

A. General:1. Outlets shall be same size as the drainage pipe.2. Drains shall be from the same manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide drain outlets as follows:

a. Drains in floors above grade: no-hub, push-on, or inside caulk.

B. Finished Area Drains (Series D1):1. D1: cast iron body, trimmed with adjustable 6" square nickel-bronze grate, trap

primer connection, and reversible flashing collar.a. Manufacturer: Josam 30000X-S, Smith 2010B, Wade 1100 G, or Zurn

ZN415-S.

C. Mechanical Drains (Series D2):1. D2: cast iron body, trimmed with 12" round nickel-bronze half grate, seepage

holes, chemical resistant coated interior, dome bottom strainer, flashing clamp, and anchor flange.a. Manufacturer: Josam 49280A-X-43, Smith 3060, Wade 9140, or Zurn ZN-

1950-K.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Bolts and nuts: ASTM A307-2010, Grade B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General:1. Piping shall be cut to measurements established at the site and worked into place

without springing or forcing.2. Use concentric reducing fittings between different size pipe. 3. Ream copper pipe after cutting, turn on end and knock loose dirt, scale, and

filings from interior of pipe.4. Install horizontal drainage piping 3" and smaller with a slope of 0.25" per foot,

and piping 4" and larger with a slope of 0.125" per foot unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.


224300-4

5. Pitch/grade: piping shall be installed with sufficient pitch to ensure drainage and venting.

6. Install sway bracing and anchorage for piping as required by International Plumbing Code-2012.

B. Piping Joints:1. Make changes in the horizontal direction of gravity drainage piping with drainage

pattern fittings.2. Solder joint connections shall be cut, deburred, cleaned and assembled in

accordance with ASTM B828-2002 (2010).3. Threaded connections: screw-thread joints shall be made with cut tapered

threads. Joints shall be made tight with Teflon tape. Not more than 2 threads shall show after the joint is made tight, except no threads shall show in exposed chromium-plated piping.

4. Mechanical couplings on drainage piping: during the torque process, if any one band of the coupling breaks, replace the entire coupling.

5. Isolate joints between dissimilar metals and connections to tanks with dielectric fittings.

6. Provide adapters where copper pipes connect to cast iron pipe.

C. Coordination:1. Pipes shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction without damage

to joints, hangers, or the building. Arrange piping to minimize stresses caused by expansion and contraction.

2. Install piping so as to preserve access to valves and equipment and to provide the maximum headroom possible.

3. Provide offsets as required to maintain ceiling height and to coordinate with other trades.

4. Install exposed piping such that when insulation is applied it will not come in contact with adjacent surfaces.

5. Piping to fixtures and equipment shall be braced so that there is no horizontal or vertical movement in the piping.

6. Pipe supports shall be isolated from copper tubing with rubber sleeves.

3.02 NO-HUB CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Do not use tee fittings in horizontal drainage piping.

B. Torque coupling bolts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.03 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS

A. Uninsulated piping installed in masonry construction shall be painted with 2 coats of asphaltum paint.

B. Clean, prime, and paint exposed uninsulated piping with 2 coats of glossy silver paint.


224300-5

3.04 UNIONS

A. Provide in each connection to each piece of equipment, except where flanges are used, so it may be removed.

3.05 P-TRAPS

A. Set traps true and level.

3.06 CLEANOUTS

A. General:1. Locate cleanouts so that they are accessible and in compliance with codes.2. Install floor cleanouts flush and level with the finished floor.

B. Provide cleanouts in drainage piping as indicated on the Drawings, and as follows:1. At the bottom of each exposed fixture trap which is not integral with the fixture.2. At the beginning of each branch drainage line.3. At each change of a horizontal direction greater than 45º.4. In horizontal drain lines at intervals of not more than 50' for inside piping and

100' for outside piping.

C. Cleanouts for horizontal piping above grade located above the ceiling shall extend through the floor above, and shall be set flush with that finished floor, or turned up to a wall cleanout.

D. Sanitary cleanouts shall not be installed in return air plenums.

E. Cleanouts that occur in carpeted floors shall be installed flush with the floor slab and marked with a stainless steel carpet marker.

3.07 DRAINS

A. General:1. Cover the grate of each drain during construction to prevent entry of foreign

matter. The covering shall not deface the grate's finish.2. Remove and clean drain grate, set-screws, insides of drain bodies, and sediment

buckets before substantial completion. 3. Drains shall not be field modified.4. Where waterproof liners are used in the building construction, secure the liners to

drain bodies with clamping rings, making watertight connections.

B. Floor Drains:1. Set top of floor drains and floor sinks flush and level with the finished floor,

unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.


224300-6

2. Where trap primer connections are made to drain tailpieces, cap or eliminate the trap primer connection on the drain body.

3. Set square drainage grates with sides parallel to the adjacent walls.4. Where floor drains are installed in a sloping floor, install at low point.

3.08 PIPING AND JOINTS TESTS

A. Piping and piping joints shall be leak free.

B. Test soil, waste, and vent systems piping and joints by capping or plugging all openings, and filling each system with a 10' head of water, then allowing to stand filled for 1 hour without any leak down. Where a system is tested in sections, each section shall be subjected to the same test.

C. General:1. Tests shall be made while piping and joints are exposed to view.2. Submit a statement certifying that piping and joints are tight and have passed the

specified test.

D. Leakage Requirements:1. Screwed joints that leak shall be taken apart and reassembled.2. Soldered joints that leak shall be cut-out and replaced.3. Cast iron no-hub joints that leak shall be taken apart and reassembled with new

couplings.

E. Flow Test:1. Ensure a smooth and nonobstructed flow of liquid for every drainage pipe, free

from construction or natural sediment debris that may have entered during construction.

2. Route clean and flush with clear water piping having an obstruction.



224400-1

SECTION 224400 WATER SYSTEMS



B. This Section covers plumbing water systems and equipment.


D. See Section 224300, Drainage Systems for drainage, waste, and vent systems.

E. See Section 224800, Laboratory Systems for laboratory systems.

F. Performance verification is specified in Section 220090, Performance Verification.

This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of the performance verification specified therein.


A. Conform to the following: 1. ICC A117.1-2009. 2. International Energy Conservation Code-2009 with Georgia State Amendments-

2012. 3. International Plumbing Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS

A. General: 1. Piping and fitting sizes listed are nominal inside diameter.

B. Cold water, hot water, hot water circulating, trap primer, relief valve discharge, and

tempered water, above grade, except chromium-plated piping at fixtures: 1. Piping: copper tubing, type L, hard temper, ASTM B88-2009. 2. Fittings: wrought copper and/or cast bronze socket fittings, 0.5" to 2", ASME

B16.22-2001 (R2005).


224400-2

3. Fittings: wrought copper press fittings, ASME B16.22-2001 (R2005) with EPDM elastomeric O-ring seals, may be used at the Contractor's option for sizes 0.5" to 2". a. Manufacturer: NIBCO Press+Fittings, Victaulic Vic-Press, or Viega

ProPress. 4. Joints:

a. Soldered with 95/5 tin/silver type, with a compatible flux designed to be cold water flushable in potable water systems, ASTM B813-2010 and NSF 61-2012.

b. Pressed type, using the tools and pressure requirements of the fitting manufacturer.

2.02 SPECIALTY PIPING JOINTS

A. Unions: 1. For copper piping 2" or smaller: cast brass or bronze with copper soldered

connections. 2. For piping larger than 2": flange and gasket type. Gaskets shall meet ANSI/NSF

61 requirements. 3. For press fit piping: hexagonal threaded type with press fit ends.

2.03 VALVES, GENERAL

A. Valves shall be of the same manufacturer, unless specified otherwise herein.

B. Stem packing: asbestos-free. 2.04 GATE VALVES

A. Gate valves 2.5" and smaller: class 125, bronze body with nonrising stem, threaded bonnet, solid wedge disc, 200 psig wog. 1. Manufacturer (solder ends): Crane 1701S, Kitz 41, Milwaukee 115, or NIBCO S-

113. 2. Manufacturer (threaded ends): Crane 1701, Kitz 40, Milwaukee 105, or NIBCO

T-113. 2.05 GLOBE VALVES

A. Globe valves 2.5" and smaller: class 125, bronze body with rising stem, threaded bonnet, integral seat, renewable bronze seat and disc, 200 psig wog. 1. Manufacturer (solder ends): Crane 1310, Kitz 10, Milwaukee 1502, or NIBCO S-

211-B. 2. Manufacturer (threaded ends): Crane 01, Kitz 09, Milwaukee 502, or NIBCO T-

211-B.


224400-3

2.06 BALL VALVES

A. For threaded and soldered copper piping, 2" and smaller: 2-piece bronze body, full port, with blowout-proof stem, rated for 400 psig wog. Valves shall have a chromium-plated vented ball, reinforced TFE seat, stuffing box ring, and soldered or threaded ends as applicable. Valves in insulated piping shall have 1.25" extended stems. 1. Manufacturer: Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, or NIBCO.

B. For copper press fitting piping, 2" and smaller: 2-piece bronze body, full port, with

blowout-proof stem, rated for 200 psig wog. Valves shall have a chromium-plated ball, reinforced TFE seat, stuffing box ring, grade E EPDM elastomeric O-ring seals, and press by press female ends. Valves in insulated piping shall have 1.25" extended stems. 1. Manufacturer: NIBCO PCF585-60, or ProPress Ball Valve series.

2.07 LOCKING HANDLE BALL VALVES

A. For threaded or soldered copper piping, 2" and smaller: 2-piece bronze body, full port, with blowout-proof stem, rated for minimum 400 psig wog. Valves shall have a chromium-plated vented ball, reinforced TFE seat, stuffing box ring, and soldered or threaded ends as applicable. Valves shall have a locking type handle and be provided with pad lock and key. Locks shall be keyed to the same master key. 1. Manufacturer: Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, or NIBCO.

2.08 CHECK VALVES

A. Check valves 2.5" and smaller: class 125, bronze body, Y-pattern horizontal swing with renewable bronze disc and seat, screw cap, 200 psig non-shock cwp. 1. Manufacturer (solder ends): Crane S1340, Kitz 23, Milwaukee 1509, or NIBCO

S-413. 2. Manufacturer (threaded ends): Crane T37, Kitz 22, Milwaukee 509, or NIBCO

T-413. 2.09 STRAINERS

A. Strainers 2.5" and smaller: class 125, bronze body, Y-pattern, with type 304 mesh stainless steel screen (with effective screening area of not less than 2 times the area of the pipe), threaded cap, 200 psig non-shock cwp. 1. Manufacturer (solder ends): Apollo 59-300-YBS, Hammond 3040, Kitz 16, or

NIBCO S-221-A. 2. Manufacturer (threaded ends): Apollo 59-YB, Hammond 3010, Kitz 15, or

NIBCO T-221-A.


224400-4

2.10 HOSE BIBS

A. For finished areas: polished chromium-plated with 0.75" inlet, tee handle, and built-in vacuum breaker. 1. Manufacturer: Chicago 952 or T&S B-0720.

2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Double check valve type for 0.25" to 0.375" sizes, for use at coffee, tea, and beverage dispensers. Units shall be inline spring loaded double check valve type, constructed of 316 stainless steel, shall meet FDA requirements for food service facilities, and shall comply with ASSE 1022-2003. 1. Manufacturer: Watts SD-3, or Wilkins 740.

B. For cold water systems: reduced pressure type assembly, same size as pipe, with

stainless steel working parts, complete with air gap drain device, strainer, check modules, isolation valves, test cocks, and relief module. Assemblies shall be bronze body construction. 1. Manufacturer: Apollo 40LF-200, Watts 919, or Wilkins 975.

2.12 TRAP PRIMERS

A. Brass construction, capacity to prime traps as indicated on the Drawings, line pressure operation, with distribution units where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Manufacturer: Precision Plumbing Products Oregon 1.

2.13 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Enclosed piston type with copper tubing enclosure, O-ring seals, threaded connections, ASSE 1010-2004 certified. 1. Manufacturer: Ancon, Precision Plumbing Products, Sioux Chief, or Watts.

2.14 HOT WATER CIRCULATING FLOW METERS

A. Inline threaded body flow meters with an accuracy of ±5%, and operating parameters of 175 psig at 200ºF. The meters shall measure flows from 0.5 gpm to 5.0 gpm. Meters shall be acceptable for domestic water usage and mountable in both horizontal and vertical positions.

B. Manufacturer: Ernst EFI Inflo, Kobold VKP, or Racine Federated EZ-View.

2.15 EMERGENCY FIXTURE WATER TEMPERING VALVES

A. Multiple shower/eye washes, WTV-1: thermostatic type complete with inlet checks, stops with unions, outlet thermometer, and vandal resistant temperature setting. Each valve shall be designed for use with emergency eye/face washes, and be factory set for


224400-5

85°F at 40 gpm with 30 psig inlet water pressure. Units shall be designed to flow full cold in the event of hot water supply failure or thermostatic controller failure, and designed to stop flow completely in the event of cold water supply failure. 1. Manufacturer: Lawler 911, Leonard TM-5100, or Powers ES400.

2.16 ACCESSORIES

A. Gaskets in water piping: 0.063" thick red rubber or asbestos-free composition sheet type, selected for the pressure, temperature and service of the specific joint.

B. Bolts and nuts: ASTM A307-2010, Grade B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Piping shall be cut to measurements established at the site and worked into place

without springing or forcing. 2. Use concentric reducing fittings between different size pipes. 3. Ream copper pipe after cutting, turn on end and knock loose dirt, scale, and

filings from interior of pipe. 4. Slope water piping to drain back to the mains.

B. Aboveground:

1. Piping shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction without damage to joints, hangers, or the building. Arrange piping to minimize stresses caused by expansion and contraction.

2. Group exposed pipe together and arrange control valves at fixtures for ease of operation.


4. Provide offsets to maintain ceiling height and to coordinate with other trades. 5. Install exposed piping such that when insulation is applied it will not come in

contact with adjacent surfaces.

C. Piping Joints: 1. General:

a. Isolate joints between dissimilar metals and connections to tanks with dielectric fittings.

b. Provide flanges or unions at connections to equipment and apparatus. 2. Solder joints: pipe ends shall be cut square, deburred, cleaned and assembled in

accordance with ASTM B828-2002 (2010). 3. Threaded joints: screw-thread joints shall be made with cut tapered threads.

Joints shall be made tight with Teflon tape. Not more than 2 threads shall show


224400-6

after the joint is made tight, except no threads shall show in exposed chromium-plated piping.

4. Flanged joints: except at connections to equipment, flanged joints shall be made with ring type gaskets, extending to inside of bolt holes. Flanged connections to equipment shall be made with full-face gaskets to match flanges on equipment.

5. Press fitting joints: shall be made using the manufacturer's specific equipment for the piping joint being made, and by manufacturer trained personnel. Each pipe end shall be abutted full length into the fitting and marked accordingly.

3.02 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS

A. Noninsulated piping installed in masonry construction shall be painted 2 coats of asphaltum paint.

B. Clean, prime, and paint exposed non-insulated piping with 2 coats of glossy silver

paint. 3.03 SPECIALTY PIPING JOINTS

A. Unions: 1. Provide in each connection to each piece of equipment, except where flanges are

used, so equipment may be removed. 3.04 VALVES – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide a valve in each cold and hot water supply connection to each piece of equipment.

3.05 STRAINERS

A. Install in the inlet to each pressure reducing valve, flow control valve, thermostatic mixing valve, backflow preventer, and as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.

3.06 TRAP PRIMERS

A. Connect trap primer lines to the drain tailpieces where field conditions prohibit connection to the trap primer connections on the drain bodies.

B. Install trap primers with a straight downward slope to allow drainage from the trap

primer valve. 3.07 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Install water hammer arresters in accordance with the Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH201-2006.


224400-7

3.08 EMERGENCY FIXTURE WATER TEMPERING VALVES

A. Valves shall be accessible to read thermometers and adjust temperature setting as required.

B. Install a strainer in cold and hot water supplies, and a union at each connection.

C. Locking handle ball valves shall be installed in the closest accessible proximity

upstream of emergency fixture water tempering valves in both the hot and cold water supply lines. In addition, signs shall be provided and attached to the locking handles indicating that the valves shall be normally in the open position except for maintenance purposes.

D. Emergency fixture water tempering valves and emergency fixtures shall have their

performance verified in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions after substantial completion but before occupancy. In addition, verify that the water emitted from emergency fixtures be tepid, between 60°F and 100°F, immediately following compliance with the manufacturers' instructions.

3.09 PIPING TESTS

A. Test cold water, hot water, hot water circulating, and tempered water systems piping by capping all openings and applying a hydrostatic pressure of 125 psig for 1 hour without any drop in pressure. Disconnect the pump source prior to and during testing. Where a system is tested in sections, each section shall be subjected to the same test.

B. Piping General:

1. Tests shall be made while piping and joints are exposed to view. 2. Submit a statement certifying that piping and joints are tight and have

passed the specified test.

C. Piping Test General: 1. Screwed and flanged joints that leak shall be taken apart and reassembled. 2. Soldered and brazed joints that leak shall be taken down and replaced.

3.10 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION

A. Domestic Water Piping: 1. Clean and disinfect inside water piping prior to placing the system in operation. 2. Purge domestic cold water, hot water, hot water circulating and tempered water

piping, including fixtures. 3. Flush the piping systems with potable water from the municipal supply system

until water runs clear.


224400-8

4. Fill the system with clean water with a water/chlorine solution containing a minimum 50 ppm chlorine. Isolate the piping systems and allow to stand for 24 hours.

5. Drain the systems and refill with a water/chlorine solution containing a minimum 200 ppm chlorine. Isolate the piping systems and allow to stand for 3 hours.

6. Flush the systems with clean, potable water from the municipal supply system until the chlorine in the system is the same level as the municipal supply system.

7. Submit water samples for biological examination by laboratories approved by the local health authority. Samples shall be taken in the presence of the Owner.

8. Repeat the procedures and resubmit water samples as required to pass the biological test. Minimum acceptance test results shall be 0.0 colonies of coliform bacteria.

9. Provide results of tests. 10. Materials and test methods shall comply with AWWA C651-2005.

B. Strainers: after final flushing of the water system, remove strainer baskets for

cleaning and disinfection. Reinstall baskets and ensure that caps are leak tight. 3.11 TESTING AND BALANCING OF THE HOT WATER AND TEMPERED

WATER SYSTEMS

C. Hot Water System: 1. Following the installation of the piping systems, open valves to new renovation

and bring the new piping systems up to operating temperatures. 2. Flow the hot water system and test that the correct water temperature is flowing

from each hot water outlet. Make adjustments as required.

D. Hot Water Circulation Systems: 1. Allow the hot water system to stand for one hour with only the circulation pump

running before balancing the system. 2. For manual systems using globe valves with flow meters, make the flow

adjustments as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Perform water temperature spot checks at the most remote fixture of each branch

take-off from the hot water system main.



224800-1

SECTION 224800 LABORATORY SYSTEMS



B. This Section includes furnishing, installing and testing laboratory systems, including

chemical waste and chemical vent, as indicated on the Drawings.


D. See Section 224300, Drainage Systems for drainage, waste, and vent systems.

E. See Section 224400, Water Systems for water systems.


1.02 RELATED EQUIPMENT

A. The furnishing, delivering, uncrating and installation of laboratory equipment and trim is specified in another Division.

1.03 MANUFACTURING REQUIREMENTS

A. One manufacturer, unless otherwise specified herein, shall supply the laboratory systems equipment, including the sources of supply. The manufacturer shall have a product specialist periodically check with the Contractor during installation of the systems and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS

A. General: 1. Piping and fitting sizes listed are nominal inside diameter.

B. Chemical resisting waste and vent, above grade:


224800-2

1. Piping: polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), meeting schedule 40 pipe thickness, material per ASTM D3222-2005 (2010), and marked in accordance with ASTM F1673-2004 (2009) and UL 723-2008.

2. Fittings: drainage pattern PVDF. 3. Joints below grade: electric coil socket thermal fusion. 4. Joints above grade: stainless steel compression, or mechanical, or electric coil socket

thermal fusion. 2.02 CHEMICAL RESISTANT CLEANOUTS

A. For concealed chemical resisting piping in floors: corrosion resistant fire retardant polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) conforming to ASTM D3222-2005, having a ferrule with counter sunk gas tight plug, and adjustable round nickel bronze top. Top shall be cast with the acronym "AWCO" (Acid Waste Cleanout). 1. Manufacturer: George Fisher FCO-PVDF, Orion FCO-SQ-PVDF for tile floors and

FCO-RD-PVDF for other floors, or Zurn Z9A-PCO1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Piping shall be cut to measurements established at the site and worked into place

without springing or forcing. 2. Use concentric reducing fittings between different size pipes. 3. Ream piping after cutting, turn on end to knock loose any filings from interior of

pipe. 4. Take-offs from horizontal piping shall be above the pipe's center line at an angle of

45º or greater above the horizontal. 5. Plastic piping shall not be stored in direct sunlight or at temperatures higher than

90°F.

B. Aboveground: 1. Piping shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction without damage to

joints, hangers, or the building. Arrange piping to minimize stresses caused by expansion and contraction.


3. Provide offsets to maintain ceiling height and to coordinate with other trades.

C. Piping Joints: 1. Threaded connections: at connections to equipment, screw-thread joints shall be

made with cut tapered threads. Joints shall be tinned using soft solder or made up with Teflon tape. Not more than 2 threads shall show after the joint is made tight.


224800-3

2. Flanged joints: at connections to equipment, flanged joints shall be made with ring type gaskets, extending to inside of bolt holes. Flanged connections to equipment shall be made with full-face gaskets to match flanges on equipment.

3.02 POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE (PVDF) PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVDF pipe shall be kept clean and free of contamination during installation.

B. Joints shall be made by butt-welding with thermal fusion machines, and shall have a rated working pressure of not less than 90% of the piping working pressure.

C. Fittings shall be marked to indicate proper alignment. Piping shall be cut with dry

noncontaminating process cutters to provide square ends for the welding process.

D. Welders shall be instructed by the welding machine supplier in the proper use of the machine. The welding machine shall be electrically heated and thermostatically controlled, and shall be equipped with trimming devices to plane the surfaces to be joined after they are placed in the machine and before welding. Welding machines shall not contaminate the piping interior or exterior.

E. Piping shall be held in contact with the heated plate under pressure until a uniform melted

bead is formed around the entire end of both pieces to be joined. When the bead is formed, remove pressure on piping and allow heat to transfer into piping material. Remove heat plate and join heated pipe surfaces gradually applying pressure to joints over a 10 second period. Keep joints under pressure until cool.

3.03 RELATED EQUIPMENT

A. General: 1. After related equipment has been installed, ensure tightness of installation, and

provide piping and accessories as specified herein, and make final connections. 2. The location and number of connections shown on the Drawings is approximate.

Determine the exact number, location, and rough-in requirements from the equipment drawings and specifications.

B. Equipment:

1. Provide indirect drains with waste connections, and extend over the appropriate floor drain and turn down with an indirect connection.

3.04 PIPING AND JOINT TESTING

A. General: 1. Piping and joints shall be leak free. 2. Tests shall be made while piping and joints are exposed to view, and prior to

connections to fixtures, equipment, or outlets/inlets.


224800-4

3. Submit a statement certifying that piping and joints are tight and have passed the specified test.

B. Test chemical waste, and vent systems piping and joints by capping or plugging openings,

and filling each system with 10' head of water, then allowing to stand filled for 1 hour without any leak down. Where a system is tested in sections, each section shall be subjected to the same test.

C. Piping and Joint Leakage:

1. Leaks shall be repaired or replaced, and the system retested as specified herein. 2. Any pipe that leaks shall be removed and a new piece installed. 3. Screwed and flanged joints that leak shall be taken apart, inspected for damage and

debris, and reassembled. 4. Thermally fused joints that leak may be fused one additional time only, if allowed by

the manufacturer. Joints that fail the pressure test after the second fusion cycle shall be cut-out and replaced.



230010-1

SECTION 230010GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. These heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) provisions specified herein apply to all Sections of Division 23.




A. Conform to the following:1. International Energy Conservation Code-2009 with Georgia State Amendments-

2012.2. International Mechanical Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012.3. NFPA 90A-2012.4. NFPA 45 Code-2011.

B. Codes, standards and regulations specified herein refer to the edition date. Revisions and addenda to these codes, standards and regulations shall be part of these specifications. Provisions of referenced codes, standards, and regulations do not create duty or responsibility by the Architect or the Owner, unless otherwise specified herein.

C. Codes, standards and regulations referred to are minimum standards. Where the requirements of these specifications or drawings exceed those of the codes, standards and regulations, the drawings or specifications shall govern.

D. HVAC/Electrical Design Coordination:1. The power ratings of motors and other HVAC equipment and the electrical

characteristics of electrical systems serving them, as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings, have been established as minimums which will allow that equipment to satisfactorily function while producing the required capacities. These power ratings include a safety factor deemed appropriate to accommodate common differences between design parameters and field construction practices. Under no circumstances shall equipment with power ratings less than those indicated on the Drawings or specified herein be provided.


230010-2

2. Reasonable efforts have been made to coordinate the electrical requirements of the HVAC equipment with the electrical systems serving that equipment. Differences among manufacturers of HVAC equipment make it impossible to produce a single electrical design which will satisfy the varying electrical requirements of those manufacturers. Consequently, the Contractor shall coordinate the electrical requirements of the HVAC equipment actually furnished on this Project and provide the electrical systems required by that equipment. This coordination effort shall be completed prior to the installation of either the HVAC equipment or the electrical systems serving that equipment. Electrical system revisions required to coordinate with the HVAC equipment actually furnished shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Adhesives and Sealants:1. Adhesives, sealants, and sealant primers used inside the building (defined as

inside the weatherproofing envelope and applied on site) shall comply with SCAQMD Rule 1168-2005 for volatile organic compound content limits.


F. Paints and Coatings:1. Anticorrosive and antirust paints applied to interior ferrous metal shall not exceed

a volatile organic compound content limit of 250 g/L per GS 11-2011.


A. Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and, unless explicitly dimensioned, indicate approximate locations of apparatus, equipment, ductwork and piping. Changes in the location, and offsets, of same which are not shown on the Drawings but are necessary in order to accommodate building conditions and coordination with the work of other trades, shall be made during the preparation of coordination drawings and prior to initial installation, without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Provide access to equipment and apparatus requiring operation, service or maintenance throughout the life of the system.

C. Piping, equipment, or ductwork shall not be installed in electrical equipment rooms, elevator equipment rooms, or elevator shafts unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. In addition, piping, ductwork, or mechanical equipment shall not be installed in the space equal to the width and depth of switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers from floor to structure above nor within the working space in front, rear and/or side (where rear and/or side access is required to work on equipment) of electrical equipment (switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, transformers, and starters). Dimensions of the working space shall be a minimum depth of 42" horizontally, the width of the equipment or 30", whichever is greater, and the height of the equipment


230010-3

or 78", whichever is greater. Minimum depth shall be increased to 60" for equipment rated over 600 V.



1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed piping, conduit, or ductwork is that which can be seen when the building is complete without opening or removing access doors or panels or accessible ceiling components.

B. Other piping, conduit, and ductwork is considered to be concealed.




C. The existing engine-generator set shall remain operational during construction and shall be accessible to the Owner. Protect the engine-generator set from dust, dirt and damage.

1.07 TEMPORARY SERVICES

A. Temporary utilities shall be in accordance with requirements specified herein.

B. Immediately after award of contract, determine the time of demolition in the existing building and the time of excavation for the new building, and be ready to:1. Disconnect the existing steam service to the existing building.2. Provide a temporary steam service to the existing building.3. Arrange with the Architect for making new connections to existing mains.4. Remove existing equipment and cap piping.5. Protect existing piping in the path of new construction.




230010-4



D. Electric power, interlock, and control wiring, except as specified herein.

E. Installation of starters, contactors, thermal overload switches, and remote push buttons, except as specified herein.

F. Fire alarm initiating devices, control modules, and monitoring modules.

G. Curbs, flashing, and pitch pockets for equipment on roof, except as specified herein.

H. Casework and laboratory equipment.

I. Fume hoods and biological safety cabinets with filters, utility outlets, automatic dampers, auxiliary air connections, and airflow alarms.

J. Door undercuts.

K. Structural supports for roof-mounted fans.

L. Demolition, including removal of piping, ductwork and equipment.

1.09 SUBMITTALS


B. Submittals shall be prepared in a line-by-line format corresponding to these Specifications and shall indicate compliance with each requirement specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.1. In addition to any other transmittals or cover sheets used, fill out and attach to

each individual submittal a copy of the Cover Sheet for Submittals to Newcomb& Boyd included at the end of this Section.

2. Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions.3. Indicate deviations, if any, including any from the manufacturer's installation

instructions.4. Reproductions or electronic versions of design drawings shall not be used in the

preparation of shop drawings.


230010-5

5. Resubmittals that are required to address review comments shall include a cover transmittal with a written explanation of how each review comment has been addressed.


7. Shop drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD 2013 format.8. Submittals in 3-ring binders shall include an index of contents and divider tabs.

C. Shop drawings shall include the following:1. Trade shop drawings (i.e., HVAC equipment room drawings, HVAC piping

system drawings, HVAC sheet metal system drawings, and electrical main feeder raceway drawings) shall be submitted within 30 days after award of contract.

2. Approved trade shop drawings shall be utilized as the basis for the coordination drawings. Coordination drawings shall be submitted within 30 days after approval of trade shop drawings.

3. Coordination drawings shall utilize either manual or electronic means of analyzing the work of each trade in spatial relationship with other trades. Locations of conflicts between trades, and the proposed resolution for each conflict, shall be noted on the coordination drawings submitted.

4. No work shall be fabricated and/or installed prior to receipt by the Contractor of approved trade shop drawings and approved coordination drawings without specific written authorization from the Architect. No change orders will be approved or design assistance provided for remedial field coordination activities for work fabricated and/or installed prior to receipt by the Contractor of approved trade shop drawings and approved coordination drawings.

D. HVAC submittals shall include the following:1. Performance Verification Supervisor qualifications.2. Coordination drawings, with dimensions and elevations, of HVAC work,

including ductwork, equipment, piping with fittings, valves, dampers, accessories and sleeves coordinated with the work of other trades, including plumbing, fire suppression, electrical, structural, and architectural, minimum 1/4" = 1'-0" scale.

3. Insulation.4. Seismic and wind restraint devices, including calculations, restraint selection,

installation details and written confirmation that a licensed engineer prepared the calculations.

5. Vibration isolation, including spring data, manufacturer's equipment operating weight, actual load distribution and actual deflection at each loading point for each piece of isolated equipment. Shop drawings for piping isolators shall be made on prints of the piping shop drawings.

6. Air handling units with coil, fan, and filter data, and fan curves.7. Automatic temperature controls with information as specified in Section 238000,

Automatic Temperature Controls. Each control device, software, sequence of operation, and control schematic and I/O summary submittal shall be cross-referenced to a specific requirement in these Specifications and Drawings.

8. Dampers.


230010-6

9. Ductwork and fittings, factory-fabricated.10. Fans and fan curves.11. Filters and frames.12. Fire dampers, including static pressure drop for each damper.13. Flexible ductwork.14. Grilles, registers and diffusers, including performance data.15. Piping system drawings, showing equipment, piping, fittings, elevations,

dimensions, valves, sleeves and accessories, coordinated with ductwork, building conditions, and other trades, minimum 1/4" = 1'-0" scale.

16. Rooftop air conditioning units.17. Sheet metal system drawings, showing air distribution equipment, including

required clearances around control panels, coils, filters, return air openings, and other components, ductwork, fittings, dampers, plenums, elevations, dimensions, offsets, and transitions coordinated with piping, building conditions, and other trades, minimum 1/4" = 1'-0" scale.

18. Smoke dampers, including static pressure drop for each damper.19. Structural supports for utility sets and laboratory fume hood exhaust fans.20. Terminal units.21. Valves and strainers.22. Variable frequency drives.



B. Materials and equipment shall be UL listed, and shall bear the UL listing mark on products for which standards have been established and for which listing is regularly furnished by UL.

C. In addition to the 1 year warranty specified in General Conditions, an additional 4 year warranty shall be extended on the compressors of self-contained air conditioning units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hangers:1. General: complete with rods and supports proportioned to the size of piping or

equipment to be supported.2. For copper piping 4" and smaller: copper-plated; Anvil CT-69, B-Line B3170

CT, or ERICO 101.


230010-7

B. Hanger Rods: 1. One-piece steel type, threaded as required.2. Sizes, unless specified otherwise herein, shall be as follows:

Pipe Size Rod Diameter

2" and smaller 0.375"

3. Sizes for gang or multiple hangers: calculated for the combined weight of the piping and accessories.

4. Sizes for equipment hangers: calculated for the weight of the equipment supported.

C. Horizontal supports for hot water piping above the roof: Anvil 264, B-Line B3093 with B3088 T, or ERICO 723, modified to have no holes in saddles.

D. Inserts: 1. Adjustable type: Anvil 282, B-Line B3014, or ERICO 355.2. Continuous type: Anvil PS-5000, B-Line B32I, or ERICO CON.

E. Expansion Anchors:1. In concrete: wedge, self-drilling, or drilled flush type.2. In masonry: sleeve type.3. Manufacturer: Hilti, ITW Ramset/Red Head, or Rawl.

F. Clamps for piping in bar joist construction: Anvil 92 or 93, B-Line B3031 or B3033, or ERICO 300.

G. Insulation protectors: Anvil 167, B-Line B3151, or ERICO 125.

H. Channel strut systems: 14 gauge minimum galvanized steel, with factory-punched attachment holes. Straps shall be designed so that the attachment nut is captive on the shoulder of the strap when tightened. Attachment nuts shall be designed to provide a surface on the turned down edge while making positive contact with the side walls of the channel. Nuts, bolts, straps, and accessories shall be protected with same finish as channels.1. Manufacturer: B-Line, Kindorf, Midland-Ross, or Unistrut.

2.02 VALVE TAGS

A. Minimum 19 gauge polished brass, 1.5" minimum size. Tags shall be square. Stamped numbers and letters shall be not less than 0.75" high, and filled with black paint.


230010-8



Diameter (Including Insulation) Width Size of Legend Letters

0.75" to 1.25" 8" 0.5"1.5" to 2" 8" 0.75"

1. Legends shall be in full or abbreviated form, in contrasting color to background color.

B. Nameplates and signs: laminated plastic, engraved with white letters. Background color shall be:

System Color

Equipment served by emergency power RedOther equipment Black

C. Duct identification shall be strap-on type vinyl markers, minimum size 32" x 6" with minimum 3.5" lettering.

2.04 SLEEVES



A. Firestops:1. Refer to Section 078413, Penetration Firestopping

2.06 MOTORS

A. General:1. Motors shall be dripproof, unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the

Drawings, and in compliance with NEMA MG 1-2011. Refer to Electrical Drawings for exact characteristics of motors. Dripproof and totally enclosed fan-cooled motors shall be rated on a 50°C and 55°C temperature rise basis, respectively, unless otherwise specified herein.

2. Dripproof and totally enclosed: 1800 rpm, induction type with a 1.15 service factor, unless otherwise specified herein.


230010-9

3. Designed in accordance with Part 31 of NEMA MG 1-2011 for use with variable frequency drives for equipment as indicated on the Drawings.

4. Motors not furnished with equipment shall be by: Baldor, Century, Delco, GE, Marathon, Reliance, or Siemens.

2.07 STARTERS

A. General:1. Manual reset, Class 20, thermal type overload protection for each phase, in

accordance with NEMA ICS 2-2000 (R2005).2. NEMA 3R enclosures for exterior application. 3. Equipment furnished with factory-installed starters shall also be equipped with

individual motor disconnect and thermal magnetic circuit breakers or fuses as specified herein with lugs sized to receive a feeder as indicated on the Electrical Drawings.

4. 120 V secondary control power transformer with fused primary and secondary circuit in the enclosure.

5. Unused auxiliary contacts (installed on each contactor): 1 normally open, and 1normally closed.

6. Starters and contactors not furnished with equipment shall be provided by: ABB,Allen-Bradley, Crouse-Hinds, Cutler-Hammer, GE, Furnas, or Siemens-ITE.

B. For 3-phase motors, unless otherwise specified herein:1. Combination magnetic type and thermal magnetic circuit breaker:

a. Circuit breakers having minimum AIC rating as specified in Division 26.b. External operating handle capable of being locked in the off or open

position.c. Hand-off-automatic switch on the face for each fan and pump, except those

manually controlled.d. Automatic-test switch, with spring return from test, on the face for

refrigerant and atrium smoke exhaust fans and stairwell and elevator hoistway pressurization fans.

e. Solid state motor winding heater package, fused, for motors over 40 hpinstalled outdoors.

C. For 1-phase, unless otherwise specified herein:1. Manual starting switch with thermal overload protection and pilot light.2. Hand-off-automatic switch, except for manually controlled equipment.

2.08 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. Variable frequency AC motor controllers shall be designed for use with motors as specified in Paragraph 2.06, Motors.

B. Variable frequency drives in air handling units mounted on the roof shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall include provisions


230010-10

for removing excess heat. Manufacturer shall fully warrant the installation as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Coordinate with the air handling unit manufacturer.

C. Controllers:1. NEMA 1 enclosure, wall- or floor-mounted, UL 508C-2002 listed, with integral

power disconnect with door interlock, completely factory-wired, ready for field connection of incoming and outgoing power, and control signal, in compliance with NEMA ICS 1-2000 (R2005, R2008), NEMA ICS 6-1993 (R2001, R2006), and NEMA ICS 7.1-2006. Drives shall be rated a minimum of 100,000 A RMS symmetrical AIC.

2. Controllers shall be of the pulse width modulation type, and shall have the following features and functions contained in the cabinets unless otherwise specified herein:a. Current limiting fuses or semi-conductor protection on the incoming line

side.b. Speed regulation within 3% accuracy.c. Interface connections for remote controls shall be wired to terminal strips as

follows:1) Dry contacts for remote enable/disable.2) Process transducers for 4-20 mA speed adjustment signal.3) Terminals for connection of normally closed remote safety devices.4) Dry contact for external alarm, to open on internal drive fault, power

supply fault, process transducer signal fault, or operation of remote safety devices.

d. Harmonic Distortion Control:1) The variable frequency drive manufacturer shall perform a harmonic

analysis study in accordance with IEEE 399-1997. The study shall establish the requirements for harmonic distortion control. Harmonic analysis study report shall be submitted concurrently with the variable frequency drive submittals.

2) Variable frequency drive design shall be such that the maximum contribution from all variable frequency drives does not exceed the following:a) IEEE 519-1992 voltage and current distortion limits for general

systems applications at the point of common coupling.

b) 5% total demand distortion (total harmonic current distortion in percent of maximum demand load current) and 5% total harmonic voltage distortion at the building service switchboard.

3. Where specified herein, controllers shall be provided with damped low pass DV/DT drive output filters. Filters shall have K-rated line reactor, gapped iron core, inductor, copper windings and 40ºC ambient temperature rating with a 155ºC maximum operating temperature. Filters shall allow mounting of variable frequency drives up to 3000' from motor loads by filtering voltage spikes.


230010-11

4. Controllers shall have the following internal protective functions for the protection of the controller modules and motors:a. DV/DT (voltage transient) and DI/DT (short circuit) protection.b. Inverse time overcurrent protection.c. Full time current limit to limit maximum speed for prevention of overload.d. Phase sequence (if phase sensitive), phase loss, overvoltage, undervoltage,

electronic thermal overload, abnormal temperature, DC overvoltage, and internal fault protection.

e. Motor winding ground fault.f. Motor and variable frequency drive overtemperature protection.g. Input power line surge protective device.

5. Integral EMI/RFI filter. Controllers shall be designed to avoid RF interference with other electronic equipment internal or external to the building.

6. Diagnostic module shall identify faults as they occur, storing them in nonvolatile memory for recall, including:a. Overcurrent.b. Overvoltage.c. Undervoltage.d. Ground fault.e. Electronic motor overload, UL listed for this function.

7. Operator panels shall include digital display and keyboard for entry of set-up parameters, recall of faults from diagnostic module, and display of current operating values including:a. Output frequency.b. Motor speed.c. Motor current.d. Output voltage.e. Analog input values.f. Digital input status.g. Elapsed time meter.h. Power on indication.

8. Provide nameplate engraved with system identification and hand-off-automatic switch. The hand position shall start the drive and shall have a manual means of speed adjustment. In the automatic position, the drive shall be started and adjusted remotely.

9. Controller design shall permit operation at full load with ambient conditions between 0°C and 40°C, with capacity to handle 110% overload torque for 1 minute. Printed circuit boards shall be tested under full rated load at 10°C above rated ambient temperature for at least 20 hours, and failures corrected prior to shipment.

10. When enabled by remote controls, controller shall start at zero speed and ramp to the current speed setting. Speed range shall be adjustable between 0 Hz and 66 Hz, with separately adjustable maximum and minimum speeds, and adjustable rate of acceleration and deceleration. Provide at least 2 lockout speed ranges with adjustable minimum and maximum speed settings to prevent operation at driven equipment resonant vibration frequencies.


230010-12

11. Controllers shall restart automatically upon restoration of stable electric service after power supply faults, with adjustable time delay before restart. Operating parameters shall be stored in nonvolatile memory. Controllers shall continue to operate at the minimum speed setpoint on loss of remote control signal, and activate the remote alarm contact.

12. Variable frequency drives shall be designed for starting into a spinning motor. The variable frequency drive shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the variable frequency drive shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to the preset speed.

13. Drive displacement power factor shall be between 0.95 and 1.0 lagging over the entire operating speed range.

14. Drive efficiency shall be greater than 96% at 100% speed full load.

D. Start-up service: as specified in Section 230090, Performance Verification.

E. Service: manufacturer shall maintain a parts and service facility within 4 hours of this Project, which shall have inventory to cover not less than 80% parts service within 24 hours, and 95% within 48 hours. Further, the facility shall have a factory-trained service representative to furnish installation, test, and start-up supervision necessary for final approval and acceptance, as well as to perform maintenance and repairs oncomponents.

F. Warranty: in addition to other warranties specified herein, equipment shall be guaranteed against defective parts and workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's standard warranty, but in no event shall it be for a period of less than 2 years from date of initial start-up of the system and shall include labor and travel time.

G. Manufacturer: ABB, AC Tech, Allen-Bradley, ASIRobicon, Cutler-Hammer, Danfoss, GE Fuji, Hitachi, Johnson Controls/York, Reliance, Siemens, Square D, Toshiba, Trane, US Drives, or Yaskawa.

2.09 VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. Apparatus shall be by one manufacturer, except where herein specified otherwise.

B. Vibration bases for fans shall have adjustable motor slide rails, and shall accommodate motor overhang. Bases shall be of welded construction with cross members to form an integral support platform. Steel members shall be designed to match supported equipment. Bases for exterior use shall be completely corrosion resistant.

C. Where isolators are exposed to weather, springs shall be powder- or neoprene-coated and other parts hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-plated.


230010-13

D. Isolators:1. Type FS - Free-standing, laterally stable, unhoused spring type with leveling bolts

for bolting to the equipment. Spring diameter shall be not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Springs shall be complete with neoprene or fiberglass noise isolation pads, minimum 0.25" thick, bonded to the baseplate.a. Manufacturer: Amber-Booth SW, Kinetics Noise Control FDS, Mason

SLF, Vibration Eliminator OST, Vibration Mountings & Controls A, or Vibro-Acoustics FS.

E. Flexible metal hose connectors: stainless steel corrugated type with stainless steel woven braid outer sheath.1. Manufacturer: Amber-Booth SS, Mason BSS, Vibration Eliminator Stainless

Steel flexible Connectors, or Vibro-Acoustics SMP.

F. Thrust restraints: a set (2 or more) of spring thrust resisting assemblies consisting of coil springs, spring retainers, isolation washers, angle mounting brackets, and elastomeric tubing for isolating thrust rods.1. Manufacturer: Amber-Booth TRK, Kinetics Noise Control HSR, Mason WB,

Vibration Eliminator HTR-1, Vibration Mountings & Controls HTR, or Vibro-Acoustics AHCS.

G. Caulking: resilient, paintable, nonsag and nonhardening latex sealant complying with ASTM C834-2010.1. Manufacturer: Owens Corning Quietzone Acoustical Sealant, QuietSolution

Quiet Seal 350, 3M FireDam 150+, STI SpecSeal Smoke 'N' Sound Sealant, or U.S. Gypsum Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant.


A. Refer to Section 08310, Access Doors and Panels.

2.11 PAINTING

A. Paint for high temperature piping and equipment shall be high temperature resistant, designed for the temperatures at which the system will operate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DURING CONSTRUCTION



230010-14

B. Store equipment and material under cover, and off the ground or floors exposed to rain.


D. Protect coils against damage by installing temporary closure panels over exposed coil faces. Panels shall be minimum 24 gauge sheet metal or 0.375" plywood.

E. Close open ends of fans, terminal units, air handling units, and ductwork with temporary closures of sheet plastic taped in place.

F. Plug ends of pipes when work is stopped to prevent debris from entering the pipes.

G. Provide dust and debris protection for ductwork, coils, fans, equipment, motors, and bearings operated during construction up to date of substantial completion.

H. Cover open ends of exhaust and return ducts with temporary filter media while fan systems are operating.

3.02 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS


B. Coordinate the installation of new ductwork, piping and other equipment with existing equipment which is to remain operational to avoid conflict with operating performance and working clearances.

C. Remove piping and ductwork rendered useless due to changes. Plug outlets in piping. Blank-off openings in ductwork and seal airtight.

D. Relocate concealed piping which is exposed by the removal of walls and reconnect.

E. Sleeves left open by removal of piping shall be cut flush with the finished slab, and filled with grout flush with both sides of slab.

F. Existing unit heaters, window fans and window air conditioning units which are removed and are not reused in the new work shall be turned over to the Owner.

G. Material and equipment which has been removed and not accepted by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.


230010-15

H. Material and equipment which has been removed shall not be used in the new work, except as specified herein.

I. Where existing piping, ductwork and equipment is indicated on the Drawings, its size and location shall be verified.

J. Coordinate water treatment chemicals with chemicals used in existing systems prior to connection of new and existing piping.

K. Utilize service procedures to maximize recycling, and prohibit venting, of chlorofluorocarbons and hydrochlorofluorocarbons during servicing, removal, and disposal of equipment containing refrigerants, in accordance with the Clean Air Act Amendments-1990, Title VI.


A. Air systems shall operate without aerodynamic noise generated from the faulty installation of ductwork or any component of the air distribution system.

B. Equipment shall be installed and connected as specified herein or indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for this Project. Furnish and install auxiliary piping, water seals, valves, and electrical connections recommended by the manufacturer for operation.

C. Motor quantities, sizes and equipment wattage ratings specified herein or indicated on the Drawings are the minimum requirements, unless noted otherwise. Motor quantities, sizes and equipment wattage ratings less than those specified herein or indicated on the Drawings are not acceptable. Larger motor sizes and equipment wattage ratings may only be provided if necessary to meet the prescriptive requirements specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. Where multiple motors or motor sizes or equipment wattage ratings larger than specified herein or indicated on the Drawings are furnished, provide and coordinate the corresponding increased number or capacity of feeders and other electrical equipment serving them, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Fans, drive sheaves, motors, and pumps shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall have steady state radial vibration levels which do not exceed the following:

Equipment Peak-to-Peak Displacement (mils)

Fans, drive sheaves, and motors under 600 rpm 4600 to 1000 rpm 31000 to 2000 rpm 2over 2000 rpm 1


230010-16

Equipment Peak-to-Peak Displacement (mils)Pumps and motors

over 1800 rpm 1under 1800 rpm 2

E. Field-installed equipment controls or sensor wiring shall be installed in conduit. Low voltage control and sensor wiring shall be installed in conduits separate from line voltage control wiring and power wiring.

F. Where water and steam connection sizes at equipment vary from the pipe size indicated on the Drawings, provide appropriate reducers/increasers directly adjacent to the pipe-equipment unions. Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, the size of the valves and accessories dedicated to the equipment shall not be less than the pipe size to which they are connected.


A. Where several pipes run parallel and in the same plane:1. 2.5" and smaller: may be supported on gang or multiple hangers. Separate

copper tubing from ferrous supports with copper-plated steel or 4 psf sheet lead.

B. Supports for copper tubing shall not be more than 10' apart. Supports for copper tubing 1" and smaller shall be not more than 5' apart. Pipes shall be supported within 1' of each elbow and tee.

C. Hangers and supports for insulated piping shall bear on outside of insulation. Hangers shall be sized for uncompressed insulation thickness.

D. Provide insulation protectors.

E. Support piping independently of equipment.

F. Adjust hangers and supports so that loading is uniform.

G. Hanger rods shall be suspended from the structure. Do not suspend from other piping, equipment, or ductwork.

H. Expansion Anchors:1. Use for piping in existing concrete and masonry construction.2. Use for piping 2" and smaller in new concrete construction.

3.05 SLEEVES

A. Provide where pipes pass through walls, floors and roofs, except in the following circumstances:1. Concealed wall openings of the required diameter in non fire- or smoke-rated

construction.


230010-17

2. Concealed floor openings formed by the use of plastic forming devices providing a circular opening of the required diameter.

3. Core drilled concealed openings. Openings in roofs shall not be core drilled. Obtain written permission prior to core drilling.

B. Sleeves shall be placed into position prior to wall, floor, or roof construction. Sleeves shall be tight-fitting and cut smooth.

C. Wall sleeves shall extend 1" on each side of walls.

D. Size sleeves for insulated pipes penetrating nonrated construction to allow full thickness insulation.

E. Sleeves in nonrated construction shall be sized to provide clearance all around pipe, including insulation, to accommodate thermal movement. Clearance shall be minimum 0.75".

F. Furnish 4 psf lead flashing for sleeves through flat built-up roofs extending at least 8"from the sleeve in all directions.

3.06 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING

A. Identify piping specified under this Division in accordance with ASME A13.1-2007.

B. Legends shall be on the lower quarters of the pipe except where such location would be obscured. Arrow tape shall be wrapped completely around the pipe at each end of the legend with arrows pointing in the direction of flow.

C. Locate pipe identification as follows:1. Above suspended ceilings:

a. Within 18" of each valve or valve assembly.b. At tees within 36" of both main and branch.c. Within 36" of each 90º elbow.d. Identify at not less than 1 point each piping run visible in each room with

identification on not over 20' intervals.e. On not over 20' intervals.

2. Piping concealed in chases or shafts:a. Each pipe visible through an access door or panel.

3. Piping exposed in rooms other than mechanical equipment areas:a. Omit identification of piping 0.5" and smaller exposed at connections to

equipment.b. With the above exception, identify at not less than 1 point each piping run

visible in each room with identification on not over 20' intervals.


230010-18

D. Schedule of Piping Identification:

Piping System Tape Abbreviatedand Contents Color Legend Legend

Hot Water Yellow Hot Water HWS & HWR


A. Provide numbered brass tags on valves except at unit heaters, fan-coil units, terminal unit coils, finned tube radiation, and convectors. Attach tags to valve stems with brass S-hooks or brass chain.


C. Provide for each system a typewritten schedule of valves giving number, location (room number), and function of each with a small scale diagram outlining general piping layout and location of each numbered valves.

3.08 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Identification shall consist of upper case letters.

B. Each starter, variable frequency drive, contactor, push button station, control switch, disconnect, and thermal overload switch shall be appropriately identified by nameplates with 0.25" high letters.1. Identification shall include the equipment designation and device function, e.g.,

CT-1 Water Level Control Disable.

C. Each piece of equipment and access door shall be stenciled with its equipment number in a prominent location with minimum 2" high letters.

D. Access panels and doors in ductwork and plenums shall be stenciled with minimum 1"high letters to indicate the type of devices accessible therein and the system or fanidentification number associated with that ductwork or plenum.

E. Identify each filter using a stick-on tag with the filter size and description, the American Air Filter part number, and the quantity of filter units required. Tags shall be installed near or on the filter access door.

3.09 MOTORS

A. Provide motors for equipment covered in Division 23 unless otherwise specified herein. Select motors for operation not exceeding a 1.0 service factor and within the nameplate amperage and nominal power rating.


230010-19

3.10 STARTERS

A. Provide starters, push buttons, thermal overload switches, and contactors for equipment covered in Division 23 unless otherwise specified herein. Installation of starters, push buttons, and thermal overload switches, not factory installed, is specified under Division 26.

B. Provide 120 V secondary control power transformers for control circuits where equipment is served at 208 V or higher.

3.11 FUSES

A. Provide fuses in equipment furnished under this Division of the specifications.

B. Provide 3 spare fuses of each size, UL class, and voltage rating furnished under this Division of the specifications and turn over to the Owner. Obtain a receipt for same.

3.12 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. Installation is specified under Division 26.

B. Start-up shall be performed under the supervision of a technical service employee of the manufacturer. Set minimum speed at 20%, and calibrate the control input to match the operating conditions and the automatic temperature control system. Submit written certification, upon completion, that components have been installed correctly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, are operating correctly, and that operation and set-up has been coordinated with the automatic temperature control systems.1. Set default speed at 25%.

C. Test each fan from minimum to maximum speed to determine the resonant frequencies. Once the resonant speeds have been determined, adjust the frequency lock-out feature to eliminate fan operation at those speeds.

D. Install DV/DT drive output filters where load lead length is 50' and greater.


A. General:1. Select and locate vibration isolation equipment for uniform loading and

deflection, according to weight distribution of equipment.2. Vibration isolators shall be installed and connected as specified herein or

indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and certified submittal data.

3. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be supervised by an authorized, factory-trained manufacturer's representative.


230010-20

4. There shall be no direct contact of isolated piping, ductwork, or equipment with shaft walls, floor slabs, structural elements, conduits, or any other nonisolated item.

5. Prior to startup, clean out foreign matter between bases, isolators, equipment, and mounting surfaces. Verify that there are no rigid connections between equipment and building structure.

6. Where recommended by the manufacturer, isolator baseplates shall be bolted to the structure or foundation. Bolting shall incorporate neoprene bushings and washers.

7. Installed Type FS isolators shall not incorporate a leveling bolt of greater length than that supplied with the isolators.

8. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change in position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

9. Conflicts with other trades that will result in direct contact with isolated equipment, piping, or ductwork, shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to installation.

10. Discrepancies between the specifications and the field conditions, or changes required due to specific equipment selection shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to installation.

B. Equipment Isolation:1. Isolated equipment mounting systems shall permit equipment motion in all

directions.2. Mount fans, as indicated on the Drawings, on structural steel vibration bases

common to both fan and motor.3. Provide height saving brackets where recommended by the manufacturer for

equipment stability, or operating height requirements.4. Provide spring-loaded thrust restraints for fans and air handling units where

movement under any operating condition will exceed 0.375".5. Mount air compressor on Type NS isolators.

C. Caulking: install in accordance with ASTM C919-2008.

3.14 EQUIPMENT


B. Foreign matter shall be blown, vacuumed, flushed, or cleaned out of and from new equipment, piping, ductwork, pumps, fans, motors, bearings, devices, switches, controls, and panels.

C. Clean and polish identification plates.


230010-21


A. Where HVAC work is concealed by walls or ceilings, or is inaccessible, provide an access panel to provide access for service and maintenance.

B. HVAC work located above ceilings is considered accessible if the ceiling is the accessible type and is arranged for access to the equipment.


D. Access doors providing access to ductwork access doors shall allow for service and maintenance of the intended equipment.

E. Installation of access panels is specified under another Division.

3.16 PAINTING


B. Equipment factory finishes damaged or deteriorated during construction shall be repaired to match original finish.


D. Exterior ferrous equipment, piping and supports shall be painted with 2 coats of rustpreventive paint, color selected by the Architect.

E. Exposed interior uninsulated black steel piping, and exposed nongalvanized ferrous accessories, hangers, rods, inserts, and mechanical supports shall be prepared and painted with 1 coat of rust preventive paint prior to other painting or identification, or 2 coats of rust preventive paint if no other painting is specified.

F. Ductwork, conduits, insulation, pipe and structure visible through grilles, registers and diffusers shall be painted flat black.

3.17 COORDINATION

A. Provide offsets, transitions, and fittings to coordinate the work of each trade with that of other trades, including plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural, and architectural.


230010-22

3.18 PHASING

A. Install work in phases as required by the Architectural Documents.



B. Operation and maintenance documentation, in hardback 3-ring loose-leaf binders except full size drawings and CDs, shall cover the HVAC and automatic temperature control systems. Documentation shall include an operations and maintenance documentation directory, emergency information, operating manual, maintenance manual, test reports, and construction documents.

C. The operation and maintenance documentation package shall be submitted as one comprehensive package to the Architect 3 months before systems start-up, and shall be updated, revised and completed at completion of, construction.

D. Compile and coordinate the documentation for equipment and systems installed. Documentation shall be typewritten and shall contain, at a minimum, the following information.1. Introduction:

a. Project name, contractors' and subcontractors' names, addresses, and telephone and facsimile numbers. Indicate the portion of the work forwhich each subcontractor was responsible.

b. Index.2. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory:


3. Emergency Information:a. Information for technical and nontechnical personnel about actions

recommended during emergency situations to protect life and property and to minimize disruption to the building occupants. Emergencies shall, at a minimum, include:1) Fire.2) Security breach.3) Water outage.4) Power failure.5) Refrigerant release.6) Heating failure.7) Cooling failure.

4. Operation Manual:a. General Information:

1) Building function.


230010-23

2) Building description.3) Operating standards and logs.

b. Technical Information:1) System description.2) Operating routines and procedures.3) Seasonal start-up and shutdown.4) Special procedures.5) Basic troubleshooting.

5. Maintenance Manual:a. Descriptions (specifications) of the equipment and components.b. Description of function, as applicable: the function of the equipment,


c. Recommended maintenance and lubrication procedures and their recommended frequency for this Project.

d. Recommended list of spare parts, part numbers, and the place(s) from which they can be obtained.

e. Original purchase order number; date of purchase; name, address, and the telephone number of the vendor; and warranty information.

f. Name and address of at least one service agency capable of providing maintenance.

g. Installation information.h. Other information needed for the preparation of documents supporting the

management of operation and maintenance programs.6. Test Reports and Certifications:

a. Copies of tests and certifications performed during manufacture and construction, including but not limited to the following:1) Certification of installation of vibration isolation.2) Certification of seismic and wind restraints.3) Receipt for spare fuses.4) Receipt for instruction of operating personnel.5) Certification of hydronic system cleaning.

7. Construction Documents:a. Record drawings.b. Approved submittals, including revised shop drawings indicating as-

installed conditions.c. Equipment identification charts and schedules.d. Warranty certificates.e. Inspection certificates.f. Test, adjust and balance report.g. Performance verification report.

E. Submit a receipt signed by the Owner acknowledging receipt of the operation and maintenance documentation package.


230010-24


A. Refer to Section 01770, Closeout Procedures.

3.21 DIAGRAMS

A. Frame and mount the following information:

Information Location

HVAC diagrams, start-stop procedures, and valve schedules.

Appropriate mechanical rooms.

Automatic temperature control diagrams and sequences. Adjacent to each control panel.

Apropriate control and interface drawings, including a simplified guide to local programming through the digital display unit, a directory of I/O points connected to that panel, and variables which may be displayed.

Posted on the inside cover of each DDC panel.

B. Diagrams shall be type written or computer generated.

C. Diagrams shall be as-built, and shall include interfaces and interlocks with other equipment.

D. Diagram framing system: 0.125" thick acrylic with satin finish aluminum frames.

3.22 MAINTENANCE

A. Equipment operated prior to the date of substantial completion shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, provide complete water treatment for hydronic systems operated prior to date of substantial completion.

B. Prepare and submit a lubrication chart listing for each piece of equipment:

1. Points requiring lubrication.

2. Recommendations for a single manufacturer's lubricants with brand name and designation.

3. Frequency of lubrication required.


230010-25

C. Lubricate each item of apparatus requiring lubrication prior to start-up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.


A. Provide the designated Owner's personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of equipment specified in Division 23. Conduct 2 formal instruction sessions for operating personnel. The first session shall be conducted at the time of start-up and check-out, and the second session shall be approximately 2 months later. Sessions shall be a minimum of 2 days for basic HVAC systems, and as specified herein for specialty systems and equipment. Sessions shall be conducted at the site.

B. Prepare and submit a syllabus describing an overview of the proposed training program, describing how the training program will be conducted, when and where meetings are to be held, names and company affiliations of lecturers, description of contents and outline for each lecture, and recommended reference material and outside reading. Obtain direction from the Architect on which operating personnel shall be instructed in each system. Proposed training schedules, materials, and lesson plans shall be submitted to the Owner for review of the content and adequacy of the training of the Owner's personnel.

C. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor, or manufacturer's representative. More than one party may be required to execute the training. The training program shall include the following, as appropriate for the system or equipment:1. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on

training for each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including start-up, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm modes, and power failure.

2. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the operation and maintenance manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.

3. The controls contractor shall attend training sessions for each type of equipment or system controlled by the automation system, to discuss the interaction of the automation system as it relates to the equipment or system, in addition to the training required for the automation system.

4. Training shall include:a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction

material included in the operation and maintenance manuals.b. A review of the written operation and maintenance instructions emphasizing

safe and proper operating requirements, preventative and routine maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions.


230010-26

The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover, and any emergency procedures.

c. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees.e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.f. Explanatory information included in the operation and maintenance

manuals and the location of plans and manuals in the facility.g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.h. Classroom sessions shall include the use of overhead projections, slides,

video/audio-taped material as appropriate.i. Specific operating and maintenance procedures for:

1) Rooftop air handling unit.j. Factory-trained technicians shall give instruction on the following specialty

systems and equipment:Minimum Session

System/Equipment Duration, hours

Variable frequency drives 4Rooftop air handling unit 4

k. DDC system training: as specified in Section 238000, Automatic Temperature Controls.

5. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment.

6. Explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of local packaged controls not controlled by the central control system.

7. Training shall occur after testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Architect.

8. Provide DVD format video recordings of training sessions and a complete record copy of training materials, handouts, and other printed materials used in each training session.

9. Obtain a receipt acknowledging completion of each item of instruction.


COVER SHEET FORSUBMITTALS TO NEWCOMB & BOYD

Project: ________________________________________________ Date:

Item: Submittal Number:

Manufacturer: Model:

Specification Paragraph and/or Drawing Number:

Capacity:

Electrical Characteristics (including identification of all separate connections or services required):

Accessories:

Options:

Deviations (if any; if none, state so):

General Contractor Approval:


230090-1


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. General provisions and other HVAC systems are specified in other Sections of Division 23.

B. Performance verification is ongoing process and shall be performed throughout construction. Performance verification verifies that systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Construction Documents.

C. This Section covers HVAC systems performance verification, as required to demonstrate that the equipment and systems of Division 23 are ready for safe and satisfactory operation, as defined by the Construction Documents. Performance verification shall include, but shall not be limited to, identification of piping and equipment, cleaning, lubrication, start-up, check-out, and testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems, preparation of equipment and systems documentation and of maintenance and operation manuals, Owner training, and preparation of record drawings.

D. Performance verification shall conclude with the completion of required deferred testing, training, and system documentation as specified herein and required to demonstrate the proper operation of the HVAC equipment and systems provided by this Division.

E. Verify, at a minimum, the performance of the following systems and equipment and witness the following tests:1. Section 230010, General:

a. Seismic restraints.b. Variable frequency drives.c. Vibration isolation.

2. Section 231000, Piping, Valves and Accessories:a. Automatic air vents.

3. Section 236000, Equipment:a. Electric heating coils.b. Rooftop air conditioning units.c. Terminal units.

4. Section 237000, Air Distribution:a. Centrifugal power roof ventilators.b. Filter pressure gauges.c. Laboratory exhaust systems.

5. Section 238000, Automatic Temperature Controls:a. DDC system acceptance.b. DDC system start-up and checkout.c. DDC system training.


230090-2

d. DDC systems.6. Section 230095, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:

a. Certified test reports.b. Ductwork leakage tests.c. Hydrostatic pressure tests.d. Laboratory fume exhaust hood and biological safety cabinet certification tests.


A. Provide a HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor with ten years experience in HVAC contracting. The HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor shall become familiar with the Owner's project requirements and the requirements of the performance verification process as defined in this Section. The HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate and execute the required performance verification activities.

B. The HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor shall review submittal data for conformance with the requirements of the Project, shall monitor compliance with the requirements specified herein for storage and protection of equipment during construction, shall authorize the initial starting of equipment and systems in a manner to avoid damage to equipment, shall oversee start-up, testing and balancing, and shall document that the scheduled and specified performance requirements of each systemhave been accomplished.

C. Refer to ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005, Addenda a-d-2010, The Commissioning Process, ASHRAE Guideline 1.1-2007, The HVAC+R Technical Requirements for theCommissioning Process, and Guideline 4-2008, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.

1.03 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

A. The HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor shall be responsible for scheduling, supervising, and coordinating and executing the start-up, testing, and performance verification activities as specified herein. Include and itemize the cost of performance verification in the contract price, and in each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, performance verification efforts and documentation, operations and maintenance data, and training as specified herein.

B. HVAC Performance Verification shall take place in three phases. Performance verification requirements for each phase are as follows:1. Construction Phase:

a. Attend a performance verification scoping meeting and additional such meetings, initially scheduled monthly until prefunctional testing of equipment and systems begins, and weekly thereafter during the construction phase to facilitate the performance verification process. The HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate meeting attendance.


230090-3

b. Report in writing to the Architect, at least as often as performance verification meetings are scheduled, concerning the status of mechanical activities as they affect the performance verification process, the status of each discrepancy identified the prefunctional and functional testing process, explanations of any disagreements with the identified deficiencies, and the proposed resolution and schedule for correction of the deficiency.

c. Provide documentation of installed systems and equipment, and develop functional testing procedures. This documentation shall include detailed manufacturer installation, start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures; full details of any Owner-contracted tests; fan and pump curves; full factory testing reports, if any; and full warranty information, including responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force. In addition, the installation, start-up and check-out materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field check-out sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Architect.




g. Prepare a preliminary schedule for performance verification activities, including pipe and duct system pressure and leakage testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, and testing, adjusting and balancing start and completion, and update the schedule during the construction period, as appropriate. Notify the Architect immediately when the performance verification activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction.

h. HVAC equipment start-up shall not be initiated until completion of pressure and leakage testing and cleaning as specified in other Sections of Division 23.

i. Provide start-up and prefunctional testing for equipment, including the building automation control system, and execute the HVAC-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for the verification of the performance of all the equipment during the start-up and initial check-out process.


k. Correct noncompliance items before beginning functional performance testing. Air and water testing, adjusting and balancing shall be completed with

discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the respective air- or water-related systems.


230090-4

2. Acceptance Phase:a. Place equipment and systems into operation and continue their operation

during each working day of the testing, adjusting and balancing, and performance verification activities, as required.

b. For each system or area, have required prefunctional checklists, calibrations, start-up and prefunctional tests of the mechanical systems and associated controls completed prior to beginning the testing, adjusting and balancing process.

c. Provide sheaves and belts as required to achieve required equipment performance, as measured by the testing, adjusting and balancing work.

d. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting and prefunctional testing of equipment and to execute the functional tests for each individual piece of equipment and system. Technicians shall be available and present during the agreed upon scheduled tests and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.

e. Perform functional testing for specified equipment and interpret the test data, as necessary.

f. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as identified by the HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor, and interpreted by the Architect and retest the equipment, as required to demonstrate proper operation and performance.

g. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals as specified herein, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.

h. Maintain marked-up record drawings and produce final record drawings of Project drawings and contractor-generated coordination drawings. List and identify on these record drawings the locations of control system components, airflow stations, and sensor installations that are not equipment mounted.

i. Provide specified training of the Owner’s operating personnel.j. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements

to maintain the validity of the warranty.3. Warranty Period:

a. Execute seasonal or deferred functional testing.b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to operations and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT



230090-5

B. Test equipment shall be of the quality and accuracy required to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified and shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, or as specified herein. Equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates available on request.1. Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration

within the past 12 months and a resolution of ±0.1ºF. Accuracy of temperature test equipment shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested.

2. Humidity sensors shall have a certified calibration within the past 6 months and a resolution of ±1%. Accuracy of humidity test equipment shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested.

3. Pressure sensors shall have a certified calibration within the 12 months and a resolution of 0.05% of sensor range. Accuracy of pressure test equipment shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SUBMITTALS






2. The start-up and initial check-out plan shall consist, as a minimum, of the following:a. The manufacturer’s standard written start-up and check-out procedures copied

from the installation manuals and manufacturer’s normally used field check-out sheets. The plan shall include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of


230090-6

each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.

b. First-run checklist for equipment, including:1) Equipment properly set.2) Alignment of shafts and couplings.3) Adjustment of vibration isolators.4) Piping and equipment properly connected. 5) Completion of initial lubrication procedures.6) Clean filters in place, as appropriate.7) Wiring properly connected.8) Electrical overload relays appropriate for load.9) Electrical accessories properly installed and adjusted.10) Controls, safeties, and time switches properly set.11) Verification of direction of motor rotation after final

electrical connections by jogging motor.12) Verification of proper belt tension.13) Measurement of ampere draw of electric motors and

comparison with nameplate rating and with overload heater ratings.

14) Monitoring of temperature build-up in motors and bearings.

c. Contractor-developed prefunctional checklists.3. Identify which trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line



D. Sensor calibration: calibration of sensors associated with a given piece of equipment or system shall be included as part of the prefunctional testing and listed on the appropriate test checklists and reports for the system. This requirement may be met during the prefunctional testing of the temperature control or automation system, but shall also be documented with the functional testing procedures.

E. Completed start-up, check-out, and prefunctional test forms shall be completed and submitted to the Architect for review. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the Architect within 2 days of test completion. The Architect shall review the Contractor’s start-up and prefunctional testing reports and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. The


230090-7

Contractor shall correct items that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the Architect as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, the Architect shall recommend approval of the start-up and prefunctional testing ofeach systemand schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.


G. Do not operate HVAC systems in a mode that would induce unconditioned, humid outside air into the building.





A. Schedule and coordinate, with the approval of the Architect, any required seasonal testing, tests delayed until building construction is completed, required building occupancy or loading, weather, or other conditions are suitable for the demonstration of equipment or system’s performance, as specified herein. Deferred testing shall be executed, documented, and deficiencies corrected as specified herein for functional testing. Adjustments or corrections to the operations and maintenance manuals and as-built documents required by the results of the testing shall be made before the seasonal testing process is considered complete.

3.05 SEASONAL ADJUSTMENTS

A. The HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor shall schedule, coordinate and complete the seasonal adjustment process. During this effort the HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor shall:1. Check and verify the calibration of temperature control devices and thermostats.

Test and verify control sequences for proper operation for the season.2. Check the operation, performance, and balance of air and hydronic systems to

provide uniform distribution and comfort conditions.


230090-8

B. Where deficient operation or defective equipment is discovered, provide corrective measures.


A. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the functional test procedure forms or on an attached sheet. The functional test procedure forms and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the Architect within 2 days of test completion. The Architect shall review the Contractor's start-up and prefunctional testing documentation and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. Work with the Architect to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. Correct items that are deficient or incomplete in a timely manner, and notify the Architect as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.



A. The HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems covered in Division 23 and deliver this documentation for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals prior to the training of the Owner's personnel.


A. The HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor shall schedule, coordinate and assemble, and deliver the documentation of training required by Division 23.


A. Functional test requirements for the demonstration of proper system and equipment operation shall be defined by the HVAC Performance Verification Supervisor. Execution of these test and demonstration of the required performance shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems or subsystems at the discretion of the Architect. Beginning system testing before full completion of construction shall not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including prefunctional checklists.


230090-9

C. Functional testing shall be completed and test documentation approved by the Architect before the Project will be considered substantially complete.



230095-1

SECTION 230095 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING



B. This Section covers testing, adjusting, and balancing work specified herein, and also

indicated on the Drawings, and is defined to include, but is not limited to, air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus of the new and existing HVAC work. The work consists of setting speed and flow, adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.

C. Component types of testing, adjusting, and balancing specified in this Section include the

following as applied to HVAC equipment: 1. Fans. 2. Air handling units. 3. Ductwork systems. 4. Grilles, registers, and diffusers. 5. Pumps. 6. Coils. 7. Piping systems. 8. Terminal units.

D. Performance verification is specified in Section 230090, Performance Verification. This

Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of performance verification specified therein.


A. Work shall be performed by a firm certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in testing and balancing for this type of project. Work shall be performed under the direction of an Engineer licensed in the State of Georgia.

B. Conform to:

1. NEBB-2005, Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environment Systems, or AABC MN-1-2002, as applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus.


230095-2

2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments and testing, adjusting and balancing, except as otherwise specified herein.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 30 days after the award of the contract, submit an organizational chart and proof of current certification identifying current certified supervisors in the trade that they are certified.

B. Immediately upon award of the contract, review the construction documents to determine

that: 1. The required testing, adjusting, and balancing devices, e.g., balancing dampers and

balancing valves, are included. 2. The design intent of the systems and their operation to the extent necessary to

perform the work is clear. 3. The systems are capable of being tested, adjusted, and balanced as designed. 4. Upon completion of the review, submit a report summarizing the findings, and

including any recommendations.

C. Submit a balancing plan that provides a detailed description of the methodology that will be implemented to accomplish the testing, adjusting, and balancing for this Project. Include: 1. Schedule for the Project, with timeline. 2. Instruments that will be used and copy of their latest certification. 3. Sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms for each system. 4. Single-line schematic flow diagram for each system. 5. Proposed pitot tube traverse locations.

D. Submit certified test reports signed by the supervisor who performed the testing,

adjusting, and balancing work, complying with the requirements of this Section and Section 230090, Performance Verification. 1. Include identification and types of instruments used, their most recent calibration

dates, and methods of testing and balancing each system and piece of equipment. 2. A final test and balance report including all "shall" and "should" requirements of the

NEBB TAB Procedural Standards, Chapter 5, Standards for Reports and Forms. 3. Include AABC or NEBB test forms containing installation data, design data,

equipment data, and operating data for systems and equipment, including air handling unit pressure profiles for each unit and duct traverse forms showing all measurements taken at traverse locations.

4. Include copies of readings, with piping layouts and duct layouts showing where readings were taken.

5. Identification of the index device for each air and hydronic system and documentation of the minimum pressure setpoint required at this device to achieve the flows reported.


230095-3

6. Include terminal unit correction factors and DDC controller calibration constants for terminal devices and flow measuring installations.


A. Do not proceed with adjusting and balancing work until: 1. Deficiencies in the systems and controls that would prevent complete and accurate

testing, adjusting and balancing have been corrected. 2. Work is complete and systems, including automatic temperature controls, are

operable. 3. Cleaning, flushing, lubrication, and start-up specified in other Sections has been

accomplished. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. Use the same products and materials for patching holes in insulation, ductwork, and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, and attaching jigs, to match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Submit a detailed report documenting deficiencies of systems and controls that prevent complete testing, adjusting and balancing. Do not proceed with adjusting and balancing work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Provide materials, equipment, labor, and power to test, adjust, and proportionally

balance new and existing heating, ventilating, refrigeration, and air conditioning systems and components as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Verify functioning of operating devices and equipment. In addition, the following specific testing and balancing shall be performed. 1. Ductwork Leakage Testing:

a. For ductwork with static pressure classification of 4" wg, 6" wg, or 10" wg, a leakage test shall be made after installation of the first representative sample of ductwork of each classification. The test sample shall incorporate at least: 5 transverse joints, typical seams, one elbow, 2 typical branch connections, and for riser ducts or other systems that include multiple fire dampers, one fire damper and one access door. After satisfactory results for the test sample, additional ductwork shall be tested totaling no less than 25% of the total duct area for each pressure class.

b. For ductwork with static pressure classification of 3" wg, a leakage test shall be made after installation of the first representative sample


230095-4

of ductwork. The test sample shall incorporate at least: 5 transverse joints, typical seams, one elbow, 2 typical branch connections, and for riser ducts or other systems that include multiple fire dampers, one fire damper and one access door. After satisfactory results for the test sample, additional ductwork shall be tested totaling no less than 25% of the total duct area.

c. For ductwork with static pressure classification of 0.5" wg, 1" wg, or 2" wg, a leakage test shall be made after installation of the first representative sample of ductwork of each classification. The test sample shall incorporate at least: 5 transverse joints, typical seams, one elbow, 2 typical branch connections, and for riser ducts or other systems that include multiple fire dampers, one fire damper and one access door. After satisfactory results for the test sample, additional ductwork shall be tested totaling no less than 25% of the total duct area for each pressure class.

d. Prior to testing, submit drawings indicating sections of ductwork to be tested, including area calculations.

e. Leakage testing shall be performed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual-2012.

f. Test pressure shall equal the static pressure classification for the duct. g. Leakage in each type of ductwork shall not exceed:

1) Rectangular Ductwork:

Static Pressure Classification, wg Leakage Class 0.5", 1", 2" 24 3" 12 4", 6", 10" 4

h. Submit a report certifying ductwork testing and results. i. Ductwork failing tests shall be reconstructed and retested until

satisfactory, before additional ductwork is installed and before ductwork is concealed.

j. Positive pressure testing may be used for negative pressure ductwork. 2. Air Systems Balancing, General:

a. Test, adjust, and balance systems to achieve operation and design air quantity, temperature differential, and pressure drop through ductwork, equipment, and components.

b. Variable frequency drives for fans shall be set up so that a 100% input signal to the variable frequency drive does not overload the fan motor and produces the design fan total static pressure at design airflow. If necessary, fan total static pressure shall be simulated. Adjustment of design airflow shall be accomplished by providing the proper motor sheave.


230095-5

c. Balance air handling units such that duct static pressures are maintained as low as possible while maintaining minimum inlet static pressure and airflow requirements at each terminal unit.

d. Total supply, return and outside air airflow for each air handling unit shall be measured using pitot tube duct traverses. Where the outside air inlet configuration is insufficient for a pitot tube duct traverse, the outside air shall be calculated as the difference between the supply and return.

e. For systems with diversity, with the fan under control and loads nearest the fan closed off to simulate diversity, verify design flow through each terminal unit. Diversity shall be calculated as the ratio of the total system capacity to the total connected load.

f. Adjust pattern adjustment devices in diffusers for horizontal discharge, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

g. Calibration of DDC flow elements shall be verified through the use of duct traverses or flow hoods, as appropriate for the device being calibrated. DDC flow elements shall not be used for balance adjustments prior to the verification of their calibration.

h. Balance laboratory fume hood exhaust systems to provide the exhaust air quantity indicated on the Drawings at the face of the equipment.

i. Test, adjust and balance minimum outside air and return dampers to produce the quantity of minimum outside air indicated on the Drawings when each air handling unit is operating at its maximum air quantity. Return air dampers shall be adjusted to a less than fully open position only if required to achieve the minimum outside air quantity indicated on the Drawings. Return and minimum outside air damper linkages shall be adjusted to position their respective dampers at full stroke. Permanently mark damper linkage adjustments. Measure, record and adjust the mixing plenum static pressure controller to the static pressure necessary to achieve the minimum outside air quantity.

j. Adjust the outside airflow and chilled waterflow to existing AHU-2 as schedules on the Drawings.

k. Balance existing air and hydronic systems to produce the flow rates indicated on the Drawings.

l. Balance and adjust systems to pressurize the entire building, and to minimize stack effect during the winter.

m. Balance and adjust individual room air distribution devices to achieve pressure relationships indicated on the Drawings.

3. Hydronic Systems Balancing, General: a. Test, adjust, and balance systems to achieve operation and design

flow, pressure, temperature differential, and pressure drop through equipment and components.

b. The contractor shall adjust the existing hot water differential pressure setpoint as necessary to accommodate the new heating coil in AHU-4.


230095-6

4. Hydronic Systems - Variable Flow, Variable Speed Pumps: a. Operate the system pumps under control and balance terminal devices

for design flow with control valves wide open. Record the pump operating data and piping loss data. Do not throttle the pump discharge. Calculate the pump differential pressure setpoint needed to obtain full flow at the worst case load and set the pump controller to that value.

b. Variable frequency drives for pumps shall be set up so that a 100% input signal to the variable frequency drive does not overload the pump motor and produces the design total head pressure at design flow. If necessary, system total head shall be simulated.

c. Balance pumps that are controlled in parallel such that the pump suction and discharge pressures are the same for each pump. The balancing valve associated with each pump shall be adjusted to equalize those pressures.

d. Balance hydronic systems such that distribution system differential pressures are maintained as low as possible while maintaining the minimum differential pressure and volume requirements at connected loads.

e. For systems with diversity, with the pump under control and loads nearest to the pump closed off to simulate diversity, verify design flow through each terminal device. Diversity shall be calculated as the ratio of the total system capacity to the total connected load.

5. Hydrostatic Pressure Testing: a. Test piping systems in accordance with the ASME standards

specified in Section 231000, Piping, Valves and Accessories. b. Test shall be held for 4 hours, minimum, with compensation made for

temperature change. c. No pressure change allowed.

C. Laboratory fume exhaust hood certification tests:

1. Where requested by the Owner, provide assistance during the certification tests to verify that each device is balanced and performing to the design conditions indicated on the Drawings.

D. Submit report of system deficiencies, leaks, or defects that must be corrected to

successfully pass tests.

E. Patch holes in insulation, vapor barriers, ductwork, and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes.

F. Position and secure memory stops on valves used for balancing.

G. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators,

memory stop positions, and controls and devices, to show final settings at completion


230095-7

of testing, adjusting, and balancing work. Provide markings with paint or permanent identification materials.

H. Prior to the date of substantial completion, after balancing is complete, furnish labor,

equipment and materials to verify a random 20% selection of all conditions.

I. Pressure and leakage tests of the piping and ductwork systems shall be made in the presence of the Owner.

3.02 SEASONAL ADJUSTMENTS

A. Assist the Performance Verification Supervisor with the seasonal adjustment process. During this effort the Performance Verification Supervisor will: 1. Check the operation, performance, and balance of air and hydronic systems

to provide uniform distribution and comfort conditions. 2. Where deficient operation or defective equipment is discovered, Contractor

shall provide corrective measures as required by the warranty provisions of these specifications and shall assist the Performance Verification Supervisor in the correction of these deficiencies.



231000-1

SECTION 231000 PIPING, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES



B. This Section covers piping, fittings, valves and accessories for heating, ventilating, and air

conditioning systems, and, except as otherwise specified herein, does not cover fuel, plumbing, or fire protection systems.

C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing is specified in Section 230095, Testing, Adjusting and

Balancing.

D. Performance verification is specified in Section 230090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of performance verification specified therein.


A. Piping systems shall meet ASME B31.9-2011, Building Services Piping.

B. Components of the same type shall be products of the same manufacturer.

C. Pressure/temperature ratings of components and accessories shall meet or exceed design conditions for the system in which they are installed. Components and accessory items shall be designed for operating conditions of not less than:

System Rating Hot water 125 psig and 200ºF

Other services 125 psig and 200ºF

1.03 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Fume hood casework are specified under another Division. Provide final steam and condensate connections for operation.


231000-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PIPE:

Service

Joints Material

Ht water, 2" and smaller Soldered Copper tubing, type L, hard drawn ASTM B88-2009

Coil condensate drain Soldered Copper tubing, type L, hard drawn, ASTM B88-2009

B. Solder: 95/5 tin/silver or tin/antimony alloy type.

C. Flux: ASTM B813-2010.

D. Brazing Alloys: 1. For copper-to-copper joints: AWS A5.8/A5.8M-2011, Classification BCuP-5, 15% silver

brazing alloy with a melting point range of 1300ºF to 1500ºF. 2. For dissimilar metal joints: AWS A5.8/A5.8M-2011, Classification BAG-1, 45% silver

brazing alloy with a melting point of 1145ºF to 1400ºF. 3. Flux: approved by brazing alloy manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer: Airco, Handy & Harman, or Harris.

2.02 VALVES AND STRAINERS

A. Body construction, unless specified otherwise herein: 1. 125 250 psig service and lower: cast iron.

B. Ball valves: bronze body, full port, bronze ball, TFE seals and seats, blowout-proof stem, and

soldered or threaded ends. Ball valves shall be 2" size and smaller. Ball valves in insulated piping shall be provided with extended lever or stem. Ball valves used for balancing shall have memory stops. 1. Manufacturer: Apollo, Crane, Jenkins, Kitz, NIBCO, or Stockham.

C. Control valves: as specified in Section 238000, Automatic Temperature Controls.

D. Strainers: Y-type, flanged body with removable type 316 stainless steel or monel screens.

Strainers 2" and smaller shall be threaded, bronze body type. 1. Water Service:

Pipe Size Strainer Perforation Size 0.75" to 1.5" 20 mesh


231000-3

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Unions: 1. Unions in copper piping shall be cast brass or bronze with copper soldered connections.

B. Dielectric fittings: threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. Metal

parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below 1% of the galvanic current which would exist with metal-to-metal contact. 1. Manufacturer: Bolt-Pak, Epco (with high temperature gasket), Perfection Clearflow, or

Watts.

C. Automatic air vents: float-operated automatic type with cast iron body, stainless steel trim, 0.75" piping connections, and minimum 175 psig water working pressure. 1. Manufacturer: Anderson, Armstrong, or Hoffman.

D. Needle valves: brass with 0.25" connection.

E. Dial thermometers: bimetallic element, dial type with minimum 3" dials, stainless steel case,

angle or straight as required. Thermometers installed in uninsulated piping shall have 4" stems with brass separable sockets. Thermometers installed in insulated piping shall have 6" stem with brass separable socket with extension neck equal to thickness of insulation. Thermometers installed in ducts shall have 6" stems with duct mounting flanges.

Service Range Hot water 0º/250ºF

1. Manufacturer: Ashcroft, Marsh, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, Weiss, or Weksler.

F. Thermometer test wells: brass construction with brass plug and chain, designed for use with

partial immersion laboratory type test thermometers. Test wells in insulated piping shall have an extension neck equal to thickness of insulation. 1. Manufacturer: Ashcroft, Moeller, Taylor, Trerice, Weiss, or Weksler.

G. Manual Flow Control Valves:

1. Valves 2" and smaller shall have soldered or threaded ends with brass or bronze body. Valves shall have brass or bronze ball, Teflon or carbon-filled TFE seats, memory stop, meter connections with built-in check valves or pressure/temperature test plugs, and shall be designed for balancing and positive shut off.

2. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi. Provide flow capacity characteristic curves or tables for each valve size. Calibrated orifice devices shall have integral pointer and calibrated nameplate.

3. Provide one portable meter set, including checking hoses, check seal and carrying case. Wetted parts of the meter shall be corrosion-resistant. Meter shall be diaphragm type with variable pulsation damping control, zero adjustment control, and bleed valves. Meter shall be designed for system velocities and temperatures.

4. Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett, Flow Design, Gerand, MEPCO, Taco, or Tour & Andersson.


231000-4

H. Combination Pressure and Temperature Test Plugs: 1. Combination pressure and temperature test plugs may, at the Contractor's option, be used

on pipe sizes 2" and smaller, for maximum 150 psig service, in lieu of the needle valves and thermometer test wells specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. Plugs shall not be used at locations specified herein or indicated on the Drawings to have a pressure gauge or thermometer permanently installed. Plugs shall have brass bodies, and internal valve seat material designed for specific system operating temperature and pressure. Plugs shall be provided with adaptors to connect pressure gauges or thermometers identical to those used elsewhere on the Project.

2. Manufacturer: Fairfax, Flow Design, Peterson, or SISCO.

I. Temperature Maintenance Cable: 1. Self-Regulating Heating Cable:

a. Cable shall consist of 2 #16 AWG nickel-copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature along its length. Cable shall be covered by a crosslinked, modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. Cable shall have a braid of tinned-copper and an outer jacket.

b. Cable components shall be UL listed to provide freeze protection as required. c. System shall be controlled by a line sensing thermostat set at 40ºF, either directly

or through a contactor. d. Manufacturer: Brisk-Heat SL series, Chromalox, Easy Heat, Nelson Electric,

Raychem XL-Trace, or Thermon. 2.04 HOT TAPS AND LINE STOPS

A. Products and services shall be by the same company.

B. Valves: gate type, as specified in Paragraph 2.02, Valves and Strainers.

C. Fittings: tees shall be the weld-on split type with flanged side outlet. Fittings used for line stopping shall have inside threads on the flanged outlet to permit recovery of the valve after the line stopping tool is removed.

D. Manufacturer: Furmanite, or T.D. Williamson.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Before erection, clean interior and exterior of pipe and fittings of slag, spatter, rust, dirt and debris by wire brushing and swabbing.

B. Workmanship: pipe shall be cut to measurements established at the Project site and worked

into place without springing or forcing. Pipes shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction without damage to joints, hangers, or the building.

C. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except where branches are two or more sizes

less than the size of the main, the branch may be made using branch connections, weldolets, threadolets, latrolets, sweepolets, and elbolets.


231000-5

D. Pitch/grade: piping shall be installed with sufficient pitch to ensure drainage and venting.

E. Solder joint connections shall be cut, deburred, cleaned and assembled in accordance with

ASTM B828-2002 (2010).

F. Threaded connections: screw-thread joints shall be made with cut tapered threads. Joints shall be made tight with Teflon tape unless otherwise specified herein. Not more than 2 threads shall show after the joint is made tight. Pipes shall have burrs removed by reaming cut end.

G. Install piping so as to preserve access to valves, air vents, and equipment requiring access, and

to provide the maximum headroom.

H. Provide offsets to maintain ceiling height and to coordinate with other trades.

I. Install piping such that when insulation is applied it will not come in contact with adjacent surfaces.

J. Provide reducing fittings for changes in pipe sizes.

K. Provide extra heavy pipe for nipples: where unthreaded portion of pipe is less than 1.5" long,

and where size is less than 0.75" x 6".

L. Dirt pockets: line size, 4" long minimum. Terminate with threaded cap or blind flange, and provide clearance for access to cap or flange.

M. Perform pressure tests required by Section 230095, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing before

work is concealed or buried.

N. Piping failing the tests specified in Section 230095, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing shall be repaired until satisfactory.

3.02 VALVES AND STRAINERS

A. Valves in horizontal piping shall be installed with stems at or above the pipe centerline.

B. Control valves: install in accessible locations, with room for actuator removal and service. Adjust the actuators to provide tight closure. Provide valve stem travel indicators and adjust to indicate proper travel. Where butterfly valves are used, permanently mark the end of the valve shafts to indicate valve position.

C. Strainers in water piping shall be installed with blowdown outlets at the low point.

3.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Needle valves: install as indicated on the Drawings, unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Dial thermometers: install as indicated on the Drawings, unless otherwise specified herein.


231000-6

C. Thermometer test wells: install as indicated on the Drawings, unless otherwise specified

herein. Fill with a thermally conductive material.

D. Thermometers and thermometer test wells shall be installed on a 45° angle in vertical piping and vertically in horizontal piping. Thermometers and thermometer test wells shall be installed so as to not be obscured by piping, building structure, or equipment.

E. Install control valves, thermometers, and valved pressure taps provided under Section 238000,

Automatic Temperature Controls.

F. Temperature Maintenance Cable:

1. Install and test before insulation is applied, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Secure cable to the piping with cable ties or fiberglass tape

3.04 WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN PIPING

A. Arrange piping for the venting of air and for drainage of the entire system.

B. Changes in size of vertical piping shall be made with concentric reducers, and in horizontal piping shall be made with eccentric reducers to maintain uniform top elevation of pipe.

C. At each low point of the system, provide a 0.75" drain valve with hose thread, and at each

high point and in every drop in the direction of flow of supply and return mains provide an automatic air vent valve, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.

D. Provide 1.5" fill and drain valves at each connection of new water piping to existing water

piping. Locate fill valves on top of new supply pipe and drain valves at bottom of new return pipe.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Hot Water Piping: 1. Fill and flush with clean water. 2. Refill with clean water, then add cleaning/degreasing detergent.

a. Approved by local, state and federal authorities for the intended use. b. With nonfoaming wetting agent. c. Concentration of the detergent shall be 2% of the active ingredients of the

chemicals used for cleaning. d. Supplied and supervised by water treatment company.

3. Circulate water, using temporary pumps as required, in each system at respective design flow rates, minimum, for three 8 hour periods. a. At the end of each 8 hour period: remove and clean strainers. Blow-off low

points. 4. After third period of pumping, drain entire system of cleaning solution.

a. Clean out cooling tower basins and hose down.


231000-7

5. Refill systems with clean water and circulate for an additional 8 hour period. Remove and clean strainers. Drain and refill with clear water. Continue to circulate water.

6. Test for alkalinity, not more than 200 ppm in excess of alkalinity of rinsing water. 7. Repeat process described above until 200 ppm in excess of alkalinity of rinsing water, or

less is maintained for 10 days. 8. Protect against damage from freeze-up or discharge of water. 9. When cleaning is completed, fill systems with clear water, and circulate with appropriate

water treatment chemicals to protect pipe and equipment until the date of substantial completion.

10. Immediately prior to the date of substantial completion, remove and clean strainers. 11. Use and disposal of chemicals shall comply with local, state, and federal regulations.

3.06 PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Manually operate relief valves and verify that discharge openings and piping are clear and free flowing.

B. Open air vents until air is removed from the systems.

3.07 HOT TAPS AND LINE STOPS

A. Work shall be performed while the systems remain under pressure. Schedule work so that the existing systems shall not be interrupted.

B. Line stopping shall block 100% of the line flow by mechanically inserting a stopping head

through a hot tap valve and into the active line. Provide supplemental containment to prevent dripping onto adjacent equipment. Temporary valves shall be recovered after the line stopping tool is removed.

C. Tees used for size-on-size hot taps and line stops shall be the weld-on split type.



232500-1

SECTION 232500INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers thermal insulation for equipment, ductwork and piping specified in Division 23.


1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Exterior piping, ductwork, or equipment is exposed to outdoor temperature.



2012.2. International Mechanical Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012.3. NFPA 90A-2012.

B. Products of the manufacturers listed will be acceptable for use for the specific functions specified herein. Materials shall be compatible with the materials to which they are applied, and shall not corrode, soften or otherwise attack such material in either the wet or dry state.

C. Materials shall be applied subject to their temperature limits. Methods of application of insulating materials or finishes not specified in detail herein shall be in accordance with the particular manufacturer's published recommendations.

D. Insulation shall be applied by experienced workers regularly employed for this type of work.

1.04 RATINGS

A. Insulation and accessories, unless specifically excepted herein, shall have a maximum composite flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke developed rating of 50. Materials that are factory-applied shall be tested as assembled. Materials which are


232500-2

field-applied may be tested individually. No fugitive or corrosive treatments shall be employed to impart flame resistance.

B. Flame spread and smoke developed ratings shall be in accordance with ASTM E84-2012. Products or their shipping cartons shall bear a label indicating flame spread and smoke developed ratings.

C. Treatment of pipe jackets and duct facings to impart flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. The use of water-soluble treatments is prohibited.

D. Vapor retarders shall have a maximum permeance of 0.02 perm at 73.4°F.

1.05 ALTERNATE THICKNESSES

A. Specified thicknesses may be increased or reduced for insulation materials having thermal resistivity, K-values, different from those listed. Submit calculations in accordance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010, and documentation of product performance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Pipe, Duct and Equipment Insulation:1. Maximum K-value for preformed pipe insulation: 0.23 Btu·in/(h·ft²·°F) at 75°F.2. Maximum K-value for blanket and board insulation: 0.28 Btu·in/(h·ft²·°F) at 75°F.3. Pipe and board insulation shall be designed for operating temperatures up to

850°F.4. Manufacturer: CertainTeed, Johns Manville, Knauf, or Owens Corning.

B. Adhesives and Mastics:1. Manufacturer: Aeroflex, Armacell, Childers, Epolux, Foster, Marathon, Pittsburg

Corning PC 88, Pittsburgh Corning Pittcote 300 (interior) or 404 (exterior), or Vimasco.

C. Preformed Fittings: 1. Equal thickness and composition to adjacent pipe insulation.2. Manufacturer: Extol, Performance Insulation Fabricators, or Specialty Products

& Insulation.

D. Glass fabric: 10 x 10 construction white fiberglass scrim fabric.

E. Tape: pressure sensitive, foil-scrim-kraft backed.

F. Staples: outward clinching type.


232500-3

G. Rigid inserts: cellular glass or 5 pcf phenolic. Rigid inserts shall be same length as insulation protectors, 360° pipe coverage, and same thickness as adjacent insulation. Where polyisocyanurate is specified herein, rigid inserts may be polyisocyanurate, minimum 2 pcf for piping 6" and smaller and minimum 3 pcf for pipe 8" and larger. Where fiberglass is specified herein, rigid inserts may be premolded minimum 20 pcffiberglass blocks with 180° pipe coverage. Where flexible elastomeric is specified herein, rigid inserts may be rigid foam designed for the supported weight without compression. Provide jacketing, joint sealing, and weatherproofing as specified for the pipe service. Fiberglass inserts shall be selected for a maximum 10% compression when loaded. Polyisocyanurate inserts shall be selected such that compressive load does not exceed 33% of the compressive strength of the insert.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Surfaces to be insulated shall be clean, dry, and free of foreign material, rust, scale and dirt when insulation is applied. Perform pressure and leakage tests and submit results required by other Sections before applying insulation.

B. Where existing insulation is damaged due to the new work, repair damage to match existing work or replace damaged portion with insulation specified for new work.

3.02 MATERIAL SELECTIONS

A. Where multiple insulation materials are specified herein for the same service, one of the specified materials shall be applied and used consistently throughout the project, subject to the requirements of these specifications.

3.03 INSULATION FOR HOT PIPE

A. Insulate the following pipe with preformed fiberglass pipe insulation of the thickness indicated, and white all service jacket with self-sealing lap:

Insulation Thickness, Inches

Fluid DesignOperating Pipe SizesTemperature Less than 8" andRange, ºF 1" 1"-1.25" 1.5"-3" 4" and 6" over

HeatingHot water, through 200 1.5 1.5 2 2 2

201 to 250 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3


232500-4

1. Install insulation with jacket drawn tight and side laps and end joint butt strips secured. End joint butt strips shall be minimum 3" wide and of material identical to jacket.

2. Insulate strainers and valves in piping larger than 1" and fittings and flanges with preformed or mitered fiberglass fittings. Wire fittings in place and cover with a smoothing coat of insulating cement. Finish with glass fabric embedded between 2 coats of white breather mastic. Glass fabric shall overlap adjoining insulation at least 2".

B. Insulate the following pipe with preformed cellular glass pipe insulation, and all service jacket with self-sealing lap, 2.5" thick for hot water pipe 1" and smaller, 3"thick for hot water pipe 1.5" and larger, and 4.5" thick for steam and condensate pipe.

Exterior hot water.

1. Seal longitudinal and end joints with sealant or mastic. Install insulation with jacket drawn tight with side-laps and end joint butt strips secured. End joint butt strips shall be same material as jacket, not less than 3" wide.

2. Insulate strainers and valves in piping larger than 1" and fittings and flanges with preformed or mitered cellular glass fitting sections. Secure fittings in place, seal joints, and contour mitered sections with insulating cement, and finish with a layer of glass fabric embedded between 2 coats of white breather mastic.

3. Where temperature maintenance cable is specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, piping shall be insulated after application of temperature maintenance cable.

3.04 INSULATION FOR DUCT SYSTEMS

A. Insulate the following concealed duct systems with flexible, fiberglass insulation, 2"thick, with foil-scrim-kraft facing:

Supply ductwork and plenums.Return ductwork.

1. Overlap edges 3" and secure 12" on center with copper-clad, stainless steel or galvanized steel wire.

2. Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with tape.3. On ducts over 36" wide, insulation shall be secured to the underside with mechan-

ical fasteners maximum 18" on center each way.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Insulation shall be clean and dry during installation and during application of any finish.


232500-5

B. Provide removable and replaceable covers on pumps, equipment, and removable ends of strainers requiring insulation that must be opened periodically for inspection, cleaning, or repair.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces, jackets drawn tight and cemented down smoothly at longitudinal and end laps. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit.

D. Install insulation, jackets and coatings continuous through openings and sleeves in nonrated construction. For penetrations of fire- or smoke-rated construction, insulation shall be butted tightly against firestops specified in Section 230010, General. Tape and seal butt joints.

E. Banding wires shall have the twisted terminals turned down toward the insulation without damaging the vapor barrier.

F. Install layered insulation with layer joints staggered. Wire inner layer 9" on center; apply outer layer and finish as specified herein.

G. Finish open ends of pipe insulation as specified herein for fittings.

H. Provide rigid inserts at each insulation protector location for piping 1.5" and larger.

I. Standing seams and projections in ductwork or casings shall have insulation applied so that at least 0.25" of insulation will cover such projections.

J. Lined Ductwork: 1.Where ductwork and plenums are lined, no external thermal insulation is required.

K. Insulation and vapor barrier shall be continuous around and under standoff brackets used for mounting balancing and control devices on ductwork.

3.06 WEATHERPROOFING

A. Protect insulation on piping exposed to weather outside the building with 0.016" thick corrugated aluminum covers with factory-applied moisture retarder protective film on the inner surface. Provide 2" overlap at joints with sealant recommended by the manufacturer. Locate longitudinal joints to shed water. Secure covers with aluminum bands every 12" and at end joints.

3.07 ALTERNATE METHODS

A. Fitting covers may be used for hot water piping subject to the manufacturer's published application guidelines. Fitting covers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.


232500-6

B. In lieu of banding wires, staples, installed 3" on center, may be used on fiberglass blanket insulation joints.



236000-1

SECTION 236000EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Testing, adjusting and balancing is specified in Section 230095, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

D. Performance verification is specified in Section 230090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of performance verification specified therein.



2012.2. International Mechanical Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012.3. NFPA 70-2011.4. NFPA 90A-2012.

B. Pressure/temperature ratings of components and accessories shall meet or exceed design conditions for the system in which they are installed. Refer to Section 231000, Piping, Valves and Accessories, and requirements specified herein.

1. Provide a complete parts and labor warranty, including refrigerants and lubricants, for 1 year after date of substantial completion, for the rooftop air conditioning unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COILS

A. Copper tubes, and nonferrous fins with belled collars mechanically bonded to the tubes.

B. Multirow hot water coils: designed for parallel flow of water to air.

C. Supply and return connections shall be on the same end.


236000-2

D. Performance shall be in accordance with AHRI 410-2001 (with Addendum).

E. Minimum working pressure rating shall be equal to that specified herein for the piping system in which the coil is installed. Coils shall be tested at the rated working pressure plus 50%.

2.02 TERMINAL UNITS

A. Casings:1. Minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel.2. Acoustical lining: minimum 0.5" thick, 1.5 pcf density coated fiberglass. Lining

shall meet erosion test method described in UL 181-2005 and shall have a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 50 in accordance with NFPA 90A-2012.

3. Access doors: sealed, flush type for access to internal parts for service or maintenance.

4. Enclosure: removable type for control components.5. Casing leakage rate of less than 3% at 4" wg.6. Inlet velocity shall not exceed 2200 fpm.

B. Control Motors:1. Factory-installed on units by unit manufacturer.2. Coordinated with automatic control system manufacturer; see Section 238000,

Automatic Temperature Controls.

C. Airflow sensors: averaging multipoint type, with taps for field calibration, minimum ±5% accuracy with 90° elbow at inlet.

D. Volume Regulators:1. Factory preset: minimum and maximum air quantity. Air volumes and unit size

shall be indicated on the regulator.2. Gauge taps and calibrated means of adjustment to permit field adjustment of air

quantities without unit disassembly.3. Pressure independent, capable of maintaining constant volume, ±5%, up to 4" wg

inlet air pressure.4. Factory-mounted.5. Removable.

E. Depth of units: 20" maximum.

F. Moving parts designed for minimum of 300000 cycles.

G. Heating Coils:1. Proportional, modulating electric coil, labeled as a complete assembly with the

terminal unit per UL 1995-2005 or ETL listed to comply with the requirements of


236000-3

UL 1995-2005, complete with unit-mounted terminal box with hinged cover, and intermediate coil supports.

2. Heating elements, exposed element type:a. Nickel chrome (80% nickel, 20% chrome) coiled wire, with minimum 1

wire diameter open space between adjacent coils. b. Maximum wire density: 37 W/in2.c. Maximum wire surface temperature: 1400°F.

3. Coils rated more than 48 A shall have heating elements subdivided. Each subdivided load shall not exceed 48 A and shall be fuse protected.

4. Provide a wiring diagram showing terminal designations of power and control circuits, mounted inside the terminal box.

5. Integral terminal boxes shall include:a. Terminal blocks for line feeder and control connections.b. Incoming line fuses for ungrounded conductors.c. Control circuit transformer with fused primary and 120 V or 24 V

secondary for 3-phase heaters.d. Automatically reset thermal cutouts for primary over-temperature

protection. e. Manually reset thermal cutouts, load carrying type, for secondary over-

temperature protection.f. Contactors and PE switches. Controlling and back-up contactors shall be

magnetic. Back-up contactors shall break ungrounded conductors. 6. Controls:

a. Coil shall be interlocked with fan by pressure differential air flow switch.b. A proportional SCR controller shall modulate the heater load according to

the temperature control signal.

H. Variable Volume Units:1. Complete with:

a. Air valve assembly.b. Variable air volume from maximum of 100% to minimum of approximately

0%.c. Units shall be factory-wired for a single electrical connection point,

including input fuses, single disconnect switch for heating coil, and transformers.

2.03 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A. Packaged, air-cooled, variable volume draw-through type, complete with hermetic compressors, cylinder unloaders, suction and discharge service valves, spring vi-bration isolators, compressor ambient lockout, crankcase heaters, oil sight glass, refrigerant sight glass, refrigerant drier, thermostatic expansion valves, pressure relief valve or fusible plug, time delay between successive starts of each compressor, suction accumulator, hot-gas discharge muffler, manually reset low oil pressure cutout for each compressor, liquid line valve for isolating refrigerant charge in condenser, motor overload protector and winding thermostats, refrigerant solenoid valves, air-cooled


236000-4

condenser coils with guards, condenser fans and motors, evaporator coils, fans, motors, extended fan grease connections, filter section, hot water reheat coil, and high and low pressure safety controls.

B. Casings: weatherproof, galvanized steel construction with baked enamel finish.Sections and components shall be accessible through hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets. Casings shall be double-wall with solid inner panels and insulated with 1" or 2" thick spray injected foam with a maximum K-value of 0.167 Btu·in/(h·ft² (ºF) at 75° F. Insulation shall have a composite flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 50 in accordance with NFPA 90A-2012. Units shall be mounted on watertight curb units.

C. Fans: 1. Tested in accordance with ASHRAE 51/AMCA 210-2007.2. Statically and dynamically balanced. Fans with variable frequency drives shall be

dynamically balanced throughout the complete speed range.3. Bearings: pillow block or flange type with L10 life of 40000 hours at the peak

operating condition. Extend grease leads to casing exterior to allow lubrication during operation.

4. In draw-through units with centrifugal fans, fan wheel rotation shall be in the same direction as flow in elbows installed within 3 duct diameters of the fan discharge, where discharge from the elbow is perpendicular to the fan shaft.

D. Filters: cartridge type, as specified in Section 237000, Air Distribution.

E. Dampers: as specified in Section 237000, Air Distribution.

F. Condensers: selected for a condensing temperature not to exceed 120°F at 100°Fambient. Coils shall have copper tubes and aluminum fins.

G. Hot water coil as specified in Paragraph 2.01, Coils.

H. Variable volume features: variable frequency drives, as specified in Section 230010, General. Static pressure sensor for remote mounting in duct, and a static pressure controller mounted inside the unit control compartment, with a magnahelic gauge connected to the static pressure sensing line and permanently mounted in an accessible location. Provide microprocessor-based leaving air temperature control including remote setpoint adjustment, adjustable reset rate (based on return air temperature),adjustable control band, and anti-frost control for the coil.

I. Outside air, return air and relief air controls: Provide all sensors, devices, and controls programming required to control the outside air, return air, and relief air as follows:1. Normal mode outside air controls: during normal mode (i.e., when not in

economizer mode), provide controls to maintain a constant outside airflow at the scheduled airflow quantity.


236000-5

2. Economizer mode outside air controls: provide an enthalpy economizer to modulate the amount of outside air between the scheduled outside air quantity and the supply air quantity to maintain unit discharge temperature. Economizer mode shall be initiated whenever the outside air enthalpy is below 25 btu per pound of dry air and above 46°F adjustable.

J. Installation and start-up service: an EPA-certified manufacturer’s representative, under the direct employ of the equipment manufacturer, shall provide guidance and supervision throughout the installation and start-up processes. The manufacturer’s representative shall perform, at a minimum, the following tasks, in order to verify that the unit has been installed and set up in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations:1. Provide supervision and guidance to the Contractor during installation.2. Review the controls and power systems installation.3. Program the variable frequency drives provided with the unit.4. Program all initial setpoints and sequences as required to make the unit function

as specified herein.5. Charge the refrigerant.6. Prior to start-up, a field inspection to verify all related work that is required to be

complete prior to start-up (i.e., ductwork and power wiring, duct leakage testing, etc.).

7. Start-up procedures, including, but not limited to the following: inspection and acceptance of the installation of the unit, all related piping, controls and power wiring, calibration of all related controls devices, and all manufacturer-recommended electrical testing. All pertinent start-up data shall be recorded, including control settings, air and refrigerant temperatures, refrigerant pressures, pressure drops, and electrical data for each motor and compressor.

K. Motors and starters: as specified in Section 230010, General.

L. Remote readout panels: 7 day programmable type with 6 hour battery back-up. Panel shall show operation of system-fan-cooling-heating, and dirty filters.

M. Night setback thermostat and guard.

N. Sound attenuators: factory-installed, above the curb, fan discharge type, integral within the unit casing. Attenuators shall provide a minimum of 5 dB dynamic insertion loss in frequency range between 125 Hz and 500 Hz.

O. Units shall be factory-wired to accommodate a single incoming main power feeder. Provide wiring diagram for isolating power circuit to evaporator fan, power burner and control circuit. Wiring will be modified in field to allow connection to emergency power circuit.

P. Manufacturer: AAON, Carrier, Johnson Controls/York, McQuay, or Trane.


236000-6

2.04 ELECTRIC HORIZONTAL UNIT HEATERS

A. Fans: propeller type with aluminum blades dynamically balanced with single-speed motor and an inlet guard.

B. Motors with contactors shall be wired within the unit to the heating coil power supply. Provide 24 V or 120 V control circuit transformer fused on primary side and grounded.

C. UL listed, with high limit thermal control switch, automatic reset, and integral unit disconnect switch. Elements shall be sheathed type with nickel chrome coiled wire imbedded in magnesium oxide refractory material, enclosed in sheath with spirally wound fins.

D. Enclosures: steel, welded, with baked enamel finish, and adjustable horizontal louvers.

E. Manufacturer: American Stabilis, Berko HUHAA, Brasch BTU or BTUH, Erincraft, INDEECO, Markel 5100, Q-Mark MUH, Raywall, or Trane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TERMINAL UNITS

A. Install terminal units with manufacturer's recommended upstream duct conditions for operation of velocity sensors and volume controls, and required clearances for control panels, coils, and other components.



237000-1

SECTION 237000AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers air distribution systems and equipment.

C. Motorized dampers not furnished with equipment shall be provided under Section 238000, Automatic Temperature Controls.

D. Testing, adjusting and balancing is specified in Section 230095, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

E. Performance verification is specified in Section 230090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of performance verification specified therein.


A. Laboratory exhaust systems shall conform to NFPA 45-2011.

B. Air conditioning systems shall conform to the following:1. International Energy Conservation Code-2009 with Georgia State Amendments-

2012.2. International Mechanical Code-2006 with Georgia State Amendments-2012.3. NFPA 90A-2012.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Sizes for lined ductwork indicated on the Drawings are sheet metal sizes.

B. Ductwork shall have the following static pressure classifications, unless otherwise specified herein: 1. From variable volume air handling units to terminal units: 4" wg.2. From terminal units to grilles, registers and diffusers: 2" wg.3. From constant volume air handling units to grilles, registers and diffusers: 3" wg.4. On the inlet of return air exhaust fans: -2" wg.5. On the inlet of laboratory fume hood exhaust fans: -4" wg.6. Other: 2" wg.


237000-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET METAL WORK - GENERAL

A. Ductwork, except where otherwise specified herein, and apparatus casings shall be constructed of galvanized steel in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005.

2.02 SHEET METAL WORK - ACCESSORIES

A. Zinc-rich paint: Sherwin-Williams Zinc-Clad Primer, or ZRC Worldwide Galvilite.

B. Weld or mechanical grip pins: AGM, Duro-Dyne, or Erico.

C. Duct sealants: liquid, mastic, gasket, or tape and activator type, asbestos-free, complying with NFPA 90A-2012 and UL 181-2005.

D. Draw bands: nylon type, complying with UL 181-2005, Class 1, and NFPA 90A-2012.

E. Lining adhesive: ASTM C916-1985 (2007).

2.03 DUCT LINING

A. Fibrous:1. Duct lining shall be coated fiberglass meeting ASTM C1071-2012, Type I.

Coating shall not support the growth of fungus or bacteria when tested in accordance with ASTM G21-2009.

2. Density: 1" thick – 1.5 pcf; 2" thick – 1.5 pcf.3. Lining and accessories shall have a composite flame spread rating of not more

than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 50.4. Manufacturer: CertainTeed ToughGard Duct Liner, Johns Manville Permacote

Linacoustic HP, or Owens Corning QuietR Duct Liner.

2.04 LABORATORY EXHAUST DUCTWORK

A. Laboratory exhaust ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005, and SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, 1999.1. Round ductwork shall be factory-fabricated.

B. Ductwork, including fittings, couplings, and transitions, shall be:

System MaterialGeneral laboratory exhaust galvanized steelFrom fume hoods type 304 stainless steelFrom snorlels galvanized steels


237000-3

C. Galvanized steel: as specified in Paragraph 2.01, Sheet Metal Work - General.

D. Stainless Steel: 1. Minimum 18 gauge, type 304.2. Ductwork shall be the longitudinal seam type, and fittings shall have continuous

welds along joints. 3. Interior concealed ductwork shall be spiral seam.4. Elbows shall be manufactured as separate fittings, die-formed with smooth radius

with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the duct diameter.5. Finish shall be No. 2B for concealed ductwork, and No. 4 for exposed ductwork.6. Manufacturer: McGill AirFlow, or Semco.

2.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Coated glass fabric not less than 6" active length.

B. Connections shall comply with NFPA 90A-2012, NFPA 701-2010, and shall be asbestos-free and designed for continuous use at 275°F. Connections to laboratory exhaust fans shall also be designed for use with acidic fumes. Connections exposed to weather shall also be sunlight and ozone resistant.

C. Manufacturer: Duro-Dyne, or Ventfabrics.

2.06 ACCESS PANELS

A. Tight fitting, hinged, except removable where necessitated by space conditions, double-wall insulated type, manufactured in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005.

B. Manufacturer: Air Balance, Krueger, Louvers & Dampers, Nailor, National Controlled Air, Phillips-Aire, Ruskin, or Ventlok.

2.07 ACCESS DOORS

A. Tight fitting, hinged, double-wall insulated type, 24" x 60" clear inside opening.1. Manufacturer: Air Balance, Louvers & Dampers, National Controlled Air, or

Ruskin.

B. Handles, latches and hinges: cadmium-plated steel.1. Manufacturer: Duro-Dyne, Ventlok, or Young Regulator.

2.08 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

A. Chlorinated polyethylene; aluminum foil, fiberglass, and aluminized polyester trilaminate; or coated woven fiberglass cloth, mechanically locked or permanently


237000-4

bonded to a noncorrosive metal helix. Factory-insulated with fiberglass with a protective vapor barrier jacket to achieve an ADC certified minimum R-value of 6.0°Fft² h/Btu at 75°F.

B. Listed under UL 181-2005 as a Class 1 air duct, in compliance with NFPA 90A-2012, and rated for minimum 6" wg positive pressure and 0.75" wg negative pressure.

C. Manufacturer: Flexmaster, or Thermaflex.

2.09 SPIN-IN COLLAR FITTINGS

A. Minimum 26 gauge galvanized steel, with air scoop and manual damper with locking device, for round duct connection to supply duct.


A. Duct hangers and supports shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005.

2.11 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Factory-built curtain type, except where multiblade type is specified herein. Dampers shall be spring-operated with stainless steel constant tension springs, conforming to requirements of UL 555-2006 for dynamic operation, NFPA 90A-2012, and UL listed.

B. Rating: 1.5 hours.

C. Provide factory-built sleeves of design and length to permit mounting within the open-ing.

D. Dampers in round ductwork shall be Type C.

E. Dampers in rectangular ductwork with minimum dimension 30" and larger shall be the multiblade type with airfoil shaped blades.

F. Dampers in rectangular ductwork with minimum dimension less than 30" shall be as follows:1. Dampers in return air openings or behind grilles or registers shall be Type A.2. For ductwork with a static pressure rating of 2" wg or less, dampers with a

minimum dimension of 18" or smaller shall be Type B, and those with a minimum dimension of 19" and larger shall be Type A.

3. For ductwork with a static pressure rating greater than 2" wg, dampers shall be Type C.


237000-5

G. Fusible links shall have a temperature rating approximately 50°F above the maximum temperature that would normally be encountered with the system in operation or shutdown, but not less than 165°F.

H. Manufacturer: Greenheck, Leader, Nailor, National Controlled Air, Phillips-Aire,Prefco, Ruskin, or Safe-Air.

2.12 MANUAL DAMPERS

A. Single blade up to 8" high, opposed multiblade over 8" high; minimum 80% free area based on damper frame outside dimensions.

B. Blades: minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel, or airfoil shape extruded aluminum.1. Pivot rods: steel, minimum 0.5" diameter or hex, with one rod extended 6" to

permit operation of damper from outside the duct.2. Maximum length 42"; maximum width 8".3. For low leakage applications: at points of contact provide interlocking or

overlapping edges, compressible neoprene or extruded vinyl blade seals, and compressible metal side seals, designed for temperature of -40°F to 180°F at leakage rate specified herein.

C. Frames: galvanized steel bar minimum 2" wide x 12 gauge for dampers 10" high or less, and 3.5" x 0.875", 16 gauge galvanized roll-formed channel with double-thickness edges or 5" x 1" x 0.125" extruded aluminum channel for 11" high and larger.1. Corner bracing.2. Full size of duct or opening in which installed.

D. Bearings: bronze sleeve, steel ball type, or Cycoloy 800.1. Vertically-mounted: thrust bearings.2. Maximum spacing: 42".

E. Quadrants: cadmium-plated steel, with damper locking device, and damper position indicator.1. Manufacturer: Arrow Q-38, Duro-Dyne KL-7R, or Ventlok 560.

F. Finish on steel parts: galvanized.

G. Operating linkage: factory-assembled, concealed in frame out of airstream, steel construction.

H. For low leakage applications: leakage when closed shall be less than 4 cfm/ft² at 1" wgdifferential static pressure based on a 48" damper width.


237000-6

2.13 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. As specified in Section 238000, Automatic Temperature Controls.

2.14 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. General:1. Selection of grilles, registers and diffusers shall be based on air introduced at a

20°F temperature differential. 2. Grilles and registers with borders shall have felt or rubber gaskets cemented to the

back face and holding screws not over 18" on center around the perimeter.3. Wall-mounted grilles and registers located less than 7' above finished floor shall

be heavy duty, impact-resistant type.4. Diffusers in lay-in ceilings shall lay in a nominal 24" x 24" 48" grid opening and

shall be furnished without exposed flanges. 5. Extractors: adjustable through the face of the grille or register.6. Diffusers shall be complete with straightening vanes, and opposed or rotating

blade volume control dampers. Straightening vanes are not required where diffusers are attached to round flexible ductwork. Volume control dampers are not required where single diffusers are served by branch ducts with dampers at take-offs.

7. Internal parts of diffusers shall be designed so they can be adjusted, removed, and assembled without special tools.

8. Diffusers shall have round necks or shall be provided with square-to-round collars where connected to round or flexible duct.

9. Finishes, unless otherwise specified herein:a. Steel grilles and registers: white baked enamel.b. Door grilles: c. Diffuser faces and frames: white.d. Diffusers interior: same as face and frame.

10. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be provided with frames, borders, and mounting attachments for installation in the actual wall, soffit, and ceiling construction in which installed.

B. Supply Devices:1. Type S-CF - Square cone face diffuser type, 24" x 24" face, minimum of 3

stamped cones, horizontal/vertical pattern adjustment device, 1-piece construction.

2. Type S-LA – Laminar flow diffuser, nonaspirating, perforated face type. Static pressure drop through diffusers shall not exceed 0.1" wg. Diffusers shall be equipped with volume control dampers in the inlet neck, which shall be operable without removing the diffuser face. Diffusers shall be provided with air equalization baffles. Perforated diffuser face and equalization baffle shall be removable for cleaning. Diffuser face shall be attached to the diffuser with safety chains. Diffusers and internal parts shall be of aluminum construction and finish shall be white epoxy paint.


237000-7

C. Return and Exhaust Devices:1. Type R-EG - Eggcrate grille, 0.5" x 0.5" x 0.5" fabricated aluminum eggcrate.

D. Manufacturer, unless otherwise noted: Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Metal*Aire, Nailor, E.H. Price, Titus, or Tuttle & Bailey.

2.15 FANS - GENERAL

A. Rated in accordance with AMCA 211-2005 (R2011), AMCA 300-2008, and ASHRAE 51/AMCA 210-2007.

B. Fans used in smoke control systems shall be UL listed as power ventilators for smoke control systems.

C. Drives: 1. V-belt type, sized for 140% of motor size. Belt drive fans used in smoke control

systems shall have 1.5 times the number of belts required for the design duty, minimum 2 belts.

2. Construction: cast iron. Sheaves for drives 5 hp and larger shall have bushed bores.

3. Motor sheaves: fixed pitch once final balancing and commissioning is completed.4. Companion sheaves: to maintain belts parallel.5. Temporary motor sheaves for final balancing and commissioning: variable pitch

for motors through 25 hp or fan speeds less than 1000 rpm; fixed pitch for motors over 25 hp or fan speeds over 1000 rpm, and for variable frequency drives.

D. Motors and variable frequency drives: as specified in Section 230010, General, unless otherwise specified herein.

E. Control circuit transformers: for actuators on fans with 3-phase motors.

F. Wheels and shafts: factory-balanced, both statically and dynamically as an assembly. Fans with variable frequency drives shall be dynamically balanced throughout the complete speed range. Fan wheel rotation for utility sets and centrifugal fans shall be in same direction as flow in elbows installed within 3 duct diameters of the fan discharge, where discharge from the elbow is perpendicular to the fan shaft.

G. Bearings: ball, roller, or taper roller type. Bearings for power roof ventilators shall have an L10 life of 50000 hours. Bearings for laboratory exhaust fans shall have an L10life of 200000 hours. Other bearings shall have an L10 life of 100000 hours. Bearing life shall be calculated based on the peak operating condition indicated on the Drawings.1. Fans 27" and larger shall be provided with horizontally split type bearing

housings, and pressure type lubricating fittings extended to accessible locations.


237000-8

H. Fans for variable volume duty shall be capable of operating at 25% of design capacity without surge or pulsation.

I. Fan guards: shall shield the perimeter and face of belt drives, with openings opposite driver and driven shafts to permit use of tachometer. Guards for double-inlet fans shall have face of expanded metal.

2.16 UTILITY SETS

A. Steel construction, Arrangement 10 with nonoverloading wheel, motor, scroll access door with quick opening clamps, drain, V-belt drive, and protective finish inside and outside of the housing, wheel and inlet bell. Exterior fans shall have weatherproof drive cover.

B. Manufacturer: Acme, Airmaster, American Coolair, Buffalo, Carnes, Chicago, Clarage, Cook, Greenheck, Ilg, NY Blower, PennBarry, Trane, or Twin City.

2.17 CENTRIFUGAL POWER ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Centrifugal type, for exhaust service, of aluminum construction complete with motor, V-belt drive, birdscreen, motorized backdraft damper, disconnect switch, prefabricated curb and curb cap. Dampers shall be interlocked to open when the fan is on and to close when the fan is off.

B. Manufacturer: Acme, Breidert DB, Carnes, Cook AC, Greenheck GB, JencoFan, PennBarry, or Twin City Ventco.

2.18 FILTERS

A. General:1. MERV, efficiency and arrestance ratings shall be based on ASHRAE 52.2-2007.2. Filters shall be UL 900-2004 Class 2.

B. Temporary Filter Media:1. 1" thick, dual-density, depth-loading polyester media with a minimum MERV

rating of 8.2. Manufacturer: Fiberbond Dual-Ply Dustlok.

C. Pleated Filters:1. 4" thick pleated, disposable type. Each filter shall consist of media and enclosing

frame. Media shall be self-supported or shall contain a support grid. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.27" wg based on 500 fpm face velocity.

2. Filter media shall be reinforced nonwoven cotton fabric type with a minimum MERV rating of 8.

3. The effective filter media shall be not less than 7 ft² of media per ft² of filter face area.


237000-9

4. Self-supported media shall be capable of maintaining its shape and pleat spacing during normal use. Filters with self-supported media shall maintain functionality if filter frame is damaged.

5. The media support shall be a welded grid with an effective open area of not less than 96%. The welded wire grid shall be bonded to the filter media to eliminate the possibility of media oscillation and media pullaway. The media support grid shall be formed in such a manner that pleats are rounded, allowing total use of filter media.

6. The enclosing frame shall be constructed of rigid, heavy duty, chipboard with diagonal or longitudinal support members bonded to the air entering and air exit side of each pleat to ensure pleat stability. The inside periphery of the enclosing frame shall be bonded to the filter pack.

7. Housings: factory-fabricated of galvanized steel, double-wall insulated type, withtracks for filters, and side access door with seal. Filter enclosing frames and housing shall form an airtight seal.

8. Manufacturer: Airguard DP, American Air Filter Am-Air 300X PerfectPleat, or Farr 30-30.

D. Cartridge Filters:1. 12" deep with synthetic media with a minimum MERV rating of 14. Dimensions

shall be based on capacities as indicated on the Drawings and a 500 fpm face velocity. Initial pressure drop, including prefilters, shall not exceed 0.95" wg. Provide 2" thick pleated prefilters with a minimum MERV rating of 6.

2. Enclosing frame shall be galvanized steel assembled in a rigid manner. Overall frame dimensions shall be correct to 0.063", and squareness shall be maintained to within 0.125".

3. Housings: factory-fabricated of galvanized steel, double-wall insulated type, with tracks for filters and prefilters, complete with seals and high pressure double-wall access doors, designed and leak tested by the manufacturer to operate at 5" wgpositive internal pressure. Access door or panels shall be provided for both sides of filter housings for side removal and access.

4. For filters installed on the discharge of air handling units, provide a diffuser section to equalize filter face velocity. Maximum static pressure drop of diffuser section shall not exceed 0.2" wg.

5. Frame retainers: designed to form a filter bank with airtight joints. Retainers shall be galvanized steel, with gaskets and fasteners.

6. Filter housing and frame retainer assemblies shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to be 90% efficient.

7. Manufacturer: Airguard Variflow, American Air Filter Varicel, or Farr Riga-Flo.

E. HEPA Filters:

1. HEPA type, with minimum efficiency of 99.97% based on the thermal DOP test as specified in IEST-RP-CC001.5-2009, tested at 100% flow. Filters shall be waterproof and constructed of fire retardant glass fiber media encased in a fireretardant frame. Each cell shall be capable of withstanding a differential pressure


237000-10

of 8" wg. Provide MERV 8 pleated type prefilter. Capacity of the total assembly shall be based on a fpm face velocity. Initial resistance of the total assembly shall not exceed 1" wg.

2. Filter assemblies: factory-fabricated double-wall insulated type housing constructed of minimum 16 gauge stainless steel, complete with prefilter section, stainless steel filter locking mechanism and safety feature that prevents access door closing until HEPA filters are correctly seated and sealed. Seams and joints shall be continuously welded. The entire housing shall be factory leak tested by pressurizing to 3" wg static pressure. Access doors shall provide for side removal of filters and provide an airtight seal when shut. Separate doors shall be provided for prefilters and HEPA filters.

3. Manufacturer: American Air Filter, or Flanders.

2.19 FILTER PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Differential pressure gauges shall have a range 0" wg to 1" wg, except HEPA filter gauges shall have a range of 0" wg to 2" wg. Gauges shall have adjustable signal flag4-20 mA output for remote monitoring, static tips, vent valves, and mounting accessories.1. Manufacturer: Dwyer Photohelic.

2.20 ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORT RAILS

A. Prefabricated type, 18 gauge galvanized steel with welded joints, raised cant to match roof deck insulation, and 1.5", 3 pcf fiberglass insulation. Top surfaces shall be level, with construction to fit roof pitch. Minimum height, at the lowest point, shall be 8".

B. Manufacturer: AES Industries, Pate, Penn, Roof Curb Products, Roof Products & Systems, or Thy Curb.

2.21 SIDE TAKEOFF FITTINGS

A. Minimum 26 gauge galvanized steel, designed for minimum pressure drop by an expansion from a rectangular connection to a round duct. The fitting shall include a 1"wide mounting flange with die formed corner clips, prepunched mounting holes, and an adhesive-coated flange gasket. The outlet collar shall be crimped and incorporate a bead.

B. Manufacturer: Crown, or Flexmaster.

2.22 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. As specified in Section 238000, Automatic Temperature Controls.


237000-11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SHEET METAL WORK - GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, construct and install sheet metal work in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible, 2005.

B. Workmanship, methods of assembly, joint and seam construction, and sealants for sheet metal work shall be designed for the duct leakage classifications specified in Section 230095, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

C. Changes in shape, dimension, or direction shall be made with a maximum transition, offset, or combination thereof of 1 to 7.

D. Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, use metal hat sections or standoff brackets in lined ductwork to install dampers, turning vanes or coils. Hat sections or standoff brackets shall be the same height as the lining thickness.

E. Separate galvanized sheet metal from aluminum or copper with lead or felt gaskets.

F. Provide supplemental stiffening and supports to ducts and apparatus casings to prevent drumming, sagging and to provide a structurally sound assembly.

G. Ductwork and sheet metal seams, joints, penetrations, connections and attachments shall be sealed.1. Sealants shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

for each specific application.2. Ductwork failing the leakage tests specified in Section 230095, Testing, Adjusting

and Balancing shall be repaired, reworked or rebuilt until satisfactory, before additional ductwork is installed and before ductwork is concealed.

H. Entire air system installation shall be rigid, and free from rattles and air noises. Interior of ducts shall be smooth.

I. Provide offsets, elbows, and transitions to coordinate with other work.

J. Provide transitions to connect ductwork to equipment and coils.

K. Elbows:1. Elbows in round and flat oval ductwork are specified hereinbefore.2. Radius elbows in rectangular and square ductwork shall have an inside radius

equal to the width of the duct, except where space conditions prohibit, in which case a reduced inside radius with full heel radius is permitted. Where the space conditions require the inside radius to be less than 75% of the duct width, provide multiple splitter vanes inside the elbow.


237000-12

3. Square (mitered) elbows in rectangular and square ductwork shall contain single-thickness turning vanes and shall be limited to 90° turn applications.a. Vanes shall be parallel to airflow.b. Vanes exceeding the maximum unsupported length defined by SMACNA

shall be divided into multiple sections with intermediate vane rails or shall be braced with tie rods spanning perpendicularly across the leading edges of the vanes. The tie rods shall be welded to the leading edge of each vane.

4. Turns less than 90° in rectangular and square ductwork shall be made with radius type elbows. Mitered elbows are not permitted.

L. Seal wall and floor penetrations as specified in Section 230010, General.

3.02 DUCT LINING

A. Line acoustic transfer ducts as indicated on the Drawings with duct fibrous lining.

B. Do not install lining within 18" upstream or 30" downstream of electric heating coils.

C. Install lining, except where otherwise specified herein, with coated side facing air stream and in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005. Adhere lining to inside of duct with 100% coverage of adhesive. In addition, weld or mechanical grip pins shall be installed with spacing conforming to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005, for velocities over 2500 fpm. Mechanical fasteners shall not compress the lining more than 0.125". Coat exposed edges and joints with edge sealer. Protect leading edges against flaking by 24 gauge galvanized metal protectors. Butt and seal edges of lining together to form a continuous thermal barrier. Coat field cuts and minor surface damage with edge sealer after lining is installed.

3.03 LABORATORY EXHAUST DUCTWORK

A. Slope horizontal ductwork back to hoods.

B. Provide transitions and connections between ductwork and terminal units, laboratory fume hoods, ventilated cabinets, biological safety cabinets, and filter boxes.

C. Stainless Steel: 1. Joints shall be welded.2. Install horizontal ductwork so that longitudinal seams are in the top half of the

duct.3. Transverse joints in spiral seam ductwork shall be made with stainless steel

couplings, riveted and sealed with corrosion resistant sealant.

3.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Joints and seams shall be sealed airtight.


237000-13

B. Provide at:1. Inlet and outlet of fans.2. Duct connections to air handling units, or on inlet and outlet of fan section only if

fan section is separate.

C. Not required at:1. Power roof ventilators.2. Air handling units with internally isolated fan, motor and drive.

D. Provide a braided copper bridge strap across flexible connections.

3.05 ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide access panels of sufficient size and quantity for access to fire dampers, smoke dampers, controls, coils, duct smoke detectors, and where ductwork covers electrical boxes. Install in appropriate locations to allow cleaning, oiling, inspection, repair and maintenance.

B. Open each to verify that swing space is clear and access into duct or plenum is unobstructed.

3.06 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

A. Install flexible ductwork in a fully extended condition, free of sags and kinks, using the minimum length to make connection. Seal joints as recommended by manufac-turer. Maximum length of flexible ducts to diffusers shall be 7'. Maximum length of flexible ducts to terminal units shall be 3'. Use round galvanized duct, same size as flexible duct, for longer runouts.

B. Flexible ductwork shall be fastened to spin-in fittings, collars and transitions by draw bands and duct tape.

C. Size, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings:1. For diffusers, same diameter as diffuser neck to which it connects.2. For terminal units, two sizes larger than the terminal unit inlet.

D. Where size of flexible duct is different than size of collar, make connection with a sheet metal transition.

3.07 SPIN-IN COLLAR FITTINGS

A. Provide for each flexible duct takeoff and for each round sheet metal duct runout to flexible ducts serving diffusers.


237000-14


A. Adjust hangers and supports so that loading is uniform.

B. Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, duct hangers and supports shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible, 2005.

C. Support horizontal ductwork not more than 8' on center. Ductwork shall be directly suspended from or supported by the building structure, but not from metal deck.

D. Support round ductwork with straps and hangers as recommended by the manufacturer and SMACNA.

E. Support sound attenuators independently of the ductwork.

F. Support vertical ducts at each floor with a minimum of 2 supports attached to the duct and fastened to the floor or structure.

3.09 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Install within the thickness of the rated construction.

B. Verify accessibility of each fire damper through duct and building access panels, and operation of each fire damper by removing link and operating damper.

3.10 MANUAL DAMPERS

A. Install dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to operate freely.

B. Provide standoff brackets, sized to clear the insulation thickness, for quadrants installed on insulated ductwork.


A. Install dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to operate and to obtain leakage rates specified herein. Adjust the damper linkage such that the damper closes before the actuator is fully closed to assure tight closure of the damper.

B. Blank-off and seal around dampers and between dampers and sleeves or frames to eliminate air bypass.


237000-15

3.12 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Wall return and relief grilles installed above eye level shall be installed with blades angled so the inside of the duct or the adjacent space will not be visible through the grilles.

B. Lengths of linear diffusers indicated on the Drawings are nominal. Coordinate actual lengths required with field conditions and/or the Architectural Drawings.

3.13 FANS - GENERAL

A. Install centrifugal fans with a minimum of 2.5 duct diameters of straight duct at the inlet.

3.14 FILTERS

A. Install filters to be used while the building is under construction. Replace during construction as filters become loaded. Prior to final inspection, remove these filters and replace with new filters.

B. Install temporary filter media to protect return air grilles, registers and openings of permanent air handling systems operated while the building is under construction. Media shall be installed to prevent leakage around and bypass of filters.

C. Do not install HEPA cartridge filters until the building is substantially complete and free of construction debris, and associated duct systems have been cleaned.

D. Each bank of activated carbon filter units shall be fitted with a test element to be used for laboratory determination of the degree of saturation of the units. This operation shall be part of the manufacturer's replacement service.1. Filters shall not be installed in the bank until final inspection.

3.15 FILTER PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Provide a differential pressure gauge, unless otherwise specified herein, across each bank of filters and/or filter housing.

B. Provide an inclined manometer across each high efficiency and HEPA filter, and calibrate.

C. Gauges shall be located so as to be visible.

3.16 SIDE TAKEOFF FITTINGS

A. Provide for takeoffs from rectangular ductwork to terminal units.


237000-16

B. Install 45° takeoff fittings to correspond with direction of airflow.

C. Install concentric takeoff fittings where terminal units are connected to the supply duct loop.


A. Duct-mounted smoke detectors shall be located as follows:1. On the upstream side and within 36" of its respective smoke damper.2. Between the smoke damper and any duct opening or connection.3. In a straight section of duct.4. To be accessible.

B. Locate remote test and alarm stations near the detector served, and mount approximately 6" below the ceiling.



238000-1

SECTION 238000 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS


A. General provisions and HVAC systems are specified in other Sections of Division 23.

B. This Section covers automatic temperature control systems and equipment.

C. Performance verification is specified in Section 230090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of performance verification specified therein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The installation of motor starters that are not factory-installed, thermal overload switches, and power wiring to motors, starters, thermal overload switches, electric heating coils, and contactors, is specified in another Division. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of controls and wiring for automatic controls, electric damper and valve actuators and motors, terminal unit controllers, interlocks, starting circuits, and 120 V and low voltage power wiring to power consuming control devices.

B. Area smoke detectors are provided, installed and wired under Division 28. Duct smoke

detectors shall be installed under Division 23, but furnished and wired into the fire alarm system under Division 28. This Section includes wiring fire alarm signal relays, provided and installed under another Division, to the automatic temperature control systems.

C. Air measuring and control systems are specified in Section 237000, Air Distribution.

D. The monitoring and data logging capabilities of the DDC system shall be available for use

in the commissioning process. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to the following: 1. NFPA 70-2011.

B. Installation shall be by mechanics trained by the control manufacturer.

C. DDC system layout and performance: the DDC system shall be engineered and

equipment selected by the manufacturer as required to meet the performance specified herein. The location and quantity of DDC controllers shall be as determined by the DDC system manufacturer except that, as a minimum, a separate stand-alone controller shall be provided for each refrigeration plant, heating plant, air handling unit over 3 hp, and as


238000-2

indicated on the Drawings. Sensors and control points for each system shall be connected to its associated stand-alone controller. The DDC system, including the data transmission system and network communication devices, and each DDC controller shall provide for the future addition of at least 10% of the number of sensor and control points connected to that component. An alarm condition shall be reported to the appropriate operator device no more than 10 seconds following the occurrence of that condition. Sensor and control values displayed to the operator in graphics displays shall be dynamically updated within 30 seconds of significant change of value.

D. This Project involves expansion of an existing DDC system including new DDC

equipment, software, programming and controls. The new DDC controllers shall be connected to the existing DDC central station. The existing DDC central station shall be reprogrammed to include the new systems. New DDC system components shall be 100% hardware and software compatible with the existing system and shall be by the same manufacturer. Programming logic, database definition, and point identifiers shall conform to, and be a logical extension of, the existing system.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a single comprehensive submittal package including the following items. At the Contractor's option, control valves and control dampers may be submitted in a separate submittal in advance of the other items to maintain project schedule. 1. Control valve data: including manufacturer's product data and schedule indicating

body type, size, flow rate, pressure drop, actuators and motors, end switches, normal (failure) position, and maximum differential pressure at which valve is capable of full closure for each valve.

2. Control damper data: including manufacturer's product data and schedule indicating damper type, size, flow rate, pressure drop, leakage rate, actuators and motors, end switches and normal (failure) position for each damper.

3. DDC system data: including control manufacturer's data sheets on DDC controllers, sensors, meters, relays, actuators, motors, terminal unit controllers, protection devices, and other devices specified herein. Include data on software and illustrations of proposed graphics displays.

4. Diagrams: separate field wiring diagrams for each system, including motor starting and interlock wiring, ladder diagrams, control wiring, interior electrical circuits of control instruments with terminal and control device designations, actuators and motors, colors of wires, locations of instruments and remote elements, interfaces with communications equipment provided with equipment specified in other Sections, and normal position of relays. Each diagram shall have terminals labeled as they will be marked on the installed equipment. Each diagram shall delineate between existing piping, wiring or equipment, and new piping, wiring, and equipment.

5. System architecture: provide a drawing of the proposed system architecture showing configuration and locations for DDC controllers, terminal unit controllers, control wiring for each device, and hardware and wiring for connections to networks external to the building. Also, provide diagrams of the proposed control power


238000-3

infrastructure, including the designation of the electrical panelboards that will be utilized to provide control power, the quantity, configuration, size, and location of controls system transformers, and the distribution wiring to power consuming control devices. Provide floor plans locating equipment coordinated with the work of other trades.

6. Uninterruptible power supplies: provide wiring diagrams and sizing calculations for uninterruptible power supplies.

7. Sequences of operation: complete detailed sequences of operation, including: a narrative of the system operation and interactions and interlocks with other systems; notations indicating whether interlock or interaction is accomplished through software or hard wired connections; detailed delineation of control between packaged controls and the DDC system; and sequences of operation for packaged controlled equipment that interfaces with the DDC system.

8. Existing DDC system expansion data: proposed central station modifications if any are required to support this addition; complete field wiring diagrams showing interconnection with existing controllers, devices, and central station equipment; illustrations of proposed graphics displays if specified herein; and proposed database and software additions or modifications, if required.


A. Visit the Project before bidding, and make a survey of existing control instruments. Reuse existing instruments that would be practical in the new system. Reused instruments shall be put in first class working condition and shall bear the same warranty as new instruments.

B. Advise, in writing, of any malfunctions or inoperative control apparatus or instruments

that become apparent during the course of the work in portions of the temperature control system that are not directly affected by this Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. American Auto-Matrix, Andover Controls, Automated Logic, Carrier, Delta Controls, Johnson Controls, Siemens, or Trane.

2.02 DDC SYSTEM

A. Provide a complete system of direct digital controls (DDC) and monitoring points as specified herein. The DDC systems shall interface with the pneumatic, electric, and electronic systems to provide control outputs and monitoring inputs to the DDC systems as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Complete pneumatic or electric control systems shall be provided to perform sequences not indicated to be performed by the DDC systems.


238000-4

B. Transient surge suppressors: suppressors shall be solid state, operate bidirectionally, and have a turn-on and turn-off time of less than one nanosecond, and shall provide the protection specified herein, either as an internal part of the DDC controller or as a separate component. Suppressor manufacturer shall have available certified test data confirming a fail short failure mode. 1. Communication or Signal Conductor Transient Suppressors:

a. Maximum single impulse current conductor-to-conductor or conductor-to-ground: 10000 A, 8 x 20 µs waveform.

b. Pulse life rating: 3000 A, 8 x 20 µs waveform, 2000 occurrences. c. Maximum clamping voltage at 10000 A, 8 x 20 µs waveform, with the peak

current not to exceed the normal applied voltage by 200%.

C. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS): provide a self contained UPS designed for installation and operation at each DDC controller sized for at least 125% of the peak demand, and to provide a minimum of 15 minutes of full operation of the controller and input/output expansion modules connected to that controller. Equipment connected to the UPS shall not be affected in any manner by a power outage of a duration less than the rated capacity of the UPS. Each UPS shall be wired such that primary power to the controller will be maintained upon failure of the UPS, including either a relay switch upstream of the UPS or two UPSs in parallel. UPS shall be complete with necessary power supplies, transformers, batteries, and accessories and shall include visual indication of normal power operation, UPS operation, abnormal operation and visual and audible indication of low battery power.

D. DDC controllers: field programmable, microprocessor-based type incorporating direct

digital control and energy management functions. Each DDC controller shall perform its assigned control and energy management functions as a stand-alone unit and shall comply with FCC Part 15, Subpart B 2011. Controls shall be performed in a digital manner using the digital signal from the microprocessor based controller, converted through electronic circuitry for modulation of actuators. Each DDC controller shall be expandable by adding additional input/output modules that operate through the processor of the DDC controller. The master processor in the DDC controller shall be able to manage remote field interface units thereby expanding its control loop and energy management point capacity. Each DDC controller including associated input/output modules shall have a minimum of 10% spare input and output points of each type installed. The DDC controller shall be supplied with a minimum of 8 hours of battery back-up for the clock operation and memory retention with an automatic battery charger. Provide interface for valve and damper actuators. DDC controller hardware shall provide relay or solid state isolation on each contact input circuit and each output circuit to prevent high voltage surges from entering the logic circuits. 1. Provide a digital display unit, programmed to display analog variables, binary

conditions, off-normal conditions and other analog or binary information for analysis and adjustment of the system being controlled. The display unit shall provide visible indication of automatic operation, manual or override operation, a test and associated trouble indication, and alarm indication. The display unit shall include a keyboard containing keys to call-up the described point and type of value to be displayed and


238000-5

several special dedicated keys for such functions as manual-automatic, test and function and value enter, as an aid to the operator. This display unit may be furnished either as an integral component of the DDC controller or as a separate portable unit providing equivalent functions

2. Provide manual hand-off-automatic (HOA) override switches and means for manually adjusting the analog output of outputs connected to each DDC controller. HOA switches and manual adjustments shall be either of a key operated design with switches keyed alike and utilizing the same keying system used for other outputs, or otherwise protected from unauthorized access by a key locked enclosure.

E. DDC controllers shall be arranged and installed to allow controllers to share global data.

This global data shall include, but not be limited to: time-of-day, outside air temperature and humidity, and electrical meter and demand information. If DDC controllers are not configured in a communication network to share this data, then each DDC controller shall be provided with sensor inputs to implement sequences specified herein when operating in a stand-alone mode.

F. DDC controller software: DDC controller software and custom programming shall be

provided to implement control sequences as specified in Paragraph 3.13, Sequences. Each DDC controller shall contain mathematic, logic, utility functions and standard energy calculations and control functions in ROM to be available in any combination for field programming the unit. These routines shall include but not be limited to: 1. Math Routines:

a. Basic arithmetic. b. Binary logic. c. Relational logic.

2. Utility Routines: a. Process entry and exit. b. Variable adjustments and output. c. Alarm indication. d. Restart.

3. Control Routines: a. Signal compensation. b. Loop control. c. Energy conservation. d. Timed programming.

4. Energy Management Routines: a. Scheduled start-stop and holiday programming. b. Optimal start-stop. c. Duty cycling. d. Demand limiting.

5. Terminal Unit Control: a. Volume control in response to temperature. b. Volume flow limits, minimum and maximum. c. Occupied and unoccupied operation with associated temperature and volume

limits.


238000-6

d. Occupant temperature adjustment. e. Temperature setpoint override. f. Occupant override. g. Global reset of temperature and volume limits.

6. Project tailored programs: the library of routines available in firmware shall be capable of generating additional programs for specific Project requirements. These should include but not be limited to: a. Supply air temperature control. b. Variable volume supply fan control. c. Space temperature control. d. Fire alarm activated sequences. e. Totalizing. f. Event initiated sequences.

7. Each DDC controller shall perform its full control and energy management functions, regardless of condition of communications link with other system components. These stand-alone capabilities shall be implemented and shall include, but not be limited to, closed loop control functions (P, PI, PID, incremental, floating) and energy management functions. DDC controllers and terminal unit controllers shall be totally stand-alone and independent of the DDC central station for control applications specified herein. Failure of the DDC central station shall in no way inhibit the operation or program execution of the DDC controllers and terminal unit controllers.

8. DDC controller control algorithms shall be available and resident in the DDC controller to permit proportional, integral and derivative control modes in any combination to meet the needs of the application. Other control modes, incremental, floating or 2-position, shall be available to adapt to the needs of the Project. Adjustment of control variables shall be available at the DDC controller through the display unit. These adjustments shall include, but not be limited to, proportional gain, integral rate, the velocity and acceleration constants associated with incremental control, and on/off values of 2-position control. Each control loop setpoint and control logic threshold shall be programmed as a variable expressed in the appropriate engineering units and shall be displayable and adjustable through the display unit. Modification of DDC software shall not be required to alter those variables.

9. Software, local variables, and data resident in the DDC controllers shall be resident in nonvolatile memory or shall be down-loadable from the DDC central station.

G. Terminal Unit Controllers:

1. Control of terminal units shall be accomplished by microprocessor-based stand-alone terminal unit controllers utilizing direct digital control. An individual terminal unit controller shall be provided for each terminal unit and shall interface to the DDC system. Terminal unit controller components shall be furnished to the terminal unit manufacturer for factory mounting and calibration. Mounting charges shall be the responsibility of the controls contractor. Terminal unit controller power shall be 24 V AC. Each terminal unit controller shall contain resident programs which are field-selectable for a specific application. Resident programs shall be contained in


238000-7

nonvolatile memory using EEPROM, EPROM, or RAM. Systems that employ volatile (RAM) memory shall provide 72 hour battery back-up for each terminal unit controller.

2. Each terminal unit controller shall be accessible for purposes of control parameter and setpoint adjustment and monitoring from the central station and remote operator's terminals as specified herein. An operator's terminal connected to any DDC controller on the network, directly or via modem, shall have access to the terminal unit controllers. Terminal unit controllers shall also be accessible through a communications port at the space sensor.

3. Portable Terminal Unit Controller Interfaces: a. Portable full function terminal unit controller interfaces shall interface with the

terminal unit controller for readout of variables, override control, servicing, troubleshooting and adjustment of control parameters. Terminals shall communicate in English language for inquiry, reporting, and programming purposes.

b. When used remotely or locally, terminals shall: 1) Indicate system status (heating, cooling, out of control range). 2) Display, set, and manually override minimum and maximum air flow in

cfm. 3) Display space temperature. 4) Display, set, and manually override space temperature setpoint and

setback. 5) Display auxiliary (duct, discharge) temperature. 6) Display, set and change heating/cooling deadband. 7) Display damper and valve position in percent open notation. 8) Command damper and valve position in percent open notation. 9) Select application mode. 10) Assign terminal control unit address. 11) Display and manually override reheat stages (on/off). 12) Set and change control loop gains. 13) Change unoccupied/occupied mode.

H. Energy Management Software:

1. Scheduled start-stop and holiday programs: provide software to start and stop equipment based on the time-of-day for each day-of-week, including holidays. To eliminate power surges and to ensure stable system operation, an operator adjustable time delay shall be provided between consecutive start commands and between consecutive stop commands for electrical loads. Software shall provide for multiple start/stop events scheduled for each output for each day, including holidays.

2. Optimum start-stop program: provide software to start and stop equipment on a sliding schedule based on indoor and outdoor air conditions. The program shall take into account the thermal characteristics of the structure, indoor and outside conditions using prediction software to determine the minimum time of system operation needed to satisfy space environmental requirements at the start of the occupied cycle, and determine the earliest time for stopping equipment at the day's


238000-8

end. The program shall automatically modify the calculation constants based on its past performance.

3. Demand limiting program: provide software to shed electrical loads to prevent exceeding an electrical demand peak value (target). The program shall continuously monitor power demand, and with prediction software, calculate a predicted power demand. When the predicted power demand exceeds a preset desired target, the program shall turn off or adjust operation of electrical loads on a prescheduled priority basis to reduce the connected load before the actual peak exceeds the target. The demand limiting program shall provide several priority levels of loads. Loads in the lowest priority level shall be shed before loads in the next higher priority level. Loads shed within a priority level shall be rotated automatically, subject to equipment constraints to avoid any one load from always being shed first. Loads shed in the highest priority level shall be restored before loads in lower priority levels. The demand program shall be compatible with time-of-day metering. The program shall permit a minimum of 6 individually resettable time-of-day demand periods in 24 hours. The start and stop time of each time-of-day demand program shall allow different daily schedules for 3 types of days (weekday, weekend, holiday). A time-of-day metering calendar shall be established by the program which shall define daily time-of-day metering schedules.

4. Day-night setback program: provide software to limit the rise or drop of space temperature during unoccupied hours. Whenever the space temperature is above (or below for heating) the operator assigned temperature limit, the system shall be enabled until the temperature is within the assigned temperature limit.

5. Power fail-auto restart: on power failure, the DDC controller shall shutdown without damage to the DDC controller or connected systems, and without loss of programmed information. If power is restored within the time specified herein for battery back-up of DDC controller clock operation, the DDC system shall automatically restart, adjust operating parameters according to the proper time of day, and resume full normal operation within no longer than 5 minutes following restoration of power. Each controlled item of equipment, 5 hp or greater, shall be sequentially restarted or returned to proper operation as appropriate for the time-of-day.

6. Event initiated sequences: based on programmable values of either digital or analog inputs or outputs, the DDC controller shall be able to: open or close any output contacts or combination of contact outputs; and adjust any analog output over its normal range.

7. Terminal unit controller software: provide software for the management and control of the DDC terminal unit controllers. Software shall allow for operator definition of terminal unit controllers as functional groups; monitoring, alarming and reporting of terminal unit parameters on an individual or group basis; after hours terminal unit operation monitoring and reporting on an individual or group basis; and remote setpoint adjustment of terminal unit parameters on an individual or group basis in response to operator commands or through software interaction.

I. Data transmission network: DDC controllers and the existing DDC central station shall

be connected by a data transmission cable network. It shall be possible to access any


238000-9

DDC and terminal unit controllers through the network. Such access shall include full read-write capability from an operational as well as programming standpoint. Total system information shall be available to the DDC central station.

J. DDC Sensors:

1. Provide sensors, controls, instruments, and control interfaces to meet the performance specified herein. Sensors shall be high quality precision electronic type, selected to be compatible with the DDC controllers and appropriate for the service specified herein. Accuracy values specified herein include sensor, wiring, signal conditioning and display accuracies for overall end-to-end performance. Sensors shall be selected to place the expected value in the middle third of the device's range.

2. Temperature sensors: 100 or 1000 ohm platinum resistance temperature device (RTD), Deutsche Industrial Norms (DIN) 43760, with an average percent change in resistance per degree (α) of 0.00385 ± 0.00002 ohms/ohm/ºC, selected for normal range of media sensed with accuracy of ±0.5ºF at 70ºF except chilled water sensors used for Btu calculations or control as indicated on the I/O summaries shall have an accuracy of ±0.25ºF at 32ºF. Sensors used for Btu calculations shall be matched pairs at the calibration point. Temperature sensor stability errors shall not exceed 0.25ºF cumulative over a 5 year period. Provide thermowells and insertion type sensors for water temperature sensing. Air temperature sensing shall be provided by duct insertion type sensors for supply or return duct temperatures and by extended element averaging type for plenum, and coil entering or leaving temperatures. RTD transmitters shall be a 2-wire, loop-powered device, producing a linear 4-20 mA output corresponding to the temperature span of the connected sensor. The output error shall not exceed 0.1% of calibrated span. Transmitters shall include noninteracting offset and span adjustments and RFI shielding and rejection circuitry to prevent disruption from ambient signals. Transmitter drift shall be less than 0.1ºF per year.

3. Space temperature sensors: space temperature type with setpoint adjustment range of 45ºF to 85ºF. The setpoint adjustment shall be locked out, overridden, or limited as to time or temperature in software from a central or remote operator's terminal. Temperature setpoints for heating and cooling and night setback shall be independent of each other and shall provide a zero energy band between heating and cooling modes. Precision thermistors may be used in space temperature sensing applications below 200ºF. Sensor accuracy over the application range shall be minimum 0.5ºF between the range of 32ºF to 150ºF including sensor error and A/D conversion resolution error. Sensor manufacturer shall utilize 100% screening to verify accuracy. Thermistors shall be pre-aged and inherently stable. Stability error of the thermistor over 5 years shall not exceed 0.25ºF cumulative. Sensor element and leads shall be encapsulated. Bead thermistors shall not be used. Space temperature sensors shall include a communications port for local connection of a portable test/terminal device for communications/programming access to the associated DDC controller. a. Covers:

1) Unless otherwise specified herein, space temperature sensors shall have cover, visible temperature indicator integral to the sensor, and concealed means of setpoint adjustment.


238000-10

2) Space temperature sensors in operating rooms, labor and delivery rooms, and special procedure (radiology) rooms shall have covers with visible temperature indicator integral to the sensor, occupant override push button integral or adjacent to the sensor assembly, and accessible means of setpoint adjustment.

3) Space temperature sensors in patient rooms shall have blank cover and accessible means of setpoint adjustment.

4. Pressure transmitters: 2-wire strain gauge type, designed for media sensed for static pressure or differential pressure. The span shall be continuously adjustable from 0% to 125% of the expected full pressure or full flow differential pressure. The zero shall be continuously adjustable on outputs. Transmitters shall produce a 4-20 mA signal with an accuracy of ±1.0% of the upper range limit for 6 months from calibration. Instruments shall be capable of withstanding an overrange pressure limit of 300% normal.

5. Current sensing relays: current sensing relays shall provide an adjustable setpoint normally open contact rated at a minimum of 50 V peak and 0.5 A or 25 VA, noninductive. There shall be a single opening for passage of current carrying conductors. Relays shall be sized for operation at 50% rated current based on the connected load. Voltage isolation shall be a minimum of 600 V.

6. Filter status: filter status shall be sensed by 4-20 mA input from differential pressure gauges across each filter, as specified in Section 237000, Air Distribution.

K. Actuators:

1. DDC terminal unit actuators: 24 V nonstall type, providing complete modulating

control for the full range of damper movement. Actuators shall be de-energized when the damper has reached the operator or system determined position. Actuators shall be supplied to the terminal unit manufacturer for factory mounting and calibration. Actuators shall be removable for servicing without removing the terminal unit. Actuators shall be provided with transformers for proper operation from the terminal unit controller power source.

2. Other actuators: 24 V electric worm-gear type; sized to provide required starting torque and to control the driven apparatus smoothly. Higher voltage actuators are acceptable for specific applications where 24 V actuators are not adequate. Actuators shall have spring return.

2.03 EXISTING DDC CENTRAL STATION MODIFICATIONS

A. If a new DDC system installation, rather than an expansion of the existing system, is provided to meet the requirements of this Project, provide a gateway to the existing system to allow integration of the two systems at the central station. The new DDC central station shall provide graphic displays and functions specified herein and shall incorporate existing graphic displays, control, reporting, and monitoring functions of the existing system at the new DDC central station.


238000-11

B. Central station software, general: if the existing DDC installation is being expanded, upgrade the existing DDC system central station software to the current version and provide additional updates at no additional cost during the one year warranty period. Modify existing database information and add additional database information as required to interface existing and new DDC system components into a single, integrated and fully functioning system.

C. Central station software, color graphics: the monitor display format shall be organized to

permit the output of displays, and/or summaries specified herein, while concurrently displaying the most recent change-of-state occurrence. 1. Graphic displays for systems and system components shall be provided as indicated

in the I/O summaries. a. The operator shall be capable, upon command entry, of calling for graphic

displays of systems or zones. b. Displays shall contain flow schematics, and schematics of mechanical duct and

piping systems, electrical switchgear, electrical distribution systems, pumps, fans, valves, dampers, chillers, boilers, coils, pull stations, smoke detectors, heat detectors, circuit breakers, engine-generator sets, and cooling towers, for systems indicated in the I/O summaries to have graphic display.

c. Displays shall include scaled building floor plans with air handling unit and terminal unit temperature control zones identified and space sensors indicated.

d. Displays shall indicate values or status of I/O points associated with that system and those shall be dynamically updated at least once every 30 seconds. Software shall be provided to allow operator modification of graphic displays provided with the system and to allow operator creation and storage of new graphic displays.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Motors: electric worm-gear type; sized to provide required starting torque and to control the driven apparatus smoothly. Modulating valve and damper motors in control sequences involving 2 or more devices or stages controlled from a single output shall be provided with a positive positioning device. Where motors are operating at 75% or more of their rated capacity, provide a positive positioning device. Positioners shall be capable of applying maximum motor effort to maintain the operator position called for by its related controller. 1. Valve and damper motors shall have spring return.

B. Control valves: brass-trimmed; 2" and smaller, bronze bodies with screwed connections;

over 2", cast iron bodies with flanged connections. Steam valves operating at pressure differentials greater than 25 psig and water valves operating at pressure differentials greater than 40 psig shall have stainless steel trim and replaceable seat ring. 1. Valves shall be capable of full closure against 150% of design pump head, or a 50

psig differential pressure, whichever is greater.


238000-12

2. Valves for water shall have equal percentage flow characteristics. Modulating control valves shall be sized for a pressure drop of 3 psig to 5 psig, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Two-position valves shall be line size.

3. Ball valves used for modulating service shall have a replaceable flow characterizing disk to provide the required flow characteristics.

4. Steam valve sizes are indicated on the Drawings, and shall have linear characteristics.

5. Pressure/temperature rating: as specified in Section 231000, Piping, Valves and Accessories.

6. At the Contractor's option, control valves may be butterfly type for chilled and condenser water service in piping 2" and larger. Modulating butterfly valves shall be sized for full flow pressure drop of 2 psig to 4 psig at 60% open and be limited to this opening. Two-position control valves shall be line size. Valves 8" and larger shall be provided with either worm-gear electric actuators or high pressure pneumatic actuators sized for 150% of the torque required to unseat the valve from the closed position. Valves shall be rated for bubbletight closure at a differential pressure equal to the valve body rating.

C. Control dampers: single-blade up to 8" high, multiblade over 8" high; minimum 80% free

area based on damper frame outside dimensions. 1. Blades: minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum. Blades shall be

airfoil shape. a. Pivot rods: steel, minimum 0.5" diameter or hex, with one rod extended 6" to

permit operation of damper from outside the duct. b. Maximum length 42"; maximum width 8". c. At points of contact: interlocking or overlapping edges, and compressible

neoprene or extruded vinyl blade seals, and compressible metal side seals designed for temperature of -40ºF to 180ºF at leakage rate specified herein.

d. Type: 1) Opposed blade: for balancing and modulating applications. 2) Parallel blade: for 2-position, and outside and return air mixing

applications. For mixing applications, orient dampers to achieve maximum mixing at throttled conditions.

e. Maximum damper area per motor: 15 ft². 2. Leakage when closed: less than 4 cfm/ft² at 1" wg differential static pressure based

on a 48" damper width. 3. Frames: galvanized steel bar minimum 2" wide x 12 gauge for dampers 10" high or

less, and 3.5" x 0.875", 16 gauge galvanized roll-formed channel with double-thickness edges or 5" x 1" x 0.125" extruded aluminum channel for 11" high and larger. a. Corner bracing. b. Full size of duct or opening in which installed.

4. Bearings: stainless steel sleeve type. a. Thrust bearings: vertically mounted. b. Maximum spacing: 42".

5. Finish on steel parts: galvanized.


238000-13

6. Operating linkage: factory-assembled, concealed in frame out of airstream, steel construction.

D. Smoke detectors: duct, photoelectric or ionization type, UL 268A-2008, 24 V AC power.

Mounting shall be on a snap-in detector base. Each detector shall have an auxiliary contact, a red alarm indicating LED, a time delay or other alarm verification circuitry to suppress false alarms, perforated sampling tube, and test and reset switch. 1. For detectors in ductwork above ceilings, provide remote, flush, wall-mounted

single-gang test and alarm stations, complete with stainless steel faceplate, alarm LED, and key-operated test switch.

E. Panels: surface type cabinet with hinged front panel and cylinder lock. Panels shall

utilize one master key.

F. Wiring: low voltage control wiring shall be not less than #18 AWG, 600 V plastic covered, color-coded. Line voltage wiring shall be not smaller than #16 AWG, 600 V. Sensor wiring shall be not less than #20 AWG twisted, shielded.

G. Valve tags: as specified in Section 230010, General.

H. Labels: as specified in Section 230010, General.

I. Thermometers:

1. Water: as specified in Section 231000, Piping, Valves and Accessories.

J. Thermowells: monel, brass, or copper for use in water piping and stainless steel for other applications. Thermowells shall have threaded plug and chain, retaining nut, and lagging neck to clear insulation. Inside diameter of insertion neck shall accommodate the element being installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Where control devices are installed on insulated piping or ductwork, provide standoff brackets or thermowells sized to clear insulation thickness. Provide extended sensing elements, actuator linkages, and other accessories as required.

B. Wiring and tubing shall be identified with the same numbers and symbols as used on the

corrected, approved record diagrams.

C. Label control apparatus with nameplates or tags bearing the functional designations shown on approved control diagrams.

D. Where control devices are exposed outside the building, provide weather shield

enclosures.


238000-14

3.02 COMMISSIONING SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS

A. Prepare a written plan indicating in a step-by-step manner the procedures that will be followed to test, check-out, and adjust the control system prior to beginning functional testing. Keep the Performance Verification Supervisor informed of progress with the Project and of changes to the proposed installation, programming and test plan. At minimum, the plan shall include for each type of equipment controlled by the automatic controls: 1. Step-by-step procedures for testing each type controller after installation, including:

a. Process of verifying proper hardware and wiring installation. b. Process of downloading programs to load controllers and verifying that they

are addressed correctly. 2. Process of verifying proper hardware and wiring installation. 3. Process of performing operational checks of each controlled component. 4. Plan and process for calibrating valve and damper actuators and sensors. 5. A description of the expected field adjustments for transmitters, controllers and

control actuators should control responses fall outside of expected values. 6. A copy of the log and field check-out sheets that will document the process. This log

shall include a place for initial and final values read during calibration of each point and clearly indicate when a sensor or controller has passed and is operating within the contract parameters. Notification of any equipment failures shall be documented.

7. A description of the instrumentation required for testing, including a certification of calibration for each test instrument.

8. Identify which tests and systems should be completed prior to using the control system for test, adjustment, and balance work.

B. Provide the Performance Verification Supervisor complete system logic diagrams,

describing the proposed system programming, with programmed attributes shown. These diagrams shall be updated with field modifications from the start-up, check-out, and prefunctional testing prior to the beginning of the functional testing of the DDC system. Provide a copy of each proposed graphical interface screen with interface points shown for the entire system.

C. Prefunctional tests: verify and document the proper installation, addressing, calibration,

programming, operation, and failure mode of DDC control points, sequences, and equipment. Provide a signed and dated certification to the Performance Verification Supervisor and Owner upon completion of the check-out of each controlled device, equipment, and system that installation, set-up, adjustment, calibration, and system programming is complete as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings, except functional testing. Completed prefunctional documentation of the system verification shall be submitted to the Performance Verification Supervisor for review and approval prior to the functional testing of the DDC control system or its being used in the testing of other equipment or systems, or other purposes. Copies of final field check-out sheets and trend logs shall be provided to the Performance Verification Supervisor for inclusion in the Commissioning Report.


238000-15

D. Functional tests: conduct and document a functional test of the complete installed DDC

control system, as defined in Section 230090, Performance Verification. Functional testing of the DDC control system may be conducted in phases or sections, as defined by the requirements of the Functional Test, or as approved by the Performance Verification Supervisor. The DDC system, or applicable portions of the system, shall have completed functional testing and be approved by the Performance Verification Supervisor before being used for other purposes, such as test and balance measurements, or in support of the functional testing of other systems. 1. Assist in the functional testing of equipment and systems by implementing trend logs

and equipment monitoring as specified herein and as required by Section 230090, Performance Verification.

E. Meet with the testing, adjusting, and balancing contractor prior to beginning the test,

adjustment, and balance process and review the test, adjusting, and balancing plan to determine the capabilities and requirements of the control system in completing the testing, adjusting, and balancing process. Provide the testing, adjusting, and balancing contractor any needed unique instruments for setting terminal units and instruct the testing, adjusting, and balancing contractor personnel in their use. Assist and cooperate with the testing, adjusting, and balancing contractor by providing a qualified technician to operate the controls as required to assist the testing, adjusting, and balancing contractor in performing his work, or alternatively, provide sufficient training for the testing, adjusting, and balancing contractor to operate the system without assistance. Verify the proper operation of affected controls at the completion of the test, adjustment, and balance procedure.

F. Seasonal Adjustment:

1. Assist the Performance Verification Supervisor with the seasonal adjustment process. During this effort the Performance Verification Supervisor will: a. Check and verify the calibration of temperature control devices and

thermostats. Test and verify control sequences for proper operation for the season.

b. Where deficient operation or defective equipment is discovered, provide corrective measures as required by the warranty provisions specified herein.

3.03 DDC SYSTEM

A. DDC System Failure Mode: 1. DDC controls and interfaces shall be arranged so that equipment controlled by the

DDC system operate as indicated on the I/O summaries on failure of the DDC controller for any reason, including logic power supply failure, CPU lock-up, or interposing relay failure. Safety and operational interlocks shall remain in effect.

B. Control sequences for fire alarm system signal responses shall be independent of the DDC

controller and its outputs.


238000-16

C. Modify the existing central station software to include new systems specified herein. Provide graphic displays for systems and systems components as indicated in the I/O summaries.

D. Transient surge suppressors: install on low voltage signal or communications conductors

entering the building from exterior locations, including those conductors from devices mounted on the exterior of the building. In addition, provide AC voltage power transient suppressors for DDC equipment power supplies.

E. DDC Sensors:

1. Liquid temperature sensors: fill sensor wells with thermally conductive material to assure accurate readings.

2. Current sensing relays: fan and pump status shall be sensed by a current sensing relay wired on the load side of each fan and pump. For constant speed fans and pumps, the current sensing relay trip setpoint shall be set at the motor's normal operating speed. For variable speed fans and pumps, the current sensing relay trip setpoint shall be set for the lowest operating speed, as determined by the commissioning process (typically 20%).

3. Proper calibration of sensors shall be demonstrated and documented as part of the commissioning process.

4. Sensor calibration: calibration of sensors shall be included as part of the prefunctional checklists according to the following procedures: a. General: verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end. b. Sensors without external transmitters: take a reading with a calibrated test

instrument within 6" of the sensor installation and verify the sensor reading is within the specified tolerance. If not, install offset, calibrate, or replace sensor to obtain required accuracy.

c. Sensors with external transmitters: disconnect sensor from transmitter input and connect a signal generator in place of sensor. Using manufacturer's data, simulate minimum measured value. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until minimum signal is read. Repeat for the maximum measured value and adjust transmitter until maximum signal is read. Reconnect sensor. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6" of the sensor installation. Verify that the sensor reading is within the specified tolerance. If not, repeat process until specified accuracy is achieved, or replace the sensor and repeat process.

d. Paired sensors: for sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, calibrate both sensors to a common measurement and verify they are reading within ±0.25ºF for temperature and within a tolerance equal to ±2% of the sensor reading for pressure.

F. DDC System Start-up and Check-out:

1. Provide the services of control technicians at start-up to check-out the system, verify and calibrate sensors and outputs, input data supplied by the Owner, and place the system in operation. Verify proper operation of each item in the sequences of operation, including hardware and software.


238000-17

2. Check-out each system for control function through the entire sequence. Check actuator travel on dampers and valves for action and extent. Verify that control dampers and valves open and close completely. Check calibration of instruments. Calculate and verify instrument setpoints.

3. Calibration and testing: calibrate sensors and monitoring inputs and verify proper operation of outputs before the system is placed on-line. Check each point within the system by making a comparison between the operator console and field device. DDC control loops, failure modes, interlocks, sequences, energy management programs, and alarms shall be debugged, tested, and stable operation verified. Control loop parameters and tuning constants shall be adjusted to produce accurate, stable control system operation. Before obtaining permission to schedule the acceptance test, provide written documentation of system calibration and certification that the installed complete system has been calibrated, verified, and is ready to begin testing.

G. DDC System Acceptance Conditions:

1. Acceptance test: conduct final acceptance test, with the Owner on site, on the complete and total installed and operational system to demonstrate that it is functioning in accordance with requirements specified herein. Demonstrate the correct operation of monitored and controlled points as well as the operation and capabilities of sequences, reports, specialized control algorithms, diagnostics, and software.

2. System shall demonstrate the following minimum acceptable levels of performance, within the physical limitations of the controlled equipment: a. Control loops shall maintain stable, nonhunting, nonoscillating control, with

minimum overshoot in response to transient and upset conditions. b. Space and air temperatures shall be maintained within ±1ºF of setpoint. c. Hot water system temperatures shall be maintained within ±0.5ºF of setpoint. d. Duct static pressures shall be maintained within ±0.05" wg of setpoint. e. Hydronic system pressures shall be maintained within ±2 psig of setpoint. f. Air and water quantities shall be maintained within ±5% of setpoint.

3. Final system acceptance will be based upon the completion of the following items: a. Completion of the installation of hardware and software items. Demonstrate

complete operation of the system, including hardware and software, with no failures during a 10 consecutive day period. Obtain receipt from the Owner acknowledging no failures within the test period. Submit a daily log documenting failures.

b. Satisfactory completion of functional performance testing, including deferred testing as specified herein.

c. Satisfactory completion of the record drawings, and operating and maintenance manuals.

d. Satisfactory completion of training programs. 4. Upon final acceptance, the warranty period shall begin.


238000-18

H. DDC System Training: 1. Provide the Performance Verification Supervisor with a training plan for review 4

weeks before the planned training. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel training on the control system. The intent is to

clearly and completely instruct the Owner on the capabilities of the control system. 3. The training shall be tailored to the needs and skill-level of the trainees. 4. The trainers shall be knowledgeable on the system and its use in buildings. The

Owner shall approve the instructor prior to scheduling the training. 5. The standard operating manual for the system and any special training manuals shall

be provided for each trainee, with a copy included in each copy of the operation and maintenance manual. In addition, copies of the system technical manual shall be demonstrated during training and a copy included in each copy of the operation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall include detailed description of the subject matter for each session. The manuals shall cover control sequences and have a definitions section that fully describes relevant words used in the manuals and in software displays.

6. Copies of audio-visual materials used in the training program shall be delivered to the Owner.

7. Provide formal training sessions. Each session shall be conducted by factory-trained personnel: a. Training I: the first training session shall consist of 24 hours of actual training.

This training may be held on-site or in the supplier's facility. If held off-site, the training may occur prior to final completion of the system installation. Provide materials and training for up to 6 persons to be designated by the Owner. Upon completion, each student, using appropriate documentation, should be able to perform elementary operations and describe general hardware architecture and functionality of the system.

b. Training II - Building Systems: the second session shall be held on-site for a period of 24 hours of actual hands-on training after the completion of system commissioning. Provide materials and training for up to 6 persons to be designated by the Owner. The session shall include instruction on: 1) Specific hardware configuration of installed systems in this building and

specific instruction for operating the installed system, including HVAC systems, lighting controls, and any interface with security and communication systems.

2) Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power outage, and restart routines, changing setpoints, and alarms and other typical changed parameters, overrides, freeze protection, manual operation of equipment, optional control strategies that can be considered, energy savings strategies and setpoints that if changed will adversely affect energy consumption, energy accounting, and procedures for obtaining vendor assistance.

3) Trending and monitoring features (values, change of state, and totalization), including setting up, executing, downloading, viewing both tabular and graphically and printing trends. Trainees shall actually set-up trends in the presence of the trainer.


238000-19

4) Every screen shall be completely discussed, allowing time for questions. 5) Use of keypad or plug-in laptop computer at the zone level. 6) Use of remote access to the system via telephone lines or networks. 7) Setting up and changing a terminal unit controller.

c. Training III: the third training session shall be conducted on-site 6 months after occupancy and consist of 24 hours of training. Provide materials and training for up to 6 persons to be designated by the Owner. The session shall be structured to address specific topics that trainees need to discuss and to answer questions concerning operation of the system.

8. In addition to the specified DDC system training, provide technically competent technicians to attend training sessions for systems and equipment that are monitored or otherwise interfaced with the DDC system, to discuss the interaction of the control system to the equipment being discussed.

I. Control System Operation and Maintenance Manual Requirements:

1. In addition to documentation specified elsewhere herein, compile and organize operation and maintenance manuals in labeled 3-ring binders. The manual shall be organized and subdivided with permanently labeled indexed tabs, containing at minimum: a. Full as-built sequence of operations for each piece of equipment. b. Full as-built set of control drawings, including the marking of system

components, sensors, and thermostats, and power sources on the as-built floor plans and mechanical drawings, identified with their control system designations.

c. Full point list. In addition to the as-built points list for the major equipment identified in the I/O summary, provide a listing of rooms served by DDC terminal controls, with the following information for each room: 1) Floor. 2) Room number. 3) Room name. 4) Air handling unit identification. 5) Reference drawing number. 6) Terminal unit tag identification. 7) Heating and/or cooling valve tag identification. 8) Minimum cfm. 9) Maximum cfm.

d. Controller/module data shall include specific instructions on how to perform and apply functions, features, and modes specified herein and other features of this system. These instructions shall be step-by-step. Indexes and clear tables of contents shall be included. The detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms shall be included.

e. Control equipment component submittals and parts lists. f. Thermostats, sensors, switches, and timers, including maintenance instructions

and sensor calibration requirements and methods by sensor type. g. Valves and valve actuators. h. Dampers and damper actuators.


238000-20

i. Full as-built documentation of software programming, including commented software program printouts, and a full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system. Provide an electronic copy of programming and database information for this facility.

j. Warranty requirements. 3.04 THERMOSTATS

A. Mount room thermostats and space temperature sensors at the following height:

Type Height

Adjustable 48" above the floor Concealed adjustment 60" above the floor

1. Align vertically or horizontally with adjacent light switches or, if no light switch,

with receptacles. 2. Coordinate final location with the furniture layout and the architectural layout. 3. Concealed setpoint adjustment type space temperature sensors that have occupant

override push buttons shall be classified as adjustable type devices.

B. Remote element type: mount on a vibration free surface 5' above the floor, unless specified herein to be mounted on a control panel. Provide 1 linear foot of element to sense the temperature of each ft² of the coil face. Install in a serpentine arrangement across the entire face of the coil.

C. Averaging and low limit safety type elements: install in a horizontal sine curve manner to

sense temperatures across the entire face of the coil, and support independently from the coil by stainless steel bands or multibulb holders. Provide 1 linear foot of element for each ft² of coil area. Provide 0.5" metallic raceway or 0.375" hard copper rails for support of elements, both top and bottom, for plenum or duct width greater than 36".

D. Under window fan-coil unit thermostats: mount so that adjusting knob is accessible

through access panel.

E. Provide insulated bases for thermostats and temperature sensors installed on exterior walls or walls to unconditioned spaces.

3.05 SENSOR PIPING

A. Tubing shall be concealed except in mechanical rooms.

B. Fasten tubing with clips at regular intervals and run parallel to building lines. Attach concealed tubing above suspended ceilings to structure.


238000-21

C. Copper bends shall be tool made. Provide unions at final connections to apparatus. Provide separation between dissimilar metals.

D. Nonmetallic tubing run in mechanical rooms and concealed in inaccessible locations shall

be run in metallic raceways. Make connections to hot equipment with copper tubing.

E. Tubing installed inside control panels and equipment enclosures, and above ceilings shall be tied and supported.

F. Provide sleeves where tubing passes through concrete or masonry.

G. Test tubing at 30 psig for pressure loss of not more than 1 psig in 1 hour.

H. Changes in direction in copper tubing shall be made with tool bends. Brass compression

type fittings shall be used at final connections to devices; other joints shall be brazed using a BCuP5 brazing alloy with solidus above 1,100°F and liquidus below 1,500°F. Brazing flux shall be used on copper-to-brass joints only.

I. Prior to final connection to devices tubing shall be flushed clean and dry and tested at

three times the operating pressure for not less than 30 minutes with no loss of pressure.

J. Tubing passing through concrete or masonry shall be sleeved and protected from abrasion and electrolytic action.

3.06 PANELS

A. Provide a panel for each DDC controller or each system not controlled by the DDC system.

B. Mount the following items in the panels unless otherwise specified herein:

1. DDC controllers. 2. Relays. 3. Switches. 4. 120 V duplex convenience outlet wired from the same circuit as the DDC controller. 5. Wiring and controls. 6. Terminal blocks.

C. Wire controllers, relays, switches, and controls in the control panel to a terminal block.

Line voltage and low voltage shall be separated on different terminal blocks with labels indicating voltage. Each sensor or other electrical device shall be wired back to the terminal block in the control panel. Devices in series shall be individually terminated at the terminal block, such that each side of each device is available at the control panel for troubleshooting. In addition to number markings on each conductor, conductor color shall be the same throughout each wiring run. Wiring shall be neatly tied and routed in the control panel. Shielded wiring shall be terminated neatly, with heat shrink tubing placed


238000-22

over the bare end of the shield. Ground conductors over 4" long shall be insulated with tubing.

D. Provide 6" x 6"trough the width of the control panel, minimum 24" in length, above the

control panel to provide an entrance for cabling and tubing into the panel, with 50% spare nipple capacity.

E. Provide 120 V power wiring for control power in the top right corner of each panel, with

disconnects, power supplies, and transformers associated with the panel also located in the top right corner.

F. Each item in the panel shall be labeled and the panel labeled as to the system or

equipment served.

G. Panels shall be located to avoid conflicts with ductwork, piping, equipment, the work of other trades, and building conditions. Panel locations indicated on the Drawings shall be coordinated prior to installation and adjusted to avoid conflicts.

3.07 STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS

A. Install sensors in the associated air handling unit control panel and use extended sensing lines. Provide taps for calibration purposes.

3.08 THERMOMETERS

A. Provide at each remote temperature sensor and element location. Do not duplicate thermometers specified in Section 231000, Piping, Valves and Accessories.

B. Mount thermometers in piping, ducts, and equipment in positions adjusted to be

accessible for reading. Use angle and adjustable types where straight type would not be readable.

C. Fill thermometer wells with thermally conductive material.


A. Refer to Section 237000, Air Distribution, for installation.

B. For outdoor air damper assemblies, stage the opening of each section to prevent stratification and poor mixing of outside and return air.


A. Refer to Section 237000, Air Distribution, for installation.


238000-23

3.11 CONTROL VALVES

A. Refer to Section 231000, Piping, Valves and Accessories, for installation.

B. Provide high pressure air if necessary for valve actuators. 3.12 WIRING

A. Materials and installation of wiring and electrical devices shall be in accordance with Division 26.

B. Exposed control and sensor wiring shall be installed in conduits and shall be separate

from power wiring. Plenum rated cable may be used in concealed spaces if run parallel to structural grid and supported by cable trays or tie wraps, and identified in a manner consistent with the documentation of the system every 30'. Conduits to devices in finished spaces shall be concealed.

C. Provide transformers or filters for operation of automatic temperature controls from

building power circuits. Each DDC controller shall be served by a dedicated transformer, and no more than 10 terminal unit controllers shall be served by a single transformer.

D. Provide relays, transformers, fuses and interlock wiring as required to accomplish the

sequences specified herein.

E. See Division 26 for 120 V, 20 A electrical branch circuits designated for control power, terminated in junction boxes. Provide power wiring from the designated junction boxes through control power transformers to DDC controllers, terminal unit controllers, smoke dampers, and other power consuming control devices.

F. Power for terminal unit controllers and smoke dampers shall be distributed at 24 V. For

terminal units containing fans or electric heat, control power may be obtained from a control power transformer furnished with the terminal unit, except for terminal units used as part of a smoke control system.

G. Branch circuit wiring and conduit furnished under this Section for control equipment

power shall be separate from other power wiring. No more than 2 DDC controller installations shall operate from a single 120 V branch circuit.

H. Low voltage control and sensor wiring shall be continuous without splicing.

3.13 SEQUENCES

A. The following items apply to control sequences specified herein: 1. Variable Speed Controls:

a. Variable frequency drives shall start at low speed.


238000-24

b. Variable frequency drives shall not operate below the minimum speed set on the control panel. Minimum speed setting shall be determined during system commissioning and shall not be lower than the motor manufacturer's recommendation.

c. Equipment safeties shall be wired into variable frequency drive control circuits and shall be active in both the hand and auto modes.

2. Indication of equipment operating status and actuation of control sequences shall be accomplished by current sensing relays unless otherwise indicated in the I/O summaries.

3. Upon power failure and restoration, systems shall automatically restart and return to their normal mode of operation. Adjustable time delays shall be provided to sequentially stage starting of equipment with motors greater than 5 hp or electric heating loads greater than 4 kW.

4. Hand-Off-Automatic and Controller-Off-Bypass Switches: a. Safety devices, including fire alarm system relays and emergency fan

shutdown stations, shall be wired in series with the motor controller holding coil circuit and shall be active in the hand and automatic positions and in the bypass position.

b. Interlocking with other fans, equipment, or systems other than those required for the operation of the specific equipment shall be through automatic positions only.

c. Remote control from the DDC system shall be through automatic positions. d. Hand position shall be for maintenance operation only. e. Operation in hand position shall energize associated dampers and equipment

necessary to allow operation. 5. Controls shall fail as specified herein, or to minimize possibility of damage on failure

if not specified herein. 6. Control setpoints shall be adjustable over the range of the sensed media. Means of

adjustment and current setpoint shall be identified. DDC setpoints, time delays, and alarm limits shall be programmed as variables, expressed in the appropriate engineering units, which can be adjusted through the digital display unit or from a central station without requiring modification or reloading of the DDC control programs. Control, alarm, and limit setpoints for each DDC controller shall be displayed and shall be adjustable from an appropriately password-protected tabular graphic display associated with the appropriate equipment. Setpoints, time delays, or alarm limits common to multiple control algorithms shall be configured as a common variable, requiring a single adjustment. Provide and adjust time delays for smooth and safe operation of systems.

7. Control outputs shall provide maximum rated actuator power at extremes of actuator travel. Control output range (0% to 100%) shall correspond to actuator travel (0% to 100%).

8. Where systems are served by emergency power, controls for operation of those systems shall also be served by emergency power.

9. Where dampers prevent airflow through an air handling unit or fan, those dampers shall be proven open prior to starting the unit or fan. Proof shall be by mechanical


238000-25

safety limit switch activated by the damper blade. This switch shall be wired in the automatic and hand/test positions and in the bypass position.

B. Interface with existing systems shall be as follows:

1. Existing thermostats serving existing terminal units shall be relocated as indicated on the Drawings. Existing thermostats that are reused shall be reconditioned and recalibrated. Existing thermostats that are in poor condition or poor repair shall be replaced. Verify operation of existing terminal unit controls associated with new or relocated thermostats and advise the Architect of any malfunctions.



260010-1

SECTION 260010GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. These electrical general provisions specified herein apply to all Sections of Division 26.





2012.2. NECA 1-2010.3. NECA 200-2010.4. NFPA 70-2011.

B. Codes, standards and regulations specified herein refer to the edition date. Revisions and addenda to these codes, standards and regulations shall be part of these specifications. Provisions of referenced codes, standards and regulations do not create duty or responsibility by the Architect or the Owner, unless otherwise specified herein.

C. Codes, standards and regulations referred to are minimum standards. Where the requirements of these specifications or drawings exceed those of the codes, standards and regulations, the drawings or specifications govern.

D. Electrical/Mechanical Design Coordination:1. The power ratings of motors and equipment and the characteristics of electrical

systems serving them, as specified in other divisions, have been established as minimums which will allow that equipment to satisfactorily function while producing the capacities indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. These power ratings include a safety factor deemed appropriate to accommodate common differences between design parameters and field construction practices.

2. Reasonable efforts have been made to coordinate the electrical requirements of the equipment specified in other divisions with the electrical systems serving that equipment. Differences among manufacturers of equipment make it impossible


260010-2

to produce a single electrical design which will satisfy the varying electrical requirements of those manufacturers. Consequently, the Contractor shall coordinate the electrical requirements of the equipment actually furnished on this Project and provide the electrical systems required by that equipment. This coordination effort shall be completed prior to the installation of either the equipment or the electrical systems serving that equipment. Electrical system revisions required to coordinate with the equipment actually furnished shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.


A. Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and, unless explicitly dimensioned, indicate appropriate locations of fixtures, apparatus, equipment and raceways. Changes in the location, and offsets, of same to accommodate building conditions and coordination with the work of other trades, shall be made prior to initial installation, without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Locations of motors, starters, equipment and apparatus as indicated on the Drawings are approximate; connections shall be made to such equipment as actually installed.

C. Provide access to equipment and apparatus requiring operation, service or maintenance throughout the life of the system.

D. Install switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers, such that no piping, ductwork or mechanical equipment is installed in the space equal to the width and depth of the equipment from floor to structure above. In addition, switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, variable frequency drives,transformers, and starters shall be installed such that the working space in front, rear and/or side (where rear and/or side access is required to work on equipment) is clear of piping, ductwork, or mechanical equipment. Dimensions of the working space shall be a minimum depth of 42" horizontally, the width of the equipment or 30", whichever is greater, and the height of the equipment or 78", whichever is greater. Minimum depth shall be increased to 60" for equipment rated over 600 V.

E. Do not install pad-mounted transformers less than 15' from any doorway or building structure (exterior walls, walkways, overhangs, balcony or windows). Orient the transformer such that the access area is facing away from the building.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL AIR-HANDLING SPACES

A. Electrical power conductors installed in environmental air-handling spaces shall be approved for installation in plenum areas.

B. Communications, data, control, and signal cable not in conduit or enclosed wireways shall be approved for installation in plenum areas.


260010-3

C. Busway installed in spaces above or behind access panels used for environmental air shall be feeder type with no provisions for plug-in connections.



1.06 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed raceways are those which can be seen when the base building and tenant fit-up is complete without opening or removing access doors or panels or accessible ceiling components.

B. Other raceways are considered to be concealed.

1.07 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Schedule work and provide temporary connections so existing systems will not be interrupted when they are required for usage of the existing building. Obtain approval from the Owner and the Architect at least 7 days prior to any interruption or connection.


C. The existing engine-generator shall remain operational during construction and shall be accessible to the Owner. Protect the engine-generator from dust, dirt and damage.

D. Submit a detailed description of the procedure proposed for making the cutover, including estimated outage time to the Owner.




A. Automatic temperature controls.

B. Casework and laboratory equipment.

C. Communications systems.


260010-4

D. Fire detection and alarm systems.

E. Fume hoods.

F. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.

G. Laboratory gas systems.

H. Laboratory equipment.

I. Painting, except as specified herein.

J. Plumbing systems.

K. Power-operated doors.

L. Security systems.

M. Sprinkler waterflow and valve monitor switches.

1.10 SUBMITTALS


B. Submittals shall be prepared in a line-by-line format corresponding to these Specifications and shall indicate compliance with each requirement specified herein and indicated in the Drawings.1. In addition to any other transmittal or cover sheet used, fill out and attach to each

individual submittal a copy of the Cover Sheet for Submittals to Newcomb & Boyd included at the end of this Section.

2. Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions.3. Indicate deviations, if any, including any from the manufacturer's installation

instructions.4. Reproductions or electronic versions of design drawings shall not be used in the

preparation of shop drawings.5. Resubmittals that are required to address review comments shall include a cover



7. Submittals in 3-ring binders shall include an index of contents and divider tabs.


260010-5

C. Electrical submittals shall include the following:1. Dry-type transformers.2. Electrical equipment room drawings, with dimensions and elevations, for each

riser closet and major electric and telephone/data room showing equipment, risers, and code required clearances, minimum 1/4" = 1'-0" scale. Drawings shall be submitted prior to or concurrent with distribution equipment submittals.

3. Individual circuit breakers.4. Luminaires, including:

a. Data including specified options, photometrics, mounting or suspension devices, and associated details.

b. Ballast data including starting method, input voltage, input watts, and ballast factor.

c. Lamp data including type, nominal wattage, lumen output, CRI, and color temperature.

5. Overcurrent protective devices.6. Panelboards.


A. Motor quantities, sizes and equipment wattage ratings specified in other divisions or indicated on the Drawings are the minimum requirements. Motor quantities, sizes and equipment wattage ratings less than those specified in other divisions or indicated on the Drawings are not acceptable. Larger motor sizes and equipment wattage ratings may be provided if necessary to meet the prescriptive requirements specified in those divisions. Where multiple motors or motor sizes or equipment wattage ratings larger than specified in those divisions or indicated on the Drawings are furnished, provide and coordinate the corresponding increased number or capacity of feeders and other electrical equipment serving them, at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Equipment and materials, except as otherwise specified herein, shall be new and shall be of the customary standard and quality furnished by the designated manufacturer for that catalogue number.

C. Materials and equipment shall be UL listed, and shall bear the UL listing mark on products for which standards have been established and for which listing is regularly furnished by UL.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Apparatus shall be by one manufacturer, except where specified herein otherwise.

B. Steel vibration bases for transformers shall be of welded construction with cross members to form an integral support platform. Steel members shall be designed to


260010-6

match supported equipment. Perimeter members shall have a minimum depth equal to 10% of the longest dimension of the base, not to exceed 14".

C. Isolators shall conform to the following:1. Type NH - Double-deflection neoprene or natural rubber hanger type, with

neoprene or natural rubber grommet between hanger rod and housing. Neoprene or natural rubber element shall have neoprene- or natural rubber-coated metal surfaces.a. Manufacturer: Amber-Booth BRD or HRD, Kinetics Noise Control RH,

Mason HD, Vibration Eliminator C, Vibration Mountings & Controls RH or RHD, or Vibro-Acoustics NH.

2. Type NS - Sandwich pad type, with minimum 0.25" thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad bonded to each side of 16 gauge plate. Isolator pads shall be selected for less than 80% maximum rated load. a. Manufacturer: Amber-Booth SP-NR, Kinetics Noise Control NG, Mason

WSW, Vibration Eliminator P, Vibration Mountings & Controls Shear-Flex Flex-Plate, or Vibro-Acoustics NSN.

2.02 CONCRETE

A. Normal weight concrete (145 pcf) using Type I Portland Cement, 1" maximum size coarse aggregate to provide a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psig.

2.03 GROUT

A. Nonshrink type, conforming to ASTM C1107/C1107M-2011 when tested at fluid consistency. Grout shall exhibit zero bleeding at every age when mixed to fluid consistency. Minimum 28 day compressive strength, when mixed to fluid consistency, shall be 7000 psig.

B. Manufacturer: Cormix, or Master Builders.


A. Access panels shall be flush type with concealed hinges. Frame shall be 16 gaugesteel or extruded aluminum, and panel shall be 14 gauge steel. Provide flush screwdriver operated cam latches. Panels shall be finished for painting.

B. Minimum size of panels shall be 12" x 12" for handholes, 18" x 18" elsewhere.

C. Fire rated access panels shall be UL listed, and shall have 16 gauge steel frames, 20 gauge hollow steel door with fire resistive insulation, finished for painting, automatic closure springs, and key operated cylinder locks.

D. Panels in inaccessible acoustical tile ceilings shall be designed to accept tiles.


260010-7

E. Manufacturer: Bar-Co, Cesco, J.L. Industries, Karp, Larsen's, Milcor, or Nystrom.

2.05 SLEEVES

A. Wall sleeves shall be galvanized rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.

B. For floor slabs above grade, plastic core form block-outs shall be used.


A. Firestops:1. Firestops shall consist of an asbestos-free fill material, forming/backing/damming

materials, and accessories needed to complete a UL classified through-penetration firestopping system. Fill material shall not slump or sag and shall be the required thickness in the fully cured state.

2. Firestops shall be designed to seal through-penetrations against flame, heat, smoke, and water in compliance with ASTM E84-2012, ASTM E119-2011, ASTM E814-2011a, and UL 723-2008.

3. Firestops shall be specifically designed and rated for the individual application, including movement, materials, moisture, penetrating item material, and fire and smoke ratings of the penetrated construction.

4. Manufacturer: 3M, GE, Flammadur, Hilti, Nelson, Rectorseal, or Thomas & Betts.


A. Tags: preprinted or partially preprinted accident prevention and operational tags, on plasticized card stock with matte finish for writing, approximately 3.25" x 5.625", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and appropriate wording.

B. Signs: 14" x 10" size, 0.04" thick aluminum base with baked enamel finish for indoor or outdoor use.

C. Nameplates and Labels: 1. White core plastic laminate with engraved lettering.2. Nameplate background color shall be black for normal power equipment and red

for emergency power equipment.3. Nameplates for individual devices shall have 0.25" high letters.4. Nameplates for panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, circuit and

motor disconnects, dry-type transformers, and equipment shall have 0.5" high letters.

5. Labels shall have minimum 0.25" high letters.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Diagram framing system: 0.125" thick acrylic with satin finish aluminum frames.


260010-8

2.09 PAINTING

A. Paint for high temperature equipment shall be high temperature-resistant, designed for the temperatures at which the equipment will operate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DURING CONSTRUCTION


B. Store equipment and material under cover, and off the ground or floors exposed to rain.


D. Provide dust and debris protection for motors, fixtures, and equipment operated during construction.

3.02 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. General:1. The existing installation shall remain as is except as otherwise indicated on the

Drawings or specified herein. Perform work to tie in the new work with the existing work and to adapt the existing work to the changes in the building and systems.

2. Remove equipment, apparatus, and exposed wiring and raceways rendered useless due to changes.

3. Where existing ceilings are removed, remove luminaires, exit signs, and other electrical power and signal apparatus mounted to the ceiling or ceiling supports, including associated raceways and wiring.

4. Existing fixtures, equipment and apparatus which are removed and not reused in the new work shall be turned over to the Owner.

5. Material and equipment which has been removed and not accepted by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.

6. Existing electrical equipment, including lamps and ballasts, removed and not reused shall be handled and disposed of in accordance with applicable state and federal regulations.

7. Material and equipment which has been removed shall not be used in the new work, except as specified herein.


260010-9

8. Where existing raceways and equipment are indicated on the Drawings, size and location shall be verified prior to bidding.

9. Should the installation of new ductwork, piping or other equipment conflict with existing luminaires or electrical outlets, shift the fixtures or outlets and make changes in the electrical installation to remedy the conflicts, as approved by the Architect and at no extra cost.

10. Provide circuit continuity for existing wiring devices and equipment outside the renovation area served from or through the renovation area.

11. Verify the load on modified or reused existing circuits to ensure that the ratings of the overcurrent protection devices are not exceeded. A true RMS ammeter shall be used. Notify the Architect of any overload conditions in writing within 5 working days of the load verifications.

B. Wiring and Raceways:1. Remove concealed wiring and raceways which are exposed by the removal of

walls, partitions, and ceilings. Provide new concealed wiring and raceways to serve existing loads presently served by the removed wiring and raceways.

2. Sleeves left open by removal of conduit or raceways shall be cut flush with the finished slab, and filled with grout flush with both sides of slab.

3. Concealed raceways in masonry walls rendered useless by revisions shall be cut flush with wall surface and sealed with grout.

C. Luminaires:1. Exercise care in removing luminaires which are to be reused so they are not

damaged, and protect fixtures which are to remain in place while work is in progress.

2. Maintain existing exterior lighting on the site in operation during construction. Provide temporary power connections to ensure continued operation.

D. Mechanical Equipment:1. Where existing mechanical equipment is removed, remove electric wiring,

raceways, switches and starters associated with the equipment.2. Where existing mechanical equipment is modified or relocated, modify the

electrical connections to the equipment to adapt it to its new function or location.3. Reconnect existing motors with multivoltage ratings for service at the designated

voltage. Replace existing starter thermal overload devices with new devices recommended by the manufacturer for new voltage and current.


A. Cut and repair walls, floors and ceilings for the installation of the electrical work.

B. Exterior building walls below grade shall not be pierced by hanger bolts.

C. Except where specific instructions are included herein, install and connect equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and recommendations.


260010-10

D. Refer to manufacturer's or equipment supplier's shop drawings for exact type, number, location, dimensions and size of connections to equipment, including but not limited to:1. Fire protection equipment.2. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment, including power supplies to

automatic temperature control systems.3. Laboratory equipment.4. Laboratory casework and fume hoods.5. Plumbing equipment.

E. Provide final connections to electrically powered equipment provided under this and other Divisions of these specifications and by the Owner.

F. In unfinished areas designated for future build out, install conduit and equipment tight against the structure to maximize the future ceiling height.


A. General:1. Select and locate vibration isolation equipment to give uniform loading and

deflection, according to weight distribution of equipment.2. Vibration isolators shall be installed and connected, as specified herein, or as

indicated on the Drawings, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instruction and certified submittal data.

3. There shall be no direct contact of isolated conduit or equipment with shaft walls, floor slabs, partitions, piping, ductwork, structural elements, or any other nonisolated items.

4. Prior to startup, clean out all foreign matter between base, isolator, equipment, and mounting surfaces. Verify that there are no rigid connections between equipment and building structure that degrade the vibration isolation systems specified herein.

5. Vibration isolators shall not cause any change in position of equipment or conduit resulting in stresses or misalignment.

B. Equipment Isolation:1. Isolated equipment mounting systems shall permit equipment motion in all

directions.2. Floor-mounted transformers shall be mounted on Type NS isolators with a

minimum static deflection of 0.1". 3. Suspended transformers shall be supported with Type NH isolators with a

minimum static deflection of 0.1".


260010-11

3.05 FOUNDATIONS

A. Provide concrete foundations for floor-mounted or grade-mounted transformers and other similar equipment.1. Interior foundations: shall accommodate seismic anchors, and shall be a

minimum of 4" high. 2. Exterior foundations: minimum 8" thick pad, minimum 4" above surrounding

grade with the exception of engine-generator sets which shall be a minimum of 6"above surrounding grade.

B. Foundations shall be continuous and shall have beveled edges and smooth float finish. Foundations shall be reinforced with No. 3 bars a maximum of 12" on center each way, and held in place with dowel rods at each corner anchored in the slab. Dowel rods shall not penetrate the slab waterproofing.

C. Roughen and clean exposed slabs before pouring foundations. Apply bonding agent to surfaces in contact.

D. Foundations shall extend beyond the equipment footprint in each direction, including appurtenances, vibration isolators, and motors as follows: exterior - 6"; interior - 1".

E. Exterior foundations shall be supported on natural ground with organic material under pad removed. The subgrade shall be compacted to 90% modified proctor maximum dry density, ASTM D1557-2009, to a depth of 12". If the compaction density cannot be achieved with the existing soil, the existing subgrade shall be removed to a depth of 12" and replaced with clean backfill and compacted as specified above. A 4" thick granular subbase of sandy gravel or crushed stone shall be compacted with vibratory compactors. Dampen the subbase prior to concrete placement. At the time of placement, the subbase shall not contain standing water.

F. Fill voids between baseplates and foundations, and level equipment, with grout.


A. Where electrical work is concealed by walls or ceilings, or is inaccessible, provide an access panel to provide access for service and maintenance.

B. Electrical work located above ceilings is considered accessible if the ceiling is the accessible type and is arranged for access to the equipment.

C. Fire rated access panels shall be provided in fire barriers, with ratings to match the construction fire rating.

D. Access doors providing access to equipment access doors shall allow for service and maintenance of the intended equipment.


260010-12

E. Installation of access panels is specified under another Division.


A. General:1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions to achieve


B. Firestops:1. Close and firestop abandoned penetrations and penetrations through fire- and

smoke-rated construction. Materials used to seal these penetrations shall continue the construction’s fire and smoke resistance ratings uninterrupted and shall maintain an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and hot gases.

2. Install after installation of raceways. and busways. , and cable trays.

3.08 PAINTING


B. Equipment factory finishes damaged or deteriorated during construction shall be repaired to match original finish.


D. Exterior ferrous equipment and supports shall be painted 2 coats of rust preventive paint, color selected by the Architect.

3.09 COORDINATION

A. Provide offsets, transitions, and fittings to coordinate the work of each trade with that of other trades, including HVAC, plumbing, fire suppression, structural, and architectural.

3.10 PHASING

A. Install work in phases as specified by the Architectural Documents.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Luminaires: 1. Remove dirt, dust, and grease, and polish reflector and trim surfaces, and clean

lamps.


260010-13

B. Equipment and Equipment Rooms:1. Remove dust, dirt, rust, stains, and temporary covers. 2. Foreign matter shall be blown, vacuumed, flushed, or cleaned out of and from

equipment, luminaires, raceways, devices, switches, controls and panelboards.3. Clean and polish identification plates.4. In equipment rooms, clean equipment, conduit, and room surfaces from dust and

dirt and maintain in a clean condition from date of substantial completion until final completion of work and corrective work.

5. Remove excess material from the project site.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. General:1. Identification shall consist of upper case letters.2. Where identification is applied to surfaces which require a finish, identification

shall be installed after surface has been finished.

D. Danger signs: install in areas constituting a danger for persons in or about the Project.

E. Nameplates and Labels:1. Install engraved nameplates at or on each circuit breaker, circuit and motor

disconnect, motor controller, panelboard, switchboard, dry-type transformers, special apparatus, and communications and signal system, unless equipment is specified herein with its own self-explanatory identification. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the construction documents and submittals as close as practicable, and shall indicate equipment controlled as well as upstream distribution device and branch circuit or feeder designation.

2. Nameplates shall not cause interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Attach nameplates with rustproof screws.

F. Panelboards: install type written directories describing the load served by each circuit. Identify spaces and spares in pencil. Install on back of panelboard doors.

G. Provide a sign at the normal service switchgear switchboard panelboard indicating the type and locations of the on-site emergency power source.

3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION PACKAGE



260010-14

B. Operation and maintenance documentation, in hardback 3-ring loose-leaf binders except full size drawings and CDs, shall cover the electrical systems. Documentation shall include the following: operations and maintenance documentation directory; emergency information; operating manual; maintenance manual; test reports; and construction documents.

C. The operation and maintenance documentation package shall be submitted as one comprehensive package to the Owner 3 months before systems start-up, and shall be updated, revised and completed at completion of construction.

D. Documentation shall be typewritten and shall contain, at a minimum, the following information.1. Introduction:

a. Project name, contractors' and subcontractors' names, addresses, and telephone and facsimile numbers. Indicate the portion of work for which each subcontractor was responsible.

b. Index.2. Operations and Maintenance Documentation Directory:

a. Explanation of the identification system used, including lists of systems, equipment and component identifiers and names.

3. Emergency Information:a. Information for technical and nontechnical personnel about actions

recommended during emergency situations to protect life and property and to minimize disruption to the building occupants. Emergencies shall, at a minimum, include:1) Power failure.2) Emergency power system failure.

4. Operating Manual:a. General Information:

1) Building function.2) Building description.3) Operating standards and logs.

b. Technical Information:1) System description.2) Operating routines and procedures.3) Routine operational testing program and procedures.4) Special procedures.5) Basic troubleshooting.

5. Maintenance Manual:a. Descriptions (specifications) of the equipment and components.b. Description of function, as applicable: the function of the equipment,


c. Recommended maintenance procedures and their recommended frequency for this Project.

d. Name, address and contact of at least one qualified service company.


260010-15

e. Recommended list of spare parts, part numbers, and the place(s) from which they can be obtained.

f. Original purchase order number; date of purchase; name, address, and the telephone number of the vendor; and warranty information.

g. Installation information.h. Any other information needed for the preparation of documents supporting

the management of operation and maintenance programs.6. Test Reports and Certifications:

a. Copies of tests and certifications performed during manufacture and construction including, but not limited to, the following:1) Description of cutover procedure.2) Engine-generator set factory test report.3) Engine-generator set oil sample analysis.4) Receipt of O&M documentation package.5) Receipt for instruction of operating personnel.6) Emergency power supply system on-site test report.

7. Construction Documents:a. Record drawings.b. Approved submittals, including revised shop drawings indicating field and

as-installed conditions.c. Equipment identification charts and schedules.d. Warranty certificates.e. Inspection certificates.f. Performance verification report.

E. Submit a receipt signed by the Owner acknowledging receipt of the operation and maintenance documentation package.


A. A record of field and as-installed conditions shall be maintained at the site, shall be kept current throughout the Project, and shall be used in the preparation of the final record drawings. Field and as-installed conditions shall be recorded on design drawings and shall be marked to include addenda, change orders, field changes and selections made during construction.

B. Upon completion of the Project, submit marked-up design drawings indicating field and as-installed conditions, and shop drawings incorporating changes made during construction for raceways and equipment. Submit the following:1. 3 sets of bound prints.2. Full size PDFs on CDs.

3.15 MAINTENANCE

A. Equipment operated prior to the date of substantial completion shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.


260010-16


A. Conduct formal instruction sessions for operating personnel. Conduct two similar sessions. The first session shall be conducted at the time of start-up and check-out, and the second session shall be approximately 2 months later. Sessions shall be a minimum of 1 day duration for basic electrical systems, and as specified herein for other systems and equipment. Sessions shall be conducted at the site.

B. Prepare and submit a syllabus describing an overview of the program, describing how the program will be conducted, when and where meetings are to be held, names and company affiliations of lecturers, description of contents and outline for each lecture, and recommended reference material and outside reading. Obtain direction from the Owner on which operating personnel shall be instructed in each system. Proposed training schedules, materials, and lesson plans shall be submitted to the Owner for review.

C. Sessions shall include:1. General familiarization and operating procedures for the entire electrical

installation.2. Routine maintenance procedures for equipment.

D. Training shall occur after testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Architect.


COVER SHEET FORSUBMITTALS TO NEWCOMB & BOYD

Project: ________________________________________________ Date:

Item: Submittal Number:

Manufacturer: Model:

Specification Paragraph and/or Drawing Number:

Capacity:

Electrical Characteristics (including identification of all separate connections or services required):

Accessories:

Options:

Deviations (if any; if none, state so):

General Contractor Approval:


260090-1

SECTION 260090 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION


A. General provisions and other electrical systems are specified in other Sections of Division 26.

B. Performance verification is an ongoing process and shall be performed throughout

construction. Performance verification verifies that systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Construction Documents.

C. This Section covers electrical systems performance verification, as required to

demonstrate that the equipment and systems of Division 26 are ready for safe and satisfactory operation, as defined by the Construction Documents. Performance verification shall include, but shall not be limited to, identification of equipment, cleaning, lubrication, start-up, check-out, testing and adjusting of systems, preparation of equipment and systems documentation and of maintenance and operation manuals, Owner training, and preparation of record drawings.

D. Performance verification shall conclude with the completion of required deferred testing,

training, and system documentation as specified herein and required to demonstrate the proper operation of the electrical equipment and systems provided by this Division.

E. Verify, at a minimum, the performance of the following systems and equipment:

1. Section 261200, Building Wire and Cable, 600 Volt. 2. Section 261700, Circuit and Motor Disconnects. 3. Section 264600, Dry-Type Transformers. 4. Section 264710, Panelboards:

a. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. b. Distribution panelboards.

5. Section 264750, Overcurrent Protective Devices. 6. Section 264760, Individual Circuit Breakers. 7. Section 265910, Lighting Control Devices.


A. Provide an Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor with years experience in electrical contracting. The Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor shall become familiar with the Owner's project requirements and the requirements of the performance verification process as defined in this Section. The Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate and execute the required performance verification activities.


260090-2

B. The Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor shall review submittal data for conformance with the requirements of the Project, shall monitor compliance with the requirements specified herein for storage and protection of equipment during construction, shall authorize the initial starting of equipment and systems in a manner to avoid damage to equipment, shall oversee start-up, testing, and shall document that the scheduled and specified performance requirements of each system have been accomplished.

C. Conform to the following:

1. ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005, Addenda a-d-2010, The Commissioning Process. 2. ASHRAE Guideline 4-2008, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance

Documentation of Building Systems. 3. NECA 90-2009.


A. The Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor shall be responsible for scheduling, supervising, and coordinating and executing the start-up, testing, and performance verification activities as specified herein. Include and itemize the cost of performance verification in the contract price, and in each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, performance verification efforts and documentation, operations and maintenance data, and training as specified herein.

B. Electrical performance verification shall take place in three phases. Performance

verification requirements for each phase are as follows: 1. Construction Phase:

a. Attend a performance verification scoping meeting and additional such meetings, initially scheduled monthly until prefunctional testing of equipment and systems begins, and weekly thereafter during the construction phase to facilitate the performance verification process. The Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate meeting attendance.

b. Report in writing to the Owner, at least as often as performance verification meetings are scheduled, concerning the status of his activities as they affect the performance verification process, the status of each discrepancy identified during the prefunctional and functional testing process, explanations of any disagreements with the identified deficiencies, and his proposed resolution and schedule for correction of the deficiency.

c. Provide documentation of installed systems and equipment, and develop functional testing procedures. This documentation shall include detailed manufacturer installation, start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures; full details of any Owner-contracted tests; full factory testing reports, if any; and full warranty information, including responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force. In addition, the installation, start-up and check-out materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field check-out sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Owner.


260090-3

d. Develop and submit to the Owner for review and comment, prior to equipment or system start-up, a complete start-up and initial check-out plan using manufacturer's start-up procedures and prefunctional checklists for the performance of the equipment to be verified.


f. Prepare the specific functional test procedures as specified herein and review the proposed functional test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety, and equipment protection, and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests. Obtain Owner approval for proposed functional test procedures.

g. Prepare a preliminary schedule for performance verification activities, including equipment start-up, and testing, adjusting and balancing start and completion, and update the schedule during the construction period, as appropriate. Notify the Owner immediately when the performance verification activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction.

h. Provide start-up and prefunctional testing for equipment and execute the electrical-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for the verification of the performance of all the equipment during the start-up and initial check-out process.

i. Perform and document start-up and system operational check-out procedures, providing a copy to the Owner.

j. Correct noncompliance items before beginning functional testing. Discrepancies and problems shall be remedied before functional testing.

2. Acceptance Phase: a. Place equipment and systems into operation and continue their operation

during each working day of the testing and performance verification activities, as required.

b. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting and prefunctional testing of equipment and to execute the functional tests for each individual piece of equipment and system. Technicians shall be available and present during the agreed upon scheduled tests and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem solving.

c. Perform functional testing for specified equipment and interpret the test data, as necessary.

d. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as identified and interpreted by the Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor and interpreted by the Architect and retest the equipment, as required to demonstrate proper operation and performance.

e. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals as specified, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.

f. Maintain marked-up record drawings and produce final record drawings of project drawings and contractor-generated coordination drawings.

g. Provide specified training of the Owner's operating personnel.


260090-4

h. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty.

3. Warranty Period: a. Execute deferred functional testing. b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to operations and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Standard testing equipment required to perform start-up, initial check-out, prefunctional, and required functional performance testing shall be provided by the contractor for the equipment or system being tested.

B. Test equipment shall be of the quality and accuracy required to test and/or measure

system performance with the tolerances specified and shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, or as specified herein. Equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates available on request.

1. Accuracy of sensors shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUBMITTALS




B. Procedures for performance verification shall include:

1. Start-up and initial check-out plan: develop the detailed start-up and prefunctional testing plans for equipment and systems that are to be performance verified, as specified herein. Review the proposed procedures and prefunctional testing


260090-5

documentation to ensure that there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed.

2. The start-up and initial check-out plan shall consist, as a minimum, of the following: a. The manufacturer's standard written start-up and check-out procedures copied

from the installation manuals and manufacturer's normally used field check-out sheets. The plan shall include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.

b. First-run checklist for equipment, including: 1) Equipment properly set. 2) Adjustment of vibration isolators. 3) Equipment properly connected. 4) Completion of initial lubrication procedures. 5) Wiring properly connected. 6) Electrical overload relays appropriate for load. 7) Electrical accessories properly installed and adjusted. 8) Controls, safeties, and time switches properly set. 9) Verification of direction of motor rotation after final electrical

connections by jogging motor. 10) Measurement of amperage draw of electric motors and comparison with

nameplate rating and with overload heater ratings. 11) Monitoring of temperature build-up in motors and bearings.

c. Contractor-developed prefunctional checklists. 3. Prior to energizing, test cables and wiring for continuity, shorts, and circuitry, and

correct short circuits, opens, and errors in circuiting. Field test circuits phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, phase-to-ground, and neutral-to-ground.

4. Overcurrent Protective Devices: a. Set field-adjustable devices for trip settings providing maximum coordination,

subsequent to installation of units. b. Prior to energizing overcurrent protective devices, test devices for continuity

of circuitry and for short circuits. Correct malfunctioning units. 5. Start-up equipment and check-out operation in accordance with manufacturer's

published procedures and with the procedures specified herein. a. Submit report on equipment start-up and check-out with data from recorded

findings. 6. In addition to other requirements specified herein, manufacturer shall provide

services to start-up, check-out, and test the following equipment and systems: a. Emergency power supply systems.

7. Time switches: set for operation as directed by the Owner. 8. Panelboards:

a. Prior to energizing, measure the resistance between the neutral bus and ground bus for lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. The measurement shall be made with the feeder neutral disconnected. If the resistance is less than 1 megohm test each branch circuit for continuity, short circuits, or


260090-6

circuiting errors. Correct branch circuit problems. A final measurement of the panelboard shall be made and recorded after problems have been corrected.

C. Identify which trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line item

tasks and note that trade on the form. Each form may have more than one trade responsible for its execution.

D. The Owner reserves the right to witness the above described tests, checks and inspections.

Notify the Owner at least 10 days prior to the date scheduled for the tests.

E. Four weeks prior to start-up, schedule equipment and systems start-up and check-out and notify the Owner in writing. The execution of the prefunctional checklists, start-up and check-out shall be directed and performed by the Contractor, in accordance with manufacturer's published procedures. The Owner shall be present for the start-up, check-out, and prefunctional testing of the first unit of each type of equipment, and any other tests he designates.

F. Sensor calibration: calibration of sensors associated with a given piece of equipment or

system shall be included as part of the prefunctional testing and listed on the appropriate test checklists and reports for that system.

G. Completed start-up, check-out, and prefunctional test forms shall be completed and

submitted to the Owner for review. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the Owner within 2 days of test completion. The Owner shall review the Contractor's start-up and prefunctional testing reports and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. The Contractor shall correct items that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the t Owner as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, the Owner shall recommend approval of the start-up and prefunctional testing of each system and schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.

H. Complete start-up and prefunctional testing for a system before functional testing of that

system may proceed. 3.03 RETESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND/OR SYSTEMS


B. Prior to retesting, submit required data indicating that the deficient items have been

completed and/or corrected to the Owner for approval and rescheduling of the functional test. If during the retesting it becomes apparent that the deficient items have not been


260090-7

completed and/or corrected as indicated in the data provided by the Contractor, the retesting shall be stopped. Costs for the design team to further supervise the retesting of a functional test shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.


A. Schedule and coordinate, with the approval of the Owner, any required tests delayed until building construction is completed, required building occupancy or loading, or other conditions are suitable for the demonstration of equipment or system's performance, as specified herein. Deferred testing shall be executed, documented, and deficiencies corrected as specified herein for functional testing. Adjustments or corrections to the operation and maintenance manuals and as-built documents required by the results of the testing shall be made before the seasonal testing process is considered complete.


A. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the functional test procedure forms or on an attached sheet. Procedure forms and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the Owner within 2 days of test completion. The Owner shall review the Contractor's start-up and prefunctional test reports and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. The Contractor shall work with the Owner to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. Correct items that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the Owner as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, recommend approval of the start-up and prefunctional testing of each system and schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.

B. As functional performance testing progresses and deficiencies are identified, work with

the Owner to resolve the issues. 3.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION PACKAGE

A. The Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems covered in Division 26 and deliver this documentation for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals prior to the training of the Owner's personnel.


A. The Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor shall schedule, coordinate, assemble and deliver the documentation of the training required by this Division.


260090-8

3.08 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Functional test requirements for the demonstration of proper system and equipment operation shall be defined by the Electrical Performance Verification Supervisor. Execution of these tests and demonstrations of the required performance shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing

may proceed prior to the completion of systems or subsystems at the discretion of the Architect and Owner. Beginning system testing before full completion of construction shall not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including prefunctional checklists.

C. Functional testing shall be completed and approved by the Architect Owner

Commissioning Authority before the Project will be considered substantially complete.



261100-1

SECTION 261100RACEWAYS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers raceways for electrical, telephone, data, and fire alarm, and communications, and security wiring.


A. Conform to the following: 1. NECA 101-2006.2. NECA 111-2003.3. NFPA 70-2011.

B. Conduit sizes specified herein or indicated on the Drawings refer to the standard trade sizes, are for identification purposes only, and are not actual dimensions.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING

A. Galvanized steel.

B. Connectors and couplings shall be malleable iron or steel, galvanized or cadmium-plated, compression or set screw type.

C. Connectors shall have insulated throats.

D. Manufacturer: Allied Tube & Conduit, Republic Conduit, Western Tube & Conduit, or Wheatland Tube.

2.02 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT


B. Connectors shall be of the twist-in, insertion or totally enclosed clamp type, galvanized malleable iron or steel, with insulated throats.

C. Manufacturer: Alflex, American Flexible Conduit, Cerro Wire & Cable, or Steelflex Electro.


261100-2

2.03 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Extra flexible type, neoprene-jacketed.

B. Connectors shall be watertight, of the twist-in, insertion type, galvanized malleable iron or steel, with insulated throats.

C. Manufacturer: Alflex, American Flexible Conduit, International Metal Hose, or Universal Metal Hose.

2.04 RIGID METAL CONDUIT


B. Connectors and couplings shall be threaded galvanized malleable iron or steel.

C. Locknuts shall be of the type with sharp edges that bite into enclosure where connected.

D. Plastic insulating bushings shall be high temperature type.

E. Sealing bushings shall have galvanized malleable iron locking ring with molded neoprene sealing ring with predrilled holes to accommodate each individual conductor, stainless steel screws and washers, PVC-coated pressure discs, and factory-installed lay-in grounding conductor lugs.

F. Hub fittings shall be 2-piece, insulated throat, liquidtight type of steel or malleable construction.

G. Manufacturer: Allied Tube & Conduit, Republic Conduit, Western Tube & Conduit, or Wheatland Tube.

2.05 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride, nonburning, high impact, schedule 40.

B. Couplings and connectors shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride, high impact, schedule 40.

C. Cement for connections of conduit shall be approved by the conduit manufacturer.

D. Manufacturer: Cantex, Carlon, Plastiline, or Queen City Plastics.


261100-3

2.06 ALUMINUM SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS

A. Two-piece, surface metal type factory preassembled for power and or communications service, consisting of base and cover sections. Base sections shall be nominally 10'long, 0.078" thick, and shall have 0.281" diameter knockouts 1.25" from each end and 18" on center along length for mounting. Cover sections shall be nominally 5' long, 0.078" thick.

B. Bases, covers, and end plates shall be constructed of 6063-T5 aluminum alloy, Architectural Class II clear anodized.1. Dimensions of double-channel assembled raceways shall be 2.5" deep x 6" high.

C. Raceway systems shall be complete with fittings, elbows, couplings, wire retainers clips, blank ends, and transition pieces to other surface metal raceways and to 0.5" to 1.5" conduit.

D. Raceways shall be capable of being internally divided into 2 separate equal compartments for power and communications and fiber wiring.

E. Raceway systems shall also be complete with device brackets for horizontal or vertical single- or double-gang devices, and combination receptacle and telephone outlet covers.

F. Manufacturer: Hubbell ALU4800, Mono-System SnapWay SWA4800, Post Glover Versa-Duct 255 series, or Wiremold Isoduct ALA4800.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Pull lines: minimum tensile strength of 200 lb. Pull lines in nonmetallic conduit shall be galvanized steel wire.

B. Expansion fittings: concretetight with ground continuity.1. Manufacturer: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, or O-Z/Gedney.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install conductors in raceways, unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Raceways shall be concealed above ceilings, in walls, floors, or underground. Raceways shall be exposed where indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein.

C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein, minimum raceway size shall be 0.5". Minimum raceway size for telephone, communications, and data


261100-4

cable shall be 0.75". 0.375" flexible connections to recessed luminaires are acceptable.

D. Install the raceway systems, where indicated on the Drawings, complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. The raceway installation shall follow the layout indicated on the Drawings. Changes in the location, and offsets to accommodate building conditions, and coordination with the work of other trades, including equipment, piping and ductwork, shall be made prior to initial installation, without additional cost to the Owner. Offsets in conduit are not indicated on the Drawings and shall be furnished.

F. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, route raceways tight to the underside of the structure and above ceilings. Offset raceways below obstructions.

G. Where raceways must pass through structural members, obtain approval from the Architect regarding location and size of openings prior to drilling.

H. Raceways that pass through expansion joints shall be provided with expansion fittings.

I. Raceway penetrations through the roof shall be made with prefabricated fittings. Coordinate with the roof system manufacturer.

J. Raceways shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the building walls.

K. Lateral raceways in masonry shall not exceed 0.75".

L. Raceways shall be secured in place and protected to prevent damage to the work during construction. Refer to Section 261900, Supporting Devices for support requirements and methods.

M. Open ends of raceways shall be taped or capped after installation to prevent entry of dirt and debris during construction prior to pulling wire.

N. Installation of raceways shall be complete and shall be blown-out and swabbed clear of water and trash prior to pulling wire.

O. Running threads shall not be used for threaded connections on rigid metal conduit. Conduit threading shall be limited such that the joint is watertight and that not more than 1-1.5 threads are exposed after conduit is tightened in fittings or threaded box openings.

P. Exposed threads or field-cut edges of conduits shall be immediately coated with a galvanizing compound after installation.


261100-5

Q. Make connections to motors, not near walls or columns, with a vertical rigid metal conduit, minimum size 0.75" attached to floor and ceiling. Wiring shall be carried into and out of this conduit by means of condulets and flexible conduit.

R. Install junction or pull boxes to avoid excessive runs or bends. Several such boxes are indicated on the Drawings. The locations shown may be varied and additional boxes installed. Refer to Section 261300, Boxes for specific box types and requirements.

S. Provide pull lines in empty raceways. At each end, leave 12" of slack coiled in the box, or at the end of the conduit where boxes are not installed, and secure at each end.

T. The exact routing of new exposed raceways shall be approved by the Owner before installation.

3.02 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING

A. Electrical metallic tubing shall be installed for:1. Raceways in concrete and masonry construction above grade, in hollow spaces in

columns and walls, and above ceilings.2. Exposed raceways in unfinished areas.

B. Electrical metallic tubing stubbed-up from floor slabs or down from ceiling plenums and not connected to an enclosure shall terminate with an insulated throat connector.

3.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Flexible metal conduit shall be installed for:1. Connections to recessed luminaires, maximum 72" length.2. Connections to electrical equipment subject to movement or vibration.

3.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be installed for:1. Connections to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and to dry-type

transformers length of 18" or 12 times the nominal diameter of the conduit, whichever is larger.

2. Connections to motors.3. Connections to electrical equipment subject to movement or vibration where

exposed to rain, spray, or a corrosive atmosphere.4. Connections to equipment subject to oil or grease.5. Connections to fire pumps and auxiliary equipment.

3.05 RIGID METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid metal conduit shall be installed for:1. Exposed raceways outside of the building.


261100-6

2. Exposed raceways serving fire pumps, jockey pumps, and fire pump control equipment.

3. Conduits containing emergency power supply system signal and control wiring.4. Applications not otherwise specified herein.

B. Conduit shall be secured to metal enclosures using hub fittings.

C. Insulated bushings or fittings shall be installed at connections to cabinets and boxes. Terminate stub-ups not attached to enclosures with an insulated throat grounding bushing.

D. Commercial pipe joint compound shall be applied to the male threads on threaded joints and fittings.

E. Connections shall be wrenchtight, and where subject to ground water, rain or spray shall be watertight.

F. Field treat conduit and fittings buried in earth or gravel with one of the following:

1. 2 coats of asphaltum.

2. Spiral wrapped, half-lapped, 20 mil plastic tape.

3.06 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT:

A. Rigid nonmetallic conduit may be used only where indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise specified herein.

B. Do not use in motor branch circuit wiring for exposed work in mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Install with conduit supports spaced not further apart than:

Size Spacing

1" and less nominal conduit 2'-6"1.25" to 2" nominal conduit 5' 2.5" and larger nominal conduit 6'

D. Do not install in air ducts or return air plenums.

E. An insulated copper grounding conductor shall be installed in each plastic conduit unless prohibited by local codes or utility company. Grounding conductors shall be bonded to grounded metal enclosures or devices at origin and at each outlet. Refer to Section 264500, Grounding for specific requirements and methods.


261100-7

F. Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall not be stubbed up above the finished floor for attachment to boxes, outlets, or equipment. A transition to rigid metal conduit shall be made a minimum of 18" horizontally from each stub-up.

3.07 RACEWAY SLEEVES AND SEALING

A. Provide sleeves and fire stopping for raceways penetrating floors and partitions as specified in Section 260010, General.

B. Install conduit sealing bushings on conduits that penetrate slabs or walls below grade.

C. Conduits entering refrigerated spaces, and hazardous areas, shall be installed with sealing fittings listed for the specific application to prevent entrance of moisture and explosive substances.

D. Raceways installed between luminaires and outlets exposed to weather and interior conditioned space shall be sealed with nonhardening elastic duct sealant at the lastoutlet in the conditioned space.



261200-1

SECTION 261200BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE, 600 VOLT

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers building wire, cable, and associated connection devices and accessories rated for 600 V.

C. Wiring for communications and alarm systems is covered in other Sections of Division 26.



A. Specified conductor size refers to American Wire Gauge (AWG).

B. Conform to the following:1. NFPA 70-2011.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Conductors #10 AWG or smaller shall have outer covering color-coded to indicate phase, neutral, and ground conductors. Colors shall be as follows:

Conductor 208/120 V Systems 480/277 V Systems

Phase A Black BrownPhase B Red OrangePhase C Blue YellowNeutral White GrayGround Green GreenIsolated ground Green/Yellow Green/Yellow


261200-2

2.02 CONDUCTORS

A. Conductors shall be copper. Sizes indicated on the Drawings or specified herein refer to copper conductor sizes.

B. Conductors shall be a minimum of #12 AWG unless otherwise specified herein. Conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.

C. Insulation shall be type THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2, 600 V, rated at 90°C.

D. Luminaire wiring shall be high temperature fixture or machine tool wire.

E. Lay-in fluorescent luminaires equipped with UL listed 72" flexible metal conduit and connector assemblies shall be prewired with minimum #18 AWG conductors in the flexible assembly.

F. Conductors shall have size, grade of insulation, voltage, and manufacturer perma-nently marked on the outer cover at intervals not exceeding 24".

G. Manufacturer: Aetna, Colonial, Encore, Pirelli, Southwire, or United Copper Industries.

2.03 CONNECTION DEVICES FOR COPPER CONDUCTORS

A. For splices and taps on conductors #10 AWG and smaller, connection devices shall be twist-on or crimp pressure type.

B. Splices, taps and bus bar terminations of conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be made with compression, or crimp type connection devices.

C. Manufacturer: 3M, Ideal, Panduit, or Thomas & Betts.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical tape: high voltage splicing, filler, and vinyl plastic electrical type.1. Manufacturer: 3M, Anixter Brothers, or Plymouth.

B. Connection covers: plastic type.1. Manufacturer: Ideal, Panduit, or Thomas & Betts.

C. Pulling compound: shall not deteriorate conductors or insulation.

D. Identification tape: color-coded, self-adhering, 1" wide type.


261200-3

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install in each raceway a minimum of 3 #12 AWG conductors, including ground conductors, unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings.

B. Branch Circuit Homeruns:1. For 120 V, 20 A circuits 75' or greater provide #10 AWG homerun conductors.2. For 277 V, 20 A circuits 150' or greater provide #10 AWG homerun conductors.

C. Install wiring, cables, and connection devices in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Install conductors in raceways unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

E. Conductors in one raceway shall be installed at one time, using pulling compound.

F. Conductors in panelboards, switchboards, and control cabinets shall be grouped and laced with nylon tie straps.

G. No more than three branch circuit homeruns shall be installed in a conduit.

H. Connect each circuit of a multicircuit home run to a different phase at the panelboard.

I. Single-phase line-to-neutral branch circuits shall be provided a separate dedicated neutral conductor for each branch circuit. Multiwire branch circuits with shared or common neutrals are not acceptable.

J. Where multiple single-phase line-to-neutral branch circuits are spliced within a common box or enclosure each phase and neutral conductor shall be identified with corresponding panel and circuit number at each splice.

K. Support cable risers. See Section 261900, Supporting Devices for specific supporting methods.

L. Termination of more than 1 conductor in a single terminal is not acceptable except where the terminal is approved by the manufacturer for such application.

3.02 COPPER CONNECTION DEVICES

A. Dies for compression tools shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each conductor size involved.

B. Tighten mechanical connectors according to the manufacturer's torquing requirements.


261200-4

C. Connectors shall exert positive pressure to the conductors.

3.03 CONNECTIONS TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Locations of motors, equipment, and apparatus indicated on the Drawings are approximate and connections shall be made to such equipment where actually installed.

3.04 JOINT COVERING

A. Cover electrical connections with successive layers of high voltage filler putty or splicing tape, varnished cambric tape, and vinyl plastic electrical tape to cover rough edges and to provide insulation equal to that of conductor insulation.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Conductors larger than #10 AWG shall be identified at each end with the same color-coding scheme specified herein for smaller conductors.

B. Switch legs shall be color-coded the same as phase conductors.



261300-1

SECTION 261300BOXES

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers outlet boxes, junction and pull boxes, and conduit bodies.


A. Outlet boxes, junction and pull boxes, and conduit bodies shall be UL listed. Equipment installed in hazardous locations or corrosive atmospheres shall be listed for the specific application.

B. Conform to the following:1. NFPA 70-2011.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Boxes shall be the type, size and configuration required for its specific use, location, device or luminaire, and number, size, and arrangement of raceways connecting thereto.

2.02 OUTLET BOXES

A. Construction: code-gauge galvanized steel, unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings.

B. Where installed in hazardous locations, or exposed to corrosive atmosphere, rain or spray, boxes shall be corrosion resistant cast metal with threaded entrances, removable covers, gaskets, and corrosion resistant screws.

C. Recessed boxes in plaster or gypsum board walls or columns shall be 4" or 4.688"square, 2.125" deep with plaster rings.

D. Surface-mounted boxes on walls or columns shall be 4" square, 2.125" deep, with no plaster rings or knock-outs.

E. Switch boxes with only one conduit entrance shall be single gang.


261300-2

F. Boxes for devices recessed in metal door jambs shall be sheet metal partition boxes sized for the application.

G. Recessed boxes in masonry walls shall be square cornered masonry boxes or standard 4" square boxes fitted with square cornered tile covers of proper depth for block. Both type boxes shall be 2.125" minimum depth.

H. Recessed boxes in ceilings shall be 4" octagonal or square, 2.125" depth.

I. Recessed boxes in concrete shall be UL approved for the application.

J. Through-wall type boxes are not acceptable.

K. Recessed wall telephone and data boxes shall be 4" square, 2.125" deep with single-gang device plaster covers and coverplates.

L. Provide specially designed boxes where required for special devices.

M. Boxes containing low voltage and line voltage devices or multiple 277 V switches, supplied from different phases, shall have metal barriers.

N. Boxes for surface-mounted luminaires shall have fixture studs.

O. Manufacturer: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Hubbell, O-Z/Gedney, Raco, or Thomas & Betts.

2.03 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Boxes shall be galvanized sheet metal unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein, of dimensions required for the number and size of connecting raceways and wiring.

B. Boxes shall have removable blank covers. Covers on recessed ceiling boxes shall be round. Covers on recessed wall boxes shall be size and finish as used on electrical outlets. Refer to Section 261430, Wiring Devices.

C. Boxes installed in hazardous locations or corrosive atmospheres, rain or spray, shall be corrosive-resistant cast metal with threaded entrances, removable covers, gaskets and corrosion-resistant hardware.

D. Manufacturer: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, O-Z/Gedney, Raco, or Thomas & Betts.

2.04 CONDUIT BODIES

A. Conduit bodies shall be corrosion resistant cast-metal type, shape and size to suit the location and installation.


261300-3

B. Conduit bodies shall have threaded conduit-entrance ends, removable covers, gaskets and corrosion-resistant hardware.

C. Manufacturer: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Hubbell, or O-Z/Gedney.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install boxes at each luminaire, device, and outlet.

B. Coordinate box installation with wiring or cable and raceways.

C. Coordinate box installation with other trades so boxes will remain accessible.

D. Outlet boxes shall not be installed back-to-back. Maintain minimum 24" separation between outlet boxes on opposite sides of rated walls, and minimum 6" separation in nonrated walls.

E. Install boxes level, plumb, and square to the structure.

F. Anchor boxes in place. Refer to Section 261900, Supporting Devices.

G. Provide knockout closures to cap unused open knockout holes.

H. The approximate locations of outlets are indicated on the Drawings. The exact locations shall be determined at the building. The right is reserved to change the location of any switch, luminaire, or other outlet box in any room before it is permanently installed, without additional cost to the Owner.

3.02 OUTLET BOXES

A. Install outlet boxes at each electrical, alarm, and signal outlet at heights above the finished floor, measured to the centerline of the outlet, as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Outlet boxes for flush-mounted devices that are not provided with plaster rings or tile covers shall be set so that the face of the outlet box is recessed 0.125" into the finished wall.

C. Outlet boxes for flush-mounted devices provided with plaster ring or tile covers shall be set so that the face of the plaster ring/tile cover is recessed 0.125" into the finished wall.

D. Adjust mounting heights of boxes in masonry walls to minimize cutting and patching of masonry.


261300-4

E. Install outlet boxes in one vertical line where indicated adjacent on the Drawings but at different mounting heights.1. Install a raceway from each outlet box to the backboard or cabinet indicated on

the Drawings. Provide a pull line and insulating bushings on both ends of each raceway. Provide cabling and terminations as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

3.03 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Covers on ceiling outlet boxes shall be painted to match the ceiling.

B. Install exposed junction or pull boxes only in unfinished spaces, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.



261430-1

SECTION 261430WIRING DEVICES

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers receptacles, wall switches, poke-through fittings, and coverplates.


A. Conform to the following:1. NFPA 70-2011.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Like products shall be by the same manufacturer.

2.02 WALL SWITCHES

A. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein, switches shall be flush type, totally enclosed with toggles colored to match existing wiring devices.

B. Single-pole wall switches shall be 20 A rated.1. Manufacturer: Cooper 2221, Hubbell HBL1221, Leviton 1221-2, or P&S

PS20ACl.

C. Three-way, single-pole, double-throw wall switches shall be 20 A rated.1. Manufacturer: Cooper 2223, Hubbell HBL1223, Leviton 1223-2, or P&S

PS20AC3.

D. Four-way, double-pole, double-throw wall switches shall be 20 A rated.1. Manufacturer: Cooper 2224, Hubbell HBL1224, Leviton 1224-2, or P&S

PS20AC4.

E. Wall switches with pilot lights shall be 20 A, 120 V with a neon pilot lamp, and red toggle.1. Manufacturer: Cooper 2221PL, Hubbell HBL1221PL, Leviton 1221-PL, or P&S

PS20AC1RPL.


261430-2

F. Wall switches with lighted handles shall be 20 A, 120 V with a neon pilot lamp and ivory toggle.1. Manufacturer: Cooper 2221LTV, Hubbell HBL1221IL, Leviton 1221-LH, or

P&S PS20AC1ISL.

G. Wall switches for projection screen control shall be 3-position, double-pole, double-throw, maintained contact, with positive center off. Switches shall be rated for 20 A at 120 V.1. Manufacturer: Cooper 2226, Hubbell HBL1386, Leviton 1286, or P&S 1222.

2.03 RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex receptacles shall be 125 V, with one-piece solid brass mounting strap with integral ground contacts, colored to match existing receptacles.1. Manufacturer, 15 A: Cooper AH5262, Hubbell HBL5262, Leviton 5262, or P&S

5262A. 2. Manufacturer, 20 A: Cooper AH5362, Hubbell HBL5362, Leviton 5362, or P&S

5362A.

B. Clock outlets shall consist of a simplex receptacle, coverplate and hook.1. Manufacturer: Cooper 93632, Hubbell HBL5235, Leviton 5361-CH, or P&S

S3733-SS.

C. Isolated ground duplex receptacles shall be 125 V, orange color.1. Manufacturer, 15 A: Cooper IG5262RN, Hubbell HBLIG5262, Leviton 8200-IG,

or P&S IG6200.2. Manufacturer, 20 A: Cooper IG5362RN, Hubbell HBLIG5362, Leviton 8300-IG,

or P&S IG6300.

D. Corrosion resistant duplex receptacles shall be 125 V, yellow color.1. Manufacturer, 15 A: Cooper 5262CR, Hubbell HBL52CM62, Leviton 52CM-62,

or P&S CR6200.2. Manufacturer, 20 A: Cooper 5362CR, Hubbell HBL53CM62, Leviton 53CM-62,

or P&S CR6300.

E. Ground fault circuit interrupters shall be UL 943-2011 compliant, 125 V, duplex type, colored to match existing.1. Manufacturer: Cooper TWRVGF20, Hubbell GFR5352SG, Leviton W7899-TR,

or P&S 2095TRWR.

F. Simplex receptacles shall be 125 V, 20 A, colored to match existing.1. Manufacturer: Cooper 5361, Hubbell HBL5361, Leviton 5361, or P&S 5361.

G. Weather resistant duplex receptacles shall be 125 V, industry marked as "Weather Resistant", colored to match existing.1. Manufacturer, 15 A: Hubbell HBL5262WR.


261430-3

2. Manufacturer, 20 A: Hubbell HBL5362WR.

2.04 DEVICE FACEPLATES

A. Faceplates for flush wall outlets (switch, receptacle, telephone, and signal) shall be high impact thermoplastic.

B. Plastic faceplates shall have a smooth surface and be the same color as the device it covers.

C. Manufacturer: Cooper, Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S.

2.05 WEATHERPROOF COVERS

A. Weatherproof covers shall be die cast aluminum, designed for wet location protection whether the attachment plug is inserted or removed. Covers shall be NEMA 3R rated when used with the appropriate weatherproof outlet box. Covers shall meet OSHA lockout/tagout requirements.

2.06 POKE-THROUGH FITTINGS

A. Complete assembly consisting of finished service fitting above the floor, fire rated insert containing intumescent organic material, and junction box for connection of power systems below the floor. Where poke-through fittings are used for communication and data cables in conduit located below the floor, those service openings shall be provided with conduit adapters below the floor.

B. Assemblies shall be UL listed with the utilized quantity and type of power and data conductors.

C. Surface-Mounted Fittings:1. Designed to provide both power and communications service in a single device

and for installation in a cored opening. Fittings shall be listed with a 4 hour rating with 100 #24 AWG communication conductors and 8 #12 AWG power conductors, and with a 2 hour rating with 200 #24 AWG communication conductors and 8 #12 AWG power conductors, or equivalent cross sectional area of copper conductors.

2. Fittings shall have 0.125" thick clear anodized aluminum housings, neoprene communication grommets, and a 15 A duplex receptacle.

3. Where used for hard wired connections to furniture or equipment, provide blank coverplates with conduit knockouts.

4. A carpet storing compartment shall be provided to receive carpet that is folded back from the poke-through opening during installation. Compartment shall be arranged such that the carpet is not damaged while the unit is in place and may be restored over the abandonment plug should the unit be relocated.

5. Spring steel screw actuated retainers shall lock or unlock the fitting for installation and removal. Fittings shall be capable of being reinstalled after removal without replacement of parts.


261430-4

6. Fittings shall be capable of passing an uncoupled 25-pair Amphenol connector through its entire body.

7. Manufacturer: Hubbell Pedestal series, or Wiremold Walker RC9 series.

D. Additional Fittings:1. Provide, for future use, extra poke-through fittings in quantity equal to 10% of the

quantity of units furnished.2. Abandonment plugs shall be furnished, for future use, in boxes to the Owner in

quantity equal to 10% of the quantity of units furnished. Abandonment plugs shall have the same fire rating as the fittings.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Devices shall be installed flush in the wall on which they are located when served by concealed conduit. Where necessary to conceal the conduit or flush mount the device box, masonry or plaster shall be channeled and patched.

B. Devices shall be surface mounted where their connecting raceways are indicated on the Drawings exposed.

C. Duplex receptacles shall generally be 15 A rated. Where a 20 A branch circuit serves a single duplex receptacle, the receptacle shall be 20 A rated. Duplex receptacles in corridors and equipment rooms shall be 20 A rated.

D. Where 2 or more switches, wall box dimmers, indicating devices, control and communications outlets, or receptacles are indicated on the Drawings at the same location, they shall be ganged and covered with 1 faceplate.

E. Bond receptacle ground straps to outlet boxes with 6" long green insulated #12 AWG copper jumpers.

F. Provide an insulated ground from the grounding screw of isolated ground duplex receptacles to the branch circuit panelboard isolated ground bus or the grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system.

G. Install device faceplates and adjust outlets to achieve a flush fit with no gaps.

3.02 POKE-THROUGH FITTINGS

A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install devices and make connections in the service fittings.


261430-5

C. Provide wiring as indicated on the Drawings below the slab and make connections. Extend wiring serving furniture and equipment through the fittings and connect to the furniture or equipment with liquidtight flexible conduit and fittings recommended by the furniture or equipment manufacturer's installation instructions.



261480-1

SECTION 261480CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers connections to electric current consuming equipment, and includes installation and connection of associated control devices in the power circuit.


A. Conform to the following:1. NECA 230-2010.2. NFPA 70-2011.

1.03 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS

A. Locations of motors, starters, equipment and apparatus as indicated on the Drawings are approximate; connections shall be made to such equipment as actually installed.

B. Coordinate the locations of starters or other control devices with the equipment being controlled in accordance with local code requirements. The installed location of motors, equipment, and associated ductwork shall be considered to ensure clearance, access, and sight requirements.


A. Refer to other Divisions of these specifications for equipment requiring electrical connections.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. See other Sections of Division 26 for materials and equipment.


261480-2

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 WIRING

A. Provide power wiring to equipment requiring electrical power specified in all Divisions of these specifications. Power wiring is defined as wiring in the electrical circuit between the source of power and the current consuming device, and includes the mounting and installation of starters, variable frequency drives and associated DV/DT output filters, and other control devices and interlock contacts controlling loads for which no magnetic starter or contactor is provided.

B. Provide control wiring to equipment requiring electrical control specified in all Divisions of these specifications. Refer to Divisions 21, 22, and 23 for control wiring provided under each Division.

C. Make final connections to equipment such that loads are balanced across phases in branch circuits, feeders, and panelboards. Where multiple units are connected to the same branch circuit or feeder, packaged equipment incorporating both single phase and three phase loads shall be connected such that the single phase loads are balanced as closely as possible across the phases of the three phase branch circuit or feeder serving the equipment.



261700-1

SECTION 261700CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers circuit and motor disconnects.

C. Disconnects provided with mechanical equipment are specified in Division 23.

D. Refer to Section 264750, Overcurrent Protective Devices, for fuses.

E. Performance verification is specified in Section 260090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of the performance verification specified therein.



PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosures shall be surface mounted, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

B. Type of enclosures specified herein or indicated on the Drawings refer to NEMA types as defined in NEMA 250-2008.

C. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 in dry locations and NEMA 3R where exposed to rain or spray, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Disconnects installed in hazardous locations or corrosive atmospheres shall be UL listed for the specific application.

2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Switches shall have ground and insulated neutral lugs where ground and neutral conductors are provided in the circuit.

B. Where installed ahead of elevator drives and between variable frequency drives and motors, provide electrical interlock kits to break the control circuit before the main


261700-2

switch blades open. Control contacts shall be one normally open and one normally closed, 120 V AC, 15 A rating.

C. Switches shall be heavy duty, motor rated, 600 V, with capacity and number of poles indicated on the Drawings. Fuse holders shall be designed to receive Class R fuses unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

D. Manufacturer: Eaton DH, GE TH, Siemens H, or Square D Class 3110.

E. Nonfusible type for motor loads 2 hp or smaller or nonmotor loads connected to a 20 A or smaller circuit may be toggle type switches, or nonautomatic circuit breakers, UL listed for each specific type load.

1. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds, GE, Leviton, Square D, or Westinghouse.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Disconnects shall be installed where specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, or required by manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install combination disconnect/motor starters furnished under other Divisions.

C. Provide control wiring for electrical interlocks between elevator drives and motor disconnects.

D. Provide control wiring for electrical interlocks between drives and variable frequency motor disconnect switches.

E. Coordinate disconnect installation with raceways, wiring, and equipment.

F. Anchor disconnects. Refer to Section 261900, Supporting Devices for specific requirements.

3.02 LOCATION

A. Coordinate location of disconnects with equipment being controlled.

B. When used as disconnecting means, locate as near as practicable to the load controlled.

C. When used for branch circuit protection, disconnects shall be located as near as practicable to the supply end of the conductors being protected.


261700-3

D. Disconnects used with motor-driven appliances, or motors and controllers shall be located within sight of controller, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

E. Disconnects shall be installed in accessible locations.

3.03 FUSIBLE DISCONNECTS

A. Fusible disconnects shall not be mounted in ceiling plenums.

B. Fuses shall be installed in fusible disconnects as specified in Section 264750, Overcurrent Protective Devices.



261900-1

SECTION 261900SUPPORTING DEVICES

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General provisions and other electrical systems are specified in other Sections ofDivision 26.

B. This Section covers supporting devices.



PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 BEAM CLAMPS

A. Galvanized steel, with tapped holes in base and face for bolts or hanger rods.

B. Manufacturer: Appleton, Efcor, or Kindorf.

2.02 CABLE TIES

A. One-piece, nylon, with a 90º insertion angle.

B. Manufacturer: 3M, Ideal Industries, Panduit, or Thomas & Betts.

2.03 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Galvanized steel straps or hangers, or spring steel type hangers or clamps.

B. Manufacturer: Appleton, Caddy, Raco, or Thomas & Betts.

2.04 CABLE SUPPORTS

A. Galvanized malleable iron with multiple segment plugs.

B. Manufacturer: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, or O-Z/Gedney.


261900-2

2.05 CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEMS

A. Galvanized steel, 14 gauge minimum, with factory-punched attachment holes. Straps for the support of conduit shall be designed so that the attachment nut is captive on the shoulder of the strap when tightened. Attachment nuts shall be designed to provide a surface on the turned down edge while making positive contact with the side walls of the channel. Nuts, bolts, straps, and accessories shall be protected with same finish as channels.

B. Manufacturer: B-Line Systems, Kindorf, Midland-Ross, or Unistrut.

2.06 WOOD BACKBOARDS

A. Exterior grade, 0.75" thick, B-C UL listed fire-resistant plywood tested in accordance with UL 723-2008 Category BUGV. Flame spread rating shall be 25 or less.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Anchor or support raceways, cables, and electrical equipment as specified herein.

3.02 BEAM CLAMPS

A. Beam clamps may be used for support of raceways, enclosures, panelboards or equipment where attached to or from fixed steel supports or structures. Beam clamps fastened to steel supports not horizontal or vertical shall be provided with a swing connector. Beam clamps fastened to structures in a horizontal position (where bolt is horizontal) shall not be used for support of equipment exceeding 10 lb.

3.03 CABLE TIES

A. Cable ties shall be provided for securing, grouping and organizing conductors or cables in panelboards, switchboards, wireways, or enclosures.

3.04 CABLE SUPPORTS

A. Install cable supports in vertical runs at intervals required by codes.

3.05 CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEMS

A. Use channel strut systems for support of multiple runs of conduit, enclosures, panelboards, and equipment.

B. Support channel strut from minimum 0.375" steel rods when not directly fastened to structure.


261900-3

3.06 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Use straps, clamps, or hangers to support individual runs of conduit.

B. Spring steel hangers or clamps may be used to support conduit from steel except where exposed to rain or moisture.

C. Secure conduit support devices to structure with wood screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry, lead anchors on solid masonry or concrete, and machine bolts and beam clamps on steel.

D. Support conduits, secured to surfaces exposed to water or spray, by straps or hangers, utilizing clamp backs or spacers made for the purpose which hold conduit off surface.

E. Provide PVC-coated straps and spacers for plastic-coated conduit.

F. Conduits shall not be supported from ceiling suspension systems.

G. Conduit supports shall not be welded to steel structures.

H. Install riser clamps for vertical conduits as required by codes.

3.07 WOOD BACKBOARDS

A. Install wood backboards where 2 or more disconnect switches, individual circuit breakers, or equipment are installed, and where indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.

B. Anchor wood backboards to walls with lag bolts on wood, toggle bolts on drywall or hollow masonry, and lead anchors on solid masonry or concrete.

C. Paint backboards with 2 coats of fire-inhibiting gray enamel on both sides and all 4 edges before installation of equipment.

D. Backboards installed on walls in telephone/data rooms or walls dedicated to communications equipment shall be 8' high minimum, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Lower edge of 8' backboards shall be set at floor level. Width shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Coordinate size of backboards for other equipment with equipment mounted thereon.



264500-1

SECTION 264500GROUNDING

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers grounding.

1.02 GROUND RESISTANCE

A. The resistance of the grounding system to earth shall be a maximum of 5 10 25 ohms.



PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUND RODS

A. Copper-clad steel of diameter and length indicated on the Drawings.

2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Except as otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, electrical system and equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated. Insulation shall be rated 600V. Conductors shall be of same material as feeders and branch circuits.

B. Conductors installed underground to interconnect ground rods, copper plates, and reinforcing or structural steel and extended to equipment as grounding electrode conductors shall be bare copper and minimum #3/0 AWG.

2.03 CORROSION INHIBITOR

A. Colloidal copper suspended in a waterproof corrosion and rust inhibitor compound.

B. Manufacturer: Burndy, or Thomas & Betts.


264500-2

2.04 GROUND CLAMPS

A. UL listed.

2.05 GROUND FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. Compression-type connectors, UL listed for use as grounding and bonding equipment.1. Manufacturer: Burndy, ILSCO, or Thomas & Betts.

B. Exothermic process. 1. Manufacturer: Burndy, or Erico.

2.06 LUGS

A. UL listed for use as grounding and bonding equipment, with 2 bolt hole pads.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT GROUNDS

A. Equipment, enclosures and raceways shall be grounded.

B. A green colored or green identified grounding conductor shall be installed in raceways with the phase conductors.

C. Bond ground conductors together and to enclosures using grounding lugs at origin of circuits, at intermediate pull boxes, individual circuit breakers, disconnect switches,and to panelboards or equipment at terminations.

3.02 SWITCHBOARD AND PANELBOARD GROUNDS

A. Grounding conductors shall be connected to grounding busses provided in the equipment.

3.03 GROUND FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. Underground connections between conductors and ground rods, flat plates, structural steel, and reinforcing steel shall be made with the exothermic process. UL listed compression-type connectors with corrosion inhibitor compound shall be used on above grade ground bus connections. UL listed ground clamps shall be used for pipe connections.


264500-3

3.04 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONNECTOR HARDWARE

A. Provide bolts, nuts, lock washers, flat washers, and Belleville washers (for dissimilar metals) of silicon bronze or type 316 stainless steel as recommended by the manufacturer. Tighten connections to manufacturer's recommended torque values.



264600-1

SECTION 264600DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers dry-type transformers.

C. Vibration iolation and seismic requirements are specified in Section 260010, General.

D. Transformer efficiencies shall meet or exceed values listed in NEMA TP 1-2002,Table 4-2.

E. Transformers rated for 2500 kVA or less shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA TP 2-2005.



A. Conform to the following:1. NECA 409-2009.2. NFPA 70-2011.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 TRANSFORMERS (600 V NOMINAL OR LESS)

A. Ventilated, 480 V, 3-phase, delta primary, 208/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire, wye-connected secondary unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, with full capacity standard taps in primary winding.

B. Transformers shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with UL 1561-2011.

C. Windings: copper.

D. Insulation: 220°C.

E. Temperature rise: 115°C.


264600-2

F. Where K-factor rated transformers are indicated on the Drawings, transformers shallbe UL listed with a K-factor rating of K-13. K-rated transformers shall be provided with an electrostatic shield.

G. Coils and core shall be mounted on vibration isolators.

H. Enclosures shall be UL listed for indoor installation unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings for outdoor installation.

I. Manufacturer: Acme, Eaton DT-3, GE QL, Powersmiths e-Saver, Siemens 3F, Square D Class 7400, or Uptegraff.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Ground the secondary neutral.

B. Install transformers on vibration isolators. See Section 260010, General for requirements.

C. Adjust transformer taps for proper system voltage.



264710-1

SECTION 264710PANELBOARDS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards and distribution panelboards.

C. Refer to Section 264020, Service Entrance for utility service requirements.

D. Refer to Section 264750, Overcurrent Protective Devices for circuit breakers.

E. Performance verification is specified in Section 260090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of the performance verification specified therein.


A. Conform to the following:1. NECA 407-2009.2. NEMA PB 1-2011.3. NFPA 70-2011.4. UL 50-2007.5. UL 67-2009.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 BUS MATERIAL

A. Buswork shall be copper.

2.02 CABLE CONNECTIONS

A. Cable connection lugs shall be UL listed for use with the type of material to which they are connected.

2.03 TYPE MAINS

A. Main lugs or main breakers shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings.


264710-2

2.04 GROUND BUS

A. Provide ground bus bars in cabinets.

2.05 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Protective devices in panelboards shall be molded case thermal-magnetic, with bolt-on type automatic circuit breakers of frame types, number poles, trip ratings and quantities as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Main and branch breakers shall be rated for the fault current level indicated on the Drawings, minimum 10000 A RMS symmetrical for 208 V or 120 V AC, and 14000 A RMS symmetrical for 480 V or 277 V AC. Each breaker shall be fully rated for the fault current available at its point of application.

C. Spaces for future breakers shall be equipped with hardware to accept breakers, and shall be bussed to accept a minimum 60 A breaker without revisions, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

D. Multipole breakers shall have internal common trip.

2.06 CABINETS

A. Cabinets shall be galvanized code thickness steel with hinged door in door and trim finished in gray enamel or lacquer. Mounting shall be flush or surface as indicated on the Drawings. Doors shall have combination latch and cylinder lock. Locks shall be keyed alike. Gutter space shall be in accordance with UL 67-2009, except that cabinets enclosing a through-feeder shall have an additional 4" width in the gutter on the feeder side.

2.07 LABELING

A. Panelboards shall be UL listed as "Suitable for Use as Service Entrance Equipment" and labeled as such by the manufacturer where so used.

2.08 MANUFACTURER

A. Eaton Pow-R-Line 1a, 2a, 3a, or 4B, GE AD, AE, AQ, or SPECTRA, or Siemens P1, P3, or P5.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 ELEVATION

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install top of panelboard cabinets 78"above the finished floor.


264710-3

3.02 SUPPORT

A. Panelboards shall be anchored to the building structure.

3.03 MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS

A. Group conductors within panelboards.

B. Install handle ties on individual single-pole circuit breakers serving multiwire branch circuits.



264750-1

SECTION 26 47 50OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers overcurrent protective devices for systems operating at 600 V ACor less in equipment furnished under Division 26.

C. Performance verification is specified in Section 26 00 90, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of the performance verification specified therein.


A. Conform to the following:1. NFPA 70-2011.2. UL 489-2009.3. UL 1066-2012.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Quick-make quick-break fusible type. Fusible switches with frames 30 A through 600 A shall be furnished with fuses and matching fuse clips specified herein.

B. Switches shall incorporate safety cover interlocks to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the on position or prevent placing the switch in on position with the cover open, and a defeater.

C. Handles shall have provisions for padlocking and shall clearly indicate the on or off position. Front cover doors shall be capable of being padlocked in the closed position.

D. Manufacturer: Eaton, GE, Siemens, or Square D.

2.02 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide complete circuit overcurrent protection by having inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics, and where indicated on the Drawings or specified herein shall be current limiting.


264750-2

B. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be indicated by handle position. Contacts shall be nonwelding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of arc chutes.

C. Minimum circuit breaker interrupting capacities shall be as indicated on the Drawingswith the minimum rating level as specified herein.1. Lighting and branch circuit panelboard circuit breakers shall be rated a minimum

of 14000 RMS symmetrical AIC for 277 V and 480 V, and 10000 RMSsymmetrical AIC for 120 V and 208 V.

2. Circuit breakers used in combination starters shall have a minimum interrupting capacity equal to or greater than the short circuit capacity shown for the panelboard, switchboard, or switchgear immediately upstream between the device and the source.

3. Individually mounted circuit breakers shall have a minimum interrupting capacity equal to or greater than the short circuit capacity shown for the panelboard, switchboard, or switchgear immediately upstream between the device and the source.

4. Protective devices in panelboards shall be fully rated for the fault current available at the point of application.

D. Individually mounted circuit breakers shall incorporate hinged covers with external operating handles. Devices shall be removable from the front.

E. Manufacturer: Eaton, GE, Siemens, or Square D.

2.03 FUSES

A. Fuses in devices through 600 A capacity: UL Class RK1 current limiting, dual element, time-delay type with Class R fuse clips for motor branch circuits and transformer feeders, and UL Class J current limiting, quick acting type for other applications.

B. Fuses shall be voltage rated for the system in which they are installed.

C. Manufacturer: Bussmann, Edison Fusegear, Ferraz Shawmut, GE, or Littelfuse.

2.04 SPECIAL FUSES

A. Fuses in control circuits and special applications shall be of type and size for duty for the specific application.


264750-3

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Install fuses in fusible switches.

B. Provide fuses in fusible switches serving packaged air conditioning units in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations and nameplate requirements.

3.03 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Fasten circuit breakers without causing mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cabling.

B. Install fuses in circuit breakers with fuse protection.



264760-1

SECTION 264760INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers individual circuit breakers.


PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Circuit breakers shall be the molded case frame molded case current limiting insulated case type, with number of poles and trip rating as indicated on the Drawings. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 in dry spaces, and NEMA 3R in wet or exposed locations.

B. Breakers: as specified in Section 264750, Overcurrent Protective Devices.

2.02 MANUFACTURER

A. Circuit breakers shall be by the same manufacturer as panelboards.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Circuit breakers shall be supported and located in same manner as specified herein for disconnect switches.



265010-1

SECTION 265010LAMPS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers lamps for luminaires.

C. Provide lamps in luminaires specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.


A. Conform to the following:1. ANSI C78, current edition.2. NFPA 70-2011.3. Public Law 109-58 (2005).

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Lamps shall be the type for which the luminaire is designed as specified herein or indicated on the Drawings.

B. Lamps of a specific type shall be by the same manufacturer.

C. Compact fluorescent lamps located outside shall be the amalgam type to maintain 90% lumen output between 10°F and 120°F.

D. Metal halide lamps of 150 W or less shall have ceramic arc tubes.

E. Manufacturer: GE, Osram/Sylvania, or Philips.


265010-2

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Lamps of the wattage, type, and voltage indicated on the Drawings or specified herein shall be installed in each luminaire.

B. Fluorescent lamps utilizing electronic dimming ballasts shall be burned at full output for 100 hours prior to dimming.



265020-1

SECTION 265020BALLASTS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers ballasts for fluorescent luminaires, including emergency battery type, and for high intensity discharge luminaires.



2012. NFPA 70-2011.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 BALLASTS

A. General:1. Ballasts shall be designed and UL listed for the electrical characteristics of the

circuits to which they are connected and for use with the lamps and luminaires specified herein or indicated on the Drawings.

2. Ballasts shall have the minimum sound rating available for the lamps specified herein or indicated on the Drawings and shall be labeled with that rating.

3. For outdoor luminaires, ballasts mounted remote from luminaires shall have weathertight outdoor cases, and those within luminaires shall be in a weathertight compartment.

4. Ballasts shall operate at nominal voltages of 120 V or 277 V, with an input frequency of 60 Hz.

5. For outdoor use and wherever used outside a heated environment, ballasts shall be capable of starting lamps at 0°F.

6. High intensity discharge ballasts shall be individually fused.

B. Fluorescent Electronic Type:1. UL listed, Class P, Type 1, sound rated Class A or better, programmed start type

with a minimum 97% power factor.2. Operate lamps at a frequency of 20 kHz or greater without visible flicker

providing full light output.3. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.7 or less.4. AC input total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 10%.


265020-2

5. Ballasts shall have Category A transient voltage surge suppression in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1-2002 (R2008) and IEEE C62.41.2-2002.

6. Ballast case operating temperature shall not exceed 25°C rise over 40°C ambient.7. Minimum starting temperature shall not exceed 50°F for 32 W lamps.8. Ballast RFI and EMI emissions shall conform to 47 CFR 18-2012.9. Ballasts shall have a 3 year written warranty from date of shipment against

mechanical or electrical defects under normal conditions of use, including a ballast replacement labor allowance.

10. Manufacturer: Advance, GE, Osram/Sylvania, or Universal.

C. Fluorescent Emergency Battery Type:1. Shall be designed and UL listed in accordance with UL 924-2012.2. Emergency ballasts listed below shall provide the following minimum initial

lumen output:

Initial LumenOutput

One lamp, 48", nominal 32 W, rapid start T8 1350One lamp, compact fluorescent quad, nominal 18 W, rapid start 520One lamp, compact fluorescent quad, nominal 26 W, rapid start 650

3. Shall be mounted in the ballast channel of the luminaire.4. Shall contain a high temperature nickel-cadmium battery that requires no

maintenance, operates one lamp for a minimum of 90 min in the emergency mode, and requires a maximum of 24 h recharge time.

5. Shall be provided with a charging indicator light, test switch, and installation hardware.

6. Ballast circuit arrangement shall accept a switched circuit input and a power sensing input to allow the luminaire to be fully extinguished as long as the sensing input detects available power.

7. Ballasts shall be self-testing, self-diagnostic type. Electronic circuitry shall be self-testing in design and automatically test emergency lighting for a minimum of 30 s every 30 days and 90 min once a year. An embedded microcontroller shall continuously monitor the battery charging current and voltage. A solid state status indicator light and audible alarm (selectable) to monitor the charger and battery and to indicate test results and status conditions, and a single-pole test switch shall be provided.

8. Manufacturer: Bodine, Chloride, Emergi-Lite, Iota, or Lightguard.

D. High Intensity Discharge Type:1. Metal Halide:

a. Ballasts shall bear the UL recognized component mark and shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA C82.4-2002.


265020-3

b. Ballasts shall be high power factor type and shall operate lamps specified herein within the parameters of the most recent editions of applicable ANSI C78.

c. Ballasts for lamps of 150 W or less shall be electronic.d. Ballasts for metal halide lamps of 175 W or more shall be lead-peaked,

constant wattage, autotransformer type, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Ballasts installed in new luminaires shall be wired and installed by the luminaire manufacturer.

B. Provide identical ballasts within each luminaire type.



265100-1

SECTION 265100LUMINAIRES

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers luminaires, both interior and exterior.

C. Modular flexible wiring systems are specified in Section 261260, Modular Flexible Wiring Systems.

D. Seismic restraints are specified in Section 260010, General.


A. Exact locations of luminaires shall be as indicated on the architectural reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations. Where variance exists between the Electrical and Architectural Drawings, the Architectural Drawings shall govern.



PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Luminaires shall be UL listed, and factory wired.

B. Molded-plastic materials used as lenses or louvers for the transmission or diffusion of light shall comply with requirements for approved light transmitting plastics in the International Building Code-2012. The manufacturer of each luminaire shall providenotarized certification including reference to the UL listing. Each sheet, panel, grid or unit shall be labeled for identification.

C. Painted metal components shall be painted after fabrication.

D. Ballasts: as specified in Section 265020, Ballasts.

E. Sockets: fluorescent luminaires shall have rapid start sockets when used with dimming ballasts.


265100-2

F. Disconnects: fluorescent luminaires shall have factory installed integral disconnection means that simultaneously open circuit conductors between branch circuits and ballasts including grounded conductors.

G. Lamps: as specified in Section 265010, Lamps.

2.02 SUSPENDED LUMINAIRES

A. Suspended luminaires shall have rigid stem pendants and swivel aligners. Single fluorescent luminaires shall have twin-stem hangers; row luminaires shall have single stem hangers at 4' to 8' spacing.

B. Suspended direct/indirect fluorescent luminaires shall have rigid single stem pendant suspension. Suspension points shall be symmetrically located from the center of the luminaire. Sloped ceiling adaptors shall be provided where applicable.

2.03 RECESSED LUMINAIRES

A. Recessed luminaires shall have trim and supports provided by the fixture manufacturer and designed for the type of ceiling in which they will be installed.

B. Recessed fluorescent luminaires in lay-in ceilings shall be the lay-in type unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, and shall be designed for the type of ceiling and grid in which they will be installed.

C. Recessed incandescent luminaires shall have factory-installed thermal protection.

2.04 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES

A. Exterior luminaires shall be UL classified for damp or wet locations as applicable, and shall be complete with gaskets, cast aluminum weatherproof outlet boxes, and grounding.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 LUMINAIRES

A. Provide ballasts for fluorescent and high intensity discharge luminaires.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall comply with ASTM E580/E580M-2011b.

B. Exterior luminaires shall not be installed until after the building exterior has been rinsed of any corrosive cleaning materials.


265100-3

C. Install pendant luminaires so that the luminaire housing does not rotate when changing a lamp by pole or other means.

D. Luminaires shall be adjusted and installed to provide the lighting pattern for which the fixture is designed.

3.03 SUPPORT

A. The ceiling support system shall be used to support recessed luminaires. Luminaires shall be securely attached to the ceiling support system.

B. Recessed luminaires shall be supported from the structure independent of the ceiling support system. Provide at least two supports on diagonals where any horizontal dimension of the luminaire is 18" or larger.

C. Where a recessed fluorescent or downlight luminaire replaces a section or part of a ceiling tile, the luminaire shall be supported from building structure at two opposite ends. Supports shall be provided with the same type of wire used to support the lay-in ceiling track. In addition to wire supports, lay-in luminaires shall be screwed to the main runners of the lay-in ceiling track at four corners using sheet metal screws. For fire rated suspended ceilings, luminaires shall be screwed to the main runners of the suspended ceiling track at four corners using sheet metal screws.

D. Surface- and pendant-mounted luminaires shall be supported from the structure above.

3.04 ALIGNMENT

A. Stem connections to outlet boxes shall be made with swivel aligner box covers. Stems and rods not connected into a raceway system shall be supported with nonrigid connection points to allow the stem or rod to hang vertically.

3.05 LUMINAIRE ADJUSTMENTS

A. Provide final luminaire adjustments of adjustable luminaires under supervision of the Architect. Adjustments shall be carried out before the final site visit, unless indicated by the Architect. Provide personnel and equipment for this task. Adjustments shall be as directed by the Architect. When aiming and adjusting is completed, locking set screws and nuts and bolts shall be tightened securely.


265100-4

B. Luminaires shall be focused during the normal working day; however, where daylight interferes with illumination levels, aiming shall be accomplished at night, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Luminaire adjustments shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect prior to occupancy by the Owner.



265910-1

SECTION 265910LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. This Section covers occupancy sensors,

C. Performance verification is specified in Section 260090, Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of performance verification specified therein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Like products shall be by the same manufacturer.

2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General:1. Occupancy sensors shall not emit audible noise or signals that interfere with

electronic devices.2. Occupancy sensors shall be designed to be compatible with incandescent,

fluorescent, and low-voltage lamps with electronic or magnetic ballasts.3. Occupancy sensors shall have field selectable automatic or manual on operation

modes.4. Occupancy sensors shall be designed to have RFI and EMF immunity, zero

crossing relay control, and voltage drop protection.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Occupancy Sensors:1. Ceiling-Mounted Occupancy Sensors Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared:

a. Ultrasonic type with 32 kHz to 40 kHz operating frequency, 360° field of view with 2000 ft² coverage area, adjustable ambient light levels, adjustable time delay, and LED indicator light. Sensitivity and time delay settings shall have field selectable self-adjusting and manual modes. Low voltage power supplies and relays required for control of lighting loads shall be by same manufacturer as occupancy sensors and provided with sensors at voltage as indicated on the Drawings.

b. Passive infrared type with 360° field of view with 450 ft² coverage area, adjustable ambient light levels, adjustable time delay, and LED indicator light. Sensitivity and time delay settings shall have field selectable self-


265910-2

adjusting and manual modes. Low voltage power supplies and relays required for control of lighting loads shall be by same manufacturer as occupancy sensors and provided with sensors at voltage indicated on the Drawings.

c. Dual technology type, with passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies, with 360° field of view with 2000 ft² coverage area, adjustable ambient light levels, adjustable time delay, and LED indicator light. Sensitivity and time delay settings shall have field selectable self-adjusting and manual modes. Low voltage power supplies and relays required for control of lighting loads shall be by same manufacturer as occupancy sensors and provided with sensors at voltage indicated on the Drawings.

2. Ceiling Occupancy Sensors, Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared:a. Passive infrared type with 115o field of view with 1000 ft² to 2000 ft²

coverage area, adjustable ambient light levels, adjustable time delay, and LED indicator light. Sensitivity and time delay settings shall have field selectable self-adjusting and manual modes. Low voltage power supplies and relays required for control of lighting loads shall be by same manufacturer as occupancy sensors and provided with sensors at voltage indicated on the Drawings.

b. Dual technology type, with passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies, with 115o to 180o field of view with 1000 ft² to 2000 ft² coverage area, adjustable ambient light levels, adjustable time delay, and LED indicator light. Sensitivity and time delay settings shall have field selectable self-adjusting and manual modes. Low voltage power supplies and relays required for control of lighting loads shall be by same manufacturer as occupancy sensors and provided with sensors at voltage indicated on the Drawings.

3. Manufacturer: Greengate, Hubbell, Leviton, or WattStopper.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Wall-mounted devices shall be installed flush in the wall on which they are located when served by concealed conduit. Where necessary to conceal the conduit or flush mount the device box, masonry or plaster shall be channeled and patched.

B. Wall-mounted devices shall be surface mounted where their connecting raceways are indicated on the Drawings exposed.

C. Where 2 or more wall box type lighting control devices are indicated on the Drawings at the same location, they shall be ganged and covered with 1 faceplate.

D. Install device faceplates and adjust devices to achieve a flush fit with no gaps.

E. For occupancy sensors, photosensors, and time switches, the manufacturer shall provide factory start-up and training of the installation. Every device in the system


265910-3

shall be tested and adjusted as needed to provide optimum performance of the system. The factory-trained representative shall provide a minimum of 4 hours of training to the Owner's operating personnel. Provide the Owner with certificates of system start-up, and instruction of operating personnel.

3.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Install per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Ambient light level setting shall be adjusted to maximum.

B. Install ultrasonic, infrared, or dual technology type occupancy sensors per manufacturer’s recommendations based on the room type, height, usage, partitions, and other factors that directly affect the sensors' operation.

C. The locations and quantities of occupancy sensors indicated on the Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only that the rooms are to be provided with occupancy sensors. The exact locations and quantities shall be determined at the building; refer to manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to installation for manufacturer’s recommended placement. Locate and aim occupancy sensors in the correct location required for the complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverages of controlled areas per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Rooms shall have 90% to 100% coverage of the controlled area to accommodate occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the rooms. Provide additional occupancy sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. The right is reserved to change the location of any sensor in any room before it is permanently installed, without additional cost to the Owner.

E. Provide control wiring between occupancy sensors, low voltage power supplies, and relays per manufacturer’s requirements. Provide additional low voltage power supplies and relays as required at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. Control wiring shall be installed in raceways in spaces where ceilings are exposed to structure.

G. Verify adjustment and occupancy sensor placement to ensure a trouble-free occupancy-based lighting control system.



283010-1

SECTION 283010 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM GENERAL


A. Refer to the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 for special requirements and conditions which apply to all Sections of Division 28.

B. These fire alarm and detection general provisions apply to the following:

1. Section 283100, Fire Alarm System.

C. Fire detection and alarm performance verification is specified in Section 283 90, Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of performance verification.


A. Conform to the following: 1. NFPA 70-2011. 2. NFPA 72-2002.

B. Codes, standards and regulations referred to are minimum standards. Where the

requirements of these specifications or drawings exceed those of the codes, standards and regulations, the drawings or specifications govern.

C. Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Adhesives, sealants, and sealant primers used inside the building (defined as inside the weatherproofing envelope and applied on site) shall comply with SCAQMD Rule 1168-2005 for volatile organic compound content limits.


D. Paints and Coatings:



A. Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and, unless explicitly dimensioned, indicate appropriate locations of apparatus, equipment and raceways. Changes in the location, and offsets, of same to accommodate building conditions and coordination with the work of other trades, shall be made during the preparation of coordination drawings and prior to initial installation, without additional cost to the Owner.


283010-2

B. Locations of motors, starters, equipment and apparatus as indicated on the Drawings are approximate; connections shall be made to such equipment as actually installed.

C. Provide access to equipment and apparatus requiring operation, service or

maintenance throughout the life of the system.

D. Install fire alarm panels such that no piping, ductwork or mechanical equipment is installed in the space equal to the width and depth of the equipment from floor to structure above. In addition, fire alarm panels shall be installed such that the working space in front shall be a minimum depth of 42" horizontally, the width of the equipment or 30", whichever is greater, and the height of the equipment or 78", whichever is greater.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL AIR-HANDLING SPACES

A. Electrical power conductors installed in environmental air-handling spaces shall be approved for installation in plenum areas.

B. Communications, data, control, and signal cable not in conduit or enclosed wireways

shall be approved for installation in plenum areas. 1.05 ASBESTOS MATERIALS


1.06 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed raceways are those which can be seen when the base building is complete without opening or removing access doors or panels or accessible ceiling components.

B. Other raceways are considered to be concealed.


A. Schedule work and provide temporary service and connections so existing systems will not be interrupted. when they are required for usage of the existing building. Obtain approval from the Owner and the Architect at least 7 14 days prior to any interruption or connection.

B. Perform work at such time and in such manner as to cause minimum inconvenience to

the Owner and as approved by the Architect. No allowance will be made for lack of knowledge of existing conditions.

C. Submit a detailed description of the procedure proposed for making the cutover,

including estimated outage time to the Owner.


283010-3




A. Building automation system.


C. Fire suppression systems.

D. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.

E. Installation of access panels in wall and ceiling construction.

F. Painting, except as specified herein.

G. Demolition, including removal of apparatus and equipment.

1.10 SUBMITTALS



Specifications and shall indicate compliance with each requirement specified herein and indicated in the Drawings. 1. In addition to any other transmittal or cover sheet used, fill out and attach to each

individual submittal a copy of the Cover Sheet for Submittals to Newcomb & Boyd included at the end of this Section.


instructions. 4. Reproductions or electronic versions of design drawings shall not be used in the

preparation of shop drawings. 5. Resubmittals that are required to address review comments shall include a cover



283010-4


7. Shop drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD 2013 format. 8. Submittals in 3-ring binders shall include an index of contents and divider tabs.

C. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Performance verification supervisor qualifications. 2. Fire alarm system. 3. Seismic restraint devices, including calculations, restraint selection, installation

details and written confirmation that a licensed engineer prepared the calculations.


A. Devices, equipment and materials, except as otherwise specified herein, shall be new and shall be of the customary standard and quality furnished by the designated manufacturer for that catalogue number.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS PANELS - BUILDING

A. Refer to Section 08310, Access Doors and Panels. 2.02 SLEEVES

A. Wall sleeves shall be galvanized rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.

B. For floor slabs above grade, plastic core form block-outs shall be used. 2.03 PENETRATION SEALS


B. Expansion Seals:

1. Waterproof, modular, mechanical expansion type consisting of synthetic rubber grommets or interlocking links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the penetrating item and the opening. Sizing of links and sleeve shall be determined by the manufacturer.

2. Manufacturer: Calpico Pipe Linx, Metraflex MetraSeal, or Thunderline Link Seal.


283010-5

C. Seal Assemblies:

1. Seal assemblies shall consist of a frame, compression mechanism, and insert modules. Assemblies shall be waterproof and shall be designed to allow easy addition or deletion of penetrating items.

2. Seal assemblies for multicable penetrations of fire and smoke rated construction shall comply with the requirements of firestops as specified herein.

3. Manufacturer: Nelson Multi-Plug. 2.04 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Conduit markers: self-adhesive vinyl tape, minimum 3 mil thick x 1.5" wide, color-coded orange unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

B. Tags: preprinted or partially preprinted accident prevention and operational tags, on

plasticized card stock with matte finish for writing, approximately 3.25" x 5.625", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and appropriate wording.

C. Signs: 14" x 10" size, 0.04" thick aluminum base with baked enamel finish for indoor

or outdoor use.

D. Nameplates and Labels: 1. White core plastic laminate with engraved lettering. 2. Nameplate background color shall be black for normal power equipment and red

for emergency power equipment. 3. Nameplates for individual devices shall have 0.25" high letters. 4. Nameplates for panels and equipment shall have 0.5" high letters. 5. Labels shall have minimum 0.25" high letters.

2.05 PAINTING

A. Paint for high temperature equipment shall be high temperature-resistant, designed for the temperatures at which the equipment will operate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DURING CONSTRUCTION



rain.

C. For outdoor storage, protective covers of 10 mil thick black sheet plastic shall be fitted over equipment and materials. Covers shall be reinforced to withstand wind and


283010-6

precipitation. Set equipment and material on skids or platforms of height to avoid damage or deterioration from spattering and ground water.

D. Provide dust and debris protection for devices and equipment operated during

construction. 3.02 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. General: 1. The existing installation shall remain as is except as otherwise indicated on the

Drawings or specified herein. Perform work to tie in the new work with the existing work and to adapt the existing work to the changes in the building and systems.

2. Remove equipment, apparatus, and exposed wiring and raceways rendered useless due to changes.

3. Where existing ceilings are removed, remove electrical and signal apparatus mounted to the ceiling or ceiling supports, including associated raceways and wiring.

4. Existing devices and equipment which are removed and not reused in the new work shall be turned over to the Owner.

5. Material and equipment which has been removed and not accepted by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.

6. Existing fire detection and alarm equipment removed and not reused shall be handled and disposed of in accordance with applicable state and federal regulations.

7. Material and equipment which has been removed shall not be used in the new work, except as specified herein.

8. Where existing raceways and equipment are indicated on the Drawings, size and location shall be verified prior to bidding.

9. Should the installation of new ductwork, piping or other equipment conflict with existing devices, shift the devices and make changes in the fire detection and alarm installation to remedy the conflicts, as approved by the Architect and at no extra cost.

10. Provide circuit continuity for existing wiring devices and equipment outside the renovation area served from or through the renovation area.

B. Wiring and Raceways:

1. Remove concealed wiring and raceways which are exposed by the removal of walls, partitions, and ceilings. Provide new concealed wiring and raceways to serve existing loads presently served by the removed wiring and raceways.

2. Sleeves left open by removal of conduit or raceways shall be cut flush with the finished slab, and filled with grout flush with both sides of slab.

3. Concealed raceways in masonry walls rendered useless by revisions shall be cut flush with wall surface and sealed with grout.


283010-7

C. Mechanical Equipment: 1. Where existing mechanical equipment is removed, remove fire detection and

alarm devices associated with the equipment. 2. Where existing mechanical equipment is modified or relocated, modify the fire

detection and alarm connections to the equipment to adapt it to its new function or location.


A. Cut and repair walls, floors and ceilings for the installation of the fire detection and alarm work.

B. Exterior building walls below grade shall not be pierced by hanger bolts.

C. Except where specific instructions are included herein, install and connect equipment

in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and recommendations.

D. Refer to manufacturer's or equipment supplier's shop drawings for exact type, number, location, dimensions and size of connections to equipment, including but not limited to: 1. Fire suppression equipment. 2. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment, including power supplies to

automatic temperature control systems.

E. In unfinished areas designated for future build out, install conduit and equipment tight against the structure to maximize the future ceiling height.


A. Access Panels: 1. Refer to Section 08310, Access Doors and Panels.

3.05 SLEEVES

A. Provide where conduits pass through elevated floor slabs if conduits are not a part of the slab pour, and for future cable or conduit risers. 1. Install in raised foundations at least 2" high.

B. Provide where communications and other cables, not installed in conduits, pass

through walls and elevated floor slabs.

C. Wall sleeves shall extend 4" from each side of the wall.

D. Sleeves shall be secured in place. Provide insulating bushings on both sides of sleeves for cables.


283010-8

E. Provide ground bushings on both sides of sleeves containing ground conductors. 3.06 PENETRATION SEALS

A. General: 1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions to achieve


B. Firestops:

1. Close and firestop abandoned penetrations and penetrations through fire- and smoke-rated construction. Materials used to seal these penetrations shall continue the construction’s fire and smoke resistance ratings uninterrupted and shall maintain an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and hot gases.

2. Install after installation of raceways.

C. Expansion Seals: 1. Install to seal single conduit or cable penetrations of walls below grade.

D. Seal Assemblies:

1. Install to seal the penetration of walls below grade by multiple cables in the same opening. a. Install to seal cable penetrations as indicated on the Drawings.

3.07 PAINTING





D. Exterior ferrous equipment and supports shall be painted 2 coats of rust preventive

paint, color selected by the Architect.

E. Exposed interior ferrous equipment, and exposed nongalvanized ferrous accessories and metal shall be prepared and painted 1 coat of corrosion resisting paint prior to other painting or identification, or 2 coats of corrosion resisting paints if no other painting is specified herein.


283010-9

3.08 COORDINATION

A. Provide offsets, transitions, and fittings to coordinate the work of each trade with that of other trades, including HVAC, plumbing, fire suppression, electrical, communications, structural, and architectural.

3.09 PHASING

A. Install work in phases as specified by the Architectural Documents. 3.10 CLEANING

A. Equipment and Equipment Rooms: 1. Remove dust, dirt, rust, stains, and temporary covers. 2. Foreign matter shall be blown, vacuumed, flushed, or cleaned out of and from

equipment, raceways, devices, controls and panels. 3. Clean and polish identification plates. 4. In equipment rooms, clean equipment, conduit, and room surfaces from dust and

dirt and maintain in a clean condition from date of substantial completion until final completion of work and corrective work.

5. Remove excess material from Project site. 3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. General: 1. Identification shall consist of upper case letters. 2. Where identification is applied to surfaces which require a finish, identification

shall be installed after surface has been finished.

B. Conduit Markers: 1. Install on conduits and raceways exposed or above ceilings at connections to

junction boxes, pull boxes, equipment, each side of wall, floor, and roof penetrations, and at 50' intervals along straight runs.

2. On parallel conduits (grouped), markers shall be placed on each conduit in line with each other. Markers shall be positioned in such a manner as to ensure visibility.

C. Box Color-Coding:

1. Paint connectors, couplings, bushings, hubs, entire conduit within 6" of a box, and panel backboxes red.

D. Cable identification: install cable identification on each communication or signal

cable.

E. Danger signs: install in areas constituting a danger for persons in or about the Project.


283010-10

F. Install a nameplate on the fire alarm panel to indicate the panel and circuit number supplying the fire alarm system.

3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION PACKAGE


B. Operation and maintenance documentation, in hardback 3-ring loose-leaf binders

except full size drawings and CDs, shall cover the fire detection and alarm systems. Documentation shall include the following: operation and maintenance documentation directory; emergency information; operation manual; maintenance manual; test reports; and construction documents.


comprehensive package to the Owner 3 months before systems start-up, and shall be updated, revised and completed at completion of construction.

D. Documentation shall be typewritten and shall contain, at a minimum, the following

information. 1. Introduction:


b. Index. 2. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory:

a. Explanation of the identification system used, including lists of systems, equipment and component identifiers and names.


recommended during emergency situations to protect life and property and to minimize disruption to the building occupants. Emergencies shall, at a minimum, include: 1) Fire. 2) Security breach. 3) Power failure. 4) Emergency power system failure.

4. Operation Manual: a. General Information:

1) Building function. 2) Building description. 3) Operating standards and logs.

b. Technical Information: 1) System description. 2) Operating routines and procedures. 3) Routine operational testing program and procedures.


283010-11

4) Special procedures. 5) Basic troubleshooting.

5. Maintenance Manual: a. Descriptions (specifications) of the equipment and components. b. Description of function, as applicable: the function of the equipment,


c. Recommended maintenance procedures and their recommended frequency for this Project.

d. Name, address and contact of at least one qualified service company. e. Recommended list of spare parts, part numbers, and the place(s) from which

they can be obtained. f. Original purchase order number; date of purchase; name, address, and the

telephone number of the vendor; and warranty information. g. Installation information. h. Any other information needed for the preparation of documents supporting

the management of operation and maintenance programs. 6. Test Reports and Certifications:

a. Copies of tests and certifications performed during manufacture and construction including, but not limited to, the following: 1) Certification of fire alarm system operation. 2) Certification of seismic restraints. 3) Receipt of O&M documentation package. 4) Receipt for instruction of operating personnel. 5) Fire alarm system test report.

7. Construction Documents: a. Record drawings. b. Approved submittals, including revised shop drawings indicating field and

as-installed conditions. c. Equipment identification charts and schedules. d. Warranty certificates. e. Inspection certificates. f. Performance verification report.


maintenance documentation package. 3.13 RECORD DRAWINGS


A. Equipment operated prior to the date of substantial completion shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.


283010-12


A. Conduct formal instruction sessions for operating personnel. Conduct two similar sessions. The first session shall be conducted at the time of start-up and check-out, and the second session shall be approximately 2 months later. Sessions shall be a minimum of 1 day duration for basic electrical systems, and as specified herein for other systems and equipment. Sessions shall be conducted at the site.

B. Prepare and submit a syllabus describing an overview of the program, describing how

the program will be conducted, when and where meetings are to be held, names and company affiliations of lecturers, description of contents and outline for each lecture, and recommended reference material and outside reading. Obtain direction from the Owner on which operating personnel shall be instructed in each system. Proposed training schedules, materials, and lesson plans shall be submitted to the Owner for review.

C. Sessions shall include:

1. General familiarization and operating procedures for the entire fire detection and alarm installation.

2. Routine maintenance procedures for equipment.

D. Factory-trained technicians shall give operating and maintenance instructions on the following systems and equipment:

Minimum Session

System/Equipment Duration, hours

Fire alarm system 8

E. Provide DVD format video recordings of training sessions and a complete record copy of all training materials, handouts, and other printed materials used in each training session.

F. Training shall occur after testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the

Architect.

G. Obtain receipt acknowledging completion of each item of instruction.


COVER SHEET FOR SUBMITTALS TO NEWCOMB & BOYD

Project: ________________________________________________ Date: Item: Submittal Number: Manufacturer: Model: Specification Paragraph and/or Drawing Number: Capacity: Electrical Characteristics (including identification of all separate connections or services required): Accessories: Options: Deviations (if any; if none, state so): General Contractor Approval:


283090-1

SECTION 283090 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION


A. General provisions and other fire detection and alarm systems are specified in other Sections of Division 28.

B. Performance verification is an ongoing process and shall be performed throughout

construction. Performance verification verifies that systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Construction Documents.

C. This Section covers fire detection and alarm systems performance verification, as

required to demonstrate that the equipment and fire detection and alarm systems of Division 28 are ready for safe and satisfactory operation, as defined by the Construction Documents. Performance verification shall include, but shall not be limited to, identification of equipment, cleaning, start-up, check-out, testing and adjusting of systems, preparation of equipment and systems documentation and of maintenance and operation manuals, Owner training, and preparation of record drawings.

D. Fire detection and alarm performance verification shall conclude with the completion of

required deferred testing, training, and system documentation as specified herein and required to demonstrate the proper operation of the fire detection and alarm equipment and systems provided by this Division. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of performance verification.

E. Verify the performance of the following systems and equipment:

1. Section 283100, Fire Alarm System. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide a Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification Supervisor with 10 years experience in fire detection and alarm contracting. The Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification Supervisor shall become familiar with the Owner's project requirements and the requirements of the performance verification process as defined in this Section. The Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate and execute the required performance verification activities.

B. The Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification Supervisor shall review

submittal data for conformance with the requirements of the Project, shall monitor compliance with the requirements specified herein for storage and protection of equipment during construction, shall authorize the initial starting of equipment and systems in a manner to avoid damage to equipment, shall oversee start-up, testing, and


283090-2

shall document that the scheduled and specified performance requirements of each system have been accomplished.

C. Conform to the following:

1. ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 Addenda a-d-2010, The Commissioning Process. 2. ASHRAE Guideline 4-2008, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance

Documentation of Building Systems. 3. NECA 90-2009.


A. The Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification Supervisor shall be responsible for scheduling, supervising, and coordinating and executing the start-up, testing, and performance verification activities as specified herein. Include and itemize the cost of performance verification in the contract price, and in each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, performance verification efforts and documentation, operations and maintenance data, and training as specified herein.

B. Fire detection and alarm performance verification shall take place in three phases.

Performance verification requirements for each phase are as follows: 1. Construction Phase:

a. Attend a performance verification scoping meeting and additional performance verification meetings, initially scheduled monthly until prefunctional testing of equipment and systems begins, and weekly thereafter during the construction phase to facilitate the performance verification process. The Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification Supervisor shall coordinate meeting attendance.

b. Report in writing to the Architect, at least as often as performance verification meetings are scheduled, concerning the status of his activities as they affect the performance verification process, the status of each discrepancy identified during the prefunctional and functional testing process, explanations of any disagreements with the identified deficiencies, and his proposed resolution and schedule for correction of the deficiency.

c. Provide documentation of installed systems and equipment, and develop functional testing procedures. This documentation shall include detailed manufacturer installation, start-up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures; full details of any Owner-contracted tests; full factory testing reports, if any; and full warranty information, including responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force. In addition, the installation, start-up and check-out materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field check-out sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Architect.



283090-3



g. Prepare a preliminary schedule for performance verification activities, including equipment start-up, and testing, adjusting start and completion, and update the schedule during the construction period, as appropriate. Notify the Architect immediately when the verification activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction.

h. Provide start-up and prefunctional testing for equipment and execute the fire detection and alarm-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for the verification of the performance of all the equipment during the start-up and initial check-out process.

i. Perform and document start-up and system operational check-out procedures, providing a copy to the Architect.

j. Correct noncompliance items before beginning functional testing. Discrepancies and problems shall be remedied before functional testing.

2. Acceptance Phase: a. Place equipment and systems into operation and continue their operation

during each working day of the testing and verification activities, as required. b. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting and prefunctional testing of

equipment and to execute the functional tests for each individual piece of equipment and system. Technicians shall be available and present during the agreed upon scheduled tests and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem solving.

c. Perform functional testing for specified equipment and interpret the test data, as necessary.

d. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as identified and interpreted by the Architect and retest the equipment, as required to demonstrate proper operation and performance.

e. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals as specified, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.

f. Maintain marked-up record drawings and produce final record drawings of project drawings and contractor-generated coordination drawings.

g. Provide specified training of the Owner’s operating personnel. h. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements

to maintain the validity of the warranty. 3. Warranty Period:

a. Execute deferred functional testing (after coordinating activity with the Performance Verification Supervisor).

b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to operations and maintenance manuals and as-built drawings system or equipment


283090-4

modifications made during the warranty period and those identified in any deferred functional performance testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Standard testing equipment required to perform start-up, initial check-out, prefunctional, and required functional performance testing shall be provided by the contractor for the equipment or system being tested.

B. Test equipment shall be of the quality and accuracy required to test and/or measure

system performance with the tolerances specified and shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, or as specified herein. Equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates available on request. Accuracy of sensors shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUBMITTALS




B. The following procedures shall apply to equipment and systems where the performance is

to be verified: 1. Start-up and initial check-out plan: develop the detailed start-up and prefunctional

testing plans for equipment and systems that are to be verified, as specified herein. Review the proposed procedures and prefunctional testing documentation to ensure that there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed.

2. The start-up and initial check-out plan shall consist, as a minimum, of the following: a. The manufacturer’s standard written start-up and check-out procedures copied

from the installation manuals and manufacturer’s normally used field check-out sheets. The plan shall include checklists and procedures with specific


283090-5

boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan.

b. First-run checklist for equipment, including: 1) Equipment properly set. 2) Equipment properly connected. 3) Wiring properly connected. 4) Electrical overload relays appropriate for load. 5) Electrical accessories properly installed and adjusted. 6) Controls, safeties, and time switches properly set.

c. Contractor-developed prefunctional checklists. 3. Prior to energizing, test cables and wiring for continuity, shorts, and circuitry, and

correct short circuits, opens, and errors in circuiting. 4. Start-up equipment and check-out operation in accordance with manufacturer's

published procedures and with the procedures specified herein. a. Submit report on equipment start-up and check-out with data from recorded

findings. 5. Grounding:

a. Ground resistance shall be measured by a licensed professional engineer in accordance with IEEE 81-1983. Measurements shall be made with the grounding system isolated from the utility neutral. Results of the tests shall be submitted in a certified test report, bearing the seal of the test engineer. The certified test report shall include the following minimum data: 1) Project name, date and location of test. 2) Instrument serial number and type used. 3) Sketch, showing layout of ground system and locations of test spikes. 4) Measured ground resistance.

6. Fire Alarm System: a. Procedures, methods, and testing of the fire alarm system shall be conducted in

accordance with NFPA 72-2002. b. Alarm initiating, notification, and auxiliary devices shall be tested to ensure

they are operational and that alarm outputs are as specified herein. Devices and circuits shall be tested in both normal and trouble modes. Smoke detectors shall be tested using smoke, or a listed aerosol acceptable to the manufacturer. Smoke detectors that are part of a smoke control system shall be tested at minimum and maximum airflow quantities.

c. Alarm initiating, notification, and auxiliary devices shall be tested to ensure they are annunciating the proper device label at the fire alarm control panel and/or remote annunciator display. This includes verification of the proper address, device description, and location. If the device labels are found to be inaccurate, correct and retest.

d. Verify the transmission of alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals to the central station.

e. SLC, NAC, and IDC circuits shall be tested for opens, shorts, and ground conditions, and the proper annunciation. Circuit board jumpers in the system


283090-6

that inhibit checking for ground faults shall be identified and shown to be in the correct position.

f. Auxiliary system functions shall be verified, including but not limited to elevator recall, control of HVAC systems, smoke control systems, fire or smoke doors/dampers/shutters, and the monitoring of the fire pump.

g. Significant portions of the testing shall be conducted on battery power. This includes the main control panel, and remote equipment such as network nodes, and/or auxiliary power supplies.

h. Site specific software shall be verified during testing of the sequence of operations.

i. Operational tests shall be conducted at a time coordinated between the Owner, Architect, Contractor, and the local authority having jurisdiction. The manufacturer's authorized representative for the fire alarm equipment shall be present during the tests. The manufacturer's authorized representative for auxiliary equipment monitored or activated by the fire alarm system shall also be present during the tests. This may include but is not limited to HVAC controls, elevators, suppression systems, fire pumps, and sprinkler systems. If the building is occupied prior to the operational test, these tests shall be conducted after normal business hours. Failure of the system to operate as specified herein shall require retesting.

j. Sound Output Levels: 1) Finishes and furnishings shall be in place and building systems and

equipment shall be in operation for these tests. 2) Take sound level measurements throughout the building with a sound

level meter to verify notification appliance sound output levels at a minimum of 15 dB above the ambient conditions. Provide a complete set of fire alarm shop drawings annotated to indicate the locations and sound level readings that were measured.

3) For voice communications systems, set amplifiers to establish notification appliance sound output levels a minimum of 15 dB above the ambient conditions throughout areas covered by the system. Make adjustments within the capacity of the equipment provided, such as increasing amplifier output levels or adjusting device transformer taps, to meet the required performance in each area.

k. Submit a type test report, similar to that shown in NFPA 72-2002, recording test results, system descriptions, and witnesses.

l. Submit a printout of the event history log for testing.

C. The Architect reserves the right to witness the above described tests, checks and inspections. Notify the Architect at least 10 days prior to the date scheduled for the tests.

D. Four weeks prior to start-up, schedule equipment and systems start-up and check-out and

notify the Architect in writing. The execution of the prefunctional checklists, start-up and check-out shall be directed and performed by the Contractor, in accordance with manufacturer's published procedures. The Architect shall be present for the start-up,


283090-7

check-out, and prefunctional testing of the first unit of each type of equipment, and any other tests he designates.

E. Sensor calibration: calibration of sensors associated with a given piece of equipment or

system shall be included as part of the prefunctional testing and listed on the appropriate test checklists and reports for that system.

F. Completed start-up, check-out, and prefunctional test forms shall be completed and

submitted to the Architect for review. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the Architect within 2 days of test completion. The Architect shall review the Contractor’s start-up and prefunctional testing reports and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. The Contractor shall correct items that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the Architect as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, the Architect shall recommend approval of the start-up and prefunctional testing of each system and schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.

G. Complete start-up and prefunctional testing for a system before functional testing of that

system may proceed. 3.03 RETESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND/OR SYSTEMS


B. Prior to retesting, submit required data indicating that the deficient items have been

completed and/or corrected to the Architect for approval and rescheduling of the functional test. If during the retesting it becomes apparent that the deficient items have not been completed and/or corrected as indicated in the data provided by the Contractor, the retesting shall be stopped. Costs for the design team to further supervise the retesting of a functional test shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.


A. Schedule and coordinate, with the approval of the Architect, any required tests delayed until building construction is completed, required building occupancy or loading, or other conditions are suitable for the demonstration of equipment or system’s performance, as specified herein. Deferred testing shall be executed, documented, and deficiencies corrected as specified herein for functional testing. Adjustments or corrections to the operation and maintenance manuals and as-built documents required by the results of the testing shall be made before the testing process is considered complete.


283090-8


A. List outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the functional test procedure forms or on an attached sheet. Procedure forms and any outstanding deficiencies shall be provided to the Architect within 2 days of test completion. The Architect shall review the Contractor's start-up and prefunctional test reports and shall submit either a noncompliance report or an approval form to the Contractor. The Contractor shall work with the Architect to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. Correct items that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the Architect as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a statement of correction on the original noncompliance report. When requirements are completed, recommend approval of the start-up and prefunctional testing of each system and schedule the functional testing of the equipment or system.

B. As functional performance testing progresses and deficiencies are identified, work with

the Architect to resolve the issues. 3.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION PACKAGE

A. The Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification Supervisor shall compile and prepare documentation for fire detection and alarm equipment and systems covered in Division 28 and deliver this documentation for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals prior to the training of the Owner's personnel.


A. The Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification Supervisor shall schedule, coordinate, assemble and deliver the documentation of the training required by this Division.

3.08 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Functional test requirements for the demonstration of proper system and equipment operation shall be defined by the Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification Supervisor. Execution of these tests and demonstrations of the required performance shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing

may proceed prior to the completion of systems or subsystems at the discretion of the Architect and Owner. Beginning system testing before full completion of construction shall not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including prefunctional checklists.


283090-9

C. Functional testing shall be completed and approved by the Architect before the Project will be considered substantially complete.



283100-1

SECTION 283100 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


A. General provisions and other fire detection and alarm systems are specified in other Sections of Division 28.

B. This Section covers the expansion of existing Edwards System Technology (EST) fire

alarm system.

C. This Section includes fire alarm connections to alarm and supervisory devices furnished with the fire extinguishing systems which are specified in Division 21.

D. Installation of duct smoke detectors is specified in Section 237000, Air Distribution.

Detectors, electrical connections, and testing are specified in this Section.

E. Fire detection and alarm performance verification is specified in Section 283090, Fire Detection and Alarm Performance Verification. This Section includes responsibilities and obligations in support of performance verification specified therein.


A. Conform to the following: 1. NFPA 70-2011. 2. NFPA 72-2002.

B. Preparation of submittals, final panel connections, system programming, testing,

certification, and operator training shall be performed by an authorized, factory-trained distributor or direct factory office of the equipment manufacturer.

C. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacture of fire alarm equipment, and shall be items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 1 year prior to bid opening. Equipment furnished shall be listed in accordance with UL 864-2003 for use in fire protective signaling systems.

D. Fire alarm equipment and devices shall be furnished through a service provider that is a

factory-authorized distributor or direct factory office of the equipment manufacturer. This service provider shall be located within 60 miles of the project site and shall be capable of providing on-site response to emergency calls within 8 hours. The service provider shall perform all functions relating to submittal preparation, system programming, final wiring connections at control panels, system testing and certification, and on-site operator training. The service provider shall employ at least 2 individuals who have been factory


283100-2

certified to program and maintain the fire alarm equipment and who hold current Level III certifications in the Fire Alarm subfield by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall conform to NFPA 72-2002, Paragraph A4.5.1.1 and the requirements of Section 283010, Fire Detection and Alarm General.

B. Submittals shall include a bill of materials, product data sheets, installation drawings, and

calculations. 1. Drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD 2013 and shall show third floor in plan

view to a scale not smaller than 1/8" = 1'-0". In plan views indicate the location of devices, approximate raceway routing between devices, conductor requirements in each section of raceway, the address of signaling line circuit (SLC) devices, and the intensity of strobe lights. Provide hook-up details for fire alarm initiating and notification devices and indicate the wiring color code to be used. Include a system operating sequence in the form of a narrative or an I/O schedule. Provide control panel diagrams showing the arrangement of modular components and terminal connections for external wiring.

2. Product data sheets shall be submitted for hardware, devices, and wire and shall be marked to indicate the model numbers and applicable options. Submittals shall include a complete addressable point list with corresponding messages. For each SLC, indicate the initial number of points connected, the capacity of the circuit, and the spare capacity.

3. Provide calculations for the voltage drop on notification appliance circuits, amplifier sizes, and battery sizes. Voltage drop calculations shall use as the starting voltage the battery voltage available after the batteries have operated the system in the quiescent and alarm modes for the specified duration of time.

1.04 SYSTEM FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION

A. The fire alarm system shall employ analog addressable initiating devices and multiplex communication techniques. The point address of each device shall be set either at the device or at the control panel and shall be independent of the relative location of the device on the signaling line circuit. The system shall operate at 24 V DC when provided with 120 V AC primary power. SLCs shall be arranged for Class B, Style 4 operation in accordance with NFPA 72-2002 Alarm notification appliance circuits (NACs) shall be arranged for Class A, Style Z operation in accordance with NFPA72-2002. For Class A wiring, a two-loop conduit system shall be provided so that, if any one conduit and conductors contained in that conduit are severed, signaling line and notification appliance circuits remain operational.


283100-3

B. The fire alarm system shall stand alone and shall be independent of other building systems and data communications links. Software routines necessary to perform auxiliary functions such as fan control shall reside within the fire alarm system. Operation of these auxiliary functions shall be initiated through addressable control modules, configured as relays, located adjacent to the controlled equipment.

C. Fire Alarm Interface with Existing Equipment:

1. The existing fire alarm system shall remain operational to serve the existing portions of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTING DEVICES

A. Bases for automatic fire detection devices shall have screw terminals for wiring connections.

B. Smoke Detectors:

1. Smoke detectors include area type, duct-mounted and projected beam type devices. Area and duct-mounted detectors shall be point-addressable, dynamically supervised (analog) type listed in accordance with UL 268-2009. Area type and duct-mounted smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type. Detectors shall contain a visible LED which shall be illuminated when the unit is in alarm condition. Detectors shall be plug-in type in which the detector base contains terminals for making wiring connections. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide remote LED indicators. Remote alarm LEDs shall have a flush-mounted faceplates with white or stainless steel finish and shall be identified with a permanent label indicating the type of device, the location, and the address.

3. Photoelectric smoke detectors shall operate on a light scattering principle using an LED light source. Failure of the LED shall not cause an alarm condition. Detectors shall have an obscuration rating within the limits prescribed by UL 268-2009.

4. Duct smoke detectors shall include an enclosure, mounting hardware, and perforated sampling tubes. The intake tube shall extend through the far side of the duct and shall be plugged with a removable rubber stopper or cap. Detectors shall be listed for airstream velocities up to 4000 fpm. Provide a remote LED with faceplate and identification label for each duct smoke detector.

2.02 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT INTERFACE DEVICES

A. The system shall include addressable monitor and control modules to perform control functions and supervise the open alarm contacts of nonaddressable initiating devices. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide an individual monitor module for each nonaddressable initiating device. Wiring between the monitor module and the


283100-4

initiating device shall be arranged for Class A operation. Control modules shall be configured as Form C dry contact relays. Each module shall mount in a standard outlet box and shall include a status LED, a terminal strip for external wiring connections, and a faceplate for an identification label. Status LEDs shall be visible without removing faceplates. The label shall indicate the module function and address.

B. Where multiple monitor or control functions must be performed within the same area, a

packaged multiple-circuit input/output module may be used. The packaged device shall communicate directly with the signaling line circuit and shall provide independently addressable monitor and control points, terminal strips for external wiring connections, and a protective enclosure.

C. Where the rated current capacity of the control module is insufficient to connect directly

to the controlled equipment, provide an intermediate 24 V DC plug-in control relay with dustproof cover, terminal strip for coil and contact connections, and painted steel enclosure designed for wall mounting. The enclosure shall be identified with a permanent label. Operating power for the relay coil shall be supervised by the SLC.

D. Line fault isolator modules shall detect a fault on the signaling line circuit and interrupt

power to devices installed beyond the isolator. When the fault has cleared, the isolator shall reset automatically. The maximum number of devices isolated by a single module shall be 25. Isolator modules shall be installed in a visible location. Faceplate and labeling requirements shall be similar to other SLC interface devices.

2.03 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Fire Alarm Speakers: 1. Speakers shall be flush-mounted on the wall. Provide a matching backbox with

enamel finish for surface-mounted units. Speakers shall be 4" diameter, and shall have a frequency response of 400 Hz to 4000 Hz and matching transformer with multiple power taps in the range of 0.25 W to 2 W. Speakers shall produce a minimum sound rating of 84 dBA at 10' at 1 W. Ceiling-mounted devices shall include a moisture-resistant paper cone speaker, speaker enclosure, and round perforated baffle plate with white enamel finish. Wall-mounted speakers shall include a square perforated grille with red enamel finish.

B. Visible Notification Appliances:

1. Visible notification appliances shall be strobe lights conforming to UL 1971-2002. Strobes shall have a Xenon flash tube and clear optic lens and identification "FIRE" in a contrasting color. Strobe intensity shall be field selectable with a range of 15 candela to 95 candela. Strobes shall have a minimum intensity of 75 candela on-axis and shall flash at approximately 1 flash per s. Strobes shall be semiflush-mounted on the walls and shall include a red faceplate. Strobe lights on a circuit shall flash at a synchronized rate.


283100-5

C. Combination Audible/Visible Notification Appliances: 1. Combination audible/visible notification appliances shall provide the same

performance characteristics as specified herein for individual units, except that they shall mount in a single factory-assembled enclosure.

2.04 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wiring: 1. Wiring for 120 V AC power shall be #12 AWG minimum. 2. Wiring for visible and audible notification appliance circuits (except speakers) shall

be Type FPL/FPLR, solid copper, #14 AWG minimum. 3. Wiring for signaling line circuits shall be Type FPL/FPLR, solid copper, #16 AWG

minimum. The capacitance shall not exceed 30 pf/ft between conductors. 4. Wiring for speaker circuits shall be Type FPL/FPLR, solid copper, twisted pair,

minimum #18 AWG. Wiring shall be shielded if recommended by the fire alarm manufacturer.

5. Wiring shall conform to the published performance criteria of the fire alarm manufacturer.

B. Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinets:

1. UL listed, surface-mounted steel enclosure with hinged door, key lock, 0.5" and 0.75" conduit knockouts, red finish, and white lettering "FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET". The cabinet shall contain an 18 point (minimum) high barrier terminal strip and labeling ID card. a. Manufacturer: Space Age Electronics TC1.

C. Device Markers:

1. Fire alarm initiating devices and SLC interface devices shall be identified with a printed adhesive label showing the device address. Text shall be black on a clear background and shall be minimum 0.75" high. a. Manufacturer: Brother 1700 series.

2.05 FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER

A. Edwards Systems Technology. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Primary Power Circuits: 1. Primary 120 V AC power to fire alarm equipment shall be dedicated branch

circuits.

B. Wiring: 1. Line voltage and power-limited circuits shall not be run in the same conduit.


283100-6

2. Conductors used for the same functions shall be similarly color-coded. Wiring code color shall remain uniform throughout the circuit. T-tapping using screw terminal blocks is acceptable for Class B Style 4 signaling line circuits where approved by the system manufacturer.

3. Wiring for the fire alarm system shall not be installed in conduits, junction boxes, or outlet boxes with conductors of any other building system. Fire alarm junction boxes and outlet boxes shall be painted red prior to pulling the wire. Circuit conductors entering or leaving any mounting box, outlet box enclosure or cabinet shall be connected to screw terminals with each terminal marked in accordance with the wiring diagram. Connections and splices shall be made using screw terminal blocks. The use of wire nut type connectors are prohibited in the system. Wiring within control panels shall be laced with cable ties. Final wiring connections to the control panel and application of operating power shall be made by the manufacturer's authorized representative.

C. Conduit and Boxes:

1. Fire alarm wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), as specified in Section 261100, Raceways. Minimum raceway size shall be 0.75".

D. Weatherproof Devices:

1. Where exposed to the weather or high humidity, gasketed back boxes and enclosures shall be provided.

3.02 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTING DEVICES

A. Area Smoke Detectors: 1. Detectors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 72-2002. Detectors shall be at

least 3' from supply diffusers. During construction, smoke detectors shall be provided with protective covers to prevent the entry of dust and debris. Covers shall be removed prior to system acceptance testing.

B. Smoke detectors on suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall be located in the center of

the tile and shall be secured with a tile bridge.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: 1. Duct smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 90A-2012. 2. Remote status LEDs shall be mounted approximately 5' above the floor in an

accessible location. 3. Seal the sheet metal penetrations caused by sample tubes.

3.03 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Visible notification appliances shall be mounted with the bottom of the strobe lens 6'-8" above the finished floor. For combination audible/visible appliances, mounting height shall be governed by the strobe light.


283100-7

B. Tap speaker transformers for 2 W, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 3.04 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT INTERFACE DEVICES

A. Control modules shall be installed within 36" of the device with which it is associated.
